JP7843992B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that display the net increase in the number of medals actually gained (number of medals acquired) during ART (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2013-90643 (for example, paragraph 0520, figure 55, etc.)

By the way, there is room for improvement in how the net increase in tokens (number of tokens won) and other metrics are displayed to enhance the player's enjoyment of the game.

This invention has been made in view of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine in which the processing control of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine is improved .

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine according to this embodiment can provide a gaming machine with the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
In gaming machines,
Display means (main display device 210, sub-display device 220 in Figure 3),
A door mechanism (door mechanism UD, DD in Figure 1) is attached to the gaming machine body so that it can be opened and closed,
An opening/closing detection means (door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in Figure 3) for detecting the opening/closing state of the door mechanism,
A key-type switch for setting (key-type switch 52 in Figure 3),
The aforementioned door mechanism includes an operating means (a touch panel constituting the sub-effect display unit 22 in Figure 1) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine,
The aforementioned gaming machine includes a maintenance processing means (main CPU 101 in Figure 3) for performing maintenance processing related to maintenance that can be carried out in the gaming machine,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned maintenance processing means is
In the maintenance process described above, based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions that the door mechanism is in the open state and the setting key-type switch is on when the power is turned on, a predetermined maintenance process is performed in which a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to a predetermined maintenance that is part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine is displayed on the display means as a maintenance menu screen (Figure 55), based on the fulfillment of specific conditions that the setting key-type switch changes from off to on after the power is turned on and the door mechanism is in the open state, a specific maintenance process is performed in which a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to a specific maintenance that is part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine and is different from the predetermined maintenance is displayed on the display means as a maintenance menu screen, and the specific maintenance process is terminated when the setting key-type switch turns off during the execution of the specific maintenance process, and in the case of a change in the open/closed state of the door mechanism, there is no change in the process in the specific maintenance process from when the specific maintenance menu screen is displayed until the specific maintenance process is terminated.
When the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed, the predetermined maintenance can be performed in response to an operation on the operating means.
In the aforementioned predetermined maintenance process,
Even if the predetermined conditions are met, if, after the predetermined conditions are met, the detection result by the opening/closing detection means does not indicate that the door mechanism is in a closed state but rather that the door mechanism remains in an open state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen will not be displayed on the display means.
If the predetermined conditions are met, and after the predetermined conditions are met, the setting key-type switch remains in the ON position and the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is in the closed state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means.
The aforementioned predetermined maintenance menu screen displays a predetermined indication that settings are being changed (the text "Settings Change in Maintenance Menu" in the upper left of Figure 66),
On the aforementioned specific maintenance menu screen, a specific indication is shown to show that the settings are being checked (the text "Maintenance Menu Checking Settings" is displayed in the upper left of Figures 67 to 71).
During the aforementioned predetermined maintenance, the predetermined display (Figure 66) is maintained.
During the aforementioned specific maintenance, the aforementioned specific display will be hidden (for example, when switching from the "Maintenance Menu Checking Settings" in Figure 67(a) to the "Maximum/Standard Volume Settings" in Figure 67(b)).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this embodiment, the gaming machine can provide a gaming machine in which the processing control of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine is improved .

This diagram shows the external structure of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the internal structure of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the functional flow of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating the gameplay of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating the modes of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows various tables for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows various tables for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a diagram of the pattern arrangement table for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows the internal lottery table of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination table for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination table for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination table for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a pattern combination table for the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram illustrates the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stopping operation modes, and display combinations of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating the limit processing of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the configuration of the winning flag storage area, the prize activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows the configuration of the carryover bonus storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the configuration of the game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the configuration of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows the configuration of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows the configuration of the button press sequence storage area of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the main processing performed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the power-on processing performed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the medal reception and start check process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the internal lottery process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the processing performed at the start of gameplay during the advantageous period, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the reel stop control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the processing performed when a game ends during a favorable period, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the periodic interrupt processing performed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows an overview of the sub-side control processing performed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the configuration of the main control board of a gaming machine according to this embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram of the speaker device of the second gaming machine according to this embodiment, (b) is a diagram for explaining the openings for the output of sound waves to the outside of the first speaker unit and the second speaker unit, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the speaker unit provided in the speaker device. (a) is a diagram illustrating the general shape of the convergent directivity among the directivity realized by the speaker device of the second gaming machine according to this embodiment, (b) is a diagram illustrating the general shape of the diffuse directivity, and (c) is a diagram illustrating the general shape of the normal directivity. This diagram illustrates the interference between the upper first sound wave and the lower second sound wave in the first game according to this embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating the control of convergence directivity according to this embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a specific example illustrating the relationship between the timing of output of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and the timing of output of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit in the control of convergence directivity. (a) is a diagram illustrating the control of diffusion directivity according to this embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a specific example illustrating the relationship between the timing of output of the first sound wave by the first speaker unit and the timing of output of the second sound wave by the second speaker unit in the control of diffusion directivity. This figure shows an example of a circuit related to the control of directionality in a second gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a modified example 1 of the circuit related to directional control in the second gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a modified example 2 of the circuit related to directionality control in the second gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the configuration of initialization commands transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a periodic command (no operation command) transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the input port assignment table for (a). This is a timing chart showing the timing of command transmission to explain the transmission of commands from the main control circuit to the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This is a timing chart for explaining the state (on state or off state) of the setting key-type switch in the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the setting change process (without door opening/closing conditions) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the setting confirmation process (without door opening/closing conditions) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the setting change process (with door opening/closing conditions) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the setting confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the setting change and confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) executed by the main control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions) performed by the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) executed by the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. The following are examples of screens displayed on the sub-display device of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment: (a) is the maintenance menu top screen, (b) is the total medal information screen, (c) is the setting change/confirmation history screen, and (d) is the error information history screen. This flowchart shows the setting change/confirmation error detection process executed by the sub-control circuit of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the process for creating setting key information. Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the setting error notification process. This is an example of a screen displayed on the sub-display device of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment, and is an error screen indicating a setting operation error. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a game machine which is a modified example of the third game machine according to this embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example configuration of the selection button and the performance button of (a). This flowchart shows a setting change process executed by the main control circuit of a gaming machine, which is a modified example of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows a setting confirmation process performed by the main control circuit of a gaming machine, which is a modified example of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows a maintenance process during setting changes, which is performed by the sub-control circuit of a gaming machine, and is a modified example of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This flowchart shows a maintenance process during setting confirmation, which is performed by the sub-control circuit of a gaming machine, which is a modified example of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. Figure 63 shows a specific example of the settings change screen displayed during the settings change maintenance process. Figure 63 shows a specific example of the maintenance menu screen during configuration changes to explain the processing content of steps S1106 to S1109 in the maintenance process during configuration changes. This figure shows a specific example (part 1) of the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen and setting confirmation maintenance screen to explain the processing content of steps S1152 to S1155 in the setting confirmation maintenance process shown in Figure 64. This figure shows a specific example (part 2) of the maintenance menu screen and the maintenance screen during configuration confirmation, which are used to explain the processing content of steps S1152 to S1155 in the maintenance process during configuration confirmation shown in Figure 64. This figure shows a specific example (part 3) of the maintenance menu screen and the maintenance screen during configuration confirmation, which are used to explain the processing content of steps S1152 to S1155 in the maintenance process during configuration confirmation shown in Figure 64. This figure shows a specific example (part 4) of the maintenance menu screen and the maintenance screen during configuration confirmation, which are used to explain the processing content of steps S1152 to S1155 in the maintenance process during configuration confirmation shown in Figure 64. This figure shows a specific example (part 5) of the maintenance menu screen and the maintenance screen during configuration confirmation, which are used to explain the processing content of steps S1152 to S1155 in the maintenance process during configuration confirmation shown in Figure 64. This figure shows specific examples of a user menu screen and a volume control screen in a gaming machine, which is a modified example of the third gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows the transition flow of game states between bonus states and non-bonus states of a pachislo machine in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol arrangement table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an internal lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an internal lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an internal lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a symbol combination determination table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the contents of the symbol combinations in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the transition flow of the game state, taking into account the notification system for the pachislo machine in the above implementation configuration. This diagram shows the transition flow of the game state, taking into account the notification system for the pachislo machine in the above implementation configuration. This figure shows the transition conditions for the game state, taking into account the notification system for the pachislo machine in the above implementation configuration. This figure shows the transition conditions for the game state, taking into account the notification system for the pachislo machine in the above implementation configuration. This diagram shows the correspondence between some of the internal winning combinations and the stop symbols in the above embodiment. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations and lottery flags in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations and lottery flags in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between a lottery flag and a lottery flag group in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between a lottery flag and a lottery flag group in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between a lottery flag and a lottery flag group in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between a lottery flag and a lottery flag group in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a favorable section transition/CZ mode lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an initial resonance point lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the next CZR activation lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for the initial number of games between Big Bonuses in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a preliminary drawing table for small role CZ in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a pre-Chance Zone (CZ) small role lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a pre-Chance Zone (CZ) small role lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a pre-Chance Zone (CZ) small role lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a small role CZ lottery table after CZ win in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a CZ (Chance Zone) lottery table when a Big Bonus (BB) is won in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a BB pre-announcement game count lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a normal-to-high probability transition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a high-probability fall-out lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for the number of resonance points acquired during normal play in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a CZ mode transition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for the number of games added between big bonuses in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an LI transition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a first CZ success lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a second CZ success lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a CZ reward lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a CZ mode lottery table when a CZ fails in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT game addition count (for SZ types 1, 5 to 8) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a V-stock acquisition count (for SZ type 1) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT game addition count (for SZ type 2) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT game addition count (for SZ type 3) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for reloading remaining bonus rounds (for SZ type 3) in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a SZ type 4 level-up/NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for the "Aim" effect, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5 to 8) in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a V-stock acquisition count (for SZ types 5 to 8) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5 to 8) lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT start high probability transition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a SAT activation lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment, which is generated when the next CZ fails. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for SC generation and V stock acquisition in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an SC pre-announcement game count lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT high probability transition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT (Network Attack Time) V-stock acquisition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT (Network Attack Time) pre-BB (Big Bonus) game count lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a NAT resonance point acquisition lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for the number of resonance points acquired during SC in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a V-stock acquisition count lottery table before V-stock acquisition during SC in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a V-stock acquisition lottery table after acquiring V-stocks during SC in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a game count lottery table for securing high SC after the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a SAT continuation lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a SAT difference-based payout lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a navigation generation mode lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a navigation generation lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an extra BB initial game count lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of an extra BB game addition count lottery table in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of a lottery table for the number of resonance points acquired during BB and Extra BB in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the flow of the main processing performed by the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of information related to internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment, during normal operation (during the non-advantageous period). This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment, during normal operation (during the advantageous period). This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the chance zone (CZ) of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the bonus zone (SZ) of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the general AT (NAT) of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the stock chance (SC) in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the special AT (SAT) of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed at the limit (LI) in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the Big Bonus (BB) in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the flow of various processes, including various draws, that are mainly performed in the Extra Big Bonus (BB) in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This diagram shows the relationship between the type of notification (navigation type) for the button press sequence and the content of the instructions. This diagram shows the types of notifications (navigation types) for each game state when a winning combination is achieved through the correct button sequence. This figure shows an example of the selection instruction screen when you win the "6-choice slate" game. This figure shows an example of the start and end conditions for the total number of tokens acquired counter in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the update timing for the total number of tokens acquired counter in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the upper and lower limits of the total number of tokens acquired counter in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the upper and lower limits for representing the total number of tokens won in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of zero correction for the total number of tokens acquired counter in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows a specific example of the display of the total number of acquired coins counter and the total number of acquired coins in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the conditions for starting the display of the sun icon in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the conditions for resetting the total number of tokens won in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the conditions for clearing the sun icon display information in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display flow for the total number of tokens won / Congratulations / "Sun" icon in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display flow for the total number of tokens won / Congratulations / "Sun" icon in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display flow for the total number of tokens won / Congratulations / "Sun" icon in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display flow for the total number of tokens won / Congratulations / "Sun" icon in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the display flow for the total number of tokens won / Congratulations / "Sun" icon in the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of how to display the total number of tokens won in a modified example of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of switching the display between the remaining difference in tokens for the special AT (SAT) and the number of tokens remaining until the end of the advantageous period in a modified version of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows an example of the timing of the "Congratulations" display in a modified version of the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows examples of the confirmation screen for a regular bonus and the confirmation screen for a limit bonus. This diagram shows the main processing flow when a stop function is added to the fourth gaming machine according to this embodiment. This figure shows the flow of the stop-down monitoring process that takes place during the main processing shown in Figure 211. This figure shows the flow of the shutdown process that takes place during the shutdown monitoring process shown in Figure 212. This figure shows the flow of the shutdown process that takes place during the shutdown monitoring process shown in Figure 212.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislo machine will be used as an example of the gaming machine.

[1. Structure of a pachislo machine]
First, the structure of the pachislo machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 shows the external structure of the pachislo machine 1, and Figure 2 shows the internal structure of the pachislo machine 1. For the sake of explanation, the following explanation of the external structure may include a part of the internal structure, and vice versa.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Enclosure]
The pachislo machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped casing 2. The casing 2 also includes a metal cabinet G, which serves as the main body of the gaming machine, having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD located on the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD located on the lower front of the cabinet G.

Cabinet G comprises an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that the rear wall G3 and bottom wall G5 are omitted from Figures 1 and 2. Furthermore, the top wall G4 of cabinet G has two openings G4a that are spaced apart horizontally and penetrate vertically. Wooden plate members G4b are attached to the top wall G4 to close each of these two openings G4a.

Furthermore, while the plate member G4b is used to fix the pachislo machine 1 to the gaming island (not shown) when installing it in a gaming parlor, it can be made of metal or resin, or it can be formed integrally with the upper wall G4, as long as such a fixing method is ensured. Also, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, some or all of the constituent members can be made of wood or resin.

Furthermore, within the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed above the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed below the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, the interior of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate dividing the interior of the cabinet G into the upper and lower spaces. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD inside the cabinet G, and houses the main display device 210, etc., described later. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD inside the cabinet G, and houses the reel unit RU, main control board 71, etc., described later.

Furthermore, the cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as the various devices are appropriately housed within the cabinet G, the upper and lower spaces may not be separated. Also, the cabinet G can simply be referred to as the "box" or "main body," or, since it functions as a frame supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as the "main body frame," "support," "support frame," or "fixing frame."

[1-1-2. Front Door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening in the cabinet G, and are provided to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors provided on the front side of the pachislo machine 1.

Furthermore, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are each attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown), such as a hinge, provided on the left side wall G2. Alternatively, either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the aforementioned opening/closing mechanism, while the other can be configured to be detachable only when the other door mechanism is open.

The upper door mechanism UD has a performance display window UD1 located in its center and an upper lamp 23 located above the performance display window UD1. The performance display window UD1 is, for example, constructed as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows the performance image displayed on the screen device C, which constitutes the main display device 210 (described later) located on its rear side, to be visible. In this embodiment, the main display device 210, which displays the performance via the performance display window UD1, may be described as the main performance display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 located approximately in the center of its upper part, and a reel unit RU mounted on the rear side of the main display window 4, on the inside side of the cabinet G.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel, 3L, 3C, and 3R, consists of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel strip attached to the circumferential surface of the reel body. Multiple (for example, 20) patterns are drawn on the reel strip at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is, for example, made of a transparent resin panel, and allows at least a portion (for example, three) of the patterns on the circumferential surface of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visible. Furthermore, each reel (3L, 3C, 3R) is equipped with a light source (reel lamps, included in the lamps/LEDs described later) positioned so that the symbols are visible from at least the main display window 4. By illuminating these reels from within with a constant brightness while each reel (3L, 3C, 3R) is rotating, the visibility of the symbols is ensured.

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD includes a sub-effect display unit 22 located to the left of the main display window 4, and an effect button 10b located to the right of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the effect images shown on the sub-display device 220, which will be described later. The sub-effect display unit 22 can also be configured as a touch panel, allowing it to function not only as an effect display unit but also as one of the effect buttons. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives the player's effect operations (effect operations).

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD, located below the main display window 4 on a roughly horizontal base, includes a MAX bet button 6a, a 1 bet button 6b, and a payout button 9 on the left side, a special effect button 10a located approximately in the center, and a coin slot 5 on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are control units that receive player input (betting operations; also referred to as "insertion operations" or "placement operations") for using the tokens deposited (credited) inside the pachislo machine 1. When the MAX bet button 6a is pressed, if the current bet is less than the maximum bet (for example, 3 tokens) and the credited tokens are equal to or greater than that difference, the maximum bet amount will be bet. Conversely, if the credited tokens are less than or equal to that difference, no tokens will be bet. When the 1 bet button 6b is pressed, if the current bet is less than the maximum bet and there are 1 or more credited tokens, 1 token will be bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (settlement operation) to return (settle) the credited tokens. Furthermore, if the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited tokens, the machine may accept the player's game operation (C/P mode selection operation) to select either a credit mode (C mode) that credits the tokens inserted or dispensed, or a pay mode (P mode) that does not credit the tokens, within the range of the number of tokens that can be credited (for example, 50 tokens). In other words, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that accepts the player's operation (effect operation) for effects.

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachislo machine 1 from the outside by the player. The received medals are detected by the selector 31 (described later), and it is determined whether they are valid medals. If a received medal is not valid, it is returned from the medal payout port 11 (described later). If a received medal is valid, and the current bet is less than the maximum bet, one medal is placed as a bet. If the current bet is the maximum bet and the credited medals have not reached the creditable limit, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the credited medals have reached the creditable limit, the received medal is returned from the medal payout port 11 (described later).

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 located between the main display window 4 and the aforementioned base. The information display device 14 is composed of multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information related to the game through its lighting pattern.

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD, located below the aforementioned base, includes a start lever 7 on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 on the right side. The start lever 7 is mounted to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and is an operating unit that receives the player's game operation (start operation) to begin the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, and is an operating unit that receives the player's game operation (stop operation) to stop the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is, for example, composed of a key cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, the lock is released when the administrator of the amusement parlor (for example, an employee of the amusement parlor; the same applies hereinafter) inserts the door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the right, opening the lower door mechanism DD. The locking mechanism 15 may also function as a reset switch in addition to managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, if the administrator of the amusement parlor inserts the door key into the keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to that of the reset switch 53 described later. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD can be configured to open in conjunction with the opening of the lower door mechanism DD, or a separate locking mechanism corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be provided, allowing for independent management of opening and closing.

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 located in the center of its lower section, a medal tray 12 located below the waist panel 13, a medal dispensing opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b located on the left and right sides of the medal dispensing opening 11.

The waist panel 13 consists of a decorative panel depicting machine information, such as a logo representing the machine's name or a character representing its motif, and a light source (a waist lamp included in the lamps/LEDs described later) for illuminating this decorative panel from the rear. The medal tray 12 stores the medals dispensed from the medal payout port 11. The medal payout port 11 discharges medals dispensed (or returned) from inside the pachislo machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout port 11 include those dispensed from the hopper device 32 described later and those returned through the cancel chute (not shown) from the selector 31 described later. The sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b are on their respective rear sides and transmit sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a and 35b (speaker 35a is not indicated in Figure 2) mounted inside the cabinet G toward the front of the pachislo machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided to correspond to the partition of the cabinet G into an upper and lower space. However, as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, it can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. It can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-back direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). Furthermore, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can simply be referred to as "doors," or, since they function as components that enable the opening in the cabinet G to be opened and closed, they can also be referred to as "opening/closing components," "door components," or "door parts."

[1-1-3. Variable Display Section]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and a main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player initiates the start operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described later are driven and controlled to start the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 change. Also, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (when the player initiates the stop operation), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R described later are driven and controlled to stop the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 stop.

In other words, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 constitute a variable display unit (means) capable of displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in multiple rows, or multiple variable display units (means) capable of displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in a variable manner. Note that the variable display unit (means) may also be referred to as a "symbol display unit (means)" or "variable display unit (means)." Furthermore, the symbols may be referred to as "pictures" or "patterns," and since any information that can be visually identified by the player is acceptable, they can also be referred to as "identification information."

Furthermore, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops, three symbols arranged consecutively for each reel are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol in each of the upper, middle, and lower sections of each row (a total of three symbols) (the symbols are displayed in a 3x3 arrangement within the frame of the main display window 4). The main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as the "symbol display area" or "window section."

Furthermore, valid lines are defined in the main display window 4. Valid lines are lines used to determine whether a predetermined combination of symbols has been displayed when all the symbols in all columns have stopped and been displayed in response to the player's stopping operation. In this sense, valid lines can also be called "winning lines" or "determination lines." Valid lines are configured as lines connecting any of the areas in each column. That is, if the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3x3 arrangement, it is possible to define up to 27 valid lines. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as valid lines, and the others can be defined as invalid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle areas of reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R is called the "center line," the line connecting the upper areas of reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R is called the "top line," the line connecting the lower areas of reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R is called the "bottom line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R is called the "cross-up line," and the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R is called the "cross-down line." Since these lines connect each area of each column in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as valid lines. However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to define so-called irregular lines, which connect each area of each column with a broken line, as valid lines.

Furthermore, for active paylines to be activated, the required number of tokens for the game (the number of tokens available to start the game) must be bet prior to the player's start operation. However, the number of active paylines that are activated may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or it may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines described above—"center line," "top line," and "bottom line"—are defined as active paylines, in the former case, the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" will be activated regardless of whether the number of bets is 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" will be activated; if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" will be activated; and if the number of bets is 3 (the maximum bet), the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" will be activated.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column, thus displaying symbols in a 3x3 configuration. However, the symbol display configuration in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be set to one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be set to one, two, or four or more, thereby displaying symbols in a configuration different from the one described above. In this case, the number of definable active lines can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display unit displays the patterns by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220 described later, or it may be configured using other display devices (e.g., organic EL or 7-segment LED). It may also be configured using other physical devices (e.g., a belt). The arrangement and size of the variable display unit can also be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main-side display unit directly related to the game, controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. However, a sub-side variable display unit related to effects not directly related to the game may also be provided, controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later. The sub-side display unit can be configured, for example, using a main display device 210 and a sub-display device 220. That is, a sub-side display unit may be provided in addition to the main-side display unit, which displays a variable pattern in response to the player's start operation (or the fulfillment of other start conditions) and displays a stopped pattern in response to the player's stop operation (or the fulfillment of other stop conditions). In this case, in order for the player to identify whether the variable display unit is directly related to the game, an identification mark such as "Slot Machine" or "Main Reel" may be attached near the main-side display unit to identify that the variable display unit is the main-side display unit. Furthermore, such identification displays may be shown on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with a coin slot 5 that accepts coins inserted into the pachislo machine 1 from the outside by the player. The coin slot 5 and the selector 31, described later, have the function of betting the number of coins required for one game, similar to the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b, so such insertion operations can also be referred to as betting operations. Therefore, the coin slot 5 can also be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's betting operations. The shape, arrangement, and size of the coin slot can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, this configuration is not necessarily required when the pachislo machine 1 is configured as a coinless game machine, as described later.

In this embodiment, while the use of tokens as a game medium is explained as an example of game value used in games or awarded based on game results, the game value used in this way is not limited to tokens. For example, coins, game balls, game point data, or tokens can also be used. Furthermore, game value can simply be referred to as "value" or "game value," etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachislo machine 1 includes, for example, the following operating parts that can be operated by the player. Note that the following operating parts are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include different operating parts, or it may be configured to omit operating parts that are not necessarily essential.

[1-1-5-1. Bet Button]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with a MAX bet button 6a and a 1 bet button 6b that accept betting operations from the player to use the tokens deposited (credited) inside it. Furthermore, such betting operations are detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a betting operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's betting operations. Note that the bet buttons only need to be able to detect the player's betting operations, and their shape, arrangement, and size can be changed as appropriate. In this embodiment, a MAX bet button 6a and a 1 bet button 6b are provided, but it is also possible to provide only the MAX bet button 6a without the 1 bet button 6b. Furthermore, a separate 2 bet button for betting two tokens may be provided.

[1-1-5-2. Start Lever]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with a start lever 7 that receives the player's start operation to begin playing. Such a start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's start operation. The start lever only needs to be capable of detecting the player's start operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc., can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, and which accept the player's stop operation to stop the rotation of each reel. Furthermore, such a start operation is detected by the stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons only need to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and their shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Checkout button]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts the player's settlement operation (return operation) to return (cash out) the credited tokens. Furthermore, such a settlement operation is detected by the settlement switch 9S described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's settlement operation. Note that the settlement button only needs to be able to detect the player's settlement operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Buttons for performance/effects]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with performance buttons 10a and 10b that receive performance operations from the player. Such performance operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided in conjunction with each performance button. Therefore, the performance buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switches constitute a performance operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting performance operations from the player. The performance buttons only need to be capable of detecting performance operations from the player, and their shape, arrangement, and size can be changed as appropriate. In this embodiment, two performance buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is also possible to configure the machine without either of them, or to provide only one of them. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the machine with three or more performance buttons.

The main uses of the effect buttons are to change the effect pattern when executing specific effects (for example, the operation-linked effects described later) and to perform selection and confirmation operations in the user menu described later. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system to have effect buttons tailored to specific uses. For example, effect buttons 10a and 10b could be used for the former purpose, while the touch panel described above could be used for the latter. Furthermore, for the latter purpose, it is possible to configure the system to include a separate effect button, such as a jog dial or directional pad, capable of accepting selection and confirmation operations.

[1-1-6. Medal Dispensing Outlet]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout port 11 that discharges medals dispensed (or returned) from inside the pachislo machine 1 to the outside. When a win occurs and medals are dispensed, the medal payout port 11 provides the medals dispensed from the hopper device 32 (described later) to the player, and can therefore be considered part of the means of providing benefits to the player. The shape, arrangement, and size of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, this configuration is not necessarily required when the pachislo machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine (described later).

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with a medal tray 12 for storing medals dispensed from the medal payout port 11. In other words, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) capable of storing the assigned game value. The shape, arrangement, and size of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, this configuration is not necessarily required when the pachislo machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine as described later.

[1-1-8. Lumbar Panel]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 includes a waist panel 13, which consists of a decorative panel depicting machine information and a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the rear. The waist panel 13 basically serves to clearly indicate to the player what type of pachislo machine 1 it is, but it can also be configured as one of the means for executing effects, for example, by changing the lighting pattern of the waist lamp or by configuring the waist panel 13 itself as an image display device.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with an information display device 14 that displays information related to the game depending on its lighting pattern. In other words, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) capable of displaying information related to the game.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet count lamp, a credit lamp, a payout count lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp indicates that a medal can be inserted when it lights up. The start lamp indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7 when it lights up. The replay lamp indicates that a medal has been automatically inserted due to the replay function when it lights up. The bet lamp indicates the number of medals bet when it lights up. The credit lamp indicates the number of medals credited based on its lighting pattern. The payout lamp indicates the number of medals paid out (payout) according to the game result based on its lighting pattern.

Furthermore, the instruction monitor is composed of a notification lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). The notification lamp displays the stop operation information by lighting up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information being notified when the player is notified of the stop operation information (for example, in AT state). The "manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information being notified" means, for example, when notifying the push order (in this embodiment, this may be described as "batting order") "1st (performing the first stop operation on reel 3L)", the instruction monitor displays the number "1", when notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", the instruction monitor displays the number "2", and when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)", the instruction monitor displays the number "3". The notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp or payout lamp. For example, information about the stop operation may be displayed using either the credit lamp or the payout lamp.

Thus, in this embodiment, when information about a stop operation is notified to the player, the information is notified not only by the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later, but also by the instruction monitor, which is the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. Note that the notification manner in the main side notification means and the notification manner in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main side notification means only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified, and it is not necessarily required to directly notify the information about the stop operation. For example, when notifying the order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the notification content. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to directly notify the information about the stop operation. For example, when notifying the order "1st", the main performance display unit 21 only needs to directly notify the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

Furthermore, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is within the advantageous section described below. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (described below), the section lamp lights up at any time before gameplay in the advantageous section begins. When transitioning from the advantageous section to a non-advantageous section after its end, the lamp turns off at any time before gameplay in the non-advantageous section begins. However, the timing of the section lamp's illumination is not limited to these. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section's performance section (normal advantageous section) to the initial increase section (AT state) within the advantageous section (described below), the lamp may light up at any time before gameplay in the increase section begins. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the player is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a performance section or an increase section, or it may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section until the end of the advantageous section including that section.

Furthermore, the limit lamp indicates, or is likely to be, that the limit processing described below has been performed, depending on its illumination pattern. For example, if the lamp lights up when limit processing is performed, it informs the player that a favorable state (e.g., AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the limit processing. Alternatively, if the lamp blinks when limit processing is imminent, it informs the player that there is a high probability that this favorable state will be forcibly terminated by the limit processing. In addition to these, other information regarding limit processing can be communicated as appropriate by providing triggers for lighting, blinking, or turning off the lamp.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 includes a main performance display unit 21 and a sub-performance display unit 22 that display performance images. The main performance display unit 21 and the sub-performance display unit 22 constitute a performance display unit (means) capable of performing performances. They are also configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform performances from a visual standpoint for the player.

The main performance display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that performs performance displays via a performance display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a so-called projection mapping device, comprising a display unit A detachably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 within the cabinet G, an illumination unit B that emits illumination light for image display, and a screen device C that displays an image when illuminated by the illumination light from the illumination unit B. In this embodiment, configuring the main display device 210 in this way enables advanced and impactful performance displays, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. That is, it is sufficient to perform performances from a visual standpoint for the player; it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or organic EL display device, or a display device such as a 7-segment LED, or as a variable display device such as a sub-reel or a dot display device. Furthermore, from this perspective, its shape, arrangement, and size can also be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislo machine 1 primarily focuses on providing entertainment through the so-called "winning combinations" of symbols, it is possible to configure it without the main display unit 21 (the same applies to the sub-display unit 22).

The sub-display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. The sub-display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. The sub-display device 220, like the main display device 210, can also be configured as another image display device or display device, or as a variable display device or dot display device. Furthermore, its shape, arrangement, and size can be appropriately changed from this perspective. The main display unit 21, being a large screen, primarily displays effects closely related to the current game, such as button press order notifications, win notifications, or continuous effects. The sub-display unit 22, being a small screen, primarily displays effects less closely related to the current game, such as game history. Thus, the display content can be divided according to purpose. In this embodiment, two display units, the main display unit 21 and the sub-display unit 22, are provided. However, it is also possible to configure the system without either of these, or with only one of them. It is also possible to configure the system with three or more display units.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (lighting means) capable of performing effects through their light emission mode (including not only illumination, flashing, or extinguishing, but also their brightness and color if they are configured as full-color LEDs), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such lighting means are configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform visual effects for the player. From this perspective, their number, shape, arrangement, and size can also be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end faces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter, since they include a function to inform the player whether each operation unit is operable or not, can be controlled to emit light in a single, unambiguous pattern without changing the light emission pattern according to the performance content when this function is activated.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is equipped with speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects, background music, and other audio. Speakers 35a and 35b constitute an audio output means capable of performing effects through audio output. They are also configured as one of the means of performing effects that can deliver auditory effects to the player. From this perspective, their number, shape, arrangement, and size can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other stage equipment]
Furthermore, in pachislo machine 1, it is also possible to provide performance devices other than the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to provide performance devices such as movable performance devices, so-called "mechanisms," vibration performance devices that perform performances through vibration, or air performance devices that perform performances by spraying air, and to perform performances using such devices. In other words, any performance device that can perform a performance that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (making it possible for the player to recognize that a performance is being performed) can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" means that, unless otherwise specified, a performance may be performed using one or more of the various performance devices (performance execution means) described above.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (not shown in Figure 2) is a flow path for the medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and is located on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S (described later) and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal slot 5 and determines whether the detected medal is a valid medal. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is a valid medal and the machine is in a state where it can accept medals, the sorting device is driven to guide the medal towards the hopper device 32 (described later). In this case, the bet count or credit count is increased by 1. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not a valid medal, and the machine is not in a state where it can accept medals, the sorting device is driven to return the medal through the cancel chute to the medal payout port 11. A selector error occurs if an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S. In this case, the error state is cleared after the cause of the abnormality (e.g., a medal jam) is resolved and a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting inserted game medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted game medium is appropriate or not. Furthermore, the selector 31 constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted game medium internally if it is appropriate, and discharges it externally if it is not appropriate. The configuration, arrangement, and size of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislo machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine as described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is located in the lower space inside the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section for storing medals that are inserted from the medal input port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disc section located at the bottom of the bucket section which agitates the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section which discharges the medals guided by the disc section one by one, and a count sensor which counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket section is configured to store a certain number of medals. Medal exceeding this limit are guided through a guide passage on the top surface to the medal auxiliary storage compartment 33 (described later). If the medals stored in the bucket section become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, replenishing the medals and performing a reset operation will clear the error.

The disc section has multiple medal-shaped cutouts radiating from the center. The central axis rotates according to a drive signal, guiding medals that fit into the cutouts one by one to the discharge section. The rotation of the disc section also agitates the medals stored in the bucket section. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disc section, a hopper jam error will occur. In this case, the error state will be cleared by resolving the cause of the abnormality (e.g., a medal jam) and then performing a reset operation.

The count sensor detects the medals dispensed from the dispensing unit and counts their number. For example, when dispensing one medal, the disc unit begins to rotate, and then, in response to the count sensor counting the dispensing of one medal, the disc unit stops rotating. In this way, the correct number of medals are dispensed.

In other words, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium dispensing unit (means) capable of dispensing game mediums. Furthermore, as mentioned above, it can also be considered part of the means for granting benefits to players. The configuration, arrangement, and size of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislo machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine as described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Medal Auxiliary Storage]
The medal auxiliary storage compartment 33 is located in the lower space of the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage compartment 33 includes, for example, a storage section for storing medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage compartment switch 33S located near the storage section for detecting the volume of medals stored in the storage section.

The storage compartment is configured to hold a certain number of medals. If the medal auxiliary storage compartment switch 33S determines that more than this certain number of medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage compartment error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared when the number of medals stored in the compartment is reduced to at least below the certain number, and then a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the medal auxiliary storage compartment 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage unit (means) capable of storing surplus game mediums. The configuration, arrangement, and size of the medal auxiliary storage compartment 33 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, this configuration is not necessarily required when the pachislo machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, as described later.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply unit 34 is located in the lower space inside the cabinet G. The power supply unit 34 includes, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachislo machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply unit 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from a power cable (not shown) into DC voltage power required for each part, similar to household electrical appliances, and supplies the converted power to each part. In other words, the power supply unit 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the necessary power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, and size of the power supply unit 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key-type switch 52 and reset switch 53, described later, are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, described later). However, these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply unit 34.

[1-2-5. Circuit Board]
The pachislo machine 1 includes, for example, the following circuit boards as necessary for various controls. Note that the following circuit boards are merely examples, and the machine may be configured with different circuit boards, or it may be configured without any circuit boards that are not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted on the rear side of the reel unit RU inside the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls gameplay, and is housed in a transparent (or semi-transparent) resin main control board case (not shown) so that its status can be visually observed. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

Furthermore, the specifications of the main control board 71 are subject to various constraints. While it is basically constructed with various electronic components mounted in DIP (dipstick) form, some or all of the electronic components may be mounted using SMT (surface mount technology). In this case, test points may be provided for operational verification using a tester or oscilloscope. Additionally, small electronic components not exceeding 6 square mm may be used for some or all of the electronic components. Furthermore, the main control board 71 may be constructed with multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is mounted on the back side of the intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is a performance control board that controls the performance effects and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be made of a transparent (or semi-transparent) resin case, similar to the main control board case, or it can be made of another material that is opaque (or semi-opaque). The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other circuit boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (not shown in Figure 2) is mounted at a specific location inside the cabinet G (for example, on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays signals between the various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main control board 71, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, if there are no particular problems, all the functions of the main relay board 73 can be assigned to the main control board 71, and the main relay board 73 can be omitted. Furthermore, from this perspective, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into multiple relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, multiple boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is mounted at a specific location within the cabinet G (for example, on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays signals between the various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a separate board from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, if there are no particular problems, all the functions of the sub-relay board 74 can be assigned to the sub-control board 72, and the sub-relay board 74 can be omitted. Furthermore, from this perspective, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into multiple relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, multiple boards may be provided as sub-relay boards.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external central terminal board 55 is installed in a specific location within the cabinet G (for example, at the back of the lower space) and outputs signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislo machine 1. The output start and end conditions for external signals 1 to 4 can be set as appropriate, making it possible to notify the outside of the transition of the internal state of the pachislo machine 1 (for example, bonus state or AT state) according to the gameplay. Since the external central terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, these devices can recognize not only the medal insertion and payout status and error occurrences in the pachislo machine 1, but also the transition of such internal states.

(Interface board for test machine)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used to output various game-related signals to the test machine during the certification test (trial firing test) of the pachislo machine 1. (Note that these relay boards are not installed in the pachislo machine 1 as a commercially released product, and therefore the various electronic components necessary to connect to the first interface board 301 and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are not mounted on the main control board 71 for sale.) For example, test signals for controlling major game-related operations (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and test signals related to the push-button navigation determined by the main control board 71 are output via the second interface board 302 for the test machine.

[2. Electrical Configuration of a Pachislo Machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislo machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 3. Figure 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachislo machine 1.

As described above, the pachislo machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74 to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100, which functions as a game control unit that performs control related to gameplay. The main control circuit 100 is composed of, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, and data for sending various control commands to the sub-control circuit 200. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for the operation of the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. It also extracts one or more values as random values from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control is performed over the entire game operation.

The sub-control board 72 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 200, which functions as a performance control unit that performs performance-related control. The sub-control circuit 200 is composed of, for example, a sub-CPU 201 and a sub-RAM 203. A ROM cartridge board 202 is also connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201, various data tables, and various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub-display device 220, lamp data related to the lamp/LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub-RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for registering performance content and various performance data determined by the execution of the control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control commands transmitted from the main control board 71. Furthermore, the random numbers used for the visual effects may be generated and extracted within the sub-CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 32767), or they may be generated and extracted by providing a random number circuit similar to that of the main control circuit 100. Alternatively, the sub-ROM may be included in the sub-control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs may be stored in the sub-ROM. Alternatively, the ROM cartridge board 202 may store various visual effect data, while the sub-ROM in the sub-control circuit 200 stores various control programs and data tables. The sub-control circuit 200 may also include a dedicated image processor such as a GPU (also known as a "VDP"), and be configured to generate (edit) the images displayed on the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220.

The main control board 71 is electrically connected to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, the setting key-type switch 52, the reset switch 53, the payout ratio monitor device 54, the external centralized terminal board 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and the power supply device 34. Furthermore, the main control board 71 is electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, and the information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. If the first interface board 301 and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are installed, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71, for example, via the main relay board 73.

Furthermore, the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, power supply unit 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first interface board 301 for the test machine, and second interface board 302 for the test machine have already been explained, so their explanation here will be omitted.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears with predetermined reduction ratios, and their drive rotates and stops each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R rotates by a certain angle each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, the main CPU 101 counts the number of pulses output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R and manages the position of the symbols on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on this count. Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is also provided with a reel index (not shown) to define an initial position for this management, and an index sensor (not shown) to detect the position of the reel index.

The setting key-type switch 52 is used to change the setting value of the pachislo machine 1 (for example, one of six settings, from setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change), or to check the setting of the pachislo machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage to the player in relation to the game. Generally, the lower the setting value (for example, the closer to setting 1), the lower the relative advantage to the player, and the higher the setting value (for example, the closer to setting 6), the higher the relative advantage to the player. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned ON when the administrator of the amusement parlor inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the left from the initial position, and turns OFF when it is returned to the initial position from the leftward position. Furthermore, when the power to the pachislo machine 1 is off, setting the setting key-type switch 52 to the ON position and then turning the power on will enable setting changes. If the setting key-type switch 52 is turned ON while the power to the pachislo machine 1 is already on, setting confirmation will be possible.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting reset operations performed by the administrator of the gaming establishment. A reset operation is performed to clear various error states. Furthermore, the reset switch 53 is capable of detecting setting value determination operations performed by the administrator of the gaming establishment when setting changes are possible. When the reset switch 53 is operated while setting changes are possible, the setting value increases by 1 each time it is operated (returning to setting 1 after reaching setting 6). In this way, setting value determination operations can be performed. The determined setting value is then finalized when the start lever 7 is operated once. That is, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting setting value finalization operations performed by the administrator of the gaming establishment. Thus, when changing settings, the setting key-type switch 52 must be turned ON, the reset switch 53 must be operated to select a setting value, the start lever 7 must be operated to finalize the selected setting value, and then the setting key-type switch 52 must be turned OFF. Note that this is just one example of a setting change operation, and the system can be configured to allow setting changes through other operations. Furthermore, when changing or checking settings, it is sufficient to display the current setting value using, for example, the credit lamp or payout lamp mentioned above.

The payout ratio monitor device 54 is, for example, composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is installed inside the main control board case. The payout ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various percentage information related to the game, which has been compiled and calculated by the main CPU 101. This percentage information is used by the manager of the amusement parlor to check whether the pachislo machine 1 has been illegally modified, etc. The payout ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or on another board connected to the main control board 71 (for example, a percentage display board). It may also be installed in other locations within the cabinet G. For example, it may be installed on the main control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the payout ratio monitor device 54 or switching its contents may be installed inside the cabinet G, and when this is operated, the various percentage information described above may be displayed. Also, assuming the use of such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in conjunction with the payout ratio monitor device 54. Furthermore, to allow confirmation that the 4-digit 7-segment LEDs of the performance ratio monitor device 54 are functioning correctly, immediately after power-on or after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on (for example, about 10 seconds, which is a buffer time to account for the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200), it is desirable to configure the device to light up (or blink) for a predetermined period of time in a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs light up).

In the payout ratio monitor device 54, for example, the upper two digits display the type of payout information, and the lower two digits display the value (%) representing that payout information. Here, the various types of payout information displayed in the payout ratio monitor device 54 include, for example, cumulative payout ratio information for a specific section, continuous payout ratio information and payout ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous payout ratio information and payout ratio information.

The specific section ratio information refers to the percentage of games played within the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative" games, or 6,000 games for "most recent 6,000 games" games; the same applies hereinafter) where information about advantageous stopping operations for the player was provided (for example, during AT mode) (or simply the number of games played within an advantageous section). The continuous bonus ratio information refers to the percentage of medals paid out during the operation of a Type 1 Special Bonus (RB) within the target number of games played (including during the operation of a Type 1 Special Bonus (RB) when the continuous bonus device (BB) related to the Type 1 Special Bonus is in operation). Furthermore, the bonus payout ratio information indicates the ratio of the number of medals dispensed during the operation of Type 1 Special Bonus (RB), Type 2 Special Bonus (CB), and Regular Bonus (SB) within the game period of the target number of games. Here, "during the operation of Type 1 Special Bonus (RB)" includes the operation of Type 1 Special Bonus (RB) when the continuous bonus payout device (BB) related to Type 1 Special Bonus is in operation, and "during the operation of Type 2 Special Bonus (CB)" includes the operation of Type 2 Special Bonus (CB) when the continuous bonus payout device (MB) related to Type 2 Special Bonus is in operation.

Furthermore, game sections in which information regarding advantageous stopping operations for the player is provided (e.g., AT state) can be treated as periods of operation of the special feature or continuous special feature operation device, and these can be included in the aggregation and calculation of their respective percentage information. In other words, the special feature ratio monitor device 54 only needs to appropriately display the necessary percentage information, and the types of percentage information that can be displayed are not limited to these. Also, for example, when displaying continuous special feature percentage information in a machine without a Type 1 Special Feature (RB), or when displaying specific section percentage information in a machine without an advantageous section function (AT function), in machines where no corresponding numerical information (corresponding information) exists, it is desirable that, when displaying the item, the last two digits of the four-digit seven-segment LED displaying the numerical information (percentage information) should be illuminated with an identification display for non-corresponding information, such as "- -", so that the user can immediately recognize that the machine does not have corresponding information.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is, for example, installed on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may also be configured to be installed on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. Furthermore, a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch may be installed on the upper door mechanism UD. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning ON when the lower door mechanism DD is open and OFF when it is closed. Note that a door opening error occurs when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is ON. In this case, closing the lower door mechanism DD clears the error.

The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub-display device 220. Furthermore, the sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, the performance buttons 10a and 10b, the lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and the speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74.

The ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, effect buttons, lamps/LEDs, and speaker group have already been explained, so their explanations will be omitted here.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, like the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, is installed, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. While it shares the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it monitors the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD, this monitoring can also be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side, allowing for the storage of the lower door mechanism DD's opening and closing history for a certain period. This opening and closing history can be checked from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is an opening history outside of business hours after the amusement parlor manager has left, or if there is an opening/closing history of the door being left open for a long period during business hours, it becomes possible to recognize that there is a high probability of fraudulent activity.

[3. Functional Flow of a Pachislo Machine]
Next, we will explain the functional flow of the pachislo machine 1 with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a diagram illustrating the functional flow of the pachislo machine 1.

When a player inserts tokens into the pachislo machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal random number") is drawn from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (the main CPU 101 which performs the internal lottery processing described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random values to determine the internal winning combination. The determination of the internal winning combination predetermines the combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the active lines. The combinations of symbols are categorized into those related to "winning," which grants the player benefits such as medal payouts, replay activation, and bonus activation, and those related to other so-called "misses." The combinations related to medal payouts are called "minor wins," those related to replay activation are called "replay wins," and those related to bonus activation (bonus state) are called "bonus wins." Furthermore, the combinations that can be internally won (i.e., the combinations of symbols permitted to be formed) are sometimes simply referred to as "wins." Furthermore, the internal winning combination may be referred to as the "winning combination," "pre-determined result," or "derivative acceptable condition." Similarly, the internal drawing means may be referred to as the "combination determination means," "winning combination determination means," "pre-determined means," or "derivative acceptable condition determination means."

Furthermore, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), multiple reels rotate. Subsequently, when the player operates the stop buttons (each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to each reel (each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) (the stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (the main CPU 101, which performs the reel stop control processing described later) controls the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing (including the order in which the stop buttons were pressed). Note that the operating means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped means such as the start lever 7; any operating means is acceptable as long as the player can perform the start operation. Similarly, the operating means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button-shaped means such as the each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R; any operating means is acceptable as long as the player can perform the stop operation.

In pachislo machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the moment the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels within this specified time is called the "number of sliding symbols." In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is set to four symbols.

The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination that permits the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, normally stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of 190 msec (equivalent to 4 symbol frames) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the active line as much as possible. Furthermore, the reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed on the active line. The symbols displayed when the reels stop rotating are sometimes referred to as the "stop display" or "display result." The process of displaying symbols when the reels stop rotating is sometimes referred to as the "derivation of the stop display" or "derivation of the display result."

Furthermore, the reel stop control means may be configured to automatically stop each reel after a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reels began rotating, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. In this case, since the reels will stop without any stop operation by the player, it is desirable to stop the rotation of the reels so that, even if any internal winning combination has been determined, none of the winning symbol combinations are displayed along the valid lines.

In this way, once the rotation of all the reels has stopped, the prize determination means (the main CPU 101 which performs the prize activation determination process described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is a prize-winning combination (or other predetermined combination). That is, it determines whether a prize-winning combination (or other predetermined combination) has been achieved. If the prize determination means determines that the displayed combination of symbols is a prize-winning combination (or other predetermined combination) (i.e., a prize-winning combination (or other predetermined combination) has been achieved), the player is given a bonus such as a payout of medals, or various controls are performed as a result. In pachislo machine 1, as an example, the above sequence of events constitutes one game (unit game).

Furthermore, the prize-winning determination means may simply determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line corresponds to one of a predetermined set of symbol combinations, or it may determine whether it corresponds to a symbol combination related to an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. In other words, in the former case, it may determine whether the combination of symbols is related to a prize, independently of the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately controls the stopping, the occurrence of erroneous wins can be sufficiently ensured, thus reducing the control burden related to erroneous win detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by also determining whether the combination of symbols related to a prize is a combination of symbols that was permitted to win, it becomes possible to detect erroneous wins that occur due to reel malfunctions, etc., thereby improving security.

Furthermore, in pachislot machines, within the aforementioned sequence of gameplay operations, various effects are performed using display devices (e.g., main display device 210 and sub-display device 220), various lamps (e.g., upper lamp 23), speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b), or combinations thereof. In other words, these are means for executing the effects. The content of the effects executed by these means may be determined by the main control circuit 100 (main side) or by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub side). That is, either of these can serve as means for determining the content of the effects.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), a random number for the performance is extracted separately from the random number for the internal lottery. Once the random number for the performance is extracted, the performance content determination means determines which performance to execute from among several types of performance content associated with the internal winning combination, either by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions).

Next, once the performance content is determined by the performance content determination means, the performance execution means executes the corresponding performance in conjunction with various triggers, such as when the reels start spinning, when each reel stops spinning, and when determining whether a win has occurred. In this way, in pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing performance content associated with the internal winning combination, the player is given the opportunity to learn about or predict the determined internal winning combination (which can also be described as the combination of symbols to aim for or the order in which to press the buttons), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the gameplay of pachislo machines]
Next, we will explain the basic specifications regarding the gameplay of pachislo machine 1.

[4-1. Pattern Placement]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is designed so that the game is played by displaying and stopping multiple symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to determine which symbols are located in which positions on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores data to identify the type of symbol at each symbol position on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as this objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as one example, the symbol arrangement table (see Figure 9) described later is used.

The symbol placement table defines symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19") indicating the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each reel (3L, 3C, 3R). Furthermore, data (e.g., symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data to identify the type of symbol. The symbol placement table also defines "0" as the position of the symbol located in the middle section of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected. The number of symbols in each column, the number of symbol types, and the maximum number of sliding symbols can be changed as needed.

[4-2. Pattern Combinations]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols affects the game result. In other words, the pachislo machine 1 can grant various benefits, transition from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or transition from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such combinations of symbols. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for identifying such combinations of symbols. As long as this objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as one example, the symbol combination table described later (see Figures 11 to 14) is used.

The symbol combination table contains data (e.g., "display symbols" or "winning activation flags") that indicate the types of predetermined symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active lines. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be identified, for example, using the symbol codes mentioned above. Furthermore, data indicating the type of bonus or reward (e.g., "payout, etc.") is associated with each symbol combination. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area (see Figure 17) described later. The number of symbol combination types and the content of the bonuses can be changed as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal Winning Role]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is designed so that the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed (determined in advance) affects the game result. In other words, the pachislo machine 1 is capable of determining the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combination that can be displayed (or the type of prize that can be awarded)) in advance of the player's stop operation. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for identifying such internal winning combinations. As long as this objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as one example, the internal lottery table (see Figure 10) described later is used.

The internal lottery table contains data indicating the types of predetermined internal winning combinations (e.g., "No." or "Winning Number") and a lottery value that determines each internal winning combination in each game state. Note that the lottery value may vary depending on the set settings. Furthermore, each internal winning combination is associated with the types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding to) it. In pachislo machine 1, it is possible to associate multiple symbol combinations with a single internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed is determined by the stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process described later in this embodiment (see Figure 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process in S64), first, random values extracted from a predetermined range of numbers (for example, 0 to 65535) by a random number circuit are sequentially added and updated with lottery values defined for each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether the lottery result (lottery value + random value) exceeds 65535 (whether the lottery result has overflowed). Then, for a predetermined internal winning combination, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535, that internal winning combination is declared the winner (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceed 65535 after this determination is made for all of them, the internal winning combination for this game will be a "miss". This is merely one example of an internal lottery process. As long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (probability of winning), various methods can be employed for the lottery process. For example, the extracted random values could be sequentially subtracted and updated using lottery values defined for each internal winning combination. Then, the internal winning combination could be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) falls below zero (whether the lottery result underflowed).

Thus, in the internal lottery table, the higher the numerical value of the defined lottery value for an internal winning combination, the higher the probability of it being determined (winning probability). The winning probability for each internal winning combination can be expressed as "the defined lottery value for each winning number / the total number of possible random values that can be extracted (random denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop Control]
As described above, in pachislo machine 1, the game result is affected by which combination of symbols is ultimately displayed by the player's stopping operation from among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed based on the determination of the internal winning combination. In other words, pachislo machine 1 is capable of controlling (determining) the type of combination of symbols that is ultimately displayed not only by the type of internal winning combination that has been determined, but also by the timing and order of the player's stopping operation (also referred to as "stopping operation manner" or "stopping operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to understand how to perform stopping control for each internal winning combination according to the player's stopping operation manner. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for specifying such stopping control manners. As long as this objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as an example, a stopping table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used.

The stop table defines data indicating the amount of movement of each symbol (e.g., "number of sliding pieces") for each symbol position data of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose a predetermined stop table is selected in a game where a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Next, suppose a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. Suppose the starting stop position (the symbol position data in the middle section of reel 3L at the time of the stop operation) is "0". Then, suppose the number of sliding pieces defined for symbol position data "0" in the predetermined stop table is "4". In this case, the main control circuit 100 controls reel 3L to stop at the symbol position that has moved 4 symbol pieces (the position of symbol position data "4") (the planned stop position becomes "4"). Thus, the stop table defines data (number of sliding pieces) that allows for the direct determination of the stopping position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control".

The reel pull-in priority table contains data (e.g., "pull-in priority") indicating which symbol combination should be displayed (pull-in) first when multiple symbol combinations are permitted to be displayed. For example, suppose a predetermined reel pull-in priority table is selected in a game where a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the predetermined reel pull-in priority table is set so that symbol combination B is displayed preferentially over symbol combination A. Next, suppose a stop operation is performed on the spinning reel 3L. At this time, suppose the stop start position was "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 searches for each symbol position within the maximum number of sliding frames (for example, "4"), including the stop start position, to see if there are symbols that make up symbol combination A and symbols that make up symbol combination B. If neither symbol exists, the stopping position is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stopping at a closer position, stopping at a farther position, etc.). If only the symbols that make up symbol combination A exist, the stopping position is determined to be at the position corresponding to that symbol. If only the symbols that make up symbol combination B exist, the stopping position is determined to be at the position corresponding to that symbol. If both symbols exist, since symbol combination B is given priority over symbol combination A, the stopping position is determined to be at the position corresponding to the symbols that make up symbol combination B. Note that the reel pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions while the target reel is rotating, according to the selected reel pull-in priority table, or it may be stored for each symbol position within the maximum number of sliding frames, including the stop start position, when a stop operation is performed on the target reel. Also, this data configuration is merely an example. Furthermore, using such a priority table for stopping trains is generally referred to as "control control."

In this embodiment, the system can be configured to perform stop control solely through "table control," or solely through "control control." Alternatively, it can be configured to first tentatively determine the stopping position through "table control," then search for a more appropriate stopping position through "control control," and, depending on the search results, allow for a change in the stopping position.

Thus, in pachislo machine 1, the final combination of symbols displayed on the winning lines is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "miss," then no combination of symbols related to a replay, a minor win, or a bonus will ultimately be displayed on the active payline. Note that "miss" can be considered either one of the internal winning combinations, or a lottery result in which no internal winning combination was determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four, even if the internal lottery process results in a win in any internal winning combination, if the symbols constituting the permitted symbol combination are positioned beyond four symbols on the active line (or each active line if there are multiple lines), the symbol combination may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "missed win."

The third element is the player's button press order (the order in which the player operates the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning combination may be determined by associating multiple symbol combinations. In this case, the final combination of symbols displayed on the active payline may vary depending on the player's button press order. Such internal winning combinations are called "button press order combinations," and if they are replay combinations, they may be called "button press order replays," and if they are minor combinations, they may be called "button press order minor combinations."

[4-5. Game Status]
In pachislo machine 1, various game states can be set up to vary the player's advantage or to create a desired gameplay experience. An example of such a game state is described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus State]
In pachislo machine 1, when a bonus role is won and the combination of symbols related to that bonus role is displayed on an active payline, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that no such bonus state is provided. Furthermore, by providing multiple types of bonus roles, it is possible to configure the machine so that multiple bonus states are provided. When a bonus role is won, a state occurs in which that bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role (carryover state) for multiple games until the combination of symbols related to that bonus role is displayed on an active payline. Such a bonus role is sometimes called a "carryover role". Also, such a carryover state is sometimes called "(bonus) flag interval" or "(bonus) internal in progress".

The bonus state is a state in which the manner in which small wins are drawn (including the probability of winning, the content of those wins, and the manner of stop control, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) can be altered compared to the state in which the bonus state is not active (non-bonus state). (Since it is also a state in which the manner in which replay wins are drawn can be altered, the bonus state can also be considered as a form of the RT state described later.) Therefore, if such a drawing manner is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state is a more advantageous game state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a drawing manner is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state is a less advantageous game state than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus features include the first-type special feature (RB), the continuous feature activation device related to the first-type special feature (BB), the second-type special feature (CB) (but not a carry-over feature), the continuous feature activation device related to the second-type special feature (MB), and the regular feature (SB) (but not a carry-over feature). Furthermore, for example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus feature are configured as follows: The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winning combinations (for example, an upper limit of 8) or a predetermined number of games (for example, an upper limit of 12) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined number of medals have been paid out (for example, an upper limit of 285).

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends after one game is played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined payout number of medals (for example, an upper limit of 153 medals) is exceeded, or when an RB or SB is won during the MB state. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends after one game is played.

Furthermore, the activation conditions for the bonus state are not limited to the display of a bonus symbol combination on an active payline. For example, while the continuous bonus device (BB) for the first type of special bonus is in operation, the system can be configured to automatically activate the first type of special bonus (RB) at the start of operation of the continuous bonus device (BB) for the first type of special bonus, at the start of gameplay when the first type of special bonus is not in operation, or at the end of operation of the first type of special bonus. In other words, it is possible to control the system so that the RB is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying a symbol combination for the RB. Here, the RB during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC," and this specification in which the RB is automatically activated while the BB is in operation is sometimes referred to as "Auto JAC." Also, while the BB is in operation, it is possible to control the system so that the RB is in operation when a specified symbol combination for the RB is displayed on an active payline. This specification in which the RB is activated based on the display of a corresponding symbol combination is sometimes referred to as "Manual JAC." Furthermore, the relationship between the continuous activation device (MB) for the Type 2 special feature and the Type 2 special feature (CB) is similar. That is, it is possible to control the system so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is operating, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB. Alternatively, during MB operation, the system can be controlled so that the CB is in operation when a specified combination of symbols related to the CB is displayed on the active line.

[4-5-2. RT State]
In pachislo machine 1, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. It is also possible to configure the machine so that no such RT state is provided. Furthermore, it is possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery pattern for replay roles can be changed compared to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, if such a lottery pattern is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery pattern is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a less advantageous game state than the non-RT state. The same applies to the relationships between multiple RT states when multiple RT states are provided. In this case, an RT state in which the draw pattern for the replay symbol (especially the probability of winning) is relatively favorable to the player is sometimes referred to as a "high RT state" or "high probability replay state," while an RT state in which the draw pattern for the replay symbol (especially the probability of winning) is relatively unfavorable to the player is sometimes referred to as a "low RT state" or "low probability replay state."

The RT state can be transitioned to, for example, by fulfilling any of the following transition conditions. The same applies to transitions between multiple RT states if multiple RT states are provided.
(1) When a RB, BB, or MB is won; (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB, or MB is displayed; (3) When the RB state, BB state, or MB state ends; (4) When a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a RB, BB, or MB has not been won (not carried over) and the player is not in the RB state, BB state, or MB state; (5) When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition conditions in (3) or (4) have been met.

[4-5-3. AT status]
In pachislo machine 1, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. It is also possible to configure the machine so that there is no such AT state. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the machine so that there are multiple AT states. The AT state is a game state in which, for example, when the aforementioned button-press combination is won, information on advantageous stopping operations is notified to the player, making it a more advantageous state than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state).

Furthermore, when multiple AT states are provided, the degree of advantage for the player can be varied by differentiating the game duration of each AT state (including the likelihood of extension if such extension is possible), the types of notifiable roles for which stop operation information is reported, and the probability of stop operation information being reported for each state. Also, the transition and termination conditions for AT states can be set appropriately according to the gameplay (excluding termination due to the execution of the limit processing described later). In addition, AT states may be treated similarly to the bonus states described above, in which case they may be referred to as "pseudo-bonus states," etc.

Furthermore, the duration of the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of plays), as long as the period is appropriately managed (game count management), or by the number of sets, with a predetermined number of games considered as one set (set number management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in tokens) during the AT state (payout management, difference in tokens management). It may also be managed by the number of times notifications affecting token payouts during the AT state (for example, push-order navigation during push-order small wins) are given (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Additionally, the duration of the game granted when transitioning to the AT state and the duration of the game granted when the AT state is extended may be managed using different management methods. Furthermore, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed using the same management method or using different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART State]
In pachislo machine 1, when predetermined transition conditions are met, it is possible to transition to an ART state, which is a combination of the high RT state and the AT state described above (activating the ART state). In other words, the ART state means the AT state that is performed in the high RT state. Therefore, although it differs from the AT state in that at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and control is performed to transition to the high RT state (or to avoid transitioning to the low RT state), the basic control is the same as the AT state (it can also be said that it is synonymous with the AT state if it transitions to the high RT state (or avoids transitioning to the low RT state) as a result of notifying the player of information on stopping operations that are advantageous to the player). When the transition conditions for the ART state are met, it may first transition to the AT state and then to the high RT state to transition to the ART state, or it may transition to the ART state by simultaneously (or nearly simultaneously) transitioning to the high RT state and the AT state.

[4-5-5. Other game conditions]
Furthermore, in pachislo machine 1, it is also possible to provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, the various modes during the advantageous section described later (see Figures 5 and 6) are also states in which the player plays the game, and since they can change the degree of advantage in whether or not to transition to the AT state as a pseudo-bonus state, they can be considered as game states. Also, from a similar perspective, for example, game states can be provided that can change the degree of advantage in whether or not to transition to a bonus state. For example, when a bonus role has been won (carried over), it is possible to configure the machine so that the degree of advantage for the player can be changed by providing a game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus role is more likely to be displayed by stop control, and a game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus role is relatively less likely to be displayed. Furthermore, for example, the game can be configured to vary the player's advantage by providing two game states: one in which a bonus role is won with a predetermined probability (making it easier to win), and another in which the bonus role is won with a lower probability than that predetermined probability (making it relatively harder to win).

Furthermore, the following methods can be employed to vary the degree of advantage in transitioning to the AT state (including whether or not the duration of the AT state is extended; the same applies hereinafter). For example, a "specific role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for this specific role will vary depending on the player's stopping operation (this may be the timing of the stopping operation, the order of pressing buttons, or a combination of these) (for example, if the stopping operation is appropriate (correct), 8 medals are paid out; if it is inappropriate (incorrect), 1 medal is paid out or no medal is paid out).

Furthermore, if a specific winning combination is achieved in a particular game state, and eight coins are paid out, the decision on whether or not to change the degree of advantage in transitioning to the AT state to a more favorable one (including the decision on whether or not to directly transition to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the duration of the AT state; hereinafter referred to as "favorable decision") will not be made. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, the favorable decision will be made in the current game. Alternatively, if a specific winning combination is achieved in the aforementioned specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, the favorable decision will be made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, the favorable decision will not be made in the current game.

Thus, the game can be configured such that, depending on the player's playing method, a favorable outcome may be determined for the current game, or it may not be determined (or its occurrence may be restricted). It should be noted that the player may change between games, and if such restrictions continue into subsequent games, the next player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not carried over to subsequent games. Such restrictions are sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Gaming Section]
In pachislo machine 1, in order to suppress excessive gambling tendencies, it is possible to set up various game sections as states in which the game is played using a concept different from the game states described above. An example of such a game section is described below. The game section is broadly composed of a non-advantageous section and an advantaged section.

(Non-advantageous period)
The non-advantageous period is defined as a game period during which it is not possible to notify the player of a stopping operation that is advantageous to the player, and it meets the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and may be modified accordingly if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) It is not possible to provide the player with information on a stop operation that is advantageous to them (for example, a button press order navigation). Therefore, it is not possible to control the machine to the AT state or ART state as described above.
(2) If the setting value is changed (setting change), or if the initialization conditions such as "RAM abnormality" described below are met, a non-advantageous period will be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described below is performed in the advantageous section (i.e., when a predetermined value that is updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game counter or the advantageous section payout counter described below) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins)), the non-advantageous section is set as the initial state. In addition, by referring to the predetermined value, if the predetermined value has reached a specific updated value even before it reaches the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set as a condition. Furthermore, when a predetermined termination condition is met and termination is determined during the advantageous section (for example, when the system is configured to hold an advantageous section termination lottery and the player wins the lottery), the non-advantageous section may be set as a condition.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, processing to determine whether or not to transition to the advantageous section) is only possible if it refers to the determined internal winning combination, and it is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) or the number of games played in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before the transition). In addition, the determined internal winning combination can be determined by referring to data that directly indicates the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or by referring to data that indirectly indicates the internal winning combination, such as sub-flags (where multiple combinations are treated as one judgment target data) generated or converted from the internal winning combination data.
(5) The non-advantageous period is basically state 1, and it is not possible to set multiple states within the non-advantageous period. For example, it is not possible to set the non-advantageous period after the end of the advantageous period as non-advantageous period A and the non-advantageous period after the setting change as non-advantageous period B, or to set them as different states.

(Advantageous period)
The advantageous period is defined as a game period during which the player can be notified of a stopping operation that is advantageous to them, and it meets the following requirements. Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and may be modified as appropriate if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened.

(1) The machine can notify the player of a stop operation that is advantageous to them (for example, a button press order navigation). Therefore, it can control the machine to the AT state or ART state as described above.
(2) If the setting value is changed (setting change), or if the initialization conditions such as "RAM abnormality" described below are met, it is not possible to set the advantageous period as the initial state.
(3) If the limit processing described below is executed during the advantageous period, the advantageous period must be terminated.
(4) In the advantageous period, processing related to the advantageous period (for example, processing to determine whether or not to transition the game state (mode) during the advantageous period, or whether or not to extend a specific game state (mode)) can refer not only to the determined internal winning combination, but also to the derived result display (combination of symbols) and various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the number of games played during the advantageous period. Other examples of various parameters that can be referenced include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters mentioned above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of stopping any of the reels, or the order in which to press the buttons.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous period. For example, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that makes it easy to transition to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when the player performs a stop operation according to the notification can be set. In addition, depending on the gameplay, states such as a CZ pre-announcement state, which is set as a waiting state until the player actually transitions to the CZ state in response to the decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, and in which a premonition performance that suggests the transition to the CZ state may be performed, or an AT pre-announcement state, which is set as a waiting state until the player actually transitions to the AT state in response to the decision to transition to the AT state in the normal state or CZ state, and in which a premonition performance that suggests the transition to the AT state may be performed, can also be set.
(6) The system can notify the user that they are in a favorable section by lighting up a section lamp (status indicator) that can indicate whether they are in a non-favorable section or a favorable section (if the section lamp is off, it indicates that they are in a non-favorable section). The timing of when the section lamp lights up can be set to a somewhat arbitrary timing, as described above. Basically, it may be set to start lighting up when transitioning from a non-favorable section to a favorable section and continue lighting up until transitioning to a non-favorable section, or it may be set so that the lamp does not start lighting up when transitioning from a non-favorable section to a favorable section (when the favorable section has started) but the transitioned favorable section is in a normal state, and only starts lighting up when the AT state is first entered. If the transitioned favorable section is in an AT state, the lamp should start lighting up from that point.

[4-7. Limiter]
In pachislo machine 1, in order to prevent excessive gambling tendencies caused by the advantageous period continuing for too long, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period during which the advantageous period continues consecutively. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". In this embodiment, the termination of the advantageous period by such a limiter is described as the execution of limit processing or the operation of the limiter. An example of such a limiter is described below.

(Game count limiter)
The game count limiter is configured to execute a limit process when the number of games (plays) during the advantageous period reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous period game count counter, described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous period and adds 1 to the count each time a game is played. Then, based on the value of the advantageous period game count counter reaching a predetermined value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous period is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-advantageous period (for example, even if there is still time remaining in the AT state). Note that the number of games at which the game count limiter is activated can be set to any number of games as long as it is less than or equal to the upper limit of "1500". Furthermore, if the requirements for such a game count limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. It is also possible to gradually suppress the gambling aspect according to the number of games played during the advantageous period.

(Payout limiter)
The payout limiter is configured to execute a limit process when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous period payout counter, described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous period and adds the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals paid out). Then, based on the value of the advantageous period payout counter reaching a predetermined value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous period is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-advantageous period (for example, even if there is still time remaining in the AT state). The payout number at which the payout limiter is activated can be set to any payout number as long as it is less than or equal to the upper limit of "2400" medals. Furthermore, if the requirements for such a payout limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. It is also possible to gradually suppress the gambling aspect according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period.

Furthermore, for example, the advantageous period payout counter described later may be configured to count the increase from the most recent lowest point, using the point where the absolute value of the number of medals decreased the most since the start of the advantageous period as the lowest point (i.e., subtracting the count if there were no payouts). In other words, the payout limiter can be configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when a maximum of 2400 medals have been paid out from the point when the number of medals increases during the advantageous period (for example, when the AT state begins). Also, for example, the advantageous period payout counter described later may simply count the actual payout (i.e., the payout without subtracting the number of bets) instead of the net increase mentioned above.

Furthermore, pachislo machine 1 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous period using only the game count limiter, using only the payout limiter, or using both the game count limiter and the payout limiter. When using both limiters, it is desirable to terminate the advantageous period when the activation conditions of either limiter are met after the advantageous period has started.

Furthermore, the types of limiters are not limited to the game count limiter and payout limiter mentioned above. For example, a navigation count limiter may be implemented, which executes a limit process when the number of navigations for specific button press combinations during AT mode (i.e., the number of times information regarding advantageous stop operations for combinations related to medal payouts is provided to the player) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 400 times). In other words, as long as the element of chance can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External Signals]
As described above, pachislo machine 1 is designed to output multiple types of external signals externally. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a bonus state begins and turned off when the bonus state ends, the external data display can also perform bonus state effects in conjunction with this. Also, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a BB state begins and turned off when the BB state ends, and external signal 2 is turned on when an MB state begins and turned off when the MB state ends, the external data display can not only perform the bonus state effects described above, but also count the number of bonuses by type.

Furthermore, for example, by turning on external signal 1 based on the start of the AT state and turning off external signal 1 based on the end of the AT state, the external data display can also perform synchronized AT state effects. Also, for example, by turning on external signal 1 based on the start of a predetermined AT state and turning off external signal 1 based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and turning on external signal 2 based on the start of a specific AT state and turning off external signal 2 based on the end of a specific AT state, the external data display can not only perform the aforementioned AT state effects but also count the number of ATs by type.

Furthermore, for example, if the AT state is configured as an AT state with set count management, and external signal 1 is turned ON based on the start of the first set of AT states, and external signal 2 is turned ON each time a set starts for the second set and beyond, the number of initial AT state wins and the number of AT state extensions can be counted on the external data display unit. The timing for turning each external signal ON and OFF can be set as appropriate. In other words, as long as the situation is appropriately recognized by the external data display unit or hall computer, the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, the period from the OFF state to the ON state and then back to the OFF state can be set to various conditions such as a predetermined time, during one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. Commands]
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 is designed to transmit multiple types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. However, in the pachislo machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other; communication is required to be unidirectional, from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to transmit information (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200 in a timely manner to report changes in the state of the pachislo machine 1. An example of such a command is described below.

The main control circuit 100 sends an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting value, game state, etc. Furthermore, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is sent. The medal insertion command includes parameters that specify the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is sent. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning combination, game state, etc. Furthermore, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is sent. The lock command includes parameters that specify the content of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins, a reel rotation start command is sent. The reel rotation start command includes parameters that specify that the reel rotation has begun, etc.

Furthermore, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command consists of parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position in which that reel stops. Also, for example, when all reels have stopped and the displaying role (winning activation flag) is determined, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command consists of parameters that specify the type of displaying role and the content of the bonus to be awarded. Also, for example, when a favorable period begins, a favorable period start command is sent. The favorable period start command consists of parameters that specify the start of a favorable period and the mode (game state). Also, for example, when a favorable period ends, a favorable period end command is sent. The favorable period end command consists of parameters that specify the end of a favorable period and the reason for its termination. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command consists of parameters that specify the number of tokens to be returned. Note that these are merely examples; other commands can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be omitted.

[4-10. Performance]
As described above, pachislo machine 1 is capable of executing various effects using various effects devices in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the intended gameplay. An example of such an effect is described below.

[4-10-1. Main Stage Production]
In pachislo machine 1, the main control circuit 100 (main side) can control, for example, the following effects. As mentioned above, pachislo machine 1 is capable of notifying information about stop operations via an instruction monitor, and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In pachislo machine 1, if predetermined execution conditions are met, a feature may be displayed that halts the game's progress for a predetermined period (invalidating the player's game operations for a predetermined period). Such a feature is called a "lock feature" (or simply "lock"), or a "freeze feature" (or simply "freeze"), etc. It is also possible to configure the machine so that such lock features do not occur, or to configure it so that multiple types of lock features can be displayed.

Furthermore, the game operations to be invalidated may include, for example, start operations, stop operations, or other operations. For example, if start operations are invalidated for a predetermined period, the game will be halted for a predetermined period after all stop operations have been performed. Similarly, if stop operations are invalidated for a predetermined period, the game will be halted for a predetermined period after the start operation has been performed. Additionally, if multiple types of lock effects are provided, the duration of the game's suspension (the period during which the player's game operations are invalidated) and the types of game operations to be invalidated should be set for each lock effect.

(Reel animation)
In pachislo machine 1, when predetermined execution conditions are met, the following effects may be performed during the execution of the aforementioned lock effect: the effects display patterns of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (including not only the variation display patterns but also combinations with the stop display patterns). Such effects are referred to as "reel effects," as well as "symbol effects," etc. It is also possible to configure the machine so that such reel effects do not occur, or to configure it so that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. Furthermore, when referring to "performing (executing) the lock effect," this includes both cases where reel effects occur and cases where they do not.

Reel effects, in essence, are created by rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel (3L, 3C, 3R) without the player's input during a period when the player's gameplay is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to set operation patterns for these effects without considering rotation speed or maximum number of sliding frames. Furthermore, by setting multiple operation patterns, multiple types of reel effects can be provided. Combining multiple types of reel effects with multiple types of lock effects allows for an even wider variety of effect patterns. Note that the reel effects may use any one of the three reels (3L, 3C, 3R), any two, or all three.

(Simulated game)
In pachislo machine 1, if predetermined execution conditions are met, a simulated game may be played during the execution of the aforementioned lock effect. Such an effect is called a "simulated game." It is also possible to configure the machine so that such a simulated game does not occur, or so that multiple types of simulated games can be played. Furthermore, when referring to "performing (executing) the lock effect," this includes both cases where a simulated game is played and cases where it is not.

In essence, simulated gameplay involves simulating player input during a period when player input is disabled, thereby generating visual effects by rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In other words, it further enhances the reel effects by incorporating player input. It should be noted that buttons such as the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the payout button 9 are primarily intended for gameplay and should not be used for any other purpose. However, in simulated gameplay, it is permitted to accept these inputs, provided that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistaking the simulation for actual gameplay.

Here, we will explain the flow of a simulated game using an example. A simulated game proceeds as follows:
(1) The player's actual start operation (the execution conditions are met here and the simulated game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a simulated manner (during simulated gameplay)
(3) The machine accepts a stop command in a simulated manner, causing each reel to temporarily stop (during simulated gameplay).
(4) After a random delay process, each reel actually starts spinning (the simulated game ends and the actual game begins).

Furthermore, random delay processing is a process that corrects the situation described in (3) above, where, for example, if a specific pattern is displayed in a specific order, and the reels start rotating normally in the situation described in (4) above, it may become easier for the player to stop the reels using the specific pattern as a guide (effectively assisting in so-called "eye-stopping"). This process involves randomly generating a delay period for each reel before starting rotation (such a delay period is also called a "repositioning period"). Additionally, in situations (3) and (4) above, when the reels are temporarily stopped, it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always kept below a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) to alternately change the reels between forward and reverse directions, so as not to be mistaken for a complete stop.

One of the measures described above is, for example, if any combination of symbols temporarily stops in the situation described in (3) above (when the third reel temporarily stops and all reels temporarily stop), then each reel may be made to vibrate slightly up and down (oscillate) until the random delay processing begins in the situation described in (4) above. However, as long as the phase signal changes in less than the predetermined time described above, such oscillation may be omitted when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops.

Furthermore, one of the measures mentioned above is to provide a simulated game lamp to indicate that a simulated game is in progress, and to illuminate the simulated game lamp from the time the simulated game starts in the situation described in (1) above until the random delay processing starts in the situation described in (4) above. It is desirable that the simulated game lamp be installed above the control unit that receives the player's game operations and in a position where it can be seen during gameplay. It is also desirable that the simulated game lamp be a separate lamp not used for any other purpose, and that the entire display area of the simulated game lamp be covered with a single-color border. Furthermore, it is desirable that the display area of the simulated game lamp, including the explanatory part of the simulated game lamp, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeding 10 mm and a surface area exceeding 642 square mm). Furthermore, the explanatory section for the simulated game lamp should preferably contain wording that clearly indicates that the lamp is used to signal that a simulated game is in progress (for example, wording such as "FREEPLAY," "Simulated Game Performance in Progress," or "Automatic Reel Performance in Progress"). It is also desirable that such wording occupies at least one-third of the surface area. The simulated game lamp may be controlled by either the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200.

Furthermore, one of the measures mentioned above is to display a "simulated game in progress" indicator on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220 (or both) from the time the simulated game starts in the situation described in (1) above until the random delay processing starts in the situation described in (4) above. It is desirable that the "simulated game in progress" indicator be displayed above the control unit that receives the player's game operations and in a position that is visible during gameplay (in this embodiment, both the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 are above the control unit, so either can be used). It is also desirable that the display range of the "simulated game in progress" indicator, including its explanatory portion, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm if the display screen is less than 7 inches, or the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen if the display screen is 7 inches or larger). Furthermore, the explanatory text for the "Simulated Game" display should ideally be clearly identifiable as an indication that a simulated game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY," "Simulated Game Performance," or "Automatic Reel Performance"), and should be large enough for the player to read without being obscured.

Furthermore, for example, during simulated gameplay (for instance, from the start of simulated gameplay in situation (1) above until the start of random delay processing in situation (4) above), it is desirable to configure the instruction monitor so that information about stopping operations is not displayed (if it is necessary to display information about stopping operations on the instruction monitor during the game, the display should be started at the timing when random delay processing begins). This further reduces the likelihood of the player mistakenly believing that they are playing an actual game while playing a simulated game. Note that if any of the above measures are taken, during simulated gameplay, the sub-display devices (for example, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220) may be configured to display information about stopping operations. Similarly, during simulated gameplay, the sub-display devices may perform effects that correspond to the results of the simulated game (linked to the simulated game operations).

Furthermore, during actual gameplay, test signals corresponding to the player's game operations or the state in which such game operations become possible are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine. However, during simulated gameplay, no test signals corresponding to the player's simulated game operations or the state in which such simulated game operations become possible are output. Therefore, during simulated gameplay, a test signal (simulated game signal) may be output to allow the test machine to recognize that simulated gameplay is in progress. The first interface board 301 for the test machine may, upon receiving a simulated game signal from the main control board 71, output a signal for controlling the progress of the simulated game to the main control board 71, thereby allowing the main control board 71 to proceed with the simulated game (i.e., the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be given a simulated game progression function). Also, if the first interface board 301 for the test machine is given such a simulated game progression function, a switch to toggle this function on and off may be provided. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the simulated gameplay effects during the certification test (trial firing test) of pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In pachislo machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control, for example, the following effects can be performed. As mentioned above, pachislo machine 1 is capable of notifying information about stop operations via the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In pachislo machine 1, if predetermined execution conditions are met, a special effect may occur that concludes within the current game (i.e., ends in one game). Such effects are called "normal effects," or sometimes "single-shot effects." It is also possible to configure the machine so that such normal effects do not occur, or to configure it so that multiple types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In pachislo machine 1, if predetermined execution conditions are met, a continuous sequence of events (i.e., continuing for multiple games) can be performed over multiple gameplay rounds. Such a sequence of events is called a "continuous sequence of events," or sometimes a "continuation sequence of events." It is also possible to configure the machine so that such continuous sequences do not occur, or to configure it so that multiple types of continuous sequences can be performed.

(Operation-linked effects)
In pachislo machine 1, when predetermined execution conditions are met, it is possible to perform effects that change in response to the player's actions. Such effects are called "operation-linked effects," as well as "button effects," etc. It is also possible to configure the machine so that such operation-linked effects do not occur, or to configure it so that multiple types of operation-linked effects can occur. Furthermore, operation-linked effects can be configured as normal effects or as continuous effects. In addition, the effects operations can include not only operations on the effect buttons but also various game operations.

Furthermore, the various effects described above can be used for a variety of purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or inform about settings, internal winning combinations, game state, game intervals, bonus content, and the time until bonuses are awarded. They can also be used to suggest or inform about the degree of advantage in these areas. These uses are merely examples.

(Other production elements)
In pachislo machine 1, effects other than those described above can also be displayed. For example, in addition to the uses described above, various notifications to players or amusement parlors (e.g., notifications to prevent excessive gambling, notifications to prevent lost items, error status notifications, demo status notifications, etc.) are also included in the broad sense of effects. For example, a notification to prevent excessive gambling may be issued when the advantageous period ends, indicating that the machine is vacant. Similarly, a notification to prevent lost items may be issued when the advantageous period ends or when a settlement operation is performed, indicating that the machine is vacant.

[5. The First Gaming Machine]
Next, with reference to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications related to the gameplay of the pachislo machine 1 will be described as the "first game machine." It should be noted that some or all of the specifications and functions described as the first game machine in this embodiment can be applied to other game machines described in this embodiment, and conversely, some or all of the specifications and functions described as other game machines in this embodiment can be applied to the first game machine described in this embodiment. In other words, the invention according to this embodiment can be formed by appropriately combining these.

First, in the first gaming machine, the number of active lines is defined as only one line, the "center line" mentioned above. Furthermore, the first gaming machine has two game states: a non-bonus state and a bonus state. The non-bonus state consists of three states: between 2BB flags where "F_2BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in a 2-coin bet state; hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "2BB") is carried over; between 3BB flags where "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won in a 3-coin bet state; hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over; and between non-flags where no bonus role has been won (not carried over). The bonus state consists of two states: the 2BB state, which is entered when a combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed, and the 3BB state, which is entered when a combination of symbols related to 3BB is displayed.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play with two tokens bet (two-token bet state) and three tokens bet (three-token bet state). Note that "betting" includes any of the following: the player inserting two or three tokens into the token slot 5 for gameplay; the player betting two or three tokens from the credits by operating the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b; and the automatic betting of two or three tokens upon winning a replay.

[5-1. Gameplay of the first amusement machine]
Next, the gameplay flow in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to Figures 5 to 8. Figure 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of game states in the non-advantageous and advantageous sections of the first gaming machine, Figure 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of each mode in the first gaming machine, and Figures 7 and 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays is broadly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. The advantageous section is further divided into a performance section (advantageous section - normal gameplay) and an increase section (advantageous section - pseudo-bonus). The non-advantageous section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information on advantageous stopping operations is not announced to the player, making it a disadvantageous game state for the player. The performance section is also a game state (non-AT state) in which information on advantageous stopping operations is not announced to the player, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a disadvantageous game state for the player. However, as will be described later, it differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transitions occur.

In other words, the non-advantageous section is a control state that is controlled as the initial state when gameplay in the advantageous section ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the machine is at its factory default settings. The performance section is a control state that allows the expectation of transitioning to (granting) an increase section to be varied by mode transitions, etc., and is the normal state in which the player plays the game as usual.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information on advantageous stopping operations is notified to the player, making it a game state that is advantageous to the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is advantageous for the player as they can increase their medal count. Both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and transitioning between these sections constitutes a series of advantageous sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in Figure 7(a), a non-advantageous-period sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see Figure 10, described later) during the non-advantageous-period section. The sub-flag is information that allows for the identification of groups of internal winning combinations that play similar roles (such as whether they are a target combination for drawing and their winning probability) in various draws related to gameplay (various processes related to the advantageous-period section) performed by the main control circuit 100, by assigning the same information to them. This eliminates the need to create separate data tables for each internal winning combination, thereby compressing the amount of data and avoiding strain on the main ROM 102's capacity. During the non-advantageous-period section, a draw is performed using this non-advantageous-period sub-flag.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Replay Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is one of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), or "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Confirmed Combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is one of "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Furthermore, it is possible to configure the system so that the winning sub-flag and the entry sub-flag can be determined in the non-advantageous section, similar to the advantageous section. Also, the correspondence between these is not limited to the one described above.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, as shown in Figure 7(a), during the advantageous period, a sub-flag for winning during the advantageous period is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see Figure 10 described later). In addition, during the advantageous period, a sub-flag for entering the advantageous period is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of displayed symbols. During the advantageous period, a lottery is conducted using these sub-flags for winning during the advantageous period and the sub-flags for entering the advantageous period.

The sub-flag "Bell" during the advantageous section win is determined when the internal winning combination is one of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "Weak Cherry" during the advantageous section win is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "Watermelon" during the advantageous section win is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "Confirmed Combination" during the advantageous section win is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The sub-flag "Middle Cherry" during the advantageous section win is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Normal Replay 1" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and a combination of symbols for "Diagonal Replay" is displayed (i.e., the winning combination is "Diagonal Replay"). The sub-flag "Normal Replay 2" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and a combination of symbols for "Parallel Replay" is displayed (i.e., the winning combination is "Parallel Replay").

In the first gaming machine, as described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of symbols for "upward-sloping replay" is displayed between 3BB flags, and the combination of symbols for "parallel replay" is displayed between 2BB flags and between non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Normal Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag for entering the advantageous section between 3BB flags, and "Normal Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag for entering the advantageous section between 2BB flags and between non-flags. Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag for entering the advantageous section differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various draws described later (for example, the pseudo-bonus transition draw using the pseudo-bonus transition draw table shown in Figure 7(c) and the mode transition draw using the mode transition draw table shown in Figure 8(f)) is adjusted accordingly.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as an example to explain how the sub-flag changes upon entering the advantageous section depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or 2BB flags. However, the manner in which the sub-flag changes upon entering the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is made different depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or 2BB flags. Therefore, when such a combination is won, the number of medals paid out may not change (or may be changed), but the combination of displayed symbols may be different, thereby determining a different sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section. Then, the degree of advantage in the various draws described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section.

Furthermore, as will be explained later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flags (or non-flags) are involved, if the button press position (stopping timing) is appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon" symbols will be displayed. If the button press position is inappropriate, a missed win will occur and the combination of "Missed Watermelon" symbols will be displayed. Therefore, when such a combination is won, different sub-flags for entering the advantageous section may be determined depending on whether the win was achieved without any missed wins or if a missed win occurred. Then, the degree of advantage in the various draws described later may be adjusted according to the difference in the sub-flags for entering the advantageous section.

Furthermore, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), between the 3BB flags, if the stop operation is performed in a specific manner (this specific manner may be, for example, if the stop operation is performed in a predetermined order (correct button press order), if the button press position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination of these), the combination of "Parallel Replay" symbols will be displayed. If the operation is not performed in the specific manner, the combination of "Upward-Sloping Replay" symbols will be displayed. This will determine different sub-flags for entering the advantageous section. Then, depending on the difference in the sub-flags for entering the advantageous section, the degree of advantage in the various draws described later may be varied.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to make it possible for the final stop display to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the manner of stopping the reels, or any combination of these, and to determine different secondary information according to the different stop display manners, thereby allowing all possible configurations to be applied that allow the degree of advantage to be varied.

Let's return to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. During the non-advantageous section, a lottery for transitioning to the advantageous section is held after each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(b) is referenced to determine the internal winning combination. Based on this internal winning combination, the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined. Then, at a predetermined timing during the game, the transition destination mode is determined according to the non-advantageous section sub-flag. Note that in this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode upon transitioning to the advantageous section is determined (Figure 5, "Advantageous Section Start"), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a transition to a pseudo-bonus is determined (Figure 5, "Advantageous Section Start + Pseudo-Bonus Start"). However, it is also possible to have a specification where a transition to a pseudo-bonus is not determined during the non-advantageous section.

Here, referring to Figure 6, the modes in the first gaming machine will be explained. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which can also be called the game state or control state) that changes the expected probability of transitioning to (granting) an increase section (pseudo-bonus) during the performance section (normal gameplay). During the performance section (normal gameplay), the presence or absence of a pseudo-bonus transition, the maintenance of the advantageous section, or the termination of the advantageous section and transition to a non-advantageous section are determined according to this mode.

The Start Mode is a mode in which players tend to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (performance section). It is a relatively disadvantageous mode, with a relatively low probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus (see Figure 7(c) below), and also a relatively low probability of transitioning to a more advantageous mode (see Figure 8(f) below). Although not shown in the diagram, the Start Mode has a ceiling game count of "965 games." The ceiling game count is used to force a transition to a pseudo-bonus when a certain period of time has passed without a pseudo-bonus. Therefore, a lower ceiling game count is more advantageous to the player, while a higher ceiling game count is more disadvantageous.

Normal Mode A is the mode in which players are most likely to stay while playing, and it is relatively disadvantageous. The probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7(c) below), and the probability of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 8(f) below). In Normal Mode A, the ceiling game count is set to "965 games". Also, in Figure 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo-bonus" refers to the fact that after the pseudo-bonus ends, if the player transitions to either End Mode A or End Mode B (described below), plays for 32 games in that mode without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus, and then transitions to a non-advantageous section, and then selects Normal Mode A when transitioning from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent ceiling game count is "965 games" + the duration of play in End Mode A or End Mode B ("32 games") + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. This is represented here. The same applies to Normal Mode B, Heaven Preparation Mode, and Chance Mode.

Normal Mode B is a mode that players tend to stay in relatively often. While it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than Normal Mode A. The probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7(c) below), and the probability of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 8(f) below). In Normal Mode B, the maximum number of games is set to "965 games".

While the Heaven Preparation Mode has a relatively low probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus (see Figure 7(c) below), the maximum number of games is set at "466 games," and if a pseudo-bonus is triggered, it is guaranteed to transition to Heaven Mode after its completion (see Figure 8(f) below). Therefore, in that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode.

The Chance Mode offers a relatively high probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus (see Figure 7(c) below), and the ceiling game count is set at "222 games," making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the probability of transitioning to Heaven Mode is not high (see Figure 8(f) below).

Ending Mode A is a relatively unfavorable mode that players are likely to remain in if they transition to a pseudo-bonus and do not transition to Heaven Mode (including Heaven Preparation Mode) after its completion. The probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is the lowest in this mode (see Figure 7(c) below), and the probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see Figure 8(f) below). In Ending Mode A, if 32 games are played after the completion of a pseudo-bonus without transitioning to another pseudo-bonus, the favorable section itself ends, and the player transitions to a non-favorable section.

Ending Mode B is a mode that players are likely to remain in if they transition to a pseudo-bonus and do not transition to Heaven Mode (including Heaven Preparation Mode) after its completion. While relatively unfavorable, it is more advantageous than Ending Mode A. The probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7(c) below), and the probability of transitioning to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 8(f) below). In Ending Mode B, similar to Ending Mode A, if 32 games are played after the pseudo-bonus ends without transitioning to another pseudo-bonus, the advantageous section itself ends, and the player transitions to a non-advantageous section. Note that Ending Mode A and Ending Mode B can be collectively referred to as "Ending Modes."

The Guarantee Mode is the mode you enter when Heaven Mode C ends. The probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7(c) below), and the ceiling game count is set at "32 games," making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the probability of transitioning to Heaven Mode is not high (see Figure 8(f) below). In other words, when Heaven Mode C ends, this mode is positioned as a way to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period to prevent a decline in enjoyment.

Heaven Mode A is a mode in which it is expected that pseudo-bonuses will occur in succession (including extensions (additions) if the AT state is designed to continue by making a decision to extend (add) during the AT state; the same applies hereinafter), the probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7(c) below), the number of games to be capped is set to "32 games", and the probability of maintaining the capped mode (Heaven Mode loop rate) is set to a moderate level, making it a relatively advantageous mode. Although not shown in Figure 6, for example, it is possible to set a difference in this capped mode loop rate depending on the setting. For example, when the setting value is odd (1, 3, 5), the capped mode loop rate can be set to about 75%, and when the setting value is even (2, 4, 6), the capped mode loop rate can be set to about 67%, or the setting value can simply be set so that the capped mode loop rate is higher the higher the setting value. The same applies to Heaven Mode B and Heaven Mode C, described later; it is also possible to set a difference in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven Mode B is a mode where consecutive pseudo-bonuses are expected, and the probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7(c) below). The ceiling game count is set at "32 games," and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (Heaven Mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven Mode A.

Heaven Mode C is a mode where consecutive pseudo-bonuses are expected, and the probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7(c) below). The ceiling game count is set at "32 games," and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (Heaven Mode loop rate) is set quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven Mode A and Heaven Mode B. Note that Heaven Mode A, Heaven Mode B, and Heaven Mode C can be collectively referred to as "Heaven Mode."

Please note that the modes described above are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. You can also configure modes other than those described above, or you can choose not to configure some of the modes described above.

Furthermore, while we have described the non-advantageous period as a state with relatively lower advantages compared to the advantageous period, the relationship between the non-advantageous and advantageous periods is not limited to this configuration. For example, it is possible to have specifications such as a higher transition rate to the increase period when in a non-advantageous period than when at least one mode is set in the advantageous period, or a shorter average number of games required to transition to the increase period, or to make the non-advantageous period the easiest to transition to the increase period. This creates an incentive to continue playing even when it is confirmed to be a non-advantageous period, such as after a setting change, thus motivating players to start playing from opening time. Also, even if the period lamp stops lighting up after 32 games following the end of a pseudo-bonus, it is not confirmed that the most unfavorable state is in place, thus motivating players to continue playing. Furthermore, while we have described the performance period as a game state where information on advantageous stopping operations is not announced to the player, it is also possible to have a game state where information on stopping operations is announced, provided it is in a less favorable configuration compared to the increase period (for example, by reducing the frequency of announcements or changing the roles that are announced).

Let's return to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. During the performance section (normal gameplay), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when a win occurs) is performed for each game, referencing the advantageous section win sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) is referenced to determine the internal winning role. Based on this internal winning role, the advantageous section win sub-flag is determined. Then, at a predetermined timing during the game, it is decided whether or not to transition to a pseudo-bonus, according to the advantageous section win sub-flag. In Figure 7(c), "Not a Win" means that the pseudo-bonus will not be transitioned, "Win (Current Game)" means that the pseudo-bonus will be transitioned from the current game, and "Win (Next Game)" means that the pseudo-bonus will be transitioned from the next game.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if a "win (this game)" is determined, the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period at the start of the current game. If a "win (next game)" is determined, the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, after a reel animation ("Red 7 alignment" animation) is performed in which the "Red 7 alignment" animation is displayed in the main display window 4, a pseudo-bonus is started. If it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation in a game in which the "Red 7 alignment" animation has been performed, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) becomes valid again (it may be earlier, but not before the random delay processing described above begins).

During the performance section (normal gameplay), if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (upon winning) determines that the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (upon winning) is conducted. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. This destination mode may include the mode during the pseudo-bonus, or it may be the mode after the pseudo-bonus ends. Furthermore, if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (upon winning) determines that the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus, and the mode transition lottery (upon winning) is conducted, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (upon winning), mode transition lottery (upon winning), and mode transition lottery (upon reaching the ceiling), described later, will not be conducted.

During the performance section (normal gameplay), if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) does not result in a transition to a pseudo-bonus, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is conducted for each game (more specifically, for games where "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won), referencing the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) is referenced to determine the winning combination, and after the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section is determined according to that winning combination, at a predetermined timing during the game (before the start of the next game), it is decided whether or not to transition to a pseudo-bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c), the probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is higher when "Normal Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section than when "Normal Replay 1" is determined. However, this is not the only way to favor "Normal Replay 2" over "Normal Replay 1". For example, if "Normal Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section, a transition to a pseudo-bonus may be determined with a predetermined probability, but if "Normal Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section, a transition to a pseudo-bonus may not be determined.

During the performance section (normal gameplay), if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) determines that the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is conducted. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section. This destination mode may include the mode during the pseudo-bonus, or it may be the mode after the pseudo-bonus has ended. Furthermore, if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) determines that the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus, and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is conducted, the mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) described later will not be conducted.

Furthermore, in the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f), the probability of transitioning to a relatively advantageous mode for the player is higher when "Normal Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section compared to when "Normal Replay 1" is determined. However, this is not the only way to favor "Normal Replay 2" over "Normal Replay 1". For example, when "Normal Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section, it may be possible to determine that transitioning to a relatively advantageous mode for the player is possible with a predetermined probability, but when "Normal Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag upon entering the advantageous section, it may be possible to prevent transitioning to a relatively advantageous mode for the player.

During the performance section (normal gameplay), if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (upon winning) does not result in a transition to a pseudo-bonus, the ceiling game count is updated (either by addition or subtraction). When the ceiling game count reaches the ceiling game count associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to the advantageous section, etc.), a transition to a pseudo-bonus is determined. In this case, it is possible to ensure that a "win (this game)" is always determined, or that a "win (next game)" is always determined. Alternatively, either of these can be determined by a lottery.

During the performance section (normal gameplay), if the game reaches the ceiling game count and it is determined that the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is conducted. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode. This destination mode may include the mode during the pseudo-bonus or the mode after the pseudo-bonus ends.

Furthermore, the processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when a win is achieved) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) are identical except for the type of sub-flag, and can therefore be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow. Similarly, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (when a win is achieved) and the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) are identical except for the type of sub-flag, and can therefore be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.

Furthermore, if we were to not include "Win (Current Game)" as a type of pseudo-bonus win, then at the time the sub-flag for entering the advantageous section is determined, the sub-flag for winning in the advantageous section would already be determined, and the ceiling game count could also be updated. Therefore, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when entering), and the pseudo-bonus transition process upon reaching the ceiling could all be performed in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), the mode transition lottery (when entering), and the mode transition lottery (when reaching the ceiling) could all be performed in a single process.

Let's return to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. As described above, if it is decided to transition to a pseudo-bonus during the performance section (normal gameplay) and the pseudo-bonus begins (in Figure 5, "Pseudo-bonus Start"), the game transitions to the increase section (pseudo-bonus). Also, as described above, if the game is controlled to either End Mode A or End Mode B during the performance section (normal gameplay) and 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus (in Figure 5, "Advantageous Section End (Via End A/B)"), the game transitions to the non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for the limit processing shown in Figure 16 (described later) are met, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated (in Figure 5, "Advantageous Section End (Limit Processing)"), resulting in a transition to the non-advantageous section.

During the increase period (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling reduction lottery is conducted when the pseudo-bonus begins. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in Figure 8(e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to reduce the number of games until the end of the pseudo-bonus, depending on the current mode. In Figure 8(e), "Not a Winner" means that the number of games until the end of the pseudo-bonus will not be reduced, and "Winner (Ceiling Games = 0 Updated)" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, regardless of the mode, the set number of games until the end of the pseudo-bonus will be set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling reduction lottery can be conducted not only when the pseudo-bonus begins, but also with every game played during the pseudo-bonus.

If the ceiling reduction lottery results in a decision not to shorten the ceiling game count, and the pseudo-bonus ends without any 1G consecutive win stocks (described later) being held, the ceiling game count will be set according to the current mode (in the termination mode, it will not be set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but it may be possible to set a provisional ceiling game count at this point), the pseudo-bonus will end (in Figure 5, "Pseudo-bonus ends"), and the game will transition to the performance section (normal gameplay). On the other hand, if the ceiling reduction lottery results in a decision to shorten the ceiling game count, "0 games" will be set as the ceiling game count when the pseudo-bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo-bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo-bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo-bonus started due to reaching the ceiling game count, the mode transition lottery (at ceiling) described above will be performed.

During the increase period (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is conducted for each game (more specifically, in games where "confirmed role" or "middle cherry" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous period). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous period. Note that even if a sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous period other than those mentioned above is determined, the destination mode may also be determined. In this case, in principle, to prevent the destination mode from being a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode, a different mode transition lottery table with different lottery values from the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f) may be referenced.

During the increase period (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is conducted for each game (more specifically, for games where "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is drawn). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous period. In this case, as with the above, in principle, to prevent the destination mode from being one that is relatively less favorable than the current mode, a different mode transition lottery table with different lottery values from the one shown in Figure 8(f) may be referenced.

During the increase period (pseudo-bonus), a 1G consecutive win lottery is held for each game played. Specifically, the 1G consecutive win lottery table shown in Figure 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive win occurs is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous period or the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous period. In Figure 7(d), "Not Winning" means that a 1G consecutive win will not occur, and "Winning (1G consecutive win + 1)" means that one right to generate a 1G consecutive win (1G consecutive win stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive win stock counter is increased by 1). It is possible to stock (store) multiple 1G consecutive win stocks (up to 255) using the 1G consecutive win stock counter. Therefore, it is possible to be granted multiple 1G consecutive win stocks during a single pseudo-bonus. Furthermore, the 1G consecutive win lottery table can be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive win stocks can be granted in a single 1G consecutive win lottery.

When the pseudo-bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive bonus stock counter is 1 or greater (i.e., if you have 1G consecutive bonus stocks), one 1G consecutive bonus stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive bonus stock counter is deducted by 1), and the pseudo-bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo-bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo-bonus starts according to the right of having 1G consecutive bonus stocks, the mode transition lottery mentioned above does not take place. On the other hand, when the pseudo-bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive bonus stock counter is not 1 or greater (i.e., you do not have 1G consecutive bonus stocks), and you have not won the ceiling reduction lottery mentioned above, the ceiling game count is set according to the current mode (in the termination mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but it is also possible to set the ceiling game count provisionally here), the pseudo-bonus ends ("Pseudo-bonus ends" in Figure 5), and the game transitions to the performance section (normal gameplay).

Furthermore, if you win the ceiling reduction lottery and also possess a 1G consecutive win stock, the result of the ceiling reduction lottery may take precedence, and a pseudo-bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed first, followed by a pseudo-bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive win stock. Alternatively, the 1G consecutive win stock may take precedence, and a pseudo-bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive win stock may be executed first, followed by a pseudo-bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction. In the latter case, information that carries over the existence of a ceiling reduction can be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, one example given is a pseudo-bonus that lasts for "55 games" and allows for a maximum of 275 coins to be won, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is not limited to this. For example, the said pseudo-bonus could be configured as a "pseudo-BB (Big Bonus)," and another pseudo-bonus, a "pseudo-RB (Regular Bonus)," could be included that lasts for "22 games" and allows for a maximum of 110 coins to be won. In this case, when it is decided to transition to a pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, when the ceiling is reached, or in the 1G consecutive draw lottery, the type of pseudo-bonus (for example, whether it will be a "pseudo-BB" or a "pseudo-RB") should be determined by a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). Furthermore, since "pseudo-RB" should have a different value from "pseudo-BB" (more specifically, a lower value than "pseudo-BB"), for example, the number of continuous games could be the same as "pseudo-BB," but the bell navigation rate (the probability of being notified of information about stopping operations) could be lowered to create a difference in the maximum number of coins that can be obtained, thus differentiating its value. Also, when starting "pseudo-RB," a reel animation should be displayed in the main display window 4 showing either "BAR" symbols aligned or "Red 7-Red 7-BAR." Moreover, the increase section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can also be configured as an AT state or ART state that allows for changes in the number of continuous games (playing period).

Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the limit process shown in Figure 16 (described later) are met during the pseudo-bonus, the advantageous period will be forcibly terminated (in Figure 5, "End of Advantageous Period Due to Limit Process"), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous period.

Furthermore, the gameplay flow described above for the first gaming machine is based on the premise that the game is played with a 3-coin bet. Therefore, if the game is played with a 2-coin bet, various draws such as those shown in Figures 7(a) to (d), and Figures 8(e) and (f) will not be performed, and the maximum number of games will not be updated. Also, if the game is played with a 2-coin bet during a pseudo-bonus, the game is configured so that the number of medals does not increase in the 2-coin bet state; therefore, the pseudo-bonus period does not constitute a medal increase period. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is generally at a disadvantage when playing with a 2-coin bet.

Here, when the game is played with two coins bet, while the draws and processing related to the advantageous period (AT) (for example, various draws using Figures 7(a) to (d), Figures 8(e) and (f), etc.) and the update of the ceiling game count (for example, the update of the ceiling game count) are not performed, it is desirable that the advantageous period game count counter for the game count limiter and the advantageous period payout counter for the payout limiter mentioned above be updated. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling tendencies by limiting the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous period and the number of coins acquired. If these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, it is possible that the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous period and the number of coins acquired would be exceeded due to the intervention of two-coin bet play, resulting in an inability to appropriately suppress gambling tendencies. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counters be configured to be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the game flow described above is based on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in a bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various draws such as those shown in Figures 7(a) to (d), and Figures 8(e) and (f) are not performed, and the ceiling game count is not updated. Also, if a bonus state is entered during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured to have a lower expected value of medal increase than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the 3-coin bet state in the non-bonus state), so the pseudo-bonus period may not be a period of medal increase. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured in such a way that playing in a bonus state may be disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play with a 3-coin bet between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-coin bet between 2BB flags is described as the "recommended playing state," and other states are described as "not recommended playing states"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus that can only be won with a 2-coin bet, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between 2BB flags is awarded only with a 2-coin bet, and not with a 3-coin bet. Similarly, 3BB is a bonus that can only be won with a 3-coin bet, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between 3BB flags is awarded only with a 3-coin bet, and not with a 2-coin bet. Furthermore, 3BB cannot be won between 2BB flags, and 2BB cannot be won between 3BB flags.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, by triggering a 2BB win (without actually awarding the 2BB) in a 2-coin bet state between non-flag symbols, and then playing with a 3-coin bet state, it becomes possible to play in the recommended game state described above without having to worry about whether or not to award a bonus.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, a ceiling reduction lottery is conducted during the pseudo-bonus round. Looking at the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in Figure 8(e), when the current mode is one of the following modes: Guaranteed Mode, Heaven A Mode, Heaven B Mode, or Heaven C Mode, there is a 1/8 (32/256) probability of winning the ceiling reduction lottery. However, when in any other mode, the ceiling reduction lottery is not won. In other words, in modes where the ceiling game count is "32 games," there is a possibility that this "32 games" will be reduced to "0 games," while in modes where the ceiling game count is greater than that, there is no possibility of the ceiling game count being reduced.

Furthermore, even in modes where the maximum number of games is greater than 32, the probability of the maximum number of games being shortened may be lower than in modes where the maximum number of games is 32 (for example, 1/64).

Furthermore, the methods for shortening the ceiling game count are not limited to those described above. For example, shortening "32 games" to a predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games) can achieve a similar effect. Therefore, the number of games shortened may be further determined when the ceiling shortening lottery is won, or the number of games to be shortened may be predetermined in the ceiling shortening lottery.

Furthermore, the triggers for the ceiling reduction lottery are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, during a pseudo-bonus, the ceiling reduction lottery may be held for each game played. Also, during the advantageous section (normal gameplay), if the current mode is one of the following modes: guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, or heaven C mode, the ceiling reduction lottery may be held for each game played. In these cases, the sub-flag for advantageous section win and the sub-flag for entering the advantageous section should be referenced to determine whether or not the ceiling reduction lottery is won.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive win lottery is conducted during the pseudo-bonus. Looking at the 1G consecutive win lottery table shown in Figure 7(d), it appears that a 1G consecutive win stock may be granted regardless of the current mode. In other words, regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling of "32 games" or not, the right to continue the pseudo-bonus can be granted.

Furthermore, the manner in which these rights are granted is not limited to those described above. For example, in modes where the maximum number of games is "32," the 1G consecutive win lottery may be disabled to allow for a reduction in the maximum number of games, while in modes where the maximum number of games is greater than "32," the 1G consecutive win lottery may be enabled to prevent the game from becoming excessively speculative.

Furthermore, the triggers for the 1G consecutive win lottery are not limited to those mentioned above. For example, the 1G consecutive win lottery may be conducted during advantageous periods (performance periods) other than pseudo-bonuses, and the resulting stocked 1G consecutive wins may be used up in the next pseudo-bonus.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, at the start of a pseudo-bonus or during a pseudo-bonus, if the current mode is Heaven Mode, a special bonus animation is executed with a predetermined probability to suggest that the player is in a favorable state. Therefore, if the special bonus animation is executed, the player can expect that a ceiling reduction lottery will be performed. Furthermore, this special bonus animation may be executed with 100% probability when the ceiling reduction lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus animation is executed at the start of a pseudo-bonus, it can be suggested that the player is at least in Heaven Mode, and furthermore, the player can be expected to have won the ceiling reduction lottery. Furthermore, this special bonus animation may also be executed with a predetermined probability or with 100% probability when the 1G consecutive win lottery is won during a pseudo-bonus. This approach allows for the suggestion of various possibilities, such as (1) Heaven Mode only, (2) Heaven Mode + shortened ceiling win, (3) Heaven Mode + 1G consecutive win, (4) Heaven Mode + shortened ceiling win + 1G consecutive win, or (5) 1G consecutive win only, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, if it is confirmed that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state again within a predetermined period (e.g., 32 games) after the end of an advantageous state (e.g., a pseudo-bonus) (e.g., in the case of Heaven Mode), that period may be further shortened. Therefore, even when the duration of a series of advantageous periods is limited (e.g., when limit processing is performed), it is possible to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game by allowing players to play in a state with the highest possible degree of advantage.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not guaranteed that the advantageous state will be restored within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the termination mode), the advantageous state may be restarted by granting a right (for example, a 1G consecutive win stock). This can increase the player's anticipation and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, if a "confirmed role" is determined as the sub-flag during a winning streak in the advantageous section (i.e., "F_Confirmed Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and if the mode transition lottery results in a transition to Heaven C mode, then a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Note that if the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined during a winning streak in the advantageous section (i.e., "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefits as when a "confirmed role" is determined as the sub-flag during a winning streak. Therefore, when the sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined during a winning streak in the advantageous section, the special lock effect may be made executable in the same way as when a "confirmed role" is determined as the sub-flag during a winning streak.

Here, since the "confirmed role" is a role that also confirms the transition to a pseudo-bonus (see Figure 7(c)), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can recognize that a pseudo-bonus transition and a transition to Heaven C mode have occurred, making it highly engaging for the player. The special lock effect is configured, for example, as an effect that disables game operations (stop operations) for approximately 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this time, special reel effects such as vibration or reverse rotation of each reel may be performed, or special images that are not normally displayed may be shown on the main effect display unit 21. Furthermore, special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, combinations of these can also be used to create the effect. Also, even if game operations are not disabled, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player can decide whether to let the effect run to completion or cancel it midway and continue the game).

However, in the first type of gaming machine, as shown in Figure 16 below, even if the player is in Heaven Mode C, for example, the advantageous period may be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Therefore, it may not be desirable to repeatedly execute the special lock animation described above.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous periods. Specifically, if it is decided to execute the special lock effect for the first time within a series of advantageous periods, the special lock effect will be executed. However, thereafter, even if the same conditions are met within the same series of advantageous periods, the special lock effect will not be executed. As a method, once the special lock effect has been executed, information indicating that has been executed is stored. Thereafter, if this information is stored within the same series of advantageous periods, the decision of whether or not to execute the special lock effect may not be made at all. Alternatively, the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision, even if it indicates execution, may be rewritten to indicate no execution. The stored information should be cleared when the advantageous period ends.

Furthermore, the manner in which the execution of the special lock-out effect is restricted is not limited to those described above. For example, the maximum number of times the special lock-out effect is restricted may be set to "two times" or "three times" instead of "one time." In other words, the execution of the special lock-out effect may be restricted, but the upper limit may be set to multiple times. This can be set appropriately according to the expected value of payouts per special lock-out effect.

Furthermore, the conditions under which the special lock animation is determined are not limited to those described above. That is, while the above describes a mode transition triggered by a "winning combination" and the determination of whether the special lock animation is performed based on the condition that the current mode is Heaven C mode, there are other triggers that can lead to a transition to Heaven C mode (see Figure 8(f)). Therefore, the determination of whether the special lock animation is performed may also be made in these cases, and the execution of the special lock animation may be determined at a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when triggered by a "winning combination," or a different probability).

Furthermore, for example, upon winning a "guaranteed win," a decision may be made as to whether or not a special lock animation will be executed. If it is decided that the special lock animation will be executed, the game may transition to Heaven C mode. In other words, the special lock animation may be executed in response to the decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or the game may transition to Heaven C mode in response to the decision to execute the special lock animation.

Furthermore, for example, the progress of gameplay during the advantageous period may be used as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For instance, when the value of the advantageous period game counter or control game counter (described later) is less than "750," or when the value of the advantageous period payout counter or control payout counter (described later) is less than "1201," the decision on whether or not the special lock effect is executed is made as described above. However, when the value of the advantageous period game counter or control game counter (described later) becomes "750" or greater, or when the value of the advantageous period payout counter or control payout counter (described later) becomes "1201" or greater, the decision on whether or not the special lock effect is executed is not made for subsequent advantageous periods.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, the duration of a series of advantageous periods is limited to a certain period (see Figure 16 below). Furthermore, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) is set multiple times within the same series of advantageous periods, the system is controlled so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not triggered each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high while also preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous periods, the machine is guaranteed to enter an advantageous state (e.g., a pseudo-bonus) upon winning a specific role (e.g., a "guaranteed role"), and control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if this occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous periods, the machine is controlled so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively gambling-oriented while simultaneously preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the first gaming machine is capable of determining secondary information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination (for example, a sub-flag for winning in the advantageous section), as well as secondary information corresponding to the combination of displayed symbols (for example, a sub-flag for entering the advantageous section). Based on the determined secondary information, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operations is reported.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, the expectation of being granted a favorable state can be created not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, thus diversifying the gameplay related to the granting of a favorable state.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination are both managed as common secondary information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in control load and information volume related to granting advantageous states.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if the bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), the first special prize (e.g., 3BB) can be won, while the second special prize (e.g., 2BB) cannot. Also, if the bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), the second special prize can be won, while the first special prize cannot. Additionally, if a specific prize (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is active, a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., "Upward-Sloping Replay") is displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is active, a specific symbol combination (e.g., "Parallel Replay") is displayed (see Figure 15 below).

Furthermore, the first gaming machine is capable of determining different secondary information depending on whether a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed or a specific combination of symbols is displayed. In other words, the first gaming machine can vary the determination regarding the granting of advantageous states depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific winning combination is determined. This allows for increased control load and information volume related to granting advantageous states, while further diversifying the gameplay.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant a favorable state when a specific winning combination is achieved and a specific combination of symbols is displayed.

In this first gaming machine, since both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are symbol combinations related to replay, the same benefit—the activation of replay—is granted regardless of which is displayed.

Furthermore, the manner in which the same benefits are granted is not limited to those described above. For example, a specific role may be configured as a specific minor role related to the granting of game value. When a specific minor role is won, for example, in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined symbols (a combination of symbols related to the granting of game value equivalent to "upward-sloping replay") that grants one game value (this value is arbitrary and may be any other value less than or equal to the bet game value, or a value exceeding the bet game value) may be displayed. In the second special permission state, a combination of specific symbols (a combination of symbols related to the granting of game value equivalent to "parallel replay") that grants the same number of game values as when the predetermined symbol combination was displayed may be displayed.

Furthermore, both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination may be configured as "losing" symbol combinations (however, in order to determine whether or not a favorable state is granted, the symbol combinations must be identifiable as being different from purely "losing" cases). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, the decision regarding the granting of advantageous states can be varied depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific role is determined. This allows for diversification of gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and information volume related to granting advantageous states. Furthermore, since the same benefits are granted regardless of the special permission state when a specific role is determined, it is possible to prevent players from suffering direct disadvantages even when gameplay is varied.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is achieved, or when the second special permission state is in effect, the machine may be configured to display a specific combination of symbols when a specific stopping operation is performed, but to prevent the display of the specific combination of symbols when the stopping operation is not performed in a specific manner.

Furthermore, it may be possible to determine whether or not to grant a favorable state when a specific winning combination is achieved and a specific combination of symbols is displayed. When a specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it may be possible to differentiate the degree of favorability regarding the granting of the favorable state depending on whether or not the specific combination of symbols is displayed.

Furthermore, if a specific winning combination is achieved, and the machine is in the first special permission state, the machine may display a predetermined combination of symbols regardless of the stopping operation method. If the machine is in the second special permission state, it may display a specific combination of symbols when the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner, and display a predetermined combination of symbols when the stopping operation is not performed in a specific manner.

In this case, the specific winning combination can be configured such that, on at least one reel, a specific symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed at the correct position" or "pressed at the correct position"), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed at the incorrect position" or "pressed at the incorrect position"). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of a favorable state to be varied based on the player's stop operation (and its timing), thus encouraging the player to concentrate more on the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, specific roles can also be configured as specific minor roles. In this case, at least one reel can be configured such that when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (pressed at position ○), a specific symbol combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are awarded, and when the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate (pressed at position ×), a predetermined symbol combination is displayed and a specific number of game values are awarded. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same bonus). Also, the predetermined number may be awarded with a greater game value than the specific number. Also, the predetermined number may be awarded with a less game value than the specific number. In addition, at least one of the specific symbol combinations and the predetermined symbol combinations may be the symbol combination when a miss occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". This allows not only to vary the degree of advantage granted based on the timing of the player's stop operation, but also to change the content of the direct benefits. This encourages players to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific winning combination, the timing for appropriate stopping operations becomes limited. Therefore, it is desirable to have multiple specific winning combinations with different timings for appropriate stopping operations. For example, on a single reel, there may be a first specific winning combination where, when the stopping operation is performed at the first timing, the appropriate stopping operation is performed and the specific symbol combination is displayed, but when the stopping operation is performed at any other timing, the appropriate stopping operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed; a second specific winning combination where, when the stopping operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stopping operation is performed and the specific symbol combination is displayed, but when the stopping operation is performed at any other timing, the appropriate stopping operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed; and a third specific winning combination where, when the stopping operation is performed at a third timing different from the first and second timings, the appropriate stopping operation is performed and the specific symbol combination is displayed, but when the stopping operation is performed at any other timing, the appropriate stopping operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed. These should all be designed to have the same winning probability.

Furthermore, in this case, the specific winning combination can be configured such that a specific symbol combination is displayed when the batting order is correct (correct button press order), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the batting order is incorrect (incorrect button press order). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of a favorable state to be varied based on the player's stopping operation (procedure), thus encouraging the player to concentrate more on the game and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, specific roles can also be configured as specific minor roles. In this case, when the batting order is correct (correct button press order), a specific symbol combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are awarded. When the batting order is incorrect (incorrect button press order), a predetermined symbol combination is displayed and a specific number of game values are awarded. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same bonus). Alternatively, the predetermined number may award a greater game value than the specific number. Alternatively, the predetermined number may award a less game value than the specific number. In addition, at least one of the specific symbol combinations and the predetermined symbol combinations may be the symbol combination when a miss occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". This allows not only to change the degree of advantage regarding the awarding of advantageous states due to the player's stopping operation (procedure), but also to change the content of direct bonuses. As a result, players will be able to concentrate more on the game, the gameplay will be further diversified, and the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific winning combination, the appropriate batting order is limited. Therefore, it is desirable to have multiple specific winning combinations that result in different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first specific winning combination could be provided where, when the left reel is stopped first, the appropriate stopping operation is performed and a specific symbol combination is displayed, but when the middle or right reel is stopped first, the appropriate stopping operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed; a second specific winning combination could be provided where, when the middle reel is stopped first, the appropriate stopping operation is performed and a specific symbol combination is displayed, but when the left or right reel is stopped first, the appropriate stopping operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed; and a third specific winning combination could be provided where, when the right reel is stopped first, the appropriate stopping operation is performed and a specific symbol combination is displayed, but when the left or middle reel is stopped first, the appropriate stopping operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed. These should all be designed to have the same probability of winning.

Up to this point, we have described how, in a unit game where a specific role is won, the stopping operation method (at least one or both of the timing and order of the stopping operation) can change the transition determination process from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, and the determination process regarding the granting of an advantageous state in the advantageous section (including pseudo-bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processes that change the degree of advantage of the game situation in the advantageous section). Among such changes, those that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (or may result in disadvantage) can be considered the aforementioned penalties. Therefore, when such changes occur, the system may be configured to generate an optional visual effect (warning notification) to alert the player.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is achieved, the likelihood of being granted an advantageous state is higher when a specific combination of symbols is displayed than when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed. In other words, assuming a three-coin bet, the second special permission state (for example, between two BB flags) is more favorable in granting an advantageous state than the first special permission state (for example, between three BB flags).

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined role (for example, "Push Order Bell B" described later) is won, if the first special permission state is active, the combination of symbols awarded (for example, a combination of symbols that pays out 8 coins) is displayed regardless of the order of pressing the buttons. However, in the second special permission state, if the button pressing order is the predefined correct order, the combination of symbols awarded is displayed. If the button pressing order is not the predefined correct order, the combination of symbols awarded is not displayed, resulting in a missed opportunity with no game value awarded, or a combination of symbols that awards less game value than the combination of symbols awarded would have been displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that pays out 1 coin). In other words, without considering the operation of the advantageous state, the first special permission state is a state in which game value is awarded more favorably than in the second special permission state.

In other words, even if a player is in a non-recommended playing state, if they play with a 3-coin bet between 3BB flags, the probability of being granted an advantageous state is not favored, but the probability of gaining game value when the advantageous state is not active is favored. Therefore, the difference in the slope value between when the advantageous state is active and when it is not is relatively small, allowing the player to continue playing. This state, where the possibility of the player rapidly increasing game value is reduced, but the player's game value is less likely to decrease, can be defined as a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays under recommended conditions, the probability of being granted an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of gaining game value when the advantageous state is not active is not favored. Therefore, the difference in the slope value between when the advantageous state is active and when it is not is relatively large. This state, where the possibility of a player rapidly increasing their game value is high, but the player's game value is also likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "volatile state."

Here, the methods for creating the two states, stable and volatile, are not limited to those described above. For example, in the "stable state," the probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is increased in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "volatile state," while the probability of transitioning to Heaven Mode in the mode transition lottery described above is decreased compared to the "volatile state." Similarly, in the "volatile state," the probability of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is decreased in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery described above compared to the "stable state," while the probability of transitioning to Heaven Mode in the mode transition lottery described above is increased compared to the "stable state." In this way, in the "stable state," it is easy to hit a pseudo-bonus initially, but difficult to achieve consecutive wins. In the "volatile state," it is possible to create a state where it is difficult to hit a pseudo-bonus initially, but easy to achieve consecutive wins. Regarding the stopping control of predetermined roles, as described above, it may vary between the 2BB flag and the 3BB flag, or it may be different (i.e., no preferential treatment between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to Figure 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained. Figure 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table for the first gaming machine. As shown in Figure 9, in the first gaming machine, 10 types of symbols—"Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Red Blank", "Yellow Blank", "White Blank 1", and "White Blank 2"—are arranged in the positions shown in Figure 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In addition, as shown in the symbol code table, each symbol is assigned a symbol code from 1 to 10.

[5-3. Internal Winning Combination of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to Figures 10 to 15. Figure 10 is a diagram showing an example of the internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Figures 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Figure 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stop operation patterns, and display combinations of the first gaming machine. Specifically, the following will explain the types of internal winning combinations that are drawn in the first gaming machine, and which combination of symbols (which can also be called display combinations, winning combinations, stop display patterns, display results, etc.) is displayed depending on the stop operation pattern (i.e., the order of play and the timing of the stop operation) when a winning combination is achieved.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process described later (see Figure 26), each internal winning combination shown in Figure 10 is drawn with the probability shown in Figure 10 (draw value / probability denominator: 65536). The combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is drawn are as shown in "Corresponding Symbol Combinations" in Figure 10. Furthermore, in Figures 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a minor win.

"F_2BB" is configured to be an internal winning combination when played with a 2-coin bet during a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flag states), but not when played with a 3-coin bet. In a game where "F_2BB" is won with a 2-coin bet, or in a game where there is a "miss" between 2BB flags, if the button press position is ○ on each reel, "BB01" will be displayed, and the game will transition to the 2BB state (a bonus state based on 2BB). On the other hand, "BB01" will never be displayed in a 3-coin bet state, even between 2BB flags.

"F_3BB" is configured to be an internal winning combination when played with a 3-coin bet during a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flag states), but not when played with a 2-coin bet. In a game where "F_3BB" is won with a 3-coin bet, or in a game where there is a "miss" between 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the button press position is ○ for each reel, and the game transitions to the 3BB state (a bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, "BB02" will never be displayed in a 2-coin bet state, even between 3BB flags.

In the 2BB and 3BB states, the draw value in the "Bonus State" column in Figure 10 is referenced to determine the internal winning combination (only 3-coin bets are allowed to start the game). During the 2BB and 3BB states, the game is always controlled to be in the RB state (RB state), which is a special first-class bonus feature. The RB state is controlled to terminate and then reactivate after two winning combinations or two games have been played. Furthermore, in the first game machine, the termination condition for the 2BB state is defined as the payout of more than one coin in the 2BB state, and the termination condition for the 3BB state is defined as the payout of more than 176 coins in the 3BB state.

Here, when the 2BB state or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when transitioning to the bonus state (since mode transitions do not occur during the bonus state, this is equivalent to when the bonus state ends), i.e., the current mode, is "Start Mode," then the transition destination mode will be "Start Mode." Also, if the current mode is one of "Normal A Mode," "Normal B Mode," "Heaven Preparation Mode," or "Chance Mode," then the transition destination mode will be "Normal A Mode." Also, if the current mode is one of "End A Mode" or "End B Mode," then the transition destination mode will be "End A Mode." Also, if the current mode is one of "Guarantee Mode," "Heaven A Mode," "Heaven B Mode," or "Heaven C Mode," then the transition destination mode will be "Guarantee Mode."

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation, one of "REP64" to "REP72" (these display the "Replay" symbol in a straight line at the bottom or middle, and can therefore be collectively called "Parallel Replays." "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively called "Bottom Replays," and "REP72" can be called "Middle Replay") will be displayed, and a replay will be granted. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation, "REP73" (this displays the "Replay" symbol diagonally upwards to the right, and can therefore be called "Diagonal Replay") will be displayed, and a replay will be granted.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. It can also be configured so that it can be determined as an internal winning combination in a 3-coin bet state, but not in a 2-coin bet state. When determined as an internal winning combination, regardless of the state or the stopping operation, "Parallel Replay" will be displayed, and a re-game will be granted.

The "F_Cherry" symbol is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. It can also be configured so that it is determined as an internal winning combination in a 3-coin bet state, but not in a 2-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-coin bet state, regardless of the stopping operation, a "Middle Replay" is displayed, and a re-spin is granted. In a 3-coin bet state, if the left reel 3L is pressed in the ○ position, either "REP28" or "REP60" to "REP63" (these can be collectively called "Cherry Replays" as they display the "Cherry" symbol in the lower position on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a re-spin is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, other replays (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a re-spin is granted.

"F_Confirmed Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets when not in bonus mode. It can also be configured so that it is determined as an internal winning combination when betting 3 coins, but not when betting 2 coins. When determined as an internal winning combination, in 2-coin mode, regardless of the stopping operation, "Middle Replay" is displayed and a re-play is granted. In 3-coin mode, if the pressing order is one of "Order 1" to "Order 4", at least for left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, one of "REP42" to "REP56" (these display the "Cherry" symbol in the lower position on left reel 3L, and since symbols that can raise the player's expectations on other reels, such as "REP42," are also displayed, these can be collectively referred to as "Confirmed Cherry Replay") and a re-play is granted. On the other hand, if the button press position is marked with an "X," other replays (for example, the aforementioned "Cherry Replay" or "REP29" to "REP41") will be displayed, and a replay will be granted. Also, if the button press order is either "Bat Order 5" or "Bat Order 6," regardless of the stopping operation, a "Middle Replay" will be displayed, and a replay will be granted.

The "F_Middle Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets when not in bonus mode. It can also be configured so that it is determined as an internal winning combination when betting 3 coins, but not when betting 2 coins. When determined as an internal winning combination, in 2-coin mode, regardless of the stopping operation, "Middle Replay" is displayed and a re-spin is granted. In 3-coin mode, if the pressing order is one of "Order 1" to "Order 4", at least for left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, one of "REP15" to "REP19" (these can be collectively called "Middle Cherry Replay" as they display the "Cherry" symbol in the middle position on left reel 3L) is displayed and a re-spin is granted. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other replays (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed and a re-spin is granted. Furthermore, if the button press order is either "Bat Order 5" or "Bat Order 6," regardless of the stopping operation, "Middle Reel Replay" will be displayed, and a re-play will be granted.

The "F_Reach Symbol" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. It can also be configured so that it is determined as an internal winning combination in a 3-coin bet state, but not in a 2-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-coin bet state, a "Middle Reel Replay" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation, and a re-game is granted. In a 3-coin bet state, if the button press order is any of "Butt Order 1" to "Butt Order 4", one of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are conventionally configured as combinations of symbols that can definitively notify (or suggest) a transition to a state advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "Reach Symbol Replays") is displayed regardless of the stopping operation, and a re-game is granted. Furthermore, if the button press order is either "Butt Order 5" or "Butt Order 6", a "Middle Reel Replay" is displayed regardless of the stopping operation, and a re-game is granted.

The "F_Watermelon" symbol is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the bet amount in non-bonus states. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the button is pressed in the ○ position on each reel, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these display consecutive "Watermelon" symbols and can therefore be collectively referred to as "Watermelon") will be displayed, and if a 3-coin bet is made, 3 coins will be dispensed; if a 2-coin bet is made, 2 coins will be dispensed. On the other hand, if the button is pressed in the × position, one of "FRU08" or "FRU09" (these do not display consecutive "Watermelon" symbols and can therefore be collectively referred to as "Watermelon Spill") will be displayed, and 1 coin will be dispensed. Note that if the button is pressed in the × position, it is also possible to configure the machine to cause a "slip-up" and dispense 0 coins.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell A".

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order small win with 6 choices (one of the batting orders from "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order). When it is determined as an internal winning win, if the stop operation is performed with the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Diagonal Right Bell" ("FRU03"), "Upper Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Bell" ("FRU04"), "Upward Right Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Mountain Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower Bell" ("FRU07"). If 3 coins are bet, 8 coins will be paid out, and if 2 coins are bet, 2 coins will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the correct sequence, and the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the button press position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations. If the button press position is ○, one of the winning "single-coin payouts" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one coin will be dispensed. On the other hand, if the button press position is ×, a loss occurs and no coins are dispensed. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the button press position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations. If the button press position is ○, one of the winning "single-coin payouts" will be displayed, and one coin will be dispensed. On the other hand, if the button press position is ×, a loss occurs and no coins are dispensed.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the bet amount in non-bonus states. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell B".

As shown in Figure 15, "Push-Order Bell B" is not a push-order minor role between the 3BB flags in the 2-coin bet state and the 3-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning role, one of the aforementioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation. If the 3-coin bet state is active, 8 coins will be dispensed; if the 2-coin bet state is active, 2 coins will be dispensed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 15, "Push-Order Bell B" is a push-order small win in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-coin bet state (between non-flags in the 3-coin bet state, and between the 2BB flags in the 3-coin bet state). If it is determined to be an internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed with the corresponding correct push order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed with the corresponding correct push order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the press position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations. If the press position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin wins" will be displayed and 1 medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a loss occurs and no medals are paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the press position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations. If the press position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin wins" will be displayed and 1 medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the button is pressed in the wrong position, a missed coin will be dispensed and no coins will be paid out.

The "F_RB (8 coins)" combination is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination during bonus mode. When determined as an internal winning combination, one of the aforementioned "bell" symbols will be displayed regardless of the stopping operation, and 8 coins will be dispensed.

The "F_RB (1 coin)" combination is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination during bonus mode. When determined as an internal winning combination, regardless of the stopping operation, one of the aforementioned "1-coin combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) will be displayed, and one coin will be dispensed.

The internal lottery table shown in Figure 10, the symbol combination tables shown in Figures 11 to 14, and the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation patterns, and displayed combinations shown in Figure 15 are merely examples and are not limited to the patterns shown.

For example, in the first gaming machine, a "miss" can occur in various situations, such as a pure "miss," a "miss" occurring when "BB01" is missed in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed, a "miss" occurring when "BB02" is missed in a 3-bet state where "BB02" can be displayed, a "miss" occurring due to being in a 3-bet state between 2BB flags, a "miss" occurring due to being in a 2-bet state between 3BB flags, or a "miss" occurring due to missing a "push-order small win." Therefore, in order to make the combination of symbols displayed as a "miss" different in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations can be predetermined in a symbol combination table, and these can also be permitted to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" according to the determined internal winning combination, thereby making the symbol combination related to the "miss" displayed different depending on the state, etc.

[5-4. Limit Processing Configuration for the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to Figure 16. Figure 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in Figure 16, the first gaming machine is configured to execute the following limit processing: normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing (number of games), and semi-limit processing (number of payouts). Note that this is just one example of executable limit processing, and it is also possible to execute limit processing other than these limit processing, or to not execute some of these limit processing.

The normal limit processing (game count) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game count counter reaches "1500" or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive games have been played during the advantageous section). The advantageous section game count counter begins counting the number of games played from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section) and ends counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous section ends (including when the limit processing is activated). Furthermore, the advantageous section game count counter counts regardless of whether the bet is 2 or 3 coins. The advantageous section game count counter also counts in both the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), the advantageous period is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-advantageous period, regardless of whether it is in a performance period or an increase period (pseudo-bonus). At this time, all information related to the advantageous period (for example, information used to control the performance period or increase period, information related to the current mode, information related to the duration of the pseudo-bonus, information related to the ceiling game count or whether the ceiling has been shortened, the value of the 1G consecutive win stock counter, and other various information obtained during that advantageous period, as well as various information necessary to control that advantageous period) is also cleared (initialized).

The normal limit processing (payout count) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout counter reaches "2401" or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). The advantageous section payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference in medals)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section), and stops counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit processing). The advantageous section payout counter also performs counting regardless of whether the bet is 2 or 3 medals. Furthermore, the advantageous section payout counter also performs counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state. In addition, if a "miss" or "missed medal" occurs during the advantageous section, the value to be counted is appropriately subtracted according to the actual payout (for example, "-2 medals" or "-3 medals", etc.). Therefore, if the number of medals decreases instead of increasing after the start of the advantageous period, the value may become negative (or, it can be configured so that "0" is always maintained if the value becomes negative). In other words, the advantageous period payout counter can count from the lowest point of medals paid out during the advantageous period up to the defined highest point (difference in medals: 2400).

When the normal limit processing (payout limit) is executed (activated), the advantageous period is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-advantageous period, regardless of whether it is in a performance period or an increase period (pseudo-bonus) period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit processing (game count) is executed when the value of the control game counter reaches "1445" or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive games have been played during the advantageous period). The control game counter begins counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous period (including the performance period) and ends counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends (including when the limit processing is activated). Furthermore, the control game counter counts when the bet is 3 coins, but does not count when the bet is 2 coins. Also, the control game counter counts when in a non-bonus state, but does not count in the 2BB state or 3BB state. However, the control game counter can also be configured similarly to the advantageous period game counter.

When the special limit processing (game count) is executed (activated), if a pseudo-bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increasing period), the advantageous period will be forcibly terminated when the pseudo-bonus ends, without forcibly ending the pseudo-bonus midway, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the game is not in a pseudo-bonus phase (i.e., in a performance phase), it will first forcibly transition to a pseudo-bonus. That is, even without winning the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus through the execution of this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transitioned pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous phase will forcibly end accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous phase. At this time, all information related to the advantageous phase mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

Here, we note that the value of the advantageous section game counter where the normal limit processing (game count) is executed (activated) is "1500," while the value of the control game counter where the special limit processing (game count) is executed (activated) is "1445." Considering that the maximum number of games (possible continuation period) during the pseudo-bonus in the first gaming machine is "55 games" (see Figure 5), this difference reflects the consideration of the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (game count) is implemented to curb excessive gambling tendencies in the game, and is performed when a predetermined regulated period of gameplay has been reached within the advantageous section. However, if this normal limit processing (game count) is performed immediately after the start of a pseudo-bonus or during it, players may feel distrust or a sense of loss, which can diminish the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (game count) is performed during gameplay that is 55 games before the normal limit processing (game count) is executed, thereby preventing the pseudo-bonus from ending prematurely and causing players to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

Furthermore, from this perspective, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is not limited to those described above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game played a number of times earlier than the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, equal to the possible continuation period per two increase intervals (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games). Also, for example, to give a slight grace period, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game played a number of times earlier than the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, equal to the possible continuation period per increase interval (55 games) + grace period (2 games). In addition, for example, in the case of a specification where a premonition state is passed before transitioning to a pseudo-bonus, and the maximum number of games played in this premonition state is "4 games", the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game played a number of times earlier than the possible continuation period per increase interval (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games). In other words, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any timing prior to the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to the individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit processing (payout count) is executed when the value of the control payout counter reaches "2126" or higher (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period exceeds 2125). The control payout counter begins counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference in medals)") from the start of the advantageous period (including the performance period), and ends counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit processing). Furthermore, the control payout counter counts when the bet is 3, but does not count when the bet is 2. Also, the control payout counter counts when in a non-bonus state, but does not count in the 2BB state or 3BB state.

Furthermore, when a "miss" occurs during the advantageous period, the control payout counter subtracts a value according to the actual payout (for example, "-3 coins"). However, when a "miss" occurs during the advantageous period (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out), the control payout counter counts the number of medals paid out as if no "miss" (or difference) had occurred. Specifically, for example, in a game where a player bets 3 coins and wins "Push Order Bell A," if the order of pressing the buttons is correct, the maximum number of coins paid out will be "8" (a difference of "+5"). However, if the order of pressing the buttons is incorrect, if the button press position is correct, the number of coins paid out will be "1" (a difference of "-2"). If the button press position is incorrect, a coin will be missed and the number of coins paid out will be "0" (a difference of "-3"). However, the control payout counter will count a difference of "+5" in all cases during the game.

Furthermore, if, for example, the 2BB state or 3BB state is activated and the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes greater than the value of the control payout counter, the value of the control payout counter will be corrected to match the value of the advantageous section payout counter. Note that the control payout counter can also be configured similarly to the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (payout limit) is executed (activated), if a pseudo-bonus is in progress (i.e., during an increasing period), the advantageous period will be forcibly terminated when the pseudo-bonus ends, without prematurely ending the pseudo-bonus. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the game is not currently in a pseudo-bonus round (i.e., in a performance section), it will first forcibly transition to a pseudo-bonus round. That is, even without winning the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus round through the execution of this special limit processing (payout amount). Then, when the transitioned pseudo-bonus round ends, the advantageous section will forcibly end accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous section. At this time, all information related to the advantageous section mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

Here, we note that the value of the advantageous section payout counter, where the normal limit processing (payout count) is executed (activated), is "2401," while the value of the control game counter, where the special limit processing (payout count) is executed (activated), is "2126." Considering that the maximum number of coins obtainable during the pseudo-bonus (amount of playable value that can be awarded) in the first gaming machine is "275 coins" (see Figure 5), this difference reflects the amount of playable value that can be awarded during the pseudo-bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (payout) is executed when a predetermined regulated amount of game value is granted during the advantageous period, in order to curb the excessive gambling aspect of the game. However, if this normal limit processing (payout) is executed immediately after the start of a pseudo-bonus or during it, players may feel distrust or a sense of loss, and the enjoyment of the game may decrease. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (payout) is executed when the amount of game value granted is less than the amount of game value at which the normal limit processing (payout) is executed, by the amount of game value that can be granted per increase period (275 coins). This prevents the pseudo-bonus from ending prematurely and causing players to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

Furthermore, from this perspective, the timing at which the special limit processing (payout) is executed (activated) is not limited to those described above. For example, the special limit processing (payout) may be executed when the amount of game value awarded is less than the amount of game value awarded when the normal limit processing (payout) is executed, by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase intervals (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins). Alternatively, for example, to provide a slight grace period, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed when the amount of game value awarded is less than the amount of game value awarded when the normal limit processing (payout) is executed, by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increase interval (275 coins) plus the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 coins). In other words, the timing at which the special limit processing (payout) is executed (activated) can be any timing prior to the timing at which the normal limit processing (payout) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to the individual game specifications, etc.

The semi-limit processing (game count) is executed when the value of the control game count counter is multiplied by the value of the 1G consecutive win counter (adding an additional "1" if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and "ceiling reduction available") and "55" (i.e., the possible duration of the pseudo-bonus). The result of this addition is "1390" or more. For example, if the 1G consecutive win counter value is "1" and "ceiling reduction available" is indicated, the latter value becomes "55 x 2 = 110". Therefore, the semi-limit processing (game count) is executed (activated) when the control game count counter value becomes "1280".

The semi-limit processing (payout count) is executed when the value of the control payout counter is multiplied by the value of the 1G consecutive counter (adding an additional "1" if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and "ceiling reduction is available") and "275" (i.e., the amount of game value for which a pseudo-bonus can be awarded). The result of this addition is "1851" or greater. For example, if the 1G consecutive counter value is "1" and "ceiling reduction is available," the latter value becomes "275 x 2 = 550," so the semi-limit processing (payout count) is executed (activated) when the control payout counter value becomes "1301." Note that both the semi-limit processing (game count) and the semi-limit processing (payout count) perform the same regulation; therefore, once one's activation condition is met and it is activated, it is not necessary for the other to activate even if its activation condition is met.

When the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the 1G consecutive win lottery and the ceiling reduction lottery mentioned above will not be executed during the pseudo-bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous periods. In other words, the extension of the game period in the increase period is suppressed. However, the method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increase period is not limited to this. For example, in the 1G consecutive win lottery mentioned above, the probability of winning a 1G consecutive win may be made lower than usual, or in the ceiling reduction lottery mentioned above, the probability of winning a ceiling reduction may be made lower than usual. In other words, the 1G consecutive win lottery and the ceiling reduction lottery themselves are executed, but it may be made more difficult to win these lotteries. Also, for example, in the performance period after the execution of the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the lottery value that results in a win in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be made lower to make it more difficult to transition to a pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the probability of a mode transition favorable to the player being determined in the mode transition lottery could be lowered, making it less likely for pseudo-bonuses to occur in consecutive rounds.

Furthermore, once the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), during the subsequent advantageous period, special processing is performed when a "guaranteed win" (see Figure 7(a)) occurs during the performance period. Below, this special processing will be explained using the example where the "guaranteed win" is "F_Guaranteed Cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Guaranteed Cherry").

When neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is drawn during the performance section (which may also be during the increase section), a "win (next game)" is determined in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see Figure 7(c)). In addition, in the first game machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that is highly anticipated by the player, so in games where information on stopping operations is not announced, the general procedure for the player is to stop the left reel first, aiming for the "cherry" symbol (or the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when the game is played using the general procedure, when a "confirmed cherry" is drawn, the "cherry" symbol will first stop on the lower part of the left reel 3L at the left reel first stop. Furthermore, if neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, and a "Confirmed Cherry" is drawn, a notification may be issued indicating that the left reel should be stopped first ("Batting Order 1" and "Batting Order 2"). Also, "Winning (Next Game)" is not limited to a pseudo-bonus starting from the next game; it may also mean that a pseudo-bonus starts from a game after the next game.

Here, a skilled player will further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "guaranteed cherry" by, for example, aiming for the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. As a result, the "BAR" symbol will align in the middle of each reel, and it will be recognized that a "guaranteed cherry" has been won (see, for example, "REP42" in Figure 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player may not, or may not be able to, aim for the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, and therefore may not be able to determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "guaranteed cherry" from the stop display (see, for example, "REP28" in Figure 11).

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, and a "guaranteed cherry" is drawn, and the combination of symbols for "guaranteed cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, when a "guaranteed cherry" is drawn, and the combination of symbols for "guaranteed cherry replay" is not displayed, but the combination of symbols for "cherry replay" is displayed, a special winning sound is output. The output of the special winning sound may be set to occur with 100% probability, or with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% probability).

In any case, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "guaranteed cherry" is drawn, the "red 7 alignment" animation will occur at the start of the next game, informing the player that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will then start.

On the other hand, if a "Confirmed Cherry" is drawn during the performance section (or even during the increase section) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will initially determine a "Win (Next Game)" (see Figure 7(c)). However, due to the execution of a special process, this determination is rewritten to "Win (Current Game)." Then, at the start of the current game, the "Red 7 Alignment" animation will occur, announcing the start of the pseudo-bonus, and the pseudo-bonus will begin.

In this instance, during the current game, the combination of symbols for "Confirmed Cherry Replay" (including the combination of "Cherry Replay" symbols) is not displayed, and information regarding the stop operation to display the combination of symbols for "Middle Replay" is provided (special notification). For example, in the first game machine, a special notification is given indicating that the right first stop ("Bat Order 5" and "Bat Order 6") should be performed (see Figure 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed from "Confirmed Cherry Replay" display → pseudo-bonus start from the next game to "Middle Replay" display after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated. Furthermore, the special notification may be controlled by the main control board (main control board 71), or, from the perspective of ensuring that the player does not suffer any disadvantage as the result is still a transition to a pseudo-bonus, it may be controlled solely by the sub-control board (sub-control board 72).

Furthermore, if a "Confirmed Cherry" is drawn after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated, and despite a special notification being given, if the combination of symbols for "Confirmed Cherry Replay" is displayed, the special winning sound will not be output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stopping procedure is generally not announced. Therefore, if the stopping procedure is announced and "Middle Replay" is displayed only when the aforementioned special announcement is made, then when such a situation occurs, the player will clearly recognize that one of the semi-limit processes has been activated, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. For this reason, during the advantageous period, regardless of whether one of the semi-limit processes is activated or not (or even after one of the semi-limit processes has been activated), if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special announcement may be made with a predetermined probability. This prevents the player from feeling that the special announcement is unnatural. Furthermore, the notification similar to the special notification may occur when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, or when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won. In this case, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination may be configured so that "Winning (This Game)" is determined with a predetermined probability.

Up to this point, we have explained the process of activating normal limit processing, special limit processing, and semi-limit processing by using "game count" and "payout count" to monitor the game duration of the advantageous period as an example. However, the conditions under which each limit processing is executed are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the values of the advantageous period game count counter, the advantageous period payout counter, the control game count counter, the control payout counter, the 1G consecutive win counter, and whether or not the ceiling is shortened (i.e., the variables for activating semi-limit processing), etc., can be changed as appropriate according to the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Furthermore, the methods for monitoring the duration of the advantageous period are not limited to those described above. For example, if "navigation count" is used to monitor the duration of the advantageous period, then, similar to the above, normal limit processing (navigation count), special limit processing (navigation count), or semi-limit processing (navigation count) can be executed. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the duration of the advantageous period. By defining the values for which normal limit processing is executed, special limit processing is executed, and semi-limit processing is executed for the adopted element, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, advantageous states (e.g., pseudo-bonuses) and specific states (e.g., performance sections) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections. When the game duration in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous section game counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous section payout counter is "2401" or more), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated. However, when the game duration in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), if the player is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated when transitioning to a specific state.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous period is not forcibly terminated midway through the advantageous state. Instead, it is possible to terminate the advantageous period within a certain period in a natural flow that coincides with the end of the advantageous state. This suppresses excessive gambling tendencies while preventing players from feeling distrust or loss, thus demonstrating consideration for the players' emotions.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, advantageous states (e.g., pseudo-bonuses) and specific states (e.g., performance sections) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections. When the game duration in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous section game counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous section payout counter is "2401" or more), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated. However, when the game duration in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game counter is "1445" or more), or when the amount of game value granted in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is "2126" or more), if the player is not in an advantageous state, the player is transitioned to an advantageous state. When the transitioned advantageous state ends and the player transitions to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated.

In other words, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous period is not forcibly terminated midway through the advantageous state. Instead, it is possible to terminate the advantageous period within a certain period in a natural flow that coincides with the end of the advantageous state. Furthermore, when terminating the advantageous period in this way, if the player is not in an advantageous state, the machine transitions to an advantageous state before terminating. This prevents excessive gambling tendencies while also preventing players from experiencing distrust or feelings of loss, thus demonstrating consideration for the players' emotions.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or amount is set considering the duration of the advantageous state (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 tokens"). Therefore, while considering the player's feelings, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value awarded to the player from being excessively restricted.

Furthermore, in the first type of gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling reduction"). However, when the game period in a series of advantageous sections becomes shorter than a specific period and becomes a special period set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control game counter reaches the value at which quasi-limit processing (game count) is executed), or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections becomes less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of granted rights (for example, when the value of the control payout counter reaches the value at which quasi-limit processing (payout count) is executed), the granting of rights in subsequent series of advantageous sections is suppressed. This prevents situations where, for example, a player is granted more rights than they can use, and the series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated in such a state, resulting in the player feeling distrust or loss. Therefore, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling tendencies while also considering the player's feelings.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when counting the aforementioned "specific amount" or "special amount," even if a difference arises between the amount of game value that should have been awarded and the amount actually awarded due to, for example, a player's operational error or disregard of instructions, this difference is not taken into account. The counting is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been awarded. This prevents the advantageous period from being unnecessarily extended by such player actions, and prevents unfairness between players who engage in such actions and those who do not. Thus, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling tendencies while also considering the players' feelings.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a player hits a winning combination (e.g., "guaranteed cherry") that guarantees a transition to a favorable state while the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., after the quasi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is provided to prevent the display of a special symbol combination (e.g., "guaranteed cherry replay") that clearly indicates the winning combination. This prevents the player from feeling, for example, that the winning combination was a wasted win. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger for the start of the favorable state while the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling tendencies while also considering the player's feelings. Note that any of the performance execution methods may be used to provide the special notification.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is issued, the advantageous state, which would normally begin in the next game, is instead started in the current game. This allows players to naturally perform the stopping operation according to the special notification, thus preventing them from feeling any discomfort or unease even when such special notifications are issued.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a winning combination of special symbols is displayed after hitting a guaranteed winning combination, it is possible to provide a special notification (for example, outputting a special winning sound). However, when the granting of rights is suppressed and a winning combination of special symbols is displayed after hitting a guaranteed winning combination, it is not possible to provide a special notification. This prevents players from feeling, for example, that their winning combination was a wasted win. In other words, by not clearly indicating to the player when the advantageous state has begun when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling tendencies while also considering the player's feelings. Note that any of the performance execution methods may be used to provide the special notification.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the decision of whether or not to issue a special notification is made based on whether or not a winning combination was achieved, whether or not a special symbol combination was displayed, and whether or not a special notification was issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game count counter and the advantageous section payout counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet. As a result, the normal limit processing (game count) and normal limit processing (payout) are executed not only in the 3-coin bet state but also in the 2-coin bet state.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the control game counter and control payout counter count when three coins are bet, but not when two coins are bet. Therefore, in the three-coin bet state, special limit processing (game count) and special limit processing (payout) can be executed, but in the two-coin bet state, special limit processing (game count) and special limit processing (payout) cannot be executed. Consequently, in the two-coin bet state, the execution of normal limit processing (game count) or normal limit processing (payout) may forcibly terminate a series of advantageous periods, even during a pseudo-bonus.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the probability of winning small prizes and the number of medals paid out differ between the 3-coin betting state and the 2-coin betting state (see Figures 10-15). As a result, playing with a 2-coin bet is more disadvantageous to the player than playing with a 3-coin bet. However, this is not the only method that makes playing with a 2-coin bet disadvantageous to the player. For example, if the game is played with a 2-coin bet during a pseudo-bonus, the stopping procedure may not be announced, thus making it disadvantageous to the player.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, when a first amount of game value (for example, "3 coins") is bet and the game is played, the advantageous period is not forcibly terminated midway through the advantageous state. Instead, the advantageous period is terminated within a certain period in a natural flow that coincides with the end of the advantageous state. This suppresses excessive gambling tendencies while preventing players from feeling distrust or loss, thus considering the players' emotions. On the other hand, when a second amount of game value (for example, "2 coins") is bet and the game is played, the advantageous period may be forcibly terminated midway through the advantageous state. This makes the player aware that they have not played the game in the intended manner, thus encouraging them to play the game in the intended manner.

Furthermore, within a series of advantageous periods, playing with a second amount of game value bet is less advantageous for the player than playing with a first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling this kind of warning, it is possible to encourage players to play in a more advantageous position, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to players playing in unintended ways.

[5-5. Storage area configuration for the first gaming machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to Figures 17 to 22. Figure 17 is a diagram showing an example of the winning flag storage area, the prize activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Figure 18 is a diagram showing an example of the carry-over role storage area of the first gaming machine. Figure 19 is a diagram showing an example of the game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Figure 20 is a diagram showing an example of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Figure 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Figure 22 is a diagram showing an example of the button press order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, prize activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, referring to Figure 17, the configuration of the winning flag storage area (internal winning role storage area), the prize activation flag storage area (display role storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be explained. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the prize activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the storage areas described above consists of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by one byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the one-byte data shown in the "Data" column of Figure 17. However, for the sake of explanation, Figure 17 also includes the "combinations" (shown in the order of reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R in Figure 17) and their contents (see Figures 11 to 14), which represent the pattern combinations associated with the bits of each storage area.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in this game). For example, if a 2BB win occurs in this game (i.e., if it is carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the prize activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the active line in this game). For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed on the active line in this game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that are still available on the active payline during the current game, while at least one reel is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB is available on the active payline while at least one reel is spinning during the current game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Storage area for carryover items)
Next, with reference to Figure 18, the configuration of the carryover storage area will be explained. The carryover storage area consists of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus symbols "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) are the internal winning symbols, these bonus symbols are stored in the carry-over symbol storage area as carry-over symbols (the corresponding bits are stored as "1"). The carry-over symbols stored in the carry-over symbol storage area are retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on an active payline. Furthermore, while carry-over symbols are stored in the carry-over symbol storage area, in addition to the internal winning symbols (minor symbols and replay symbols) determined by the internal lottery process, the carry-over symbols (bonus symbols) are stored in the winning flag storage area.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, with reference to Figure 19, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be explained. The game state flag storage area consists of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current game state is 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In the first gaming machine, since there is no RT (Replay Time) state, the gaming state flag storage area shown in Figure 19 does not have an area indicating the type of RT state. However, if an RT state is present, for example, "1" will be stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section is stored separately in the mode flag storage area described later, but it can also be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming sections of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. It is possible to manage this data in an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as AT (Attack Time) state and ART (Advanced Replay Time) state. It is possible to manage this data in an AT (Attack Time) state (ART) state flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Next, with reference to Figure 20, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be explained. The mode flag storage area consists of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by one byte of data. For example, if the current mode is start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Also, for example, if the current mode is heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Storage area for the stop button)
Next, with reference to Figure 21, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described. The operation stop button storage area consists of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (the type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated (the type of reel that is currently rotating).

For example, if stop button 8L is the stop button that was pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., the active stop button, then "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that was pressed this time and the stop buttons that have not yet been pressed based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Pressing order storage area)
Next, with reference to Figure 22, the configuration of the button press order storage area will be explained. The button press order storage area consists of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. The button press order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, that is, the order in which they were pressed (the order of hitting).

For example, when all reels are spinning, bits 0-5 of the button press order storage area are stored as "1". Then, when stop button 8L is pressed (the first stop being "left"), bits 0 and 1 remain "1", but bits 2-5 are changed to "0". Next, when stop button 8C is pressed (the first stop being "left" and the second stop being "middle"), bit 0 remains "1", but bit 1 is changed to "0". The main CPU 101 identifies the button press order for the current game based on the data stored in the button press order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, with reference to Figures 23 to 32, the contents of the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be explained. In the explanation of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing content may be explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing content of the various processes shown below is not limited to this.

[6-1. Main Processing]
First, with reference to Figure 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be explained. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the main processing. In addition, Figure 23 also shows the power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislo machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). This processing involves various operations necessary at the time of power-on. Details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of a game (S2). This process clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area where data must be erased after each game, such as the winning flag storage area or the prize activation flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal reception and start check process (S3). This process checks the input status of, for example, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, and the start switch 7S, and performs various necessary processing at the start of gameplay. Details of the medal reception and start check process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this process, random values for internal lottery (e.g., in the range of 0 to 65535) and random values for various gameplay-related lotteries (other lottery random values) (e.g., in the range of 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) are extracted, and these extracted random values are stored in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the methods of acquiring these random values are not limited to those described above. The required number of random values can be acquired as needed from predetermined numerical ranges (e.g., the range of 0 to 65535, 0 to 32767, 0 to 255, or 0 to 127, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (S5). This process involves various operations necessary to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and random values used for internal lottery, corresponding to the current game state. Details of the internal lottery processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, for various game states, if a transition condition is met at the start of the game (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination), the CPU performs various processes necessary to transition the game state according to the met transition condition, or to manage the duration of the current game state. Details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, data for the start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated and stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process described later (see S204 in Figure 32). The generation, storage, and transmission methods for other command data are basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the main-side performance control processing at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when various performances are performed by the main control circuit 100 (main side) at the start of the game, the CPU performs the necessary processing to execute those performances. For example, if a lock performance is performed at the start of the game, the CPU controls the execution of that lock performance. Furthermore, if this includes a simulated game, the CPU controls the progress of the simulated game (or the notification related to the simulated game). Also, for example, if the game is in AT mode and the instruction monitor notifies information about the stop operation, the CPU controls the notification method. Although details are omitted, if a lock performance is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the initial reel stop setup process (S9). In this process, based on the internal winning combination and game state, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of reel pull-in priority table to be used in the current game, is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the reel rotation start process (S10). This process requests the rotation start of all reels. Once the rotation start of all reels is requested, the reel control process (see S203 in Figure 32) controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins. Each reel that has started rotating is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then that constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted here, this process also includes the generation and storage of reel rotation start commands.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the reel pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels (in this case, all reels), data indicating the reel pull-in priority is obtained by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set reel pull-in priority table, and stored in the reel pull-in priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown in the diagram, the symbol code storage process described later is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). This processing involves performing various operations necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the determined internal winning combination (or the information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation patterns of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R. Details of the reel stop control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a prize activation determination process (S13). This process determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it checks whether there is a bit containing "1" in the prize activation flag storage area. Although details are omitted here, this process also includes the generation and storage of a prize activation command.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal payout and re-play activation process (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the aforementioned prize activation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a minor win, the corresponding number of medals are paid out. If the combination of symbols is related to a replay win, various processes necessary to activate re-play in the next game are performed. For example, if the combination of symbols determined in the aforementioned prize activation determination process is related to a replay win, the automatic medal counter (described later) is set to a value equal to the number of bets in the current game. Furthermore, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game-ending state control process (S15). In this process, for each game state, when the game ends, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), the game state is transitioned according to the met transition condition, or various processes are performed to manage the duration of the current game state. Details of the game-ending state control process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the main-side performance control processing at the end of the game (S16). In this process, if various performances are to be performed by the main control circuit 100 (main side) when the game ends, the CPU performs the necessary processing to execute those performances. For example, if a lock performance is to be performed at the end of the game, the CPU controls the execution of that lock performance. Furthermore, if this includes a simulated game, the CPU controls the progress of that simulated game (or the notification related to the simulated game). Although details are omitted here, if a lock performance is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed during this process.

Thus, in pachislo machine 1, the processes S2 to S16 described above control one unit of gameplay, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that other processes may be performed as needed, and some of these processes may be omitted. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, with reference to Figure 24, the power-on processing performed in S1 of the main processing described above will be explained. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) upon power-on, then performs a write test on the main RAM 103. Based on the results of this test, it determines whether the write to the main RAM 103 was successful (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the write operation to the main RAM 103 was successful (S21 is YES), it determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting can be changed.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state (S22 is YES), it performs the initialization process for setting changes (S23). This process clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103. The designated storage area here refers to storage areas where data needs to be erased when settings are changed, such as the carryover role storage area, the game state flag storage area, or the mode flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, it generates initialization command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200, indicating that the configuration change process has started, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, after receiving the setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation described above, the main RAM 103 is initialized, and the new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 has turned off (S26). That is, after the new setting value has been set, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which setting changes are possible has ended.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S26 is NO), it waits for the setting key-type switch 52 to turn off. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S26 is YES), it performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S27). In this process, it generates initialization command data indicating the completion of the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the power-on processing.

In S22, if the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state (S22 is NO), it determines whether the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachislo machine 1 is cut off (power outage) is normal.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (S28 is YES), it performs a game recovery process (S29). This process restores the pachislo machine 1 to its state before the power outage. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the write operation to the main RAM 103 was not performed correctly (S21 is NO), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), it performs a power-on error process (S30). Note that errors caused by this power-on error process are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when new settings are established. Therefore, after the power-on error process, the main CPU 101 does not proceed to normal operation (from S2 onwards in Figure 23) until the power to the pachislo machine 1 is turned off and new settings are established (until the processes described in S22 to S26 are performed).

(Medal reception and start check processing)
Next, referring to Figure 25, the medal reception and start check process performed in S3 of the main process described above will be explained. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the medal reception and start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether a replay was achieved in the previous game (i.e., whether a replay was activated).

The main CPU 101, if it determines that the value of the automatic medal insertion counter is not "0" (S41 is NO), performs the automatic medal insertion process (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as those inserted in the previous unit of play are automatically inserted. Although details are omitted, if automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is carried out during this process. Furthermore, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

The main CPU 101, in S41, determines that the value of the automatic medal insertion counter is "0" (S41 is YES), and after processing in S42, performs a medal auxiliary storage switch check (S43). This process determines whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is in the ON state (i.e., whether a certain number of medals or more are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33). If it determines that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is in the ON state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the process waits until the error is resolved. If it determines that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this process terminates.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check (S44). This checks the current number of bets and credits, and also determines whether medal acceptance is prohibited or if a selector error has occurred. If medal acceptance is possible, the system is set to a state where medal acceptance is possible (a state where betting operations can be accepted) (medal acceptance is permitted). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is possible to accept medals (S45 is YES), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the bet switch 6S. Although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed during this process. Also, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is possible to insert medals or credit (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the bet is set to "3" and the credit count is not "50". If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not possible to insert medals or credit (i.e., the bet is set to "3" and the credit count is "50") (S49 is NO), it prohibits accepting medals (S48). In other words, the main CPU 101 sets the system to a state where it cannot accept medals (a state where betting operations are not accepted).

The main CPU 101 determines in S45 that it is not possible to accept medals (S45 is NO), in S47 that it is possible to insert medals or credit (S47 is YES), and after processing in S48, it determines whether the number of inserted medals is the number of medals required to start the game (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current bet is "2" or "3" medals.

The main CPU 101, upon determining that the number of inserted tokens is sufficient to start the game (S49 is YES), determines whether the start switch 7S is turned ON (S50). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the player has initiated the start operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is ON (S50 is YES), it prohibits accepting medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the medal acceptance and start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of inserted tokens is not the number of tokens required to start the game (S49 is NO), or if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S50 is NO), the process returns to S44.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, with reference to Figure 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the main process described above will be explained. Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a check of the set value and the number of tokens inserted (S61). This checks the set value and the number of bets for the current game. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set value, the number of bets, and the game state (S62). Then, the main CPU 101 retrieves a random number for internal lottery from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 retrieves the data of the random number for internal lottery obtained in S4 of the main process described above. If, during this process, the set value is determined to be anything other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is anything other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the power-on error processing described above (see S30 in Figure 24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired random number for internal抽選 (random number generation) is sequentially updated (for example, by addition) using the lottery values for each internal winning combination defined in the set internal lottery table. It is then determined whether the update result is a predetermined result (for example, an overflow). If the predetermined result is met, that internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for this unit game. If, after checking all internal winning combinations, the predetermined result is not met, the result of this unit game is "miss" ("miss" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). If the main CPU 101 determines that no internal winning combination has been determined (S65 is NO), it returns to processing S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (sequentially updating the random values for internal drawing), and repeats the process of S64 until a determination has been made for all internal winning combinations (or until an internal winning combination is determined during that process).

If the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning combination has been determined (S65 is YES), it determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carry-over combination (i.e., whether it is a minor combination or a replay combination, rather than a bonus combination that carries over) (S66). If the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a non-carry-over combination (S66 is YES), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in the winning flag storage area corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

The main CPU 101, in S66, determines if the determined internal winning combination is not a combination that is not eligible for carryover (S66 is NO), and after processing in S67, determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a combination eligible for carryover (i.e., a bonus combination that is a carryover) (S68).

The main CPU 101, if it determines that the determined internal winning combination is a combination eligible for carryover (S68 is YES), determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus combinations have not yet been carried over. If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69 is YES), it updates the carryover combination storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in S64. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in relation to the determined internal winning combination in the carryover combination storage area.

The main CPU 101, in S68, determines that the determined internal winning combination is not a combination eligible for carryover (S68 is NO), in S69, determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO), and after processing in S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71).

The main CPU 101, if it determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (S71 is NO), updates the winning flag storage area (S72). This process reflects the data stored in the carryover role storage area into the winning flag storage area. Specifically, if a bonus role is carried over (or a win was achieved in the current game), the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in the bit corresponding to the symbol combination permitted to be displayed for that bonus role in the winning flag storage area.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (S71 is YES), and after processing in S72, it performs sub-flag setting processing (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, non-advantageous section sub-flags and advantageous section win sub-flags are set based on the internal winning role. In this process, for example, when in AT state, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the internal lottery processing.

(Game start state control processing)
Next, with reference to Figure 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the main process described above will be explained. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a check for the fulfillment of game state transition conditions (S81). This check determines whether the transition conditions for moving from one game state to another have been met when the game begins. For example, if the game transitions to a predetermined RT state between flags based on winning a predetermined bonus role, this process checks whether the predetermined bonus role has been won. In the case of the first game machine, since the flags are not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), this check is unnecessary. Furthermore, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends after a specific number of games have been played following the fulfillment of a specific transition condition, this process can also manage this specific number of games.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the transition conditions for transitioning to any game state have been met (S82). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition conditions for transitioning to any game state have been met (S82 is YES), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the met transition conditions. Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S84). In this process, if it is necessary to set the game period for the game state or to set the lottery values (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processing is performed as appropriate, depending on the transition in game state.

The main CPU 101, if it determines in S82 that the transition conditions for transitioning to any game state are not met (S82 is NO), and after processing in S84, determines whether the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S85). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S85 is YES), it performs an advantage section start condition fulfillment check (S86). This process checks whether the transition conditions (advantageous section start conditions) for transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantage section have been met when the game starts. In the case of the first game machine, this process, for example, involves performing the aforementioned advantage section transition lottery and checking whether the lottery result initiates an advantage section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous period have been met (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous period have not been met (S87 is NO), it terminates the game start state control processing. If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous period have been met (S87 is YES), it performs the setting processing for the start of the advantageous period (S88). In other words, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous period. In this process, depending on the start of the advantageous period, it appropriately performs setting processing such as starting the counting of various counters related to various limit processing (see Figure 16) (i.e., starting monitoring of the game period of a series of advantageous periods).

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the newly started advantageous period. In the case of the first game machine, this process sets the destination mode determined, for example, according to the result of the advantageous period transition lottery described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, it performs setting processing as needed, such as setting the game duration (including the maximum number of games, etc.) for that mode, or setting the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, in this process, depending on the set destination mode, if the game transitions to a pseudo-bonus, the game duration is set to "55 games," if it transitions to the termination mode, the game duration is set to "32 games," and if it transitions to any other mode, the corresponding maximum number of games is set. Also, the lottery values (lottery table) for various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the game start state control processing.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (i.e., an advantageous section) (S85 is NO), it performs the start-of-game processing during the advantageous section (S91). Details of the start-of-game processing during the advantageous section will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a check to determine if the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met (S92). This check determines whether the transition conditions (the conditions for ending the advantageous section) for transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section have been met when the game starts. In the case of the first gaming machine, this check, for example, determines whether the activation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games played in the advantageous section (see Figure 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the termination mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (S93 is YES), it performs the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous period and sets up a non-advantageous period. In this process, in response to the end of the advantageous period, it performs initialization processing to clear all information related to the advantageous period, such as various counters related to various limit processing (see Figure 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous period, and the game period of that mode (including the number of games until the ceiling, etc.) (i.e., information related to the advantageous period). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the game start state control process. Also, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have not been met (S93 is NO), it terminates the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of gameplay during the advantageous period)
Next, with reference to Figure 28, the processing performed at the start of game during the advantageous period, which takes place in S91 of the game start state control processing described above, will be explained. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing at the start of game during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of gameplay) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games played during the advantageous period (see Figure 16), various counters managing the game duration such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous period, or other counters managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 for each game).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the system is in a specific mode (AT state) (S102). If the main CPU 101 determines that the system is in a specific mode (S102 is YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this processing, for example, if it is possible to extend the game period of the AT state at the start of the game (for example, extending the number of games or adding sets), it determines whether or not the conditions for such extension are met, and performs processing such as extending the game period based on the result of this determination (if it is possible to shorten the game period of the AT state, it performs processing related to such shortening). In addition, this processing may manage the game period of the AT state regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, and this processing may only perform processing related to extension. In the case of the first type of gaming machine, this process involves, for example, the aforementioned 1G consecutive win lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Following this lottery, processing is performed to extend the pseudo-bonus according to the lottery result.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). This processing sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, and information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command. Note that this processing may also allow for the determination of whether or not to generate navigation. That is, even if a notified role is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily be generated, and this processing may determine whether or not navigation is generated according to predetermined conditions (for example, the type of notified role or a predetermined navigation generation probability).

The main CPU 101, if it determines in S102 that the machine is not in a specific mode (S102 is NO), and after S104, determines whether the mode transition conditions have been met (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the destination mode was determined according to the results of the mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition conditions have been met (S105 is YES), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transitioned advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the destination mode determined according to the result of the mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, it performs setting processing as needed, such as setting the game duration (including the maximum number of games, etc.) for that mode, or setting the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to, for example, the process in S90 described above. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the processing at the start of gameplay during the advantageous section. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has not been met (S105 is NO), it terminates the processing at the start of gameplay during the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the game start state control process shown in Figure 27, the game end state control process shown in Figure 30, and the game start process during the advantageous period shown in Figure 28, and the game end process during the advantageous period shown in Figure 31, have essentially the same processing configuration. This means that processes that can be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends (for example, processes that refer to determined internal winning combinations, such as transitions in game states or modes, but whose results only need to be reflected by the end of the current game (or the start of the next game)) only need to be performed at one of these times, and it does not mean that the same processes are performed redundantly at both times. Therefore, such processes can be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends.

In contrast, processes that need to be performed when the game starts (for example, the navigation setting process mentioned above) should be performed at the start of the game, and processes that need to be performed when the game ends (for example, the process of referencing the displayed symbol combinations) should be performed at the end of the game. Furthermore, processes that need to be performed, or should be performed, at a predetermined time after the game has started but before it ends (for example, the process of referencing the stopping operation pattern of the first stop operation) should be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, with reference to Figure 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the main process described above will be explained. Figure 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations/minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (S111 is NO), it waits for all reels to rotate at a constant speed before proceeding. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (S111 is YES), it permits each reel to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. In conjunction with this, the operation stop button storage area is updated (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area are stored with "1").

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that no valid stop button has been pressed (S113 is NO), it waits for a valid stop button to be pressed. Note that, when automatic stop control is performed, this waiting time can be measured, and the system can be configured to perform automatic stop control when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

The main CPU 101, upon determining that a valid stop button has been operated (S113 is YES), updates the operating stop button storage area and the button press order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on reel 3L (when stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, bit 0 of the operating stop button storage area is set to "1", and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the button press order storage area are updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if the stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for tracking symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, if the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle section of reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding piece determination process (S117). In this process, for example, it refers to the sliding piece count specified in the aforementioned stop table and the data in the aforementioned retraction priority data storage area to determine the most appropriate sliding piece count (the amount of movement of the pattern).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the planned stopping position based on the stopping start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the symbol position data representing the final stopping position of the symbols, based on the stopping start position stored in the process of S116 and the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117, is stored as the planned stopping position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that specify not only the planned stopping position, but also the starting stopping position and the number of sliding frames.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, it updates the symbol code storage area while also referring to the type of symbol (symbol code) at the planned stopping position for the reels whose stopping positions have already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an active stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are still reels rotating (i.e., whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

The main CPU 101, upon determining that a valid stop button exists (S121 is YES), performs a control modification process (S122). In this process, depending on the player's stop operation up to this point, if changes are necessary, such as to the stop table or reel pull-in priority table set in the initial reel stop setup process described above, the CPU resets the various information necessary for such stop control.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the reel stop priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels, the CPU 101 references the type of symbol at the planned stop position on reels whose planned stop positions have already been determined, and obtains data indicating the reel stop priority by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set reel stop priority table. This data is then stored in the reel stop priority data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns to the process at S113. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that there are no valid stop buttons (S121 is NO), it terminates the reel stop control process.

(Game end state control processing)
Next, with reference to Figure 30, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the main process described above will be explained. Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a check for the fulfillment of game state transition conditions (S131). This check determines whether the transition conditions for transitioning from one game state to another have been met when the game ends. For example, if the game transitions to a predetermined RT state or bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, this process checks whether the predetermined combination of symbols was displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in a predetermined RT state or bonus state, this process checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been met. In the case of the first game machine, this process checks, for example, whether a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB has been displayed. Also, if the game is in a 2BB state or a 3BB state, it checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been met by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the transition conditions for transitioning to any game state have been met (S132). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition conditions for transitioning to any game state have been met (S132 is YES), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the met transition conditions. In the case of the first game machine, for example, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, setting the 2BB state or 3BB state. Also, for example, if the termination conditions for the 2BB state or 3BB state are met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S134). In this process, when it becomes necessary to set the game duration for a given game state or to set the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first game machine, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the payout amount as the termination condition is set to "1," and if the 3BB state is set, the payout amount as the termination condition is set to "176."

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition conditions for transitioning to any game state are not met (S132 is NO), and after processing in S134, it determines whether the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S135). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S135 is YES), it performs a check to confirm that the conditions for starting an advantageous section have been met (S136). As mentioned above, in a non-advantageous section, only processing that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing in S86 (game start state control processing) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous period have been met (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous period have not been met (S137 is NO), it terminates the end-of-game state control processing. If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous period have been met (S137 is YES), it performs the setting processing for the start of the advantageous period (S138). As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing in S88 above (end-of-game state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) for the newly started advantageous period. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that references the determined internal winning combination is possible; therefore, this process is the same as the process in S89 (game start state control processing) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, it performs setting processing as needed, such as setting the game duration (including the maximum number of games, etc.) for that mode, or setting the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous section, only processing that references the determined internal winning combination is possible; therefore, this processing is the same as the processing in S90 (game start state control processing) described above.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (i.e., an advantageous section) (S135 is NO), it performs the end-of-game processing during the advantageous section (S141). Details of the end-of-game processing during the advantageous section will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a check to determine if the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met (S142). This check determines whether the transition conditions (the conditions for ending the advantageous section) for transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section have been met when the game ends. In the case of the first gaming machine, this check, for example, determines whether the activation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of payouts during the advantageous section (see Figure 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the termination mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (S143 is YES), it performs the initialization process at the end of the advantageous period (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous period and sets up a non-advantageous period. In this process, in response to the end of the advantageous period, it performs initialization processing to clear all information related to the advantageous period, such as various counters related to various limit processing (see Figure 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous period, and the game period of that mode (including the number of games until the ceiling, etc.) (i.e., information related to the advantageous period). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the game end state control process. Also, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have not been met (S143 is NO), it terminates the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of gameplay during the advantageous period)
Next, with reference to Figure 31, the processing performed at the end of the game during the advantageous period, which is carried out in S141 of the game end state control processing described above, will be explained. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing at the end of the game during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the end of gameplay) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of payouts during the advantageous period (see Figure 16), various counters managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous period, or other counters managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the type of stop operation, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the system is in a specific mode (AT state) (S152). If the main CPU 101 determines that the system is in a specific mode (S152 is YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this processing, for example, if it is possible to extend the game period of the AT state at the end of the game (for example, extending the number of games or adding sets), it determines whether or not the conditions for such extension are met, and performs processing such as extending the game period based on the result of this determination (if it is possible to shorten the game period of the AT state, it performs processing related to such shortening). In addition, this processing may manage the game period of the AT state regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period of the AT state may be managed in the processing of S151 above, and this processing may only perform processing related to extension. In the case of the first type of gaming machine, this process involves, for example, the aforementioned 1G consecutive win lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section, and then processing to extend the pseudo-bonus according to the result of this lottery.

The main CPU 101 determines if it is not in a specific mode (S152 is NO), and after S153, it determines whether the mode transition conditions have been met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the destination mode has been determined according to the results of the mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition conditions have been met (S154 is YES), it updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transitioned advantageous section. In the case of the first game machine, this process sets the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of entering the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, it performs setting processing as needed, such as setting the game duration (including the maximum number of games, etc.) for that mode, or setting the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process is similar to, for example, the process in S140 described above. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the processing at the end of gameplay during the advantageous section. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has not been met (S154 is NO), it terminates the processing at the end of gameplay during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic Interrupt Processing]
First, with reference to Figure 32, we will explain the periodic interrupt processing performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100. Figure 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for periodic interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (1 interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually performed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in the periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs register saving (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). This process checks the input states (on or off) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73). For example, it compares the input state at the time of the previous interrupt with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether there has been a change in the input state. If there has been a change in the input state, the change is stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Input states that are not affected by the change are stored as they are in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). This process controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). This process transmits the parameters of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. If no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as input status commands.

In this embodiment, various command data are stored in a communication data storage area before being transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 during periodic interrupt processing. However, for example, the various command data may be stored directly in a communication circuit (not shown) provided within the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Furthermore, although detailed explanations are omitted in this embodiment, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via serial communication. However, for example, various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via parallel communication.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED driving processing (S205). This process controls the display content of devices connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73), such as the information display device 14. Following this, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). This process updates various timers managed by the main control circuit 100.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it detects whether various error conditions have occurred based on the input states checked in S202. Next, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S208). In this process, for example, it checks the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. If various error conditions have occurred, or if the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the periodic interrupt processing.

[7. Processing by the sub-control circuit]
Next, with reference to Figure 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. Figure 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the overview of the sub-side control processing.

In pachislo machine 1, various restrictions are imposed on the main control circuit 100 (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activities and modifications. However, there are not as many restrictions on the sub-control circuit 200 (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be configured in various ways depending on the type and number of connected performance devices, the type of performances performed by those devices, and the balance between these factors and manufacturing costs. This is why Figure 33 is labeled "Overview."

First, the sub-CPU 201 performs power-on processing, similar to the main CPU 101, upon power-up (S301 and S302). This processing includes detecting whether an abnormality occurred during power-up, initializing data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and activating various tasks necessary for the various performance execution control processes described later.

Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it performs command reception and performance execution control processing (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, if an initialization command is received, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the parameter information of the received initialization command. If a setting change has been made, the sub-CPU performs the appropriate initialization process; if no setting change has been made, the sub-CPU performs a process to restore the state to what it was before the power outage.

Furthermore, for example, upon receiving a start command, the system refers to the parameter information of the received start command. If the system is not in AT mode, it determines (by drawing lots as necessary) the content of the animation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination or game state, and controls various animation devices to execute the animation based on the determined content. If the system is in AT mode, in addition to the above, it also determines the content of the animation that notifies a favorable stopping operation pattern, and controls various animation devices to execute the animation based on the determined content.

Furthermore, for example, upon receiving a lock command, the system refers to the parameter information of the received lock command to determine the content of the animation linked to the lock animation, and controls various animation devices to execute the determined animation. Similarly, upon receiving a reel stop command, the system refers to the parameter information of the received reel stop command to determine the content of the animation linked to the stop start position, planned stop position (or simply which stop operation was performed), and controls various animation devices to execute the determined animation. Furthermore, upon receiving a prize activation command, the system refers to the parameter information of the received prize activation command to determine the content of the animation linked to the awarded prize, and controls various animation devices to execute the determined animation.

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 performs control processing for the execution of performance actions when the performance buttons 10a and 10b, which are connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), are operated (S305 and S306). In this processing, for example, if a performance button corresponding to a performance is operated during the execution of an operation-linked performance, the sub-CPU 201 controls various performance devices so that the content of the operation-linked performance changes. Also, for example, if a performance button is operated during non-gameplay to call the user menu (described later), the sub-CPU 201 performs control to display the user menu. Furthermore, if a performance button is operated for selection or confirmation while the user menu is displayed, the sub-CPU 201 performs control according to these operations.

Furthermore, if a trigger other than those mentioned above occurs, the sub-CPU 201 performs other performance execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, if a predetermined period of inactivity (e.g., about 30 seconds) occurs during which no game-related operations or user menu operations are performed, the sub-CPU 201 determines the content of the performance related to the demo status notification and controls various performance devices to execute the determined performance.

[8. Other functions of pachislo machines]
As described above, pachislo machine 1 is equipped with various functions to control gameplay and various functions to control the effects, as well as various configurations to realize these functions. However, it may also be equipped with other functions, such as those shown below. Below, we will explain some examples of other functions on the player's side and some examples of other functions on the arcade's side.

[8-1. Player's Side]
For example, when a player controls the game's presentation, a user menu is displayed. If the player selects a desired menu item from that menu, and then makes appropriate selection and confirmation operations within that menu, the player can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, if the "Symbol Arrangement/Payout Table" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display unit showing the symbol arrangement in pachislo machine 1, the specified symbol combinations, and the payouts (bonus details) upon winning.

Furthermore, for example, if "Volume/Brightness Adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display unit, allowing the user to adjust the brightness of various display devices in the pachislo machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, or the brightness of the lamps/LEDs. In such settings, to enable more detailed settings or to facilitate easier acceptance of setting operations, the various operation units that receive player game operations may be used as part of the operation unit that receives setting operations (i.e., the operation unit that receives performance operations).

Furthermore, if "Custom" is selected and confirmed, for example, a settings screen will be displayed on the performance display unit, allowing the user to configure the performance mode of the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used in the performance (including the type of the character (display mode) itself, the type of sound corresponding to the character, or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of the performance occurring (including the type of expected value when the performance occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (including the timing of the performance execution), etc.). In such settings, to enable more detailed settings or to facilitate easier acceptance of setting operations, various operation units that accept player game operations may be used as part of the operation unit that accepts setting operations (i.e., the operation unit that accepts performance operations).

Furthermore, if "UniMemo" is selected, for example, players can receive information services using their mobile devices (e.g., mobile phones or smartphones). This information service allows players to log in and start playing (or start playing without logging in), and then log out at the end of the game to view or retrieve game history information (for example, the total number of games played, the number of times advantageous game states occurred, the highest number of tokens won, and other information related to the game's results).

Furthermore, the game history information also includes information about associated bonuses, such as the types of characters that became available to display and the types of music that became available to output during gameplay, depending on the game's outcome (fulfillment of unlocking conditions), as well as information about the types of characters that became available to display and the types of music that became available to output on the player's mobile device.

Furthermore, various methods can be employed for login and logout in such information provision services. For example, login and logout could be performed by having the player scan a QR code displayed on the display unit using their terminal. Alternatively, login and logout could be performed by having the player enter a password or remember a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, a 4- to 10-digit string could be displayed as a password for the next time, instead of a QR code, which the player could then write down on paper or take a picture of with their mobile device, and then enter this password when logging in before the next game). These methods can also be combined as appropriate for login and logout.

[8-2. On the side of the amusement parlor]
For example, if the administrator of the gaming establishment performs a setting confirmation operation (which may be a setting change operation or any other operation performed by the administrator of the gaming establishment), the hall menu will be displayed. If the desired menu is selected from that hall menu, and further selection and confirmation operations are performed for the selected menu, the administrator of the gaming establishment will be able to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, if "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display unit, allowing the date and time of the pachislo machine 1 to be set. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in Figure 33).

Furthermore, if, for example, "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display unit showing historical information such as the number of medals inserted and dispensed during a predetermined period (for example, each of seven business days) in the pachislo machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu within the user menu.

Furthermore, if, for example, "Setting Change/Confirmation History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display unit showing historical information such as the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each of seven business days) on the pachislo machine 1. Also, if, for example, "Error Information History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display unit showing historical information such as the date and time of errors and their details within a predetermined period (for example, each of seven business days) on the pachislo machine 1.

Furthermore, if, for example, "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display unit that allows users to check history information such as the date and time the doors were opened and the duration of those openings within a predetermined period (for example, each of seven business days) in the pachislo machine 1. Also, if, for example, "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display unit that allows users to configure the type and frequency of various warning notifications in the pachislo machine 1.

Furthermore, for example, if "Power Saving Mode Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display unit, allowing the user to configure whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislo machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu within the user menu. Additionally, in order to enable more detailed settings or to facilitate easier acceptance of setting operations, various control units that accept player game operations may be used as part of the control unit that accepts setting operations (i.e., the control unit that accepts performance operations).

Furthermore, if, for example, the "stop setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display unit that allows setting whether or not to activate the stop function in pachislo machine 1. The stop function refers to a function that, when predetermined operating conditions are met, renders the machine unplayable until a release operation (e.g., a reset operation) is performed by the administrator of the amusement parlor. The predetermined operating conditions may be, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit processing described above, or when a specific state (e.g., a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantageous section (including the performance section)) ends. Also, when the stop function is set to ON, the automatic settlement function described later may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

Furthermore, if, for example, "Automatic Settlement Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display unit, allowing users to configure whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in pachislo machine 1. The automatic settlement function refers to a function that automatically settles credits (i.e., all credited game value is automatically returned) when predetermined operating conditions are met. These predetermined operating conditions may be, for example, met when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the execution of the aforementioned limit processing, or when a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase section, or an advantageous section (including the performance section)) ends. Additionally, if the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the aforementioned stop-play function may also be set to ON in conjunction with it.

Furthermore, when setting the stop-play function or automatic settlement function, in order to enable more detailed settings or to simplify the acceptance of setting operations, various control units that accept player game operations may be used as part of the control unit that accepts operations related to the said settings (i.e., the control unit that accepts performance operations). However, in this case, since it is undesirable to unnecessarily increase the number of control units that can accept operations, it may be possible to use only a specific control unit (for example, the stop button) as part of the control unit that accepts operations related to the said settings.

[9. Examples of extensions]
Up to this point, the invention according to this embodiment has been described using pachislo machine 1 as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied. However, the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, it can also be applied to gaming machines commonly referred to as "pachinko machines" or "slot machines," and similar effects can be obtained. In other words, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine that is capable of performing a game (controlling the game) in accordance with the player's game actions (operations). Furthermore, the configuration and functions of gaming machines, including pachislo machine 1, are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. The following describes some examples of such extensions.

(Pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine includes, for example, a game board having a game area in which game balls can roll down, a glass door including protective glass that allows the game area to be seen from the outside while protecting it, a display device for effects provided in a predetermined area of the game area (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit for dispensing game balls, and a circuit board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to the game and effects, and these are supported by a frame (sometimes simply referred to as a "frame").

Furthermore, the front of a pachinko machine is equipped with, for example, a launch handle as one of the player's operating mechanisms, an upper tray for storing game balls used in the game, and a lower tray for storing dispensed game balls. Many machines also feature the aforementioned buttons and movable display devices for special effects. The game area also includes, for example, a starting area (sometimes called a "starting opening") through which game balls can pass, a specific area (sometimes called a "V-prize opening"), a variable prize-winning device (sometimes called a "large prize opening") that can switch between a state where game balls are more likely to enter and a state where they are less likely to enter, and a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (sometimes called "symbols," including "special symbols" and "regular symbols").

In a pachinko machine, the player operates the launch handle to fire a game ball into the game area. For example, when the launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display starts. At this time, a probability is determined, depending on the current state (for example, whether it is a probability variation game state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area, to determine whether or not to transition to a different game state (for example, whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state or a minor win game state that is advantageous to the player). (That is, whether or not to transition to a different game state is determined by a lottery (or judgment)). Subsequently, when the conditions for stopping the variable display (for example, when the set variation time has ended) are met, the variable display stops in a manner corresponding to the above determination result. At this time, if the above determination result is one that transitions to a different game state (a win), the stopping manner will also be the display result corresponding to that win, and the game will transition to the game state corresponding to that win when that display result is displayed. On the other hand, if the above decision result does not result in a change of game state (a loss), the stopping pattern will also be a display result corresponding to a loss, and the game state will not change. However, for example, if the launched game ball passes through a specific area (which is usually a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), a change in game state will be determined regardless of the variable display device.

In other words, while pachislo machine 1 starts when the player bets the required number of tokens and performs the start operation, pachinko machine starts when the player launches the required number of game balls by operating the launch handle, and for example, when the game balls pass through the starting area, both machines start in the same way that the game is initiated by the player's actions. Furthermore, pachislo machine 1 and pachinko machine share the commonality that the final stopping pattern permitted to be displayed (in other words, the content of the granted reward) is determined when the start trigger is met.

Furthermore, while pachislot machine 1 differs in that the variable display is stopped by the player's stop operation, and pachinko machine stops the variable display when a stop condition is met (without the player's stop operation), both machines stop the variable display according to a predetermined result and grant benefits according to the type of stop. Also, pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machine are similar in that they are capable of executing game-related effects. For example, the above-mentioned effect display device functions as the effect display unit and information display unit described above. Of course, pachinko machines may also be equipped with the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other effect execution means, and may execute effects using these.

In pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (sometimes referred to as "identification information") on the above-mentioned display device are often displayed in a variable manner. As mentioned above, the actual game result is displayed on the variable display device, but because the variable display device is small and the display result is shown by the lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for players to recognize the game result. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed so that the decorative symbols on the above-mentioned display device are displayed in a variable manner (and stopped) in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device, allowing players to play the game. Furthermore, the display of such decorative patterns, while sometimes delayed for a certain period after the trigger is met for dramatic effect, or temporarily stopped before the stop condition is met, is fundamentally similar to the variable display device described above. It displays identification information in a variable or stopped manner according to the progress of the game (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative patterns are displayed in a special stopping pattern (e.g., matching patterns), while in the case of a loss, the decorative patterns are displayed in a non-special stopping pattern (e.g., scattered patterns)). Therefore, it is possible to apply the invention according to this embodiment by considering this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various aspects described as the configuration of the external or internal structure of the pachislo machine 1 can be applied to the external or internal structure of a pachinko machine, except for those with properties unique to the pachislo machine 1 (for example, those that require tokens and cannot be replaced with game balls).

Furthermore, in pachinko machines, various controls related to gameplay are performed by the main control circuit, which acts as the game control unit, mounted on the main control board (including, in some cases, payout controls, which are performed by the payout control circuit mounted on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to the visual effects are performed by the sub-control circuit, which acts as the visual effect control unit, mounted on the sub-control board. Therefore, the various matters described as the electrical configuration of pachislo machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those with properties unique to pachislo machine 1 (for example, those related to stopping operations).

Furthermore, in pachislot machine 1, as described above, it is possible to provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or, depending on the configuration, may be disadvantageous), such as bonus states, RT states, AT states, and ART states that combine these. For example, in bonus states, by making the drawing method for small wins more favorable than in non-bonus states, it is possible to maintain a state where medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time. In RT states, by making the drawing method for replay wins more favorable than in non-RT states, it is possible to maintain a state where misses are less likely to occur (and as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time. In AT states, by notifying the player of advantageous stopping operation patterns, it is possible to maintain a state where medals are more likely to be awarded (increased) for a certain period of time.

In response to this, it is possible to provide various game states with similar properties in pachinko machines. For example, in the jackpot and minor jackpot game states, the variable prize-winning device is controlled differently than usual, making it possible to shift to a state where game balls are more likely to enter, thereby allowing a state where game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) to continue for a certain period. Furthermore, for example, in the time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as the "electric support state"), the normal symbols are controlled differently than usual, making it possible to make it easier for game balls to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of draws by the variable display device and allowing a state where game balls do not decrease easily to continue for a certain period. Also, for example, in the probability-changing game state, the special symbols are controlled differently than usual, making it possible to maintain a state where the probability of winning by the variable display device is higher (resulting in a state where game balls increase easily) for a certain period.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various aspects described as control configurations related to the transition (or shift) of game states in the pachislo machine 1 can be applied to the control configurations related to the transition (or shift) of game states in a pachinko machine, except for those with properties unique to the pachislo machine 1 (for example, those involving transitions between game sections). The same applies to other aspects of the pachislo machine 1's gameplay described elsewhere.

Furthermore, regarding the shortened play state, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to transition to the shortened play state when the number of games played in the non-shortened play state (normal play state) reaches a predetermined number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that allows transitioning to an advantageous state (e.g., shortened play state) as a relief measure when an unfavorable state (e.g., normal play state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without transitioning to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot play state)). Therefore, the various matters described regarding the ceiling function configuration of pachislot machine 1 can also be applied to the ceiling function configuration of pachinko machines.

Furthermore, even in the case of a shortened play state, in pachinko machines, if the stop pattern of the variable display device corresponds to a specific losing result during a non-shortened play state (normal play state), it is possible to transition to a shortened play state as a trigger. In other words, in pachinko machines, it is possible to transition to a play state (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot play state, etc.) by displaying a specific display result (a specific combination of symbols). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as the configuration for the transition (transition) of the RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols in pachislot machine 1 can be applied to the configuration for the transition (transition) of the shortened play state due to the display of a specific display result in a pachinko machine.

(Coinless gaming machine)
In this embodiment of the pachislo machine 1, the game starts with the player making a bet (i.e., inserting their tokens into the token slot 5 to place a bet, or betting credited tokens by operating the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b), and when the game ends and there are tokens to be paid out, the hopper device 32 is driven to pay out tokens from the token payout port 11, or the tokens are credited. However, the configuration of the pachislo machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment is applicable to all forms in which a player bets the game value necessary for the game, the game is played based on that bet, and a reward (for example, game value is awarded) is given based on the result of the game. That is, it is applicable not only to forms in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and dispensed by the player's actions, but also to pachislo machines 1 that electromagnetically manage the game value held by the player (or, even if not electromagnetically, manage it in a manner that prevents the player from directly touching the game value), enabling medalless gameplay. Here, such a pachislo machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless game machine." Note that medalless game machines are sometimes referred to as "managed game machines" or "sealed game machines."

Furthermore, the electromagnetic management of the game value held by the player may be performed by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself, or by a game value management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal count control board"). An example of how this game value management device is provided will be described below.

The game value management device is a device installed in the pachislo machine 1, comprising at least ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is connected to an external game value provisioning device (hereinafter, such a game value provisioning device may be described as a "communication-only unit") via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be described as a "connection terminal board") in a bidirectional manner. The game value management device can perform operations such as game value lending (i.e., operations that provide game value necessary for the player to bet game value), game value granting (i.e., operations that provide the granting game value to the player when a winning combination related to the granting of game value is achieved), and operations that electromagnetically record the game value provided by these operations. The game value provisioning device may be referred to as a "game value (game medium) handling device," a "game value (game medium) lending device," or a "sandbox," etc.

Furthermore, the external gaming value provision device is connected to an external payout management device (payout management server). The gaming value management device is configured to transmit payout management information to the external payout management device via a communication device and the external gaming value provision device. Here, the payout management information consists of various types of information necessary for the external payout management device to manage payouts. An example of payout management information will be described later. The connection between the external gaming value provision device and the external payout management device is, for example, via an internet connection.

Here, "payout" directly refers to the number of game tokens dispensed. However, in this embodiment, it also encompasses concepts such as the degree to which benefits are granted to the player (e.g., how much the player profited (how much the arcade lost), or how much the player lost (how much the arcade profited), the duration of advantageous states (e.g., bonus states, AT states, or a series of advantageous periods), or the degree of gambling potential expected from combinations of these factors.

Furthermore, for example, a display device (not shown) showing the number of game values held may be provided on the front side of the pachislo machine 1, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this display device based on the management results of the number of game values. That is, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that the player can use for playing by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is desirable that the game value management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values to an external game value providing device, that the recorded number of game values cannot be reduced except by direct operation by the player, and that the signal indicating the recorded number of game values can only be transmitted via a communication device.

Furthermore, the game value management device may not only have the function of electromagnetically managing the player's game value using an external game value provisioning device, but may also have the function of managing the number of game values bet by the player's physical actions and the number of game values paid out by the physical actions of the pachislo machine 1. In other words, it may also be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of tokens in a conventional pachislo machine 1. In this way, the pachislo machine 1 can be controlled using conventional methods, or using methods such as the aforementioned tokenless game machine, thus allowing for a common configuration regardless of the specifications of the pachislo machine 1. Also, in this case, the game value management device may directly control the selector 31 and hopper device 32, or it may be indirectly controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), with the control results being transmitted.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, the pachislo machine 1 should be equipped with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medalless gaming machine, such as lending and return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value provision device should also be equipped with various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable items like banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, as well as various operating means necessary for the operation of a medalless gaming machine, such as lending and return operating means that can be operated by the player (none of which are shown). Note that the insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued by the gaming parlor on the day, but also member recording media held by members of the gaming parlor. The gaming value recorded on the non-member recording media is valid only on the day of issue (it becomes invalid from the following day onwards), but the gaming value recorded on the member recording media remains valid from the following day onwards.

Let's explain an example of the game flow in this case. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value provision device using one of the methods. The game value provision device subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value in response to the player's operation of one of the lending operation means, and provides the pachislo machine 1 with game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable value. The player then plays the game, and if more game value is needed, repeats the above operation. After that, when the player has acquired a predetermined number of game value as a result of the game and is ready to end the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game value to the game value provision device in response to the player's operation of one of the return operation means. The game value provision device ejects a recording medium that has recorded the transmitted number of game value. The game value management device clears the number of game value it has stored when it transmits the number of game value. Players can take the dispensed recording medium to a prize exchange center to exchange it for prizes, or they can insert the dispensed recording medium into a game value provision device compatible with another pachislo machine and continue playing. Furthermore, if the dispensed recording medium is a member recording medium, it remains valid for subsequent days, allowing players to stop playing at that point.

In the example above, the game value management device transmitted the total game value to the game value provision device in response to the player's return operation. However, depending on the nature of the player's return operation, the system may be configured to transmit only the game value desired by the player. In other words, the game value held by the player may be divided. Furthermore, while the game value provision device recorded the transmitted game value on a recording medium and discharged it, it may also transmit information of equivalent value to the player's mobile terminal using the aforementioned contactless communication antenna, or it may discharge, for example, cash or cash equivalents, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

Furthermore, the pachislo machine 1 or the game value provisioning device may be provided with a lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and in response to the operation of this lock operation means, it may be possible to control the device to a state where communication between the game value management device and the game value provisioning device is impossible (locked state). In this case, the pachislo machine 1 or the game value provisioning device may be configured to allow authentication processing such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the lock state may be released when the result of the authentication processing is successful.

As described above, with the coinless gaming machine, compared to a machine where the gaming medium is physically used for gameplay, some external structures such as the coin slot 5 and coin payout port 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32, become unnecessary. This not only reduces the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine, but also reduces its power consumption. Furthermore, since accessing the inside of the gaming machine becomes more difficult, fraudulent activities against the machine can be prevented. In addition, because players do not directly touch the gaming medium, the gaming environment is improved and noise is reduced. In short, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine that improves various aspects of the environment surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example configuration of a coinless gaming machine)
Next, with reference to Figure 34, an example configuration of the pachislo machine 1 when it is configured as a coinless gaming machine will be described. Figure 34 is a diagram showing an example configuration of a coinless gaming machine. In the following, we will mainly describe an example configuration when a coin count control board (game value management device) is provided.

As described above, the medal count control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value) held by the player. The medal count control board is also connected to a dedicated communication unit (game value provision device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Furthermore, the medal count control board transmits payout management information to the payout management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. The medal count control board also incorporates a medal count control circuit (not shown). This control circuit, for example, includes a medal count control CPU (not shown), a medal count control ROM (not shown), and a medal count control RWM (not shown).

Furthermore, the payout management device is, for example, a server managed by an information center of a cooperative to which amusement machine manufacturers belong. The purpose of this device is to monitor whether the gambling aspect (payout performance) of each amusement machine is appropriate, by accumulating the transmitted payout management information.

Therefore, from this perspective, the medal count control board and connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, play important functions in the pachislo machine 1, and thus need to be installed inside the pachislo machine 1 in a manner that prevents fraudulent activity and unauthorized modification. Configuration examples 1 and 2 shown in Figure 34 illustrate examples of such configurations.

<Configuration Example 1>
The configuration example 1 shown in Figure 34 shows that the medal count control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually sealed in various ways to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to allow for the recognition of evidence of opening (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing by crimping, attaching sealing stickers, or attaching crimp stickers that record the cutting of the crimp).

Therefore, by housing the medal count control board and connection terminal board within the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent activities and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration Example 2>
The configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 shows that, unlike the configuration example 1 described above, the medal count control board and connection terminal board are housed in a separate medal count control board case, which is provided separately from the main control board case. The medal count control board case is constructed as a transparent (or semi-transparent) resin case, similar to the main control board case, so that the medal count control board and connection terminal board housed inside are easily visible.

In the medal count control board case of Configuration Example 2, the same sealing process as the main control board case can be applied, or at least a portion of the sealing process can be applied. For example, the medal count control board case may be sealed by crimping, similar to the main control board case, but without a sealing sticker. Furthermore, while the main control board case may be required to use a predetermined crimping sticker, the medal count control board case may be allowed to use any sticker as the crimping sticker.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in Figure 34 illustrates an example of various data stored in the payout management device. Specifically, it shows an example of payout management information transmitted from the medal count control board to the payout management device via the connection terminal board and dedicated communication unit. Note that this is merely an example, and it is possible to configure the device to not transmit some of the various types of information shown in Figure 34, or to transmit information other than the various types of information shown in Figure 34.

Furthermore, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the dedicated communication unit is arbitrary, and the timing at which the dedicated communication unit transmits information to the payout management device is also arbitrary. As long as the payout management device can monitor the payout performance of each gaming machine at least for each unit (for example, one business day of a gaming parlor), the transmission timing may be arbitrary. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the dedicated communication unit and the timing at which the dedicated communication unit transmits information to the payout management device may be different. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the dedicated communication unit may vary depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "Total Number of Coins Inserted" represents the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit since the power was turned on for each gaming machine. For example, the coin count control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operations (excluding those bet through the re-play function) to a dedicated communication unit at predetermined timings (e.g., after each game). The dedicated communication unit then transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at predetermined timings (e.g., at the end of business hours for the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "Total Payouts" represents the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values assigned by the gaming machine's payout process (excluding those assigned through re-play) to a dedicated communication unit at predetermined timings (e.g., after each game). The dedicated communication unit then transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at predetermined timings (e.g., at the end of business hours for the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "MY" represents the maximum difference in tokens generated within one unit since the power was turned on for each gaming machine (in short, the difference in tokens obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most within one unit; this is referred to as "MY"). For example, the token count control board calculates this maximum difference in tokens and transmits the calculated information to a dedicated communication unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the gaming parlor). The dedicated communication unit then transmits this information to the token management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data, "Total Payouts from Special Features," represents the cumulative payout per unit since the power was turned on for each gaming machine, and specifically, the cumulative payouts during the operation of various special features. For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of game values assigned by the gaming machine's payout process during the operation of various special features to a dedicated communication unit at predetermined timings (e.g., after each game during the operation of various special features). The dedicated communication unit then transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at predetermined timings (e.g., at the end of business hours for the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data, "Total Payouts from Continuous Bonus Features," represents the cumulative payout per unit since the power was turned on for each gaming machine, and specifically, the cumulative payouts during the operation of continuous bonus features (RB, including RB during BB operation). For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of game values assigned by the gaming machine's payout process during the operation of continuous bonus features to a dedicated communication unit at predetermined timings (e.g., after each game during the operation of continuous bonus features). The dedicated communication unit then transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at predetermined timings (e.g., at the end of business hours for the gaming parlor).

Furthermore, the medal count control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the payout ratio monitor device 54 to the dedicated communication unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the payout ratio monitor device 54), and the dedicated communication unit transmits this information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). Note that the stored data "payout ratio" corresponds to, for example, the payout ratio information described above; the stored data "continuous payout ratio" corresponds to, for example, the continuous payout ratio information described above; the stored data "advantageous section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the specific section ratio information described above; the stored data "payout ratio including instructions" corresponds to, for example, the payout ratio information described above that is also included in the aggregation and calculation even during the AT state; and the stored data "payout status ratio" corresponds to, for example, the specific section ratio information described above that is also included in the aggregation and calculation even while various payouts are operating.

The accumulated data, "Number of Games Played," represents the cumulative number of games played per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of games played to a dedicated communication unit at predetermined timings (e.g., after each game), and the dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at predetermined timings (e.g., at the end of business hours for the gaming parlor).

The stored data, "Main Control Chip ID Number," is the individual identification number (also called "CPUID," referred to as the "Chip ID Number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the dedicated communication unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. The dedicated communication unit, when transmitting various information to the payout management device, transmits information including this transmitted individual identification number.

The stored data, "Main Control Chip Manufacturer Code," is the manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the dedicated communication unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code. The dedicated communication unit, in turn, transmits information including this transmitted manufacturer code to the payout management device.

The stored data, "Main Control Chip Product Code," is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the dedicated communication unit, it transmits information including this product code. The dedicated communication unit, in turn, transmits information including this transmitted product code to the payout management device.

The stored data, "Medal Count Control Chip ID Number," is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the dedicated communication unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. The dedicated communication unit, in turn, transmits information including this transmitted individual identification number to the payout management device. Note that if the system is configured so that various information is transmitted to the dedicated communication unit via the main control board 71 without a medal count control board, this information will be "0".

The stored data, "Medal Count Control Chip Manufacturer Code," is the manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM in the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the dedicated communication unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code. The dedicated communication unit, in turn, transmits information including this transmitted manufacturer code to the payout management device. Note that if the system is configured so that various information is transmitted to the dedicated communication unit via the main control board 71 without a medal count control board, this information will be "0".

The stored data, "Medal Count Control Chip Product Code," is the product code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM in the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board transmits various information to the dedicated communication unit, it transmits information including this product code. The dedicated communication unit, in turn, transmits information including this transmitted product code to the payout management device. Note that if the system is configured so that various information is transmitted to the dedicated communication unit via the main control board 71 without a medal count control board, this information will be "0".

Thus, the payout management device is capable of storing various types of information (payout management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. Furthermore, the payout management information includes multiple individual identification pieces of information that can identify a specific gaming machine (for example, the "main control chip ID number" to the "medal count control chip product code" mentioned above). Therefore, the payout management device can identify the source gaming machine using this individual identification information. Moreover, if, for example, the correspondence between the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal count control chip ID number" changes at some point, the device can recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (i.e., the possibility of fraudulent activity or modification).

Furthermore, the payout management information includes multiple payout data points that identify the payout performance per unit (for example, the "total number of tokens inserted" to the "number of games played" mentioned above). Therefore, the payout management device can recognize whether the gambling potential of the transmitting gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on this payout information. For example, if the "total number of tokens paid out" or the "ratio of bonus items with instructions" suddenly becomes significantly high, the device can recognize the possibility of fraudulent activity or modification, or the possibility of some flaw in the original design specifications.

Furthermore, if the payout management device detects the aforementioned possibilities, the results will be notified to the amusement parlor or amusement machine manufacturer, and appropriate measures can be expected to be taken. In other words, a management system is constructed that includes multiple managed amusement machines, a gaming value provision device (communication-only unit) that transmits payout management information from the managed amusement machines to the payout management device, and a payout management device that manages the payout performance of each managed amusement machine based on the transmitted payout management information. This makes it possible to properly manage all managed amusement machines under control.

<Variation 1>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the number of game tokens held by a player can be managed by a token count control board. Therefore, a token count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the token count control board so that the manager of the gaming parlor can grasp this management status or other information.

The medal count monitor device is, for example, composed of a four-digit seven-segment LED and is installed inside the medal count control board case. The medal count monitor device sequentially displays various information related to the game value (for example, some or all of the aforementioned payout management information) aggregated and calculated by the medal count control CPU (or the main CPU 101). If the medal count monitor device displays all the information displayed by the payout ratio monitor device 54, the payout ratio monitor device 54 may be omitted. Alternatively, the payout ratio monitor device 54 may be used in conjunction with the medal count monitor device.

Furthermore, the medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board connected to the medal count control board (for example, a connection terminal board). It may also be located elsewhere within the cabinet G. For example, it may be mounted on the medal count control board case. Additionally, a control switch for starting or switching the display content of the medal count monitor device may be provided within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Furthermore, assuming the use of such a control switch, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in conjunction with the medal count monitor device.

Furthermore, the medal count monitor device may display the type of error that has occurred when various error conditions related to it occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, a communication error occurs with the game value provision device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal count control RWM, the device may display a corresponding numerical value. In this case, to allow the manager of the amusement parlor to easily recognize which error condition the displayed numerical value corresponds to, an explanatory section (such as a sticker or printing) indicating the correspondence should be provided on or near the medal count control board case.

<Modified Example 2>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to transmit payout management information to the outside via a connection terminal board. In this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of components but also reduces external wiring, thereby enhancing security.

Furthermore, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a single unit. Alternatively, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are placed in close proximity within the cabinet G. This improves work efficiency during connection. Additionally, the length of the wiring can be kept constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, thereby enhancing security.

<Example 3>
As described above, a medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit payout management information to a payout management device. The payout management device can then appropriately manage the payout performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted payout management information. Therefore, assuming that the payout performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the aforementioned limiter may be omitted. In other words, the machine may not have a function to forcibly terminate the advantageous period based on the fulfillment of certain regulatory conditions.

Furthermore, the medal count control board may be equipped with a function to appropriately manage payout performance, and assuming that payout performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the aforementioned limiter may be omitted. In other words, the system may not have a function to forcibly terminate the advantageous period based on the fulfillment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal count control board may be configured to include a payout monitoring RWM (which may be the aforementioned medal count control RWM or another RWM). The payout monitoring RWM monitors payouts by, for example, being initialized when settings are changed but not initialized when the advantageous period ends. If the monitored payout exceeds a certain threshold, control may be implemented to reduce payout performance by, for example, not forcibly ending the advantageous period itself, but reducing the probability of navigation occurrences, reducing the probability of AT state extension, or ending the AT state itself. This also allows for appropriate management of payout performance. In this case, such control results may be transmitted to the payout management device as payout management information. That is, both the medal count control board and the payout management device may be configured to manage the payout performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of the main control board configuration for a pachislo machine)
Next, with reference to Figure 35, an example of the configuration of the main control board 71 of the pachislo machine 1 will be described. Figure 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, we will mainly describe an example of a reuse (repurposing) configuration of the main control board 71.

As described above, the specifications of the main control board 71 in pachislo machine 1 are subject to various constraints. One of these constraints is the requirement that the manufacturer's name and board management number be printed on the main control board 71. The manufacturer's name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that produces pachislo machine 1, and the management number is a number used to identify the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration Example 1 shown in Figure 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board management number are printed in text on the main control board 71, as in the conventional method. Here, in Configuration Example 1 shown in Figure 35, it is assumed that a pachislo machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "Model A") equipped with the main control board 71 was first manufactured by BB Corporation. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer's name "BB Corporation" and board management number "BB-00-11-22" are printed on the lower section. Subsequently, when Model A is removed from the amusement parlor, for example, if AA Corporation tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislo machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "Model B"), AA Corporation must laser-etch the manufacturer's name and board management number that were printed on the lower section and newly print its own manufacturing number and board management number (for example, the manufacturer's name "AA Corporation" and board management number "AA-00-11-22" on the upper section of Configuration Example 1 shown in Figure 35) in a different space.

Furthermore, if, after machine B is removed from the amusement parlor, and for example, BB Corporation attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislo machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "machine C"), BB Corporation would have to laser-engrave the manufacturer's name and board management number printed on the upper section and print its own manufacturing number and board management number in a different space. However, in the configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35, there is no more available space. Therefore, even though the hardware is still perfectly reusable, there is a problem in that the main control board 71 may not be reusable due to the aforementioned constraints.

This also applies if multiple manufacturer names and board management numbers were printed from the outset. For example, even if manufacturing numbers and board management numbers for both AA Corporation and BB Corporation were pre-printed, the manufacturing numbers and board management numbers for AA Corporation would be laser-etched off during the manufacturing of model A. Therefore, while reuse might be possible for BB Corporation, it would not be possible for AA Corporation. In contrast, configuration examples 2 and 3 below are expected to resolve the above-mentioned problem. Specifically, the reusability of boards used for game control, such as the main control board 71, can be improved.

<Configuration Example 2>
Example configuration 2 shown in Figure 35 illustrates the printing of a code that includes the manufacturer's name and board management number. In Example configuration 2 shown in Figure 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code that includes the manufacturer's name and board management number, but a JAN code (barcode) or other codes can be used. In other words, the code can be anything as long as it contains information that allows the verifier to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and board management number by some means (e.g., a mobile terminal).

In the configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, assuming that model A was manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. This code contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and circuit board management number related to BB Corporation. Later, when model A is removed from the arcade and, for example, AA Corporation attempts to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed, and the first code from the right is removed by laser engraving. This second code contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and circuit board management number related to AA Corporation.

Subsequently, when machine B is removed from the amusement parlor, and for example BB Corporation attempts to manufacture machine C, the third code from the right is printed, and the second code from the right is laser-engraved and removed. The third code from the right contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Corporation. Later, when machine C is removed from the amusement parlor, and for example AA Corporation attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislo machine 1, AA Corporation can reuse the main control board 71 in yet another pachislo machine 1 by laser-engraving the third code from the right and printing the fourth code from the right, ensuring that the fourth code contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

In other words, in the configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, by printing the manufacturer's name and board management number, the printing space for each manufacturer's name and board management number on the surface of the main control board 71 can be saved. Therefore, compared to the configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35, its reusability can be improved.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration Example 3 shown in Figure 35, similar to Configuration Example 2 described above, shows that codes including the manufacturer's name and board management number are printed. In Configuration Example 3 shown in Figure 35, multiple codes (for example, four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes each for AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed. Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the areas corresponding to each code can be fixed in a state where they cannot be read by crimping them with, for example, a strip-shaped member. Conversely, the fixing can be released and the codes can be made readable by, for example, cutting the strip-shaped member.

In the configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, assuming that machine A was initially manufactured by BB Corporation, only the first code from the right is readable, while the second to fourth codes from the right are unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and circuit board management number related to BB Corporation. Subsequently, when machine A is removed from the arcade and, for example, AA Corporation attempts to manufacture machine B, only the second code from the right is readable, while the first, third, and fourth codes from the right are unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and circuit board management number related to AA Corporation.

Subsequently, when machine B is removed from the amusement parlor, and for example BB Corporation attempts to manufacture machine C, only the third code from the right is made readable, while the first, second, and fourth codes from the right are made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that identifies the manufacturing number and board management number related to BB Corporation. Later, when machine C is removed from the amusement parlor, and for example AA Corporation attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislo machine 1, AA Corporation can reuse the main control board 71 in yet another pachislo machine 1 by making only the fourth code from the right readable and making the first to third codes from the right unreadable.

Furthermore, in the configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, further reuse is possible, and it is also possible to reuse the machine by a wider range of gaming machine manufacturers. Note that in the configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, it is also possible to provide only crimping holes and print the codes at the locations corresponding to the crimping holes each time the machine is reused.

[10. The second type of gaming machine]
Next, referring to Figures 36 to 43, another specific example of the specifications related to the gameplay of the pachislo machine 1 will be described as the "second game machine." In the explanations of Figures 36 to 40, the x and y axes shown in the figures will be used as appropriate. All configurations of the pachislo machine 1 not shown in the explanations of Figures 36 to 40 are subject to the embodiments described in Figures 1 to 35.

[10.1. Schematic Configuration of the Speaker System]
The speaker device 400 used in the second gaming machine is a speaker device in which two speaker units (first speaker unit 500 and second speaker unit 600) that emit sound waves of the same frequency band are arranged coaxially. The outline of the speaker device 400 will be described below with reference to Figures 36(a) to (c).

As shown in Figure 36(a), the speaker device 400 comprises a first speaker unit 500 and a second speaker unit 600 housed (mounted) in a housing (referred to as "cabinet G" in Figure 1) 401 having a circular opening 411 as shown in Figure 36(b). The first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 have the same frequency band for sound waves they emit, and both use dynamic speaker units of the same structure that output waveforms of the same shape. In the second gaming machine, the speaker device 400 is housed in the housing 401, but it may also be housed (mounted) in a front door (referred to as "upper door mechanism UD" or "lower door mechanism DD" in Figure 1) having an opening equivalent to the opening 411.

The first speaker unit 500 has the structure of a typical dynamic speaker unit. A brief overview of the first speaker unit 500 will be provided below with reference to Figure 36(c).

The first speaker unit 500 has a yoke 502 consisting of a disc-shaped portion 502a and a cylindrical portion 502b with a central axis 501 as its central axis. In the first speaker unit 500, a cylindrical bobbin 504 with an electromagnetic coil (also called a "voice coil") 503 wound around the central axis 501 is arranged on portion 502b of the yoke 502, and a cylindrical magnet 505, a cylindrical plate 506, and a cylindrical ring 507 are arranged around the bobbin 504, each with a central axis 501 as its central axis. The first speaker unit 500 is also provided with a damper 508 connected to the bobbin 504 and the ring 507. Furthermore, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a frame 509 attached to a ring 507, and the frame 509 has an annular shape with the central axis 501 as its central axis when viewed in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 from one direction of the central axis 501. Furthermore, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a cone paper (diaphragm) 510 attached to a bobbin 504, and the cone paper (diaphragm) 510 has an annular shape with the central axis 501 as its central axis when viewed in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 from one direction of the central axis 501. Furthermore, the first speaker unit 500 is provided with a center cap 511, and the center cap 511 has a circular shape with the central axis 501 as its central axis when viewed in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 from one direction of the central axis 501. Furthermore, the first speaker unit 500 has an edge 512 between the frame 509 and the cone paper (diaphragm) 510. The edge 512 has an annular shape with the central axis 501 as its central axis when viewed in a plan view of the first speaker unit 500 from one direction of the central axis 501. In the first speaker unit 500 with the above structure, when current is passed through the electromagnetic coil 503, the cone paper (diaphragm) 510 vibrates and sound waves are emitted.

The second speaker unit 600 has the same general dynamic speaker unit structure as the first speaker unit 500 shown in Figure 36(c).

As shown in Figure 36(a), the housing 401 contains a case 402 consisting of a cylindrical portion centered on the central axis 450 and a conical portion centered on the central axis 450. The first speaker unit 500 is housed in the case 402, positioned on the central axis 450 such that the central axis 501 shown in Figure 36(c) coincides with the central axis 450 of the circular opening 410 shown in Figures 36(a) and (b).

Furthermore, the second speaker unit 600 is positioned on the central axis 450 and housed within the housing 401 such that the first speaker unit 500 is located in the direction of sound wave radiation, and the central axis 501 in Figure 36(c) coincides with the central axis 450 of the circular opening 410 shown in Figures 36(a) and (b).

Although not shown in Figures 36(a) and (b), the first speaker unit 500 is supported and fixed to the housing 401 by multiple (2 to 6) frames of a size that does not obstruct the radiation of sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600. Alternatively, the first speaker unit 500 may be fixed to the second speaker unit 600 by multiple (2 to 6) frames, and the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 may be housed together as a single speaker unit in the housing 401.

The sound waves emitted by the first speaker unit 500 are output to the outside of the housing 401 through a circular first opening 412 of the opening 411, with the central axis 450 shown in Figure 36(b) as its central axis. Similarly, the sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600 are output to the outside of the housing 401 through an annular second opening 413 of the opening 411, with the central axis 450 shown in Figure 36(b) as its central axis.

Furthermore, since the timbre of the sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 600 changes due to the internal structure of the speaker device 400, it is preferable to achieve timbre consistency between the sound waves emitted by the first speaker unit 500 and the sound waves emitted by the second speaker unit 500 by controlling the second amplifier 802 or sub-CPU 201, which outputs audio signals or audio data to the second speaker unit 600, using an FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filter, an equalizer, etc.

[10.2. Directivity]
In the second gaming machine, the speaker device 400 can achieve the directivity shown in Figures 37(a) to (c) by controlling the speaker unit that emits sound waves from the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600, and by controlling the timing of sound wave emission from the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of sound wave emission from the second speaker unit 600. The directivity in Figure 37(a) is described as "convergent directivity," the directivity in Figure 37(b) is described as "diffusive directivity," and the directivity in Figure 37(c) is described as "normal directivity."

Furthermore, the control of the sound wave output timing that enables each directivity and the control of the speaker unit that outputs the sound waves are controlled by the sub-CPU 201; therefore, the sub-CPU 201 constitutes the control means. Specifically, processing is performed based on the control of the sound control processing (not shown) of the performance control execution processing S304, S306, and S307 in Figure 33, and the sub-CPU 201 outputs the same audio data to the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600.

In the following explanation, for the sake of clarity, the speaker device 400 will be described using a planar cutaway model in which the speaker device 400 is cut along a single plane (xy plane) containing the central axis 450. The portion corresponding to the circular first opening 412 in Figure 36(b) of the planar cutaway model will be referred to as the first opening 420, and one of the portions corresponding to the annular second opening 413 in Figure 36(b) will be referred to as the upper second opening 421, and the other as the lower second opening 422. Furthermore, in the explanation using the planar cutaway model, the first sound wave produced by the first speaker unit 500 and output to the outside of the housing 401 through the first opening 420 is described as the first sound wave 550, the second sound wave produced by the second speaker unit 600 is described as the second sound wave 650, the second sound wave 650 output to the outside of the housing 401 through the upper second opening 421 is described as the upper second sound wave 651, and the second sound wave 650 output to the outside of the housing 401 through the lower second opening 422 is described as the lower second sound wave 652.

For the purposes of this explanation of the planar cutaway model, the first sound wave 550 is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircular shape around point P101 (hereinafter referred to as "first sound wave output point P101"; see Figures 39 and 40) on the central axis 450 of the first opening 420, which is also the center of the tip portion of the first speaker unit 500. Furthermore, the upper second sound wave 651 is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircular shape around the center point P102 (hereinafter referred to as "upper second sound wave output point P102"; see Figures 38 to 40) in the y-axis direction of the upper second opening 421, and the lower second sound wave 652 is assumed to spread uniformly in a semicircular shape around the center point P103 (hereinafter referred to as "lower second sound wave output point P103"; see Figures 38 to 40) in the y-axis direction of the lower second opening 422. In reality, the first sound wave 550 expands in a roughly spherical shape from the first aperture 412, and the second sound wave 650 expands in a roughly donut shape from the second aperture 413. Furthermore, the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 are assumed to have the same wavelength (same frequency).

Furthermore, since the speaker device 400 has a symmetrical structure with respect to the central axis 450, the timing at which the upper second sound wave 651 is output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401 is the same as the timing at which the lower second sound wave 652 is output from the lower second opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401. Also, in the positive x-axis direction, the distance traveled by the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 is the same as the distance traveled by the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652.

[10.2.1. Overview of Directionality]
The following describes the general characteristics of the directivity achievable by the speaker device 400 with reference to Figures 37(a) to (c). In Figures 37(a) to (c), the tips of the arrows for each sound wave 550, 651, and 652 schematically indicate the leading edge of the leading surface of each sound wave 550, 651, and 652 in the x-axis direction at a certain timing.

[10.2.1.1. Outline of the Directionality of Convergence]
In the convergence directionality shown in Figure 37(a), the leading surfaces of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 are configured to propagate further than the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 in the positive x-axis direction. Furthermore, on the central axis 450 where the leading surfaces of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 intersect, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is configured to intersect the leading surfaces of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652.

In this configuration, the first sound wave 550 becomes in phase (combined) with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 on approximately the central axis 450, reinforcing each other. This reinforcing portion then propagates in the positive x-axis direction on approximately the central axis 450 over time (see arrow 710 in Figure 39(a)). In this case, the sound is loudest near the central axis 450.

The line connecting the leading surface of the first sound wave 550, the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651, and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 forms the inward-facing directional wavefront 700, as illustrated in Figure 37(a).

[10.2.1.2. Outline of the Directionality of Diffusion]
In the diffuse directivity shown in Figure 37(b), the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is positioned to travel further than the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 in the positive x-axis direction. Furthermore, in a plan view of the speaker device 400 from one direction of the central axis 450, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at a point where the y-axis value is greater than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102 (the center point of the upper second opening 421 in the y-axis direction). In a plan view of the speaker device 400 from one direction of the central axis 450, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at a point where the y-axis value is smaller than the y-axis value of the lower second sound wave output point P103 (the center point of the lower second opening 422 in the y-axis direction). The point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 are in a symmetrical positional relationship with respect to the central axis 450.

In this way, the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 intersect at the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 and the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 intersect, resulting in constructive interference. This constructive interference portion 700A progresses in a direction where the x-axis value increases and the y-axis value increases over time (see arrow 710A in Figure 40(a)). The sound is loudest near this constructive interference portion 700A. Also, the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 intersect at the point where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 intersect, resulting in constructive interference. This constructive interference portion 700B progresses in a direction where the x-axis value increases and the y-axis value decreases over time (see arrow 710B in Figure 40(a)). The sound is loudest near this constructive interference portion 700B.

[10.2.1.3. Overview of Normal Directivity]
In the normal directivity shown in Figure 37(c), the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550, which is then output to the outside of the housing 401 through the first opening 420. On the other hand, the second speaker unit 600 does not output the second sound wave 650, so that the upper second sound wave 651 is not output to the outside of the housing 401 through the upper second opening 421, and the lower second sound wave 652 is not output to the outside of the housing 401 through the lower second opening 422.

In this way, the first sound wave 550 spreads uniformly in a semicircular shape, similar to the directivity of sound waves produced by a single dynamic speaker unit.

[10.2.2. Directional Control]
The following describes the control methods used to achieve each of the directivity settings shown in Figures 37(a) to 37(c).

[10.2.2.1.2 Interference of waves (upper second sound wave, lower second sound wave)]
Before explaining the control that realizes each of the directivity patterns in Figures 37(a) to (c), the interference between the upper second sound wave 651 output to the outside of the housing 401 from the upper second opening 421 and the lower second sound wave 652 output to the outside of the housing 401 from the lower second opening 422 will be explained with reference to Figure 38. In Figure 38, for the second sound wave 650, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652, which are compressional waves, the dense parts of the compressional waves are shown with solid lines, and the rare parts of the compressional waves are shown with dotted lines.

The second sound wave 650, emitted by the second speaker unit 600, is output to the outside of the housing 401 through the upper second opening 421 and the lower second opening 422. At the same time, the phase of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) output from the upper second opening 421 to the outside of the housing 401 is the same as the phase of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652) output from the lower second opening 422 to the outside of the housing 401.

The upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 interfere with each other, either reinforcing or canceling each other out. For example, when the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is strongest. When the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in opposite phase, the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is weakest. At each point on the central axis 450, the distance of the upper second opening 421 from the upper second sound wave output point P102 is equal to the distance of the lower second opening 422 from the lower second sound wave output point P103. Therefore, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, and the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is strongest.

Regarding the interference fringes formed by the interference between the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, at points P201, P203a, and P203b, where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, the energy of the composite wave of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 is high (these become antinodes of the interference fringe waveform). Also, at points P202a and P202b, where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in opposite phase, the energy of the composite wave is low (these become nodes of the interference fringe waveform). Furthermore, the energy of the composite wave decreases from point P201 to point P202a, and increases from point P202a to point P203a. Furthermore, the energy of the composite wave decreases from point P201 to point P202b, and increases from point P202b to point P203b. Also, since sound waves attenuate as they propagate, the energy of the composite wave at points P203a and P203b is lower than the energy of the composite wave at point P201.

The antinode of the interference fringe where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase is given by Y = n × L × λ/d. Here, the first sound wave output point P101 (which is the midpoint between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the lower second sound wave output point P103) is set to (x, y) = (0, 0). Y is the y-axis value of the antinode. n is an integer. d is the distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the lower second sound wave output point P103 (hereinafter referred to as the "distance between the second apertures"). L is the distance of the interference fringe in the positive x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101. λ is the wavelength of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. L is assumed to be sufficiently larger than d. Furthermore, the y-axis values Y for points P201, P203a, and P203b are Y = 0, L × λ/d, and -L × λ/d, respectively. Also, the smaller the distance d between the second aperture segments, the larger the distance between two adjacent antinodes in the interference fringes.

[10.2.2.2. Controlling the Directionality of Convergence]
The control related to the directionality of convergence shown in Figure 37(a) will be explained with reference to Figure 39(a).

The leading edge of the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651), which is emitted by the second speaker unit 600 and output to the outside of the housing 401 from the upper second opening 421, and the leading edge of the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652), which is emitted by the second speaker unit 600 and output to the outside of the housing 401 from the lower second opening 422, intersect on the central axis 450. At each point on the central axis 450, the distance from the upper second sound wave output point P102 of the upper second opening 421 is equal to the distance from the lower second sound wave output point P103 of the lower second opening 422. Therefore, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 overlap in phase, and the combined wave of both sound waves 651 and 652 is strongest.

The leading edge of the first sound wave 550, which has the same waveform shape as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, is made to intersect with the leading edge of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading edge of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450. In other words, the first sound wave 550 is made to overlap with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 in phase at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450. In this way, the composite wave of the three waves—the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652—is strongest at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450.

The line connecting the leading surface of the first sound wave 550, the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651, and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 forms the directional wavefront. This results in the inward-facing directional wavefront 700 shown in Figure 37(a), achieving the convergent directivity of Figure 37(a).

In the control that achieves convergent directivity, in order to make the three sound waves—the first sound wave 550, the upper second sound wave 651, and the lower second sound wave 652—in phase at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450, the sub-CPU 201 controls the output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 to be delayed compared to the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600. This is done so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450. In other words, the sub-CPU 201 controls the output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 to be delayed compared to the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

A specific example of the delay time TA (ms) used to delay the output timing of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 compared to the output timing of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 will be explained with reference to Figure 39(b). Here, let E (mm) be the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the second sound wave output point P104, which is the center of the y-axis direction of the tip of the second speaker unit 600. Let D (mm) be the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second sound wave output point P102, and the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the lower second sound wave output point P103.

The point where the distance in the x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 is F (mm) and the distance in the y-axis direction is 0 (mm) is defined as the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450, where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652.

The distance R (mm) that the second sound wave 650 travels before being output to the outside of the enclosure 401 (the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the upper second sound wave output point P102, and the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the lower second sound wave output point P103) is R = ( ^D² + ^E² ) ^¹/² .

The distance traveled by the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) from the time it is output outside the enclosure 401 until it reaches the first wavefront synthesis point P301 (distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the first wavefront synthesis point P301) S (mm), and the distance traveled by the second sound wave 650 (lower second sound wave 652) from the time it is output outside the enclosure 401 until it reaches the first wavefront synthesis point P301 (distance between the lower second sound wave output point P103 and the first wavefront synthesis point P301) S (mm) are given by S = ( ^D² + ^F² ) ^1/2 . The distance traveled by the first sound wave 550 from the time it is output outside the enclosure 401 until it reaches the first wavefront synthesis point P301 (distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the first wavefront synthesis point P301) T (mm) is given by T = F. Therefore, outside the housing 401, the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 travel S - T = ( ^D² + ^F² ) ^1/2 - F more than the first sound wave 550. Consequently, the distance Y (mm) that the leading surfaces of the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 travel in the positive x-axis direction beyond the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 is Y = ( ^D² + ^F² ) ^1/2 - F.

In order for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301, the second sound wave 650 needs to travel R + Y = ( ^D² + ^E² ) ^1/2 + (( ^D² + ^F² ) ^1/2 - F) more than the first sound wave 550.

Therefore, if the speed of sound is v (mm/ms), the delay time TA (ms) required to delay the output timing of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 compared to the output timing of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 is given by TA = (R + Y) / v = (( ^D² + ^E² ) ^¹/² + (( ^D² + ^F² ) ^¹/² - F)) / v. Note that v = 340 (mm/ms).

Furthermore, in the control related to the directivity of the convergence described above, if the delay time TA is required for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 at a certain wavelength, then the delay time TA will be the same for other wavelengths to intersect with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the same first wavefront synthesis point P301. Therefore, the same delay time TA can be used for each wavelength in the bands of the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650.

Furthermore, in Figure 39(a), at points P203a and P203b in the interference fringes of Figure 38 where the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 are in phase and reinforce each other, the first sound wave 550 is approximately out of phase with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. Therefore, by adding the first sound wave 550 to the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, the antinodes of the interference fringes formed by the interference between the first sound wave 550 and the upper and lower second sound waves 651 and 652 can be widened.

[10.2.2.3. Controlling the Directionality of Diffusion]
The control related to the directivity of diffusion in Figure 37(b) will be explained with reference to Figure 40(a).

The leading surface of the first sound wave 550, which has the same waveform shape as the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652, intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A, where, in a plan view of the speaker device 400 from one direction of the central axis 450, the y-axis value is greater than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102. In other words, the first sound wave 550 is made to overlap with the upper second sound wave 651 in phase at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A. In this way, the combined wave of the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 is strongest at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A. Note that in Figure 40(a), the dotted line 451 represents a line with a constant y-axis value passing through the upper second sound wave output point P102.

When the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B, which is symmetrically positioned with respect to the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A with respect to the central axis 450 in a plan view of the speaker device 400 from one direction of the central axis 450, and whose y-axis value is smaller than that of the lower second sound wave output point P103. In this case, the combined wave of the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 is strongest at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B. Note that in Figure 40(a), the dotted line 452 represents a line passing through the lower second sound wave output point P103 with a constant y-axis value.

In the actual speaker device 400, the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 output from the first opening 412 to the outside of the housing 401 and the leading surface of the second sound wave 650 output from the second opening 413 to the outside of the housing 401 intersect at a circular wavefront composite line (the radius of the circle formed by the wavefront composite line is larger than the radius of the circle formed by the intermediate line) outside the circular intermediate line between the outer and inner circles of the annular second opening 413, when the speaker device 400 is viewed from one direction of the central axis 450. In this case, the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 reinforce each other at the aforementioned wavefront composite line.

In the control that achieves diffuse directivity, the sub-CPU 201 controls the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the two sound waves, the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651, are in phase at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A, and the two sound waves, the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652, are in phase at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B. In other words, the sub-CPU 201 controls the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651, and the first sound wave 550 arrives at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B simultaneously with the lower second sound wave 652.

A specific example of adjusting the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 will be explained with reference to Figure 40(b). In the explanation with reference to Figure 40(b), the upper second sound wave 651 will be used as an example, but the same explanation applies to the lower second sound wave 652. Here, the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the second sound wave output point P104 is E (mm), and the distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second sound wave output point P102 is D (mm).

The point where the distance in the x-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 is G (mm) and the distance in the y-axis direction from the first sound wave output point P101 is H (mm) is defined as the upper second wavefront composite point P302A, where the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects with the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651.

The distance R (mm) that the second sound wave 650 travels before being output to the outside of the enclosure 401 (the distance between the second sound wave output point P104 and the upper second sound wave output point P102) is R = ( ^D² + ^E² ) ^¹/² .

The distance U (mm) that the second sound wave 650 (upper second sound wave 651) travels from the time it is output outside the enclosure 401 until it reaches the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A (distance between the upper second sound wave output point P102 and the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A) is U = ( ^G² + (H-D) ^² ) ^1/2 . The distance W (mm) that the first sound wave 550 travels from the time it is output outside the enclosure 401 until it reaches the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A (distance between the first sound wave output point P101 and the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A) is W = ( ^G² + ^H² ) ^1/2 . Therefore, outside the enclosure 401, the first sound wave 550 travels further than the upper second sound wave 651 by W - U = (( ^G² + ^H² ) ^1/2 - ( ^G² + (H-D) ^² ) ^1/2 ). Consequently, the distance Z (mm) that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 travels in the positive x-axis direction is greater than the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651, is Z = ( ^G² + ^H² ) ^1/2 - ( ^G² + (H-D) ^² ) ^1/2 .

In order for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A, if R-Z < 0, the first sound wave 550 needs to travel more than the second sound wave 650 by Z-R = (( ^G² + ^H² ) ^1/2 - ( ^G² + (H-D) ^² ) ^1/2 ) - ( ^D² + ^E² ) ^1/2 . Therefore, if the speed of sound is v (mm/ms), the delay time TB1 (ms) that delays the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 compared to the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 is given by TB1 = (Z - R) / v = (((G ² + H ² ) ^1/2 - (G ² + (H - D) ² ) ^1/2 ) - (D ² + E ² ) ^1/2 ) / v.

If R-Z > 0, the second sound wave 650 needs to travel R-Z = ( ^D² + ^E² ) ^1/2 - (( ^G² + ^H² ) ^1/2 - ( ^G² + (H-D) ^² ) ^1/2 ) more than the first sound wave 550. Therefore, the delay time TB2 (ms) that delays the output timing of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 compared to the output timing of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 is TB2 = (R-Z)/v = (( ^D² + ^E² ) ^1/2 - (( ^G² + ^H² ) ^1/2 - ( ^G² + (H-D) ^² ) ^1/2 ))/v.

When R - Z = 0, the distance traveled by the first sound wave 550 and the distance traveled by the second sound wave 650 must be the same. Therefore, the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 must be synchronized.

Furthermore, in the control related to the directivity of diffusion described above, if the time difference between the output timing of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A at a certain wavelength, is TB1 when R-Z < 0, TB2 when R-Z > 0, and 0 (no time difference) when R-Z = 0, then the time difference for the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 to intersect the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the same upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A at other wavelengths will be TB1 when R-Z < 0, TB2 when R-Z > 0, and 0 (no time difference) when R-Z = 0. Therefore, the same time difference can be utilized at each wavelength in the bands of the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.2.4. Control of Normal Directionality]
In the control related to normal directivity shown in Figure 37(c), the sub-CPU 201 controls the first speaker unit 500 to emit the first sound wave 550, but prevents the second speaker unit 600 from emitting the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.3. Circuit examples related to directivity control]
The following will explain the circuit examples related to the control of each directivity in Figures 37(a) to (c) with reference to Figure 41. In the circuit example in Figure 41, the second gaming machine has two speaker devices 400 as shown in Figure 36, one on the left and one on the right when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, and each of the left and right speaker devices 400 is positioned facing the player playing the second gaming machine. The first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 of the left speaker device 400 will be referred to as the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the second speaker unit (left) 600L, respectively, and the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 of the right speaker device 400 will be referred to as the first speaker unit (right) 500R and the second speaker unit (right) 600R.

In the second gaming machine, when the first of several effects is performed, the directivity of the speaker device 400 is controlled to convergent directivity as shown in Figure 37(a). When the second of several effects is performed, the directivity of the speaker device 400 is controlled to diffuse directivity as shown in Figure 37(b). When the third of several effects is performed, the directivity of the speaker device 400 is controlled to normal directivity as shown in Figure 37(c). The first effect is mainly directed at the player playing the second gaming machine, and examples of the first effect include an effect that suggests the winning of a bonus role and an effect that provides push-button navigation in AT mode. The second effect is mainly directed at other people near the second gaming machine who are not playing the second gaming machine, and examples of the second effect include an effect that notifies that the payout of medals is excellent, an effect that notifies that the player is in bonus game mode, an effect that notifies that the player is in AT mode, and other notification effects intended to appeal to other people by the gaming parlor. The third type of performance is directed towards the player playing the second gaming machine and other people near the second gaming machine who are not playing the machine. Examples of the third type of performance include notifications indicating excellent medal payout, notifications indicating a bonus game state, and notifications indicating an AT (Automatic Trigger) state. While specific examples of the second and third types of performances overlap, for example, a diffuse directionality might be used for the notification indicating excellent medal payout, while a normal directionality might be used for the notifications indicating a bonus game state and an AT state.

In the circuit example shown in Figure 41, the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 901 until the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500 is assumed to be the same as the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 904 until the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.2.3.1. Controlling the Directionality of Convergence]
In controlling the convergence directionality, as explained using Figure 39(a), the timing of output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TA (ms) compared to the timing of output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 and the leading surface of the lower second sound wave 652 at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs control signals related to the amplification level set for the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801 to the control line 900. This sets the amplification levels for the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801. Specifically, based on the volume switch (not shown) provided in the sub-control circuit 200, or the volume selected by the player (5 levels), the sub-CPU 201 outputs the selected volume as the amplification level to the first amplifier 800 and the second amplifier 801. Alternatively, the sub-CPU 201 may output and set a predetermined amplification level when it starts up (when power is turned on), and transmit the amplification level along with the audio data output by the sub-CPU 201 to data lines 901 and 904.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs second audio data (left) for the speaker device 400 on the left side when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, and second audio data (right) for the speaker device 400 on the right side when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, to the data line 904. The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc., to the signal line (speaker line L) 905 from channel ch0, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905. Furthermore, the second audio data (right) output to data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801. The second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to the signal line (speaker line R) 906 from channel ch1. The second speaker unit (right) 600R then outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to signal line 906.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904. Then, in the model described in Figure 39(b), after a delay of SampleA, which corresponds to the above-mentioned delay time TA (ms), it outputs the first audio data (left) for the speaker device 400 on the left side when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, and the first audio data (right) for the speaker device 400 on the right side when viewed from the front of the second gaming machine, to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) is the same audio data as the second audio data (left), and the first audio data (right) is the same audio data as the second audio data (right). Here, the delay of SampleA is given by SampleA = TA × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate. In a 48kHz system, the Rate is 48 (sample/ms). The first audio data (left) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained through amplification, etc., to the signal line (speaker line L) 902 from channel CH0. The first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to signal line 902. Similarly, the first audio data (right) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to the signal line (speaker line R) 903 from channel CH1. The first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to signal line 903.

As a result of the above processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R is delayed by a delay time TA compared to the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R.

[10.2.3.2. Control of Diffusion Directionality]
In controlling the directivity of diffusion, as explained using Figure 40(a), the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are adjusted so that the leading surface of the first sound wave 550 intersects the leading surface of the upper second sound wave 651 at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A, where the y-axis value is greater than the y-axis value of the upper second sound wave output point P102, when viewed in a plan view of the speaker device 400 from one direction of the central axis 450.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z < 0, the following occurs: The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc., to the signal line 902 from channel CH0, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902. Furthermore, the first audio data (right) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 903 from channel CH1. The first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to signal line 903.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to data line 901. Then, in the model described in Figure 40(b), after the number of delayed samples SampleB1, which corresponds to the above-mentioned delay time TB1 (ms), has elapsed, it outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to data line 904. The second audio data (left) is the same audio data as the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) is the same audio data as the first audio data (right). Here, the number of delayed samples SampleB1 is given by SampleB1 = TB1 × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate. The second audio data (left) output on data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801. The second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 905 from channel ch0. The second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to signal line 905. Similarly, the second audio data (right) output on data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801. The second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 906 from channel ch1. The second speaker unit (right) 600R outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to signal line 906.

As a result of the above processing, the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R is delayed by a delay time TB of 1 minute compared to the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z > 0, the following occurs: The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to the data line 904. The second audio data (left) output to the data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc., to the signal line 905 from channel ch0, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to the signal line 905. Furthermore, the second audio data (right) output to data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801. The second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 906 from channel ch1. The second speaker unit (right) 600R then outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to signal line 906.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to data line 904. Then, in the model described in Figure 40(b), after the number of delayed samples SampleB2, which corresponds to the above-mentioned delay time TB2 (ms), has elapsed, it outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to data line 901. The first audio data (left) is the same audio data as the second audio data (left), and the first audio data (right) is the same audio data as the second audio data (right). Here, the number of delayed samples SampleB2 is given by SampleB2 = TB2 × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate. The first audio data (left) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 902 from channel CH0. The first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to signal line 902. Similarly, the first audio data (right) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 903 from channel CH1. The first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to signal line 903.

As a result of the above processing, the output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R is delayed by a delay time TB of 2 minutes compared to the output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z = 0, the following occurs: The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to the data line 901. The first audio data (left) output to the data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800, and the first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc., to the signal line 902 from channel CH0, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to the signal line 902. Furthermore, the first audio data (right) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the first audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 903 from channel CH1. The first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to signal line 903.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the second audio data (left) and the second audio data (right) to data line 904 at the same time that it outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to data line 904. The second audio data (left) is the same audio data as the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) is the same audio data as the first audio data (right). The second audio data (left) output to data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801, and the second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (left) obtained by amplification, etc., to signal line 905 from channel ch0, and the second speaker unit (left) 600L outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (left) output to signal line 905. Furthermore, the second audio data (right) output to data line 904 is amplified by the second amplifier 801. The second amplifier 801 outputs the second audio signal (right) obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 906 from channel ch1. The second speaker unit (right) 600R then outputs the second sound wave 650 from the second audio signal (right) output to signal line 906.

As a result of the above process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit (left) 500L and the first speaker unit (right) 500R, and the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit (left) 600L and the second speaker unit (right) 600R occur at the same time.

[10.2.3.3. Control of Normal Directionality]
In normal directional control, the second speaker unit 600 does not emit the second sound wave 650, while the first speaker unit 500 emits the first sound wave 550.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs the first audio data (left) and the first audio data (right) to data line 901. The first audio data (left) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the resulting first audio signal (left) from channel CH0 to signal line 902, and the first speaker unit (left) 500L outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (left) output to signal line 902. Similarly, the first audio data (right) output to data line 901 is amplified by the first amplifier 800. The first amplifier 800 outputs the resulting first audio signal (right) from channel CH1 to signal line 903, and the first speaker unit (right) 500R outputs the first sound wave 550 from the first audio signal (right) output to signal line 903.

The sub-CPU 201 prevents the output of the second audio data (left) identical to the first audio data (left), and the second audio data (right) identical to the first audio data (right), to the data line 904. As a result, the second speaker unit 600 does not produce the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.4. Modification 1 of the circuit related to directivity control]
Hereinafter, a modified example 1 of the circuits related to the control of each directivity in Figures 37(a) to (c) will be described with reference to Figure 42. In modified example 1 of the circuit in Figure 42, the second gaming machine has one speaker device 400 as shown in Figure 36, and the speaker device 400 is positioned facing the player playing the game on the second gaming machine.

In the circuit example shown in Figure 42, the time from when amplifier 810 outputs an audio signal to signal line 912 until the first sound wave 550 is output by the first speaker unit 500 is assumed to be the same as the time from when amplifier 810 outputs an audio signal to signal line 913 until the second sound wave 650 is output by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.2.4.1. Controlling the Directionality of Convergence]
The sub-CPU 201 outputs control signals to the control line 910 related to the amplification level to be set for the amplifier 810, the first delay sample count corresponding to the delay time for delaying the audio data output from channel Ch0, and the second delay sample count corresponding to the delay time for delaying the audio data output from channel Ch1. As a result, the amplification level, the first delay sample count, and the second delay sample count are set for the amplifier 810.

In the convergence directionality control of the model explained using Figure 39(b), the sub-CPU 201 sets the first and second delay sample counts to the amplifier 810 such that the first delay sample count is greater than the second delay sample count by a delay sample count SampleA corresponding to the above-mentioned delay time TA. Here, the delay sample count SampleA is given by SampleA = TA × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 911. The audio data output to data line 911 is input to amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

Amplifier 810 outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 913 from channel Ch1 after delaying it by a second delay sample number. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. Amplifier 810 also outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 912 from channel Ch0 after delaying it by a first delay sample number. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to signal line 912 is delayed by a delay sample number SampleA, which corresponds to the delay time TA, compared to the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. Due to this process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TA compared to the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.2.4.2. Control of Diffusion Directionality]
In the control of diffusion directionality in the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z < 0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the first and second delay sample counts to the amplifier 810 such that the second delay sample count is greater than the first delay sample count by the delay sample count SampleB1 corresponding to the above delay time TB1. Here, the delay sample count SampleB1 is given by SampleB1 = TB1 × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 911. The audio data output to data line 911 is input to amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

The amplifier 810 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., to the signal line 912 from channel Ch0 after delaying it by a first delay sample number. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 912. The amplifier 810 also outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., to the signal line 913 from channel Ch1 after delaying it by a second delay sample number. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to the signal line 913 is delayed by a delay sample number SampleB1, which corresponds to a delay time TB1, compared to the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to the signal line 912. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 913. As a result of this process, the sound output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600 is delayed by a delay time TB of 1 minute compared to the sound output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z > 0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets the first and second delay sample counts to amplifier 810 such that the first delay sample count is greater than the second delay sample count by a delay sample count of SampleB2, which corresponds to the above-mentioned delay time TB2. Here, the delay sample count SampleB2 is given by SampleB2 = TB2 × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 911. The audio data output to data line 911 is input to amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

Amplifier 810 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., to signal line 913 from channel Ch1 with a delay of a second delay sample number. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. Amplifier 810 also outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification, etc., to signal line 912 from channel Ch0 with a delay of a first delay sample number. The output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch0 to signal line 912 is delayed by a delay sample number SampleB2, which corresponds to a delay time TB2, compared to the output timing of the audio signal from channel Ch1 to signal line 913. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. As a result of this process, the sound output of the first sound wave 550 from the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TB of 2 minutes compared to the sound output of the second sound wave 650 from the second speaker unit 600.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z = 0, the following occurs: The sub-CPU 201 sets the amplifier 810 to the same number of first and second delayed sample counts.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 911. The audio data output to data line 911 is input to amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data.

Amplifier 810 outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 912 from channel Ch0 after delaying it by a first delay sample number. The first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. Amplifier 810 also outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 913 from channel Ch1 after delaying it by a second delay sample number. The timing of the audio signal output from channel Ch1 to signal line 913 is the same as the timing of the audio signal output from channel Ch0 to signal line 912. The second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 913. Through this process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 occur at the same time.

[10.2.4.3. Control of Normal Directionality]
In normal directional control, the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 911. The audio data output to data line 911 is input to amplifier 810, which amplifies the input audio data and outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 912 from channel Ch0. The first speaker unit 500 produces the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 912. Amplifier 810 does not output the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to signal line 913 from channel Ch1, and the second speaker unit 600 does not produce the second sound wave 650.

[10.2.5. Modification 2 of the circuit related to directivity control]
Below, a modified example 2 of the circuits related to the control of each directivity in Figures 37(a) to (c) will be described with reference to Figure 43. In modified example 2 of the circuit in Figure 43, the second gaming machine has one speaker device 400 as shown in Figure 36, and the speaker device 400 is positioned facing the player playing the game on the second gaming machine.

In the circuit example shown in Figure 43, the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921 until it is input to the first delay circuit 851 is assumed to be the same as the time from when the sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921 until it is input to the second delay circuit 852. Furthermore, the time from when the first delay circuit 851 outputs audio data to data line 923 until the first sound wave 550 is emitted by the first speaker unit 500 is assumed to be the same as the time from when the second delay circuit 852 outputs audio data to data line 924 until the second sound wave 650 is emitted by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.2.5.1. Controlling the Directionality of Convergence]
The sub-CPU 201 outputs control signals to the control line 920 related to the on/off setting of switch 830, the first delay sample count corresponding to the delay time for delaying audio data in the first delay circuit 851, the second delay sample count corresponding to the delay time for delaying audio data in the second delay circuit 852, and the amplification level set for the first amplifier 821 and the amplification level set for the second amplifier 822. As a result, switch 830 is set to on or off, the first delay sample count is set in the first delay circuit 851, the second delay sample count is set in the second delay circuit 852, the amplification level is set in the first amplifier 821 and the amplification level is set in the second amplifier 822.

In the convergence directionality control of the model explained using Figure 39(b), the sub-CPU 201 sets switch 830 to ON. The sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample count to the first delay circuit 851 and the second delay sample count to the second delay circuit 852, such that the first delay sample count is greater than the second delay sample count by a delay sample count SampleA corresponding to the above-mentioned delay time TA. Here, the delay sample count SampleA is given by SampleA = TA × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921. The audio data output to data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 via data line 922 through switch 830.

The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by a number of second delay samples and outputs it to the data line 924. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, which outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 produces the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 926. In addition, the first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by a number of first delay samples and outputs it to the data line 923. The output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 is delayed by a number of delay samples, SampleA, which corresponds to the delay time TA, compared to the output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924. The audio data output on data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821. The first amplifier 821 outputs the resulting audio signal to signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 925. As a result of this process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TA compared to the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.2.5.2. Control of Diffusion Directionality]
In the control of diffusion directionality in the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z < 0, the following occurs. The sub-CPU 201 sets switch 830 to ON. The sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample number to the first delay circuit 851 and the second delay sample number to the second delay circuit 852 such that the second delay sample number is greater than the first delay sample number by the delay sample number SampleB1 corresponding to the above delay time TB1. Here, the delay sample number SampleB1 is given by SampleB1 = TB1 × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921. The audio data output to data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 via data line 922 through switch 830.

The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by a number of first delay samples and outputs it to the data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, which outputs the audio signal obtained through amplification, etc., to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 produces the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925. The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by a number of second delay samples and outputs it to the data line 924. The output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 is delayed by a number of delay samples, SampleB1, corresponding to a delay time TB1, compared to the output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923. The audio data output on data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822. The second amplifier 822 outputs the resulting audio signal to signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 926. As a result of this process, the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 is delayed by a delay time TB of 1 minute compared to the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z > 0, the following occurs: Sub-CPU 201 sets switch 830 to ON. Sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample count to the first delay circuit 851 and the second delay sample count to the second delay circuit 852, such that the first delay sample count is greater than the second delay sample count by a delay sample count of SampleB2, corresponding to the delay time TB2. Here, the delay sample count SampleB2 is given by SampleB2 = TB2 × Rate, where Rate(sample/ms) is the sampling rate.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921. The audio data output to data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 via data line 922 through switch 830.

The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by a number of second delay samples and outputs it to the data line 924. The audio data output to the data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822, which outputs the resulting audio signal to the signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to the signal line 926. In addition, the first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by a number of first delay samples and outputs it to the data line 923. The output timing of the audio data from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923 is delayed by a number of delay samples, SampleB2, which corresponds to a delay time TB2, compared to the output timing of the audio data from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924. The audio data output on data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821. The first amplifier 821 outputs the resulting audio signal to signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 925. As a result of this process, the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed by a delay time TB of 2 minutes compared to the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600.

In the model explained using Figure 40(b), when R-Z = 0, the following occurs: Sub-CPU 201 sets switch 830 to ON. Sub-CPU 201 also sets the first delay sample count to the first delay circuit 851 and sets the second delay sample count, equal to the first delay sample count, to the second delay circuit 852.

The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921. The audio data output to data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851, and then input to the second delay circuit 852 via data line 922 through switch 830.

The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data by a number of first delay samples and outputs it to the data line 923. The audio data output to the data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, which outputs the resulting audio signal to the signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 produces the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to the signal line 925. The second delay circuit 852 delays the input audio data by a number of second delay samples and outputs it to the data line 924. The timing of the audio data output from the second delay circuit 852 to the data line 924 is the same as the timing of the audio data output from the first delay circuit 851 to the data line 923. The audio data output on data line 924 is amplified by the second amplifier 822. The second amplifier 822 outputs the resulting audio signal to signal line 926, and the second speaker unit 600 outputs the second sound wave 650 from the audio signal output to signal line 926. This process ensures that the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 occur at the same time.

[10.2.5.3. Control of Normal Directionality]
In normal directional control, the sub-CPU 201 sets switch 830 to OFF. The sub-CPU 201 outputs audio data to data line 921, and the audio data output to data line 921 is input to the first delay circuit 851. The first delay circuit 851 delays the input audio data and outputs it to data line 923. The audio data output to data line 923 is amplified by the first amplifier 821, and the first amplifier 821 outputs the audio signal obtained by amplification etc. to signal line 925, and the first speaker unit 500 outputs the first sound wave 550 from the audio signal output to signal line 925.

On the other hand, since switch 830 is off, no audio data is input to the second delay circuit 852. As a result, the second sound wave 650 is not output by the second speaker unit 600.

[10.3. Effects of the second type of gaming machine]
According to the second gaming machine described above, the speaker device 400, which has a structure in which the first speaker unit 500 and the second speaker unit 600 are arranged on the central axis 450, is less constrained by the size in the left-right or up-down direction of the second gaming machine compared to the case in which multiple speaker units are arranged in an array. Using such a speaker device 400, the desired directivity can be achieved with the speaker device 400 by simple control, which involves adjusting the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive simultaneously at the wavefront synthesis point outside the housing 401.

In particular, by simply controlling the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 to be delayed from the output timing of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, the speaker device 400 can achieve focused directivity, so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive simultaneously at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 on the central axis 450 of the circular opening 411.

Furthermore, diffuse directivity can be achieved in the speaker device 400 by simply adjusting the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, so that the first sound wave 550 and the second sound wave 650 arrive simultaneously at a circular wavefront composite line (the upper second wavefront composite point P302A and the lower second wavefront composite point P302B exist on this wavefront composite line) located outside the median line between the inner and outer circles of the second aperture 413 when viewed from one direction of the central axis 450 in a plan view.

Furthermore, by simply controlling the second speaker unit 600 so that the second sound wave is not emitted from 600, and the first sound wave 550 is emitted from the first speaker unit 500, the speaker device 400 can achieve normal directivity.

Furthermore, the convergence of the first-stage effects is utilized in the implementation of effects primarily aimed at players using the second gaming machine, such as effects that suggest the winning of a bonus role and effects that guide the player on the correct button sequence during AT (Automatic Trigger) mode. This allows players to concentrate on and enjoy the first-stage effects, which they are likely to enjoy with full concentration, without being disturbed by others near the second gaming machine who might notice or peek at them.

Furthermore, the directional diffusion of the second gaming machine's features is utilized in implementing features aimed primarily at people other than the player near the second gaming machine, such as announcements indicating excellent medal payouts, bonus game states, and AT (Automatic Trigger) states. This allows the gaming establishment to effectively communicate the content of the second gaming machine's features to other people, potentially leading to an increase in the second gaming machine's utilization rate.

Furthermore, normal directionality is used to implement a third type of notification, such as an announcement that medal payouts are going extremely well, an announcement that a bonus game is in progress, or an announcement that an AT (Automatic Trigger) state is active. This notification is directed towards the player playing on the second gaming machine and other people near the second gaming machine who are not playing on the second machine. This allows the content of the third type of notification to be communicated to everyone, including the player near the second gaming machine.

[10.4. Modified version of the second gaming machine]
In the second gaming machine described with reference to Figures 36 to 43 above, the speaker device 400 was described as realizing three directivity characteristics: convergent directivity in Figure 37(a), diffuse directivity in Figure 37(b), and diffuse directivity in Figure 37(c). However, it is not limited to these. For example, in addition to realizing these three directivity characteristics, the speaker device 400 may also be configured to emit a second sound wave 650 without emitting a first sound wave 550, and output it to the outside of the housing 401 from the second opening 413, thereby realizing a directivity characteristic in which the sound waves from the speaker device 400 spread out in a roughly donut shape. Furthermore, the speaker device 400 may also be configured to realize some of these four directivity characteristics.

Furthermore, in the control of convergence directionality shown in Figure 39(a) above, the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 is delayed compared to the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600, so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652. However, the control is not limited to this. For example, the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 may be adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 and the lower second sound wave 652 arrive at the first wavefront synthesis point P301 within a first time difference other than simultaneous arrival. The first time difference and the second time difference (described later) represent the maximum time difference at which human hearing does not perceive two sound waves as separate sounds.

Furthermore, in the control of the diffuse directivity shown in Figure 40(a) above, the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 are adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 arrives at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A simultaneously with the upper second sound wave 651, and the first sound wave 550 arrives at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B simultaneously with the lower second sound wave 652. However, the control is not limited to this. For example, the timing of the output of the first sound wave 550 by the first speaker unit 500 and the output timing of the output of the second sound wave 650 by the second speaker unit 600 may be adjusted so that the first sound wave 550 and the upper second sound wave 651 arrive at the upper second wavefront synthesis point P302A within a second time difference other than simultaneous, and the first sound wave 550 and the lower second sound wave 652 arrive at the lower second wavefront synthesis point P302B within a second time difference other than simultaneous.

Furthermore, if the second gaming machine has multiple speaker devices 400 as shown in Figure 36, the multiple speaker devices 400 may be controlled to have different directivity settings during the same period. For example, if the second gaming machine has two speaker devices 400 as shown in Figure 36, one may be controlled to convergent directivity and the other to diffuse directivity.

Furthermore, if the second gaming machine has multiple speaker devices 400 as shown in Figure 36, the directivity control of each speaker device 400 may be performed independently of the directivity control of the other speaker devices 400.

[11. The Third Gaming Machine]
Next, referring to Figures 44 to 59, the specifications for changing and confirming the settings of the pachislo machine 1 will be explained as the "third gaming machine." Note that all components of the pachislo machine 1 not shown in the explanations of Figures 44 to 59 are governed by the embodiments described in Figures 1 to 35.

[11-1. Commands]
The following describes the initialization commands (initialization commands described in [4-9. Commands], etc.) and periodic commands (sometimes referred to as "no-operation commands") transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, focusing on the parts necessary for the explanation of [11. Third Gaming Machine]. Other parts will be briefly described or omitted. Note that periodic commands (no-operation commands) are referred to as input status commands in [6-2. Periodic Interrupt Processing], etc.

[11-1-1. Command Configuration]
The configuration of the initialization command and periodic command (no-operation command) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be described below.

[11-1-1-1. Configuration of Initialization Commands]
The configuration of the initialization command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 44.

As shown in Figure 44, the initialization command consists of a total of 8 bytes, including bit groups D00 to D07, each with a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). The type of bit group D00 is the "ID" for identifying the command, and the "initialization command ID (01h)" is set in bit group D00. The type of bit group D01 is the "setting value," and the "setting value" ("0" to "5") stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is set in bit group D01. The type of bit group D02 is the "status" indicating the status of the initialization command, and the value indicating the status of the initialization command ("1 (01h)" (change/start), "2 (02h)" (change/end), "3 (03h)" (confirm/start), "4 (04h)" (confirm/end)) is set in bit group D02. Bit group D03 is designated as "Clear Type," indicating the type of clear. Bit group D03 is set to a value indicating the type of clear ("0 (00h)" (none), "1 (01h)" (changed), "2 (02h)" (RWM abnormal)). Bit groups D04 and D05 are designated as "Unused," and are set to a fixed value "00h." Bit group D06 is designated as "Game Status," and is set to a "Game Status" ("Normal (01h)," "BB in Progress (02h)," "Replay (80h)," etc.). Bit group D07 is designated as "Sum," and is set to the "Check Code for Bit Groups D00-D06" (the sum of Bit Groups D00-D06). Note that in addition to the sum, the results of operations such as subtraction and exclusive OR may also be set.

In the following, (1) an initialization command in which bit group D00 is set to "Initialization Command ID (01h)" and bit group D02 is set to "1" (Change/Start) will be described as "Initialization Command (Change/Start)", (2) an initialization command in which bit group D00 is set to "Initialization Command ID (01h)" and bit group D02 is set to "2" (Change/End) will be described as "Initialization Command (Change/End)", (3) an initialization command in which bit group D00 is set to "Initialization Command ID (01h)" and bit group D02 is set to "3" (Confirm/Start) will be described as "Initialization Command (Confirm/Start)", and (4) an initialization command in which bit group D00 is set to "Initialization Command ID (01h)" and bit group D02 is set to "4" (Confirm/End) will be described as "Initialization Command (Confirm/End)".

Furthermore, (1) is referred to as the second start command, (2) as the second end command, (3) as the first start command, and (4) as the first end command.

Furthermore, while bit D00 is used as a common "initialization command ID (01h)," there is also a method of classification using bit group D00. For example, in the case of "initialization command (change/start)," bit group D00 could be set to "setting change/start (F1h)," in the case of "initialization command (change/end)," bit group D00 could be set to "setting change/end (F2h)," in the case of "initialization command (confirm/start)," bit group D00 could be set to "setting confirmation/start (F3h)," and in the case of "initialization command (confirm/end)," bit group D00 could be set to "setting confirmation/end (F4h)."

[11-1-1-2. Structure of Periodic Commands (No Operation Commands)]
The configuration of the periodic command (no operation command) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 45.

As shown in Figure 45(a), the periodic command (no operation command) consists of a total of 8 bytes, including bit groups D10 to D17, each with a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). The type of bit group D10 is "ID" for identifying the command, and "periodic command ID (80h)" is set in bit group D10. The types of bit groups D11 to D13 are "input port P1" to "input port P3," and values are set in bit groups D11 to D13 according to the input port assignment table shown in Figure 45(b). The type of bit groups D14 and D15 is "unused," and the fixed value "00h" is set in bit groups D14 and D15. The type of bit group D16 is "game state," and "game state" ("normal," "BB in progress," "replay," etc.) is set in bit group D16. The type of bit group D17 is "sum," and it is set with the "check code for bit groups D10-D16" (the sum of bit groups D10-D16). Note that in addition to the sum, the results of operations such as subtraction and exclusive OR may also be set.

The input port assignment table for input port P0 is shown in Figure 45(b). Bit B7 is set to the state of the start switch 7S (on state when the start lever 7 is being operated or off state when the start lever 7 is not being operated). Bits B6, B5, and B4 are set to the state of stop switch SW3 (on or off state) corresponding to stop button 8R, stop switch SW2 (on or off state) corresponding to stop button 8C, and stop switch SW1 (on or off state) corresponding to stop button 8L, respectively, of the stop switches 8S. Bits B3 and B2 are set to the state of the MAX bet switch (on or off state) corresponding to the MAX bet button 6a, and the 1 bet switch (on or off state) corresponding to the 1 bet button 6b, respectively, of the bet switches 6S. Bit B1 is set to the state of the settlement switch 9S (on or off state). Bit B0 is an unused bit.

The input port assignment table for input port P1 is shown in Figure 45(b). Bits B7 to B5 are set to the detection results (detected or not detected) of the reel index of the index sensor corresponding to reels 3R, 3C, and 3L. Bits B4 and B3 are set to the detection results (detected or not detected) of the medal passage sensors M1 and M2 (not shown), and bit B2 is set to the state (on or off) of the medal passage switch (not shown). Bits B1 to B0 are unused bits.

The input port assignment table for input port P2 is shown in Figure 45(b). Bit B7 is set to the state (on or off) of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Bit B6 is set to the state (on or off) of the setting key-type switch 52. Bit B5 is set to the state (on or off) of the reset switch 53. Bit B4 is set to the state (on or off) of the payout pass switch (not shown) that detects medal dispensing. Bit B3 is set to the state (on or off) of the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S. Bits B2 to B0 are unused bits.

Furthermore, the input port allocation table in Figure 45(b) directly serves as the bit allocation table for input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

The data for the idle command shown in Figure 45 is created based on the contents of the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Furthermore, the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 store the port status of input ports P0 to P2 through the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32.

[11-1-2. Timing of Command Transmission]
The timing of command transmission from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 46.

The communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3 requires a transmission time T1 to transmit the data for each command (data for one command), such as the idle command and the initialization command. This transmission time T1 is determined by the number of bits in the data for one command and the transmission baud rate (bps) of the communication circuit (not shown), and is, for example, 4.6464 msec (milliseconds).

The communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3 transmits command data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle T2. This transmission cycle T2 can be determined from the transmission time T1 and the number of times the periodic interrupt processing (executed by the interrupt shown in Figure 32) is performed when the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3 is in a ready state and not communicating. For example, it can be 7.8204 msec (milliseconds) or 8.9376 msec (milliseconds), which occurs once every 7 or 8 periodic interrupt processing (executed by the interrupt shown in Figure 32).

In the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, if the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3 is in a ready state and not performing communication, and if neither data for commands related to game progress, such as medal insertion commands and start commands corresponding to valid operations by players or arcade staff, nor data for initialization commands, is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, then the main CPU 101 stores data for an "no operation" command in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3, based on the contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then transmits the "no operation" command data to the sub-control circuit 200 via the communication circuit (not shown) based on the transmission cycle T2.

Furthermore, in the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) of the main control circuit 100, if the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3 is in a ready state, and if either command data related to the progress of the game, such as a medal insertion command or a start command corresponding to a valid operation by a player or a game parlor employee, or initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (if data for commands other than the no-operation command is stored), the main CPU 101 stores the data for commands other than the no-operation command in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3. Based on the transmission cycle T2, the main CPU 101 transmits the command data other than the no-operation command to the sub-control circuit 200 via the communication circuit (not shown).

Furthermore, if the communication circuit (not shown) is in a busy state (communicating), no new command data will be set in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3.

The communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3 is assumed to use an asynchronous serial communication method, but is not limited to this; for example, a synchronous serial communication method or a parallel communication method can also be used.

Furthermore, while the initialization command and other data are initially stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 (Figure 3) during the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) of Figure 32, and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the initialization command and other data may also be stored directly in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 without being stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

[11-2. Status of the setting key-type switch (ON or OFF)]
The state (off or on) of the setting key-type switch 52 will be explained with reference to Figure 47.

In the example shown in Figure 47(a), an employee of the amusement parlor uses a setting key to turn on the setting key-type switch 52 at time TA1, and then uses the setting key to turn off the setting key-type switch 52 at time TB1.

On the main control circuit 100 side, the main CPU 101 checks the state (on or off) of the setting key type switch 52 in the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt process shown in Figure 32, and reflects the check result in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The timing at which the ON state of the setting key type switch 52 at time TA1 is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is, as shown in Figure 47(b), at time TA2 when the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt process shown in Figure 32, which interrupts at the interrupt cycle T11, is performed after the setting key type switch 52 has actually turned ON, and is delayed by the amount of time from when the setting key type switch 52 actually turns ON until the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt process shown in Figure 32 is performed. Furthermore, the timing at which the off state of the setting key switch 52 at time TB1 is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is, as shown in Figure 47(b), time TB2, when the input port check process (S202) in the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, which interrupts at interrupt cycle T11, is performed after the setting key switch 52 has actually turned off. This delay is the amount of time between the setting key switch 52 actually turning off and the input port check process (S202) in the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32 being performed. Note that the interrupt cycle T11 is set to 1.1172 msec (milliseconds), but it is also possible to use the modified examples described in [6-2. Periodic Interrupt Processing] above.

In the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) shown in Figure 32, if data for commands other than the no-operation command (such as an initialization command) is stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3, which is in a ready state, the communication circuit (not shown) stores the data for commands other than the no-operation command (such as an initialization command) with priority over the data for the no-operation command. The communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the data for commands other than the no-operation command (such as an initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission period T2. Furthermore, in the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) shown in Figure 32, if the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3, which is in a ready state, does not contain data for commands other than the no-operation command (such as an initialization command) in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, then the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3 stores the no-operation command data, including the state of the setting key-type switch 52 (on or off), based on the contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the no-operation command data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle T2.

The sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the state (on or off) of the setting key-type switch 52 based on the state (on or off) of the setting key-type switch 52 included in the idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The sub-CPU 201 recognizes the on state of the setting key-type switch 52, which was reflected in the input port storage areas 0,1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 at time TA2, at time TA3, which is 12 minutes later than time TA2, as shown in Figure 47(c). The sub-CPU 201 also recognizes the off state of the setting key-type switch 52, which was reflected in the input port storage areas 0,1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 at time TB2, at time TB3, which is 13 minutes later than time TB2, as shown in Figure 47(c). The times T12 and T13 are due to the time difference caused by the transmission cycle T2 (see Figure 46) and the transmission time T1 (see Figure 46), as well as the time difference between the transmission timing based on the transmission cycle T2 (see Figure 46) and the interrupt execution timing based on the interrupt cycle of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32.

[11-3. Processing related to setting changes and setting confirmation]
The following describes the processing related to setting changes and setting confirmations performed by the main control circuit 100. Here, we will describe three patterns for processing related to setting changes and setting confirmations, from the first pattern to the third pattern.

In the periodic interrupt processing input port check process (S202) shown in Figure 32, the input state (on or off state) of the input ports corresponding to various sensors and switches (such as the setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, and door opening/closing monitoring switch 56) connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) is checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether there has been a change in the input state. If there has been a change in the input state, the details of the change in the input state are stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and the input state is stored as is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Therefore, by waiting for one periodic interrupt process as shown in Figure 32, the input state (on or off) of the input ports corresponding to various sensors and switches (setting key-type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, etc.) is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) during that one periodic interrupt process. Note that in the explanation of [11. Third Gaming Machine], "waiting for one periodic interrupt process as shown in Figure 32" will be described as "performing 1 interrupt wait" for simplification.

[11-3-1. Processing related to setting changes and setting confirmation: Pattern 1]
The first pattern of settings change and settings confirmation processing performed by the main control circuit 100 will be described below. In the first pattern, the settings change processing (settings change processing) and the settings confirmation processing (settings confirmation processing) are executed by different programs, and neither the settings change processing nor the settings confirmation processing is conditional on the opening or closing of the door (lower door mechanism DD).

[11-3-1-1. First Pattern Setting Change Process (Setting Change Process (No Door Opening/Closing Conditions))]
The first pattern of setting change processing (setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions)) will be explained with reference to Figure 48. The power-on processing in the third gaming machine is the same as the power-on processing in Figure 24, but with steps S22 to S27 replaced by the setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48. The setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48 is called as a subroutine, and this executes the setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48. When the setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48 is called in the power-on processing, "setting change" is written to a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When the setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48 is completed and the system returns to the caller of the setting change processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48, "setting change" is erased from the predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on (S501). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state, that is, that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on (S501 is NO), the setting change process (without door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 48 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the ON state, that is, if the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the ON state when the power is turned on (S501 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/start) data to indicate that the setting change process has started, and performs initialization command (change/start) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (change/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S502). In the communication data transmission process of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3, and this communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (change/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S502, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process to acquire a setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a setting value display process to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp (S503), and then proceeds to the processing in step S504. In the process of converting the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into a display setting value, if the acquired setting value is "0", the display setting value is converted to "1", if the acquired setting value is "1", the display setting value is converted to "2", ..., and if the acquired setting value is "5", the display setting value is converted to "6". In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off at the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value, and as a result the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp. Note that all 7-segment displays except for the one corresponding to the lowest payout amount indicator are turned off.

Furthermore, while the third gaming machine uses a 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp to display the setting value, it is not limited to this; for example, a 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the credit lamp may also be used.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S504) and then proceeds to the processing of step S505.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the push-button reset switch 53 is ON or OFF (whether it has changed from OFF to ON) (S505). If it is determined that the state of the reset switch 53 is NOT ON (it has not changed from OFF to ON) (S505 is NO), the process proceeds to step S508.

If the reset switch 53 is determined to be in the ON state (changed from the OFF state to the ON state) (S505 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value update process (S506). In this setting value update process, if the setting value is "0", it is updated to "1", ..., if the setting value is "4", it is updated to "5", and if the setting value is "5", it is updated to "0". Note that at this point, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Following the processing in step S506, the main CPU 101 converts the setting value updated in step S506 into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and performs a setting value display processing to display the display setting value (S507), then proceeds to the processing in step S508. In the process of converting the updated setting value to a display setting value, if the updated setting value is "0", the display setting value is converted to "1", if the updated setting value is "1", the display setting value is converted to "2", ..., and if the updated setting value is "5", the display setting value is converted to "6". In the 7-segment LED driving processing (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off for each segment output port of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value, thereby displaying the display setting value on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the start switch 7S corresponding to the setting value confirmation operation is ON (S508). If it is determined that the state of the start switch 7S is NOT ON (S508 is NO), the process returns to step S504.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S508 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value storage process (S509) to store the updated setting value (the setting value obtained in step S503 if the start switch 7S was turned ON without the reset switch 53 ever being turned ON) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then proceeds to the process in step S510.

The main CPU 101 performs the same initialization process for setting changes as the one shown in Figure 24 (S23) (S510), and then proceeds to step S511. As explained in Figure 24 (S23), the initialization process for setting changes clears the data in the designated storage area of the main RAM 103. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area where data needs to be erased when the settings are changed, such as the carryover role storage area, the game state flag storage area, or the mode flag storage area.

Furthermore, if an abnormality is found in the data of the main RAM 103 during the power-on processing shown in Figure 24 (S28 is NO), the entire initialization range of the main RAM 103 is cleared, excluding the setting value storage area (not shown) and a specific storage area (not shown). For example, if the setting value storage area (not shown) is address F000H of the main RAM 103, and the specific storage area (not shown) is addresses F001H to F010H of the main RAM 103, the range to be cleared will be from address F011H onwards.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S511) and then proceeds to the processing of step S512.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S512). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S512 is NO), the process returns to step S511.

If the configuration key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the off state (S512 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/end) data to send to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the configuration change process has been completed, and performs initialization command (change/end) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (change/end) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S513). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3, and this communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (change/end) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S513, the main CPU 101 performs a payout acquisition process to retrieve the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, which stores the number of medals dispensed according to the game result, and a payout display process to display the acquired payout count on the payout count lamp (S514). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the setting values on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the payout count lamp. After the processing in step S514, the setting change process (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 48 is completed, and the system returns to the caller.

[11-3-1-2. First Pattern Setting Confirmation Process (Setting Confirmation Process (No Door Opening/Closing Conditions))]
The first pattern of setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions)) will be explained with reference to Figure 49. The setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49 is called between the end of one game and before the conditions for pressing the start lever 7 are met (no bet, no replay was won in the previous game, etc.). In the third game machine, the medal insertion check processing (S46) of the medal reception/start check processing (Figure 25) calls the setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49 as a subroutine, and this executes the setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49. When the setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49 is called in the medal insertion check processing (S46) of the medal reception/start check processing, "setting confirmation" is written to a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and when the setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49 is completed and the system returns to the caller of the setting confirmation processing (no door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49, "setting confirmation" is deleted from the predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the setting key switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, whether the state of the setting key switch 52 has changed to the on state after power-on (S551). Here, a change from the off state to the on state of the setting key switch 52 means that the state of the setting key switch 52 in the previous periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32 was off, and the state of the setting key switch 52 in the interrupt of the current periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32 is on, and that an edge has been detected in which the input state of the input port corresponding to the setting key switch 52 changes from the off state to the on state of the setting key switch 52. As described above, in the periodic interrupt processing input port check process (S202) shown in Figure 32, if there is a change in the input state of the input port corresponding to the setting key-type switch 52, the details of the change in input state are stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and the input state is stored as is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Therefore, if the change from the off state to the on state corresponding to the setting key-type switch 52 is stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, the determination step in step S551 determines that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state.

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state, that is, that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed to the on state after power-on (S551 is NO), the setting confirmation process (without door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 49 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

On the other hand, if the state of the setting key-type switch 52 changes from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 changed to the on state after power-on (S551 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/start) data to indicate that the setting confirmation process has started, and performs initialization command (confirmation/start) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (confirmation/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S552). In the communication data transmission process of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (confirmation/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3, and this communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (confirmation/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S552, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process, which is the same as the setting value acquisition and setting value display processing in step S503 above, to acquire the setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. It then performs a setting value display process (S553) to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and proceeds to the processing in step S554. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S554) and then proceeds to the processing of step S555.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S555). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S555 is NO), the process returns to step S554.

If the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the off state (S555 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/completion) data to indicate that the setting confirmation process has been completed, and performs initialization command (confirmation/completion) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (confirmation/completion) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S556). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) of Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (confirmation/completion) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 of Figure 3, and this communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (confirmation/completion) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S556, the main CPU 101 performs a payout count acquisition process to retrieve the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout count display process to display the acquired payout count on the payout count lamp (S557). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the set values on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the lamp. After the processing in step S557, the setting confirmation process (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49 is completed, and the system returns to the caller.

[11-3-2. Processing related to setting changes and setting confirmation: Pattern 2]
A second pattern of settings change and settings confirmation processing performed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. In the second pattern, the settings change processing (settings change processing) and the settings confirmation processing (settings confirmation processing) are executed by different programs, and the opening and closing of the door (lower door mechanism DD) is a condition for both the settings change processing and the settings confirmation processing.

[11-3-2-1. Second Pattern Setting Change Process (Setting Change Process (with Door Open/Close Conditions))]
The second pattern of setting change processing (setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition)) will be explained with reference to Figure 50. The power-on processing in the third gaming machine is the same as the power-on processing in Figure 24, but with steps S22 to S27 replaced by the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) in Figure 50. The setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) in Figure 50 is called as a subroutine, and this executes the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) in Figure 50. When the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) in Figure 50 is called in the power-on processing, "setting change" is written to a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and when the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) in Figure 50 is completed and the system returns to the caller of the setting change processing (with door opening/closing condition) in Figure 50, "setting change" is erased from the predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state) (S601). If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not in the ON state (open state) (S601 is NO), the setting change process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 50 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is determined to be in the ON state (open state) (S601 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, whether the setting key-type switch 52 was in the ON state when the power was turned on (S602). If the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be not in the ON state, that is, whether the setting key-type switch 52 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on (S602 is NO), the setting change process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 50 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the ON state, that is, if the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the ON state when the power is turned on (S602 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/start) data and performs initialization command (change/start) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (change/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S603). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3, and this communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (change/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process, which is the same as the setting value acquisition and setting value display processing in step S503 above, to acquire the setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. It then performs a setting value display process (S604) to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and proceeds to the processing in step S605. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S605) and proceeds to the processing of step S606.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the reset switch 53 is in the ON state (S606). If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is not in the ON state (S606 is NO), the process proceeds to step S609.

If the reset switch 53 is determined to be in the ON state (S606 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value update process (S607), which is the same as the setting value update process in step S506 above, and then proceeds to step S608. At this point, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are not updated.

The main CPU 101 performs a setting value display process (S608) to convert the setting value updated in step S607 into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, which is the same as the setting value display process in step S507 above, and then proceeds to step S609. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt process in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off for each segment output port of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, based on the display setting value, and as a result the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S609). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S609 is NO), the process returns to step S605.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S609 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value storage process (S610) to store the updated setting value (the setting value obtained in step S604 if the start switch 7S was turned ON without the reset switch 53 ever being turned ON) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then proceeds to the process in step S611.

The main CPU 101 performs the same initialization process for setting changes (S510) as in the setting change process (no door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 48 (S611), and then proceeds to step S612.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S612) and then proceeds to the processing of step S613.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S613). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S613 is NO), the process returns to step S612.

If the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the off state (S613 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/end) data and performs initialization command (change/end) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (change/end) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S614). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3. This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (change/end) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S614, the main CPU 101 performs a payout acquisition process to obtain the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout display process to display the acquired payout count on the payout count lamp (S615). In the 7-segment LED driving process of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32 (S205), the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the set values for display on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the payout count lamp. After the processing in step S615,
The setting change process (with door open/closed conditions) shown in Figure 50 is completed and the program returns to the caller.

[11-3-2-2. Second Pattern Setting Confirmation Process (Setting Confirmation Process (with Door Open/Close Conditions))]
The second pattern of setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions)) will be explained with reference to Figure 51. The setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 51 is called between the end of one game and before the conditions for pressing the start lever 7 are met (no bet, no replay was won in the previous game, etc.). In the third game machine, the medal insertion check processing (S46) of the medal reception/start check processing (Figure 25) calls the setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 51 as a subroutine, and this executes the setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 51. When the setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 51 is called in the medal insertion check processing (S46) of the medal reception/start check processing, "setting confirmation" is written to a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and when the setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 51 is completed and the system returns to the caller of the setting confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 51, "setting confirmation" is deleted from the predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed to the on state after power-on (S651). The processing method for the determination in step S651 is the same as the processing method for the determination in step S551 of the setting confirmation process (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 49.

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state, that is, that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed to the on state after power-on (S651 is NO), the setting confirmation process (with door open/closed condition) shown in Figure 51 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

On the other hand, if the state of the setting key-type switch 52 changes from the off state to the on state, that is, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 changed to the on state after power-on (S651 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is on (open) or not (S652). If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not on (open) (S652 is NO), the setting confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 51 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is determined to be in the ON state (open state) (S652 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/start) data and performs initialization command (confirmation/start) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (confirmation/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S653). In the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) of Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (confirmation/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 3. This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (confirmation/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S653, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process, which is the same as the setting value acquisition and setting value display processing in step S503 above, to acquire the setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. It then performs a setting value display process (S654) to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and proceeds to the processing in step S655. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S655) and then proceeds to the processing of step S656.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S656). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S656 is NO), the process returns to step S655.

If the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the off state (S656 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/end) data and performs initialization command (confirmation/end) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (confirmation/end) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S657). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (confirmation/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3. This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (confirmation/end) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S657, the main CPU 101 performs a payout count acquisition process to retrieve the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout count display process to display the acquired payout count on the payout count lamp (S658). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the set values on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the payout count lamp. After the processing in step S658, the setting confirmation process (with door open/closed conditions) in Figure 51 is completed, and the system returns to the caller.

[11-3-3. Processing related to setting changes and setting confirmation: Pattern 3]
A third pattern of processing related to setting changes and setting confirmations performed by the main control circuit 100 will be described. In the third pattern, the processing related to setting changes (setting change processing) and the processing related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation processing) are executed by a common program, and the opening and closing of the door (lower door mechanism DD) is a condition for both the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing.

[11-3-3-1. Third Pattern Setting Change/Confirmation Process (Setting Change/Confirmation Process (with Door Open/Close Conditions))]
The third pattern of setting change and confirmation process (setting change and confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions)) will be explained with reference to Figure 52.

The power-on processing in the third gaming machine is a modified version of the power-on processing in Figure 24, replacing steps S22-S27 with the setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52. The setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52 is called as a subroutine, and this executes the setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52. When the setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52 is called during power-on processing, "setting change" is written to a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When the setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52 finishes and returns to the caller of the setting change/confirmation processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52, "setting change" is erased from the predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

Furthermore, the setting/change confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 is called between the end of one game and before the conditions for pressing the start lever 7 are met (e.g., no bet, no replay win in the previous game). In the third game machine, the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process (Figure 25) calls the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 as a subroutine, thereby executing the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52. When the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 is called in the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process, "setting confirmation" is written to a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 finishes and returns to the caller of the setting confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52, "setting confirmation" is erased from the predetermined area of the main RAM 103.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the ON state (open state) (S701). If it is determined that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is not in the ON state (open state) (S701 is NO), the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is determined to be in the ON state (open state) (S701 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state (S702). Note that if the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 is called during the power-on process, step S702 will determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 was in the ON state at the time of power-on. Also, if the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 52 is called during the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process (Figure 25), step S702 will determine whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 changed from the OFF state to the ON state after power-on.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state (i.e., the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the ON state when the power is turned on, or the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state after the power is turned on) (S702 is NO), the setting change/confirmation process (with door open/closed conditions) shown in Figure 52 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state (the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, or the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the OFF state to the ON state after the power is turned on) (S702 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the initialization command (change/start) generation and storage process (S703). If the caller is the power-on process (when "setting change" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103), it generates initialization command (change/start) data and stores the generated initialization command (change/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. If the caller is the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (Figure 25) (when "setting confirmation" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103), it generates initialization command (confirm/start) data and stores the generated initialization command (confirm/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. In the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/start) data or initialization command (confirm/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into a communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3. This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (change/start) data or initialization command (confirm/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S703, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process, which is the same as the setting value acquisition and setting value display processing in step S503 above, to acquire the setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. It then performs a setting value display process (S704) to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and proceeds to the processing in step S705. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 determines whether the caller of the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52 is a setting change process (S705), based on the contents stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. If it is determined that the caller is not a setting change process (the caller is the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process (Figure 25) (where "setting confirmation" is stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103)), then the process proceeds to step S713.

If it is determined that the process is related to a setting change (the caller is a power-on process (the "setting change" message is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103)), then the process proceeds to step S706.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S706) and then proceeds to the processing of step S707.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the reset switch 53 is in the ON state (S707). If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is not in the ON state (S707 is NO), the process proceeds to step S710.

If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is in the ON state (S707 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value update process (S708), which is the same as the setting value update process in step S506 above, and then proceeds to step S709. At this point, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 are not updated.

The main CPU 101 performs a setting value display process (S709) to display the setting value updated in step S708, which is the same as the setting value display process in step S507 above. This process converts the updated setting value into a display setting value for the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and then proceeds to step S710. In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets either an on or off value for each segment output port of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S710). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S710 is NO), the process returns to step S706.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S710 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value storage process (S711) to store the updated setting value (the setting value obtained in step S704 if the start switch 7S was turned ON without the reset switch 53 ever being turned ON) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then proceeds to the process in step S712.

The main CPU 101 performs the same initialization process for setting changes (S510) as in the setting change process (no door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 48 (S712), and then proceeds to step S713.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S713) and then proceeds to the processing of step S714.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S714). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S714 is NO), the process returns to step S713.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization command (change/end) generation and storage processing (S715). This processing is performed when the caller is the power-on process (when "setting change" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103), and when the caller is the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal acceptance/start check process (Figure 25) (when "setting confirmation" is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103), it generates initialization command (confirm/end) data and stores the generated initialization command (confirm/end) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. In the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/end) data or initialization command (confirm/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into a communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 3. This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (change/end) data or initialization command (confirm/end) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Following the processing in step S715, the main CPU 101 performs a payout acquisition process to retrieve the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout display process to display the retrieved payout count on the payout count lamp (S716). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the set values on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the lamp. After the processing in step S716, the setting change/confirmation process (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 52 is completed, and the system returns to the caller.

Furthermore, the process related to setting changes (setting change process) and the process related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation process) are executed by a common program, and the setting change process and the setting confirmation process may not be conditional on the opening or closing of the door (lower door mechanism DD). In this case, for example, the processing flow obtained by removing the process in step S701 from the setting change and confirmation process (with door opening/closing condition) shown in Figure 52 can be used.

Furthermore, in the third gaming machine, the input check port processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32 checks the status of the input ports corresponding to each of the various sensors and switches, and stores the check results in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown). Figures 48 to 52 refer to the contents of the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) to confirm the status of the various sensors and switches. However, the system is not limited to this. For example, in Figures 48 to 52, the system could directly refer to the status of the input ports corresponding to each of the various sensors and switches to confirm their status. In this case, the interrupt wait shown in Figures 48 to 52 would not be necessary.

Furthermore, while Figures 50 to 52 describe the case where the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is ON when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is open and OFF when it is closed, the explanation is not limited to this case. It is also possible to describe the case where the switch is ON when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed and OFF when it is open. In this case, in Figures 50 to 52, the parts relating to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 should be replaced with "OFF state" and vice versa.

[11-4. Procedures related to maintenance]
The following describes the maintenance processes performed by the sub-control circuit 200. Here, two patterns of maintenance processes, the first pattern and the second pattern, will be described. The maintenance processes allow the staff of the gaming parlor to check the contents of one or more items and set the contents of one or more items. Note that the "maintenance menu" in the third gaming machine corresponds to the hall menu in [8-2. Gaming Parlor Side].

The sub-RAM 203 is configured to include volatile memory (such as DRAM) and non-volatile memory (such as SRAM, FRAM®, etc.).

[11-4-1. Maintenance Procedure: Pattern 1 (Maintenance Procedure (No Door Opening/Closing Conditions)]
The first pattern of maintenance processing (maintenance processing (without door opening/closing conditions)) performed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 53. The sub-side control processing (overview) in Figure 33 calls the maintenance processing (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 53 as a subroutine, thereby executing the maintenance processing (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 53.

The non-volatile memory of sub-RAM 203 stores a state maintenance flag to maintain the execution state of the maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions). An ON state of the state maintenance flag indicates that the "maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions) execution state is maintained." Furthermore, the non-volatile memory of sub-RAM 203 stores a maintenance type flag indicating whether the maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 53 corresponds to a setting change process or a setting confirmation process on the main control circuit 100 side.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether the state maintenance flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 is set to the ON state (S801). If it is determined that the state maintenance flag is set to the ON state (S801 is YES), the process proceeds to step S804. The determination step S801 results in "YES" when the power is turned off while the state maintenance flag is set to the ON state, causing the maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (with door opening/closing conditions) to terminate prematurely or not complete properly, and then the maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (with door opening/closing conditions) to resume after the power is turned on.

If it is determined that the state maintenance flag is not set to the ON state (S801 is NO), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirm/start) (S802). If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S802 is NO), the maintenance process (no door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 53 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If it is determined that either an initialization command (change/start) or an initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S802 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 sets the state maintenance flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "on state," sets the maintenance type stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "setting change" if an initialization command (change/start) was received, or to "setting confirmation" if an initialization command (confirm/start) was received (S803), and proceeds to step S804.

The sub-CPU 201 displays the maintenance menu screen (the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 55(a) in the third gaming machine) on the sub-display device 220 (S804), and proceeds to step S805.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether the ON state of the start switch 7S is set in bit B7 (see Figure 45) of bit group D11 (input port P0) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 (S805). If it is determined that the ON state of the start switch 7S is set in bit B7 of bit group D11 (input port P0) (S805 is YES), the process proceeds to step S807. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the start switch 7S is not set in bit B7 of bit group D11 (input port P0) (S805 is NO), the process proceeds to step S806.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether the maintenance type flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 is set to "Setting Confirmation" (S806). If it is determined that the maintenance type flag is set to "Setting Confirmation" (S806 is YES), the process proceeds to step S807. On the other hand, if it is determined that the maintenance type is not set to "Setting Confirmation," that is, that "Setting Change" is set (S806 is NO), the process proceeds to step S808.

The sub-CPU 201 sets the state maintenance flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to the off state (S807) and proceeds to the processing of step S808. Note that in step S805, if the answer is YES, and in step S807, one of the conditions for step S812 to be "YES" is that the start lever 7 has been operated (the start switch 7S has been turned ON) in step S812, which is executed in response to a change in the settings of the main control circuit 100, as shown in Figure 53 (no door opening/closing conditions). Furthermore, in step S805 (NO), step S806 (YES), and step S807, in the maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (without door opening/closing conditions) executed in response to the setting confirmation on the main control circuit 100 side, the operation of the start lever 7 is not a condition for the setting confirmation process on the main CPU 101 side. Therefore, in step S812 described later, the operation of the start lever 7 (the start switch 7S being turned ON) is not included as one of the conditions for "YES" in step S812.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether an employee has operated on the screens displayed on the sub-display unit 220 using the touch panel that constitutes the sub-display unit 22 (S808). These screens include the maintenance menu screen (such as the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 55(a)), and screens for confirming content corresponding to the items on the maintenance menu screen (such as the total medal information screen, setting change/confirmation history screen, and error information history screen shown in Figures 55(b) to (d)), as well as screens for setting content (such as the time setting screen) (hereinafter referred to as "item screens" as appropriate). If it is determined that no operation has been performed by an employee (S808 is NO), the process proceeds to step S811.

Furthermore, while the third gaming machine is described as using a touch panel for staff operation of the maintenance menu screen and item screen, it is not limited to this. For example, operation keys (directional keys and Enter key), a PUSH button, a CHANCE button, or stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be used.

If it is determined that an operation was performed by an employee (S808 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs an operation identification process to identify the content of the employee's operation (S809), then performs an operation-specific screen display process to display the screen corresponding to the identified employee's operation on the sub-display device 220 (S810), and proceeds to step S811.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received either an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirm/end) (S811). If it determines that it has received either an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirm/end) (S811 is YES), the process proceeds to step S813.

If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/end) nor the initialization command (confirm/end) has been received (S811 is NO), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the state maintenance flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 is set to the off state, and whether bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 is set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S812). Note that the condition in step S812 is based on the assumption that a predetermined event has occurred in the third gaming machine, which means that the main control circuit 100 may have completed the processing related to setting changes or setting confirmations.

If the state maintenance flag is set to the off state, and it is determined that bit B6 of the bit group D13 is set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S812 is YES), the process proceeds to step S813. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state maintenance flag is not set to the off state, or that bit B6 of the bit group D13 is not set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S812 is NO), the process returns to step S805. Alternatively, if it is determined that the state maintenance flag is not set to the off state, or that bit B6 of the bit group D13 is not set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S812 is NO), the process may return to step S804.

The sub-CPU 201 performs maintenance termination processing (S813), which includes initializing the maintenance type stored in the sub-RAM 203 and ending the display of the maintenance menu screen and item screen currently shown on the sub-display device 220 so that neither the maintenance menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the sub-display device 220. The maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (without door opening/closing conditions) then ends, and the system returns to the caller.

Step S811 (YES) and Step S813 are normal maintenance completion processes performed upon receiving an initialization command (change/completion) or initialization command (confirmation/completion) transmitted by the main control circuit 100 at the end of a setting change or setting confirmation process.

Furthermore, steps S811 (NO), S812 (YES), and S813 are maintenance completion processes for troubleshooting when the third gaming machine is in a state where the main control circuit 100 has not received the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) sent at the end of the setting change or setting confirmation process, but the main control circuit 100 may have completed the setting change or setting confirmation process. These processes are performed when it is assumed that the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) could not be received due to some abnormality such as a communication error.

Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 is performing configuration verification processing, and the determination step S811 determines that no initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received (S811 is NO), then in the determination step S812, since the operation of the start lever 7 is irrelevant to the configuration verification processing on the main CPU 101 side, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set in bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100. If it is determined that the off state is set (S812 is YES), the process proceeds to step S813; if it is determined that the off state is not set (S812 is YES), the process returns to step S805.

[11-4-2. Maintenance Procedures: Pattern 2 (Maintenance Procedure (with Door Opening/Closing Conditions))]
The second pattern of maintenance processing (maintenance processing (with door opening/closing conditions)) performed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 54. The sub-side control processing (overview) in Figure 33 calls the maintenance processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 54 as a subroutine, thereby executing the maintenance processing (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 54.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received either an initialization command (change/start) or an initialization command (confirm/start) (S851). If it determines that neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S851 is NO), the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 54 is terminated and the system returns to the caller.

If it is determined that either an initialization command (change/start) or an initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S851 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 displays the maintenance menu screen (in the third gaming machine, the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 55(a)) on the sub-display device 220 (S852), and proceeds to step S853.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether bit B7 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 is set to the off state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, and whether bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 is set to the off state of the setting key type switch 52 (S853). The condition in step S853 is that a predetermined event has occurred in the third gaming machine, which means that the third gaming machine may have completed processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation on the main control circuit 100 side.

Furthermore, while the door open/close monitoring switch 56, connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, is used to determine the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD), this is not the only option. A 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74, may also be used.

If bit B7 of bit group D13 is set to the off state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, and bit B6 of bit group D13 is set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S853 is YES), the process returns to step S852. If step S853 is YES, steps S852 and S853 are repeated, and step S853 will not be NO, and the process will not transition from the maintenance menu top screen to the item screen. On the other hand, if bit B7 of bit group D13 is not set to the off state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, or if bit B6 of bit group D13 is not set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S853 is NO), the process proceeds to step S854.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether an employee has performed an operation on the screen displayed on the sub-display device 220 (one of the maintenance menu screens or item screens) using the touch panel that constitutes the sub-display unit 22 (S854). If it is determined that no operation has been performed (S854 is NO), the process proceeds to step S857.

If it is determined that an operation was performed by an employee (S854 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs an operation identification process to identify the content of the employee's operation (S855), then performs an operation-specific screen display process to display the screen corresponding to the identified employee's operation on the sub-display device 220 (S856), and proceeds to step S857.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether it has received either an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirm/end) (S857). If it is determined that neither an initialization command (change/end) nor an initialization command (confirm/end) has been received (S857 is NO), the process returns to step S853.

If it is determined that either an initialization command (change/end) or an initialization command (confirm/end) has been received (S857 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs maintenance termination processing (S858), which involves ending the display of the maintenance menu screen and item screen currently shown on the sub-display device 220, so that neither the maintenance menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the sub-display device 220. It then terminates the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 54 and returns to the caller.

Step S857 (YES) and Step S858 are normal maintenance completion processes performed upon receiving an initialization command (change/completion) or initialization command (confirmation/completion) transmitted by the main control circuit 100 at the end of a setting change or setting confirmation process.

Furthermore, steps S853 (YES) and S852 are error handling procedures performed when the main control circuit 100 has not received the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) sent at the end of the setting change or setting confirmation process, but the third gaming machine is in a state where it is possible that the main control circuit 100 has completed the setting change or setting confirmation process. These procedures are for correcting errors that occur when it is assumed that the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) could not be received due to some kind of error, such as a communication error.

[11-4-3. Display screen during maintenance processing]
The maintenance menu screen and item screen displayed on the sub-display device 220 in steps S804 and S808-S10 during the maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 53, and in steps S852 and S854-S856 during the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 54 will be explained with reference to Figure 55.

When a setting change operation (an operation to turn on the power with the setting key-type switch 52 in the ON position) or a setting confirmation operation (an operation to turn on the setting key-type switch 52 while the power is on) is performed, that is, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives an initialization command (change/start) or initialization command (confirm/start), the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 55(a) is displayed in step S804 during the maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 53 or in step S852 during the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 54.

The maintenance menu screen, including the top screen shown in Figure 55(a), displays items related to maintenance (items that can be checked by the arcade staff, items that can be configured by the arcade staff, etc.). Items that can be checked by the arcade staff include "Total Medal Information," "Setting Change/Confirmation History," "Error Information History," and "Monitoring History." Items that can be configured by the arcade staff include "Time Setting," "Warning Setting," "Power Saving Mode Setting," "Game Stop Setting," and "Automatic Settlement Setting."

The maintenance menu top screen displays the current date and time information A11, showing the current "Year/Month/Day/(Day of the Week) Hour:Minute," as shown in Figure 55(a). The current date and time information A11 is displayed in a different color (e.g., red) than when it is called and displayed outside of maintenance processing (e.g., white, black), to indicate that maintenance processing (without door opening/closing conditions/with door opening/closing conditions) is in progress. Furthermore, if error information is set in the error status flag during the processing described in Figures 56 to 58, the current date and time information A11 may be displayed in a different color to indicate that error information is set in the error status flag.

The maintenance menu top screen displays "Time Setting" A12, an item whose content can be set by the staff of the amusement parlor, as shown in Figure 55(a), "Total Medal Information" A13, "Setting Change/Confirmation History" A14, "Error Information History" A15, and "Monitoring History" A16, which are items whose content can be confirmed by the staff of the amusement parlor, and then "Next" A17 is displayed. When the staff member touches "Time Setting" A12 on the touch panel, the time setting screen (not shown) for setting the time is displayed. When they touch "Total Medal Information" A13, the total medal information screen shown in Figure 55(b) is displayed. When they touch "Setting Change/Confirmation History" A14, the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in Figure 55(c) is displayed. When they touch "Error Information History" A15, the error information history screen shown in Figure 55(d) is displayed. When they touch "Monitoring History" A16, the monitoring history screen (not shown) is displayed. Furthermore, when an attendant touches "Next" A17 on the touch panel, a maintenance menu screen (not shown) will appear, displaying other items that the arcade staff can configure or verify.

As shown in Figure 55(b), the Total Medal Information screen displays "Total Medal Information" A21, which includes "Total Games Played," "Total Coins Inserted," "Total Coins Payout," "Net Coins," and "Payout Rate." The "Total Games Played," "Total Coins Inserted," and "Total Coins Payout" in "Total Medal Information" A21 display the total games played, total coins inserted, and total coins paid out stored in the sub-RAM 203. The "Net Coins" and "Payout Rate" in "Total Medal Information" A21 display the net coins and payout rate calculated using the total coins inserted and total coins paid out stored in the sub-RAM 203 when the Total Medal Information screen is displayed. The total games played, total coins inserted, and total coins paid out are stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that they can be saved even after the power is turned off.

Furthermore, at the start of a unit game (when the start lever 7 is operated), for example, when a start command is received from the main control circuit 100, the total number of games is calculated and stored in the sub-RAM 203. At the time of betting in a unit game, for example, when a medal insertion command (including parameters that can specify the number of bets, etc.) is received from the main control circuit 100, the total number of medals inserted is calculated and stored in the sub-RAM 203. The total number of medals paid out is calculated at the end of a unit game, for example, when a prize activation command (including parameters that can specify the type of displayed prize and the content of the awarded bonus, etc.) is received from the main control circuit 100, and stored in the sub-RAM 203.

As shown in Figure 55(b), the total medal information screen displays "Back" A22. When an attendant touches "Back" A22 on the touch panel, the screen returns to the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 55(a).

As shown in Figure 55(b), the total medal information screen displays "Data Clear" A23. When an attendant touches "Data Clear" A23 on the touch panel, the total number of games played, total number of coins inserted, and total number of coins paid out stored in the sub-RAM 203 are cleared (erased).

Alternatively, instead of calculating the net number of tokens and payout rate when displaying the total token information screen, the net number of tokens and payout rate may be calculated from the total number of tokens inserted and the total number of tokens paid out, stored in the sub-RAM 203 at the end of a unit of play. These calculated net number of tokens and payout rate are then stored in the sub-RAM 203, and the "Net Number of Tokens" and "Payout Rate" included in the "Total Token Information" A21 display the net number of tokens and payout rate stored in the sub-RAM 203. In this case, the net number of tokens and payout rate are stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that they can be saved even after the power is turned off. When the "Data Clear" A23 is touched by an attendant, the net number of tokens and payout rate stored in the sub-RAM 203 are cleared (erased).

The settings change/confirmation history screen displays "Settings Change/Confirmation History" A31, which includes "No," "Settings Change/Confirmation Date and Time," "Operation," and "Setting," as shown in Figure 55(c). "Settings Change/Confirmation History" A31 displays five entries of settings change/confirmation information (including setting change/confirmation date and time, operation details, and setting values) stored in the sub-RAM 203. The "Settings Change/Confirmation Date and Time," "Operation," and "Setting" fields in "Settings Change/Confirmation History" A31 display the setting change/confirmation date and time, operation details, and setting values included in the settings change/confirmation information. Furthermore, the settings change/confirmation information (including setting change/confirmation date and time, operation details, and setting values) is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that it can be saved even after the power is turned off. The maximum number of settings change/confirmation entries stored in the sub-RAM 203 is determined according to the data size of the settings change/confirmation information and the capacity of the area in the sub-RAM 203 where the settings change/confirmation information is stored; for example, it is 150.

The date and time of the setting change/confirmation included in the setting change/confirmation information is the time when the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) was received (the date and time obtained from the RTC (Real-Time Clock) at the time of reception (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)).

The setting values included in the setting change/confirmation information are the setting values ("0" to "5") set in bit group D01 of the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end). In the "Setting" field of the "Setting Change/Confirmation History" A31, "1" is displayed if the setting value included in the setting change/confirmation information is "0", "2" is displayed if it is "1", ..., and "6" is displayed if it is "5". Thus, the setting value displayed in the "Setting" field of the "Setting Change/Confirmation History" A31 is aligned with the setting value displayed on the payout lamp on the main control circuit 100 side.

The operation content included in the setting change/confirmation information is one of the following: "Change," "Confirm," or "View." "Change" is stored when the reset switch 53 is turned ON at least once during the setting change process, before the start lever 7 is operated (before receiving a no-operation command with the start switch 7S ON state set in bit B7 of bit group D11). "View" is stored when the reset switch 53 is not turned ON even once during the setting change process, before the start lever 7 is operated (before receiving a no-operation command with the start switch 7S ON state set in bit B7 of bit group D11). "Confirm" is stored when the setting change process is performed.

As shown in Figure 55(c), the settings change/confirmation history screen displays "Previous Page" A32 and "Next Page" A33. When an attendant touches "Previous Page" A32 on the touch panel, the five previous settings change/confirmation entries are displayed in "Settings Change/Confirmation History" A31. When an attendant touches "Next Page" A33 on the touch panel, the five next settings change/confirmation entries are displayed in "Settings Change/Confirmation History" A31.

As shown in Figure 55(c), the settings change/confirmation history screen displays "Back" A34. When an attendant touches "Back" A34 on the touch panel, the display returns to the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 55(a).

As shown in Figure 55(c), the settings change/confirmation history screen displays "Data Clear" A35. When an attendant touches "Data Clear" A35 on the touch panel, the settings change/confirmation information (including the date and time of the setting change/confirmation, operation details, and setting values) stored in the sub-RAM 203 is cleared (erased).

The error information history screen displays "Error Information History" A41, which includes "No.", "Error Details", "Date and Time of Occurrence", and "Date and Time of Resolution", as shown in Figure 55(d). "Error Information History" A41 displays five error entries (error details, date and time of occurrence, and resolution date and time) stored in the sub-RAM 203. The "Error Details", "Date and Time of Occurrence", and "Date and Time of Resolution" fields in "Error Information History" A41" display the error details, date and time of occurrence, and resolution date and time included in the error information. The error information (error details, date and time of occurrence, and resolution date and time) is stored in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203 so that it can be saved even after the power is turned off. The maximum number of error entries stored in the sub-RAM 203 is determined according to the data size of the error information and the capacity of the error information storage area in the sub-RAM 203, for example, 150.

The error details included in the error information are the error codes assigned to the errors that occurred.

The occurrence date and time and release date and time included in the error information are as follows in the case of an error on the main control board 71 side. When an error occurs on the main control board 71 side, an error command that can identify the content of the error is sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. When an error is released, an error command is also sent from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, and multiple errors do not occur simultaneously on the main control board 71 side, and the sub-CPU 201 recognizes the errors that are occurring, so it can know which error has been released. The occurrence date and time and release date and time included in the error information are the time when the error command related to the occurrence of the error was received (date and time obtained from the RTC at the time of reception (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)) and the time when the error command related to the release of the error was received (date and time obtained from the RTC at the time of reception (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)). Furthermore, the occurrence date and time and release date and time included in the error information are, in the case of an error on the sub-control board 72, for example, the error detected in Figures 56 to 58 described later, the start time when the error is displayed on the sub-display device 220 (date and time acquired from the RTC at the start (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)) and the time when the error is released (date and time acquired from the RTC at the time of release (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)).

As shown in Figure 55(d), the error information history screen displays "Previous Page" A42 and "Next Page" A43. When an attendant touches "Previous Page" A42 on the touch panel, the five previous error entries are displayed in "Error Information History" A41. When an attendant touches "Next Page" A43 on the touch panel, the five next error entries are displayed in "Error Information History" A41.

As shown in Figure 55(d), the error information history screen displays "Back" A44. When an attendant touches "Back" A44 on the touch panel, the display returns to the maintenance menu top screen shown in Figure 47(a).

As shown in Figure 55(d), the error information history screen displays "Data Clear" A45. When an attendant touches "Data Clear" A45 on the touch panel, the error information stored in the sub-RAM 203 (including error details, occurrence date and time, and clearing date and time) is cleared (erased).

[11-5. Error detection process related to setting changes and confirmations]
The following describes the error detection process related to setting changes and confirmations performed by the sub-control circuit 200.

[11-5-1. Configuration Change/Confirmation Error Detection Process]
The setting change and confirmation error detection process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 56. The setting change and confirmation error detection process is read by an interrupt process at a fixed interval (for example, one period is any time between 2 msec (milliseconds) and 10 msec (milliseconds)) and constantly detects errors related to setting changes and confirmations.

The sub-CPU 201 performs the setting key information generation process described later using Figure 57 (S901), and then proceeds to step S902.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set in bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 (S902). If it is determined that the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 is not set in bit B6 of bit group 13 (S902 is NO), the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56 is terminated and the process returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 is set in bit B6 of bit group 13 (S902 is YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether the ON-edge flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 is set to the ON state (S903). The ON state of the ON-edge flag indicates that the ON edge of the setting key switch 52 was detected during the setting key information creation process (S901) of the current setting change/confirmation error detection process (Figure 56) (i.e., the setting key switch 52 was detected to be ON when the power was turned on, or the setting key switch 52 was detected to have changed from the OFF state to the ON state after the power was turned on). The ON-edge flag is stored, for example, in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203.

If it is determined that the ON edge flag is set to the ON state (S903 is YES), the process proceeds to step S905 to check for errors related to the setting key (related to the setting key-type switch 52) and to set the error information that was checked. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON edge flag is not set to the ON state (S903 is NO), the process proceeds to step S904 to report the error information set in steps S905 to S913, which were performed when step S903 was "YES".

In step S904, the sub-CPU 201 performs the setting error notification process described later using Figure 58 (S904), terminates the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56, and returns to the caller.

In step S905, the sub-CPU 201 clears the error status flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 (setting it to an unregistered error state) (S905), and proceeds to step S906. The error status flag is stored, for example, in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether bit B7 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the idle command received from the main control circuit 100 is set to the off state (closed state) of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 (S906).

Furthermore, while the door open/close monitoring switch 56, connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, is used to determine the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD), this is not the only option. A 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74, may also be used.

If it is determined that bit B7 of bit group D13 is set to the off state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 (S906 is YES), the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, if it is determined that bit B7 of bit group D13 is not set to the off state (closed state) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 (S906 is NO), the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S907, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting key operation flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 is set to "change operation" (step S907). The setting key operation flag is stored, for example, in the non-volatile memory of the sub-RAM 203.

If it is determined that the setting key operation flag is set to "change operation" (S907 is YES), an error related to the operation of the setting key is detected, specifically the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 when the power is turned on while the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed. Therefore, the sub-CPU 201 sets the error status flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "setting change operation error" (S908), which identifies the error, and proceeds to step S914.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key operation flag is not set to "change operation," that is, that it is set to "confirm operation" (S907 is NO), then an error related to the operation of the setting key is detected, specifically the change in the setting key-type switch 52 to the ON state after power-on while the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed. Therefore, the sub-CPU 201 sets the error status flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "setting key error," which identifies the error (S909), and proceeds to step S914.

In step S910, it is determined whether or not either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S910). If it is determined that either the initialization command (change/start) or the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S910 is NO), the process proceeds to step S914.

If it is determined that neither the initialization command (change/start) nor the initialization command (confirm/start) has been received (S910 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting key operation flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 is set to "change operation" (step S911).

If it is determined that the setting key operation flag is set to "change operation" (S911 is YES), an error related to the operation of the setting key has been detected: the setting key-type switch 52 is ON when the power is turned on, even though no initialization command (change/start) has been received. Therefore, the sub-CPU 201 sets the error status flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "currently setting change impossible error" (S912), which identifies the error, and proceeds to step S914.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key operation flag is not set to "change operation," that is, that it is set to "confirm operation" (S911 is NO), an error related to the operation of the setting key is detected, which is the change to the ON state of the setting key type switch 52 after power-on without receiving an initialization command (change/start).
The sub-CPU 201 sets the error status flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "setting confirmation error" which can identify the error (S913), and proceeds to the process in step S914.

In step S914, the sub-CPU 201 sets the ON edge flag to OFF (S914), terminates the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56, and returns to the caller.

[11-5-1-1. Setting Key Information Creation Process]
The setting key information creation process (S901) in the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56 will be explained with reference to Figure 57.

The sub-CPU 201 receives the first idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on, and determines whether bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received idle command is set to the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S951).

If the system receives the first idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on, and it is determined that bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received idle command (see Figure 45) is set to the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S951 is YES), the process proceeds to step S953. On the other hand, if the system does not receive the first idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on, and it is not determined that bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received idle command (see Figure 45) is set to the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S951 is NO), the process proceeds to step S952.

In step S952, the sub-CPU 201 determines, for two consecutively received pairs of no-operation commands, whether bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received no-operation command (see Figure 45) is set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52, and whether bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the second received no-operation command (see Figure 45) is set to the on state of the setting key-type switch 52 (whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state) (S952).

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state (S952 is YES), the process proceeds to step S953. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state (S952 is NO), the setting key information creation process shown in Figure 57 is terminated, and the process returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56.

In step S953, the sub-CPU 201 sets the ON edge flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to the ON state (S953), and proceeds to the processing in step S954.

The sub-CPU 201 receives the first idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on, and determines whether bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received idle command is set to the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S954).

If the system receives the first idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on, and it is determined that bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received idle command (see Figure 45) is set to the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S954 is YES), the process proceeds to step S955. On the other hand, if the system does not receive the first idle command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 after power-on, and it is not determined that bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) in the first received idle command (see Figure 45) is set to the ON state of the setting key-type switch 52 (S954 is NO), the process proceeds to step S956.

In step S955, the sub-CPU 201 sets the setting key operation flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "change operation" (S955), terminates the setting key information creation process shown in Figure 57, and returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56.

In step S956, the sub-CPU 201 determines, based on two consecutively received no-operation commands, whether bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) (see Figure 45) in the first received no-operation command is set to the off state of the setting key-type switch 52, and whether bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) (see Figure 45) in the second received no-operation command is set to the on state of the setting key-type switch 52 (whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state) (S956).

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state (S956 is YES), the process proceeds to step S957. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state (S956 is NO), the setting key information creation process shown in Figure 57 is terminated, and the process returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56.

In step S957, the sub-CPU 201 sets the setting key operation flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 to "Confirmation Operation" (S957), terminates the setting key information creation process shown in Figure 57, and returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56.

[11-5-1-2. Configuration Error Notification Processing]
The setting error notification process (S904) in the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56 will be explained with reference to Figure 58.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 has been in the ON state for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the third gaming machine, but not limited to this) or longer (S971). Regarding setting changes, if the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state, and bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) (see Figure 45) of the first idle command received after power is turned on is set to the ON state, and if the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state, and bit B6 of bit group D13 (input port P2) (see Figure 45) of each idle command received between the time the first idle command is received after power is turned on and 2 seconds have elapsed, then it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 has been in the ON state for 2 seconds or more. Furthermore, regarding setting changes, if bit B6 (see Figure 45) of bit group D13 (input port P2) in each received idle command is set to the ON state for two seconds or more after the ON edge flag is set to the ON state in step S953 of the setting key information creation process (Figure 57), then it is determined that two seconds or more have passed since the setting key switch 52 was set to the ON state. Note that the time of two seconds or more can be measured using methods such as measurement based on the number of idle commands received at regular intervals, measurement using the soft timer of the sub-CPU 201, or measurement based on the number of executions of the setting change/confirmation error detection process (Figure 56) performed at regular intervals.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 has not been in the ON state for more than two seconds (S971 is NO), the setting error notification process shown in Figure 58 is terminated, and the process returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56.

If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 has been in the ON state for more than two seconds (S971 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not error information ("setting change operation error", "setting key error", "currently setting change impossible error", "setting confirmation error") is set in the error status flag stored in the sub-RAM 203 (S972). If it is determined that no error information is set in the error status flag (S972 is NO), the setting error notification process shown in Figure 58 is terminated, and the process returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process shown in Figure 56.

If it is determined that error information is set in the error status flag (S972 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 displays the setting operation abnormality error screen shown in Figure 59 on the sub-display device 220 to notify the error information set in the error status flag (S973), and proceeds to step S974.

The error screen for setting operation errors displays "Please call an attendant" (A51) and "Error status flag details" (A52), as shown in Figure 59. "Error status flag details" displays the error information set in the error status flag ("Setting change operation error," "Setting key error," "Currently setting change unavailable error," "Setting confirmation error").

The error screen for setting operation errors is a dedicated error notification (warning) screen for setting operation system errors and differs from the error notification (warning) screen for normal errors. In the case of a normal error, not only is there a display on the sub-control board 72, but the main control board 71 also displays a code indicating the occurrence and ongoing error. If the error is on the main control board 71, the payout count lamp (information display device 14) displays the code, the lamps and LEDs used for effects on the sub-control board 72 (upper lamp 23, etc.) illuminate in a pattern indicating an error is occurring, and an error sound is emitted from speakers 35a and 35b. On the other hand, the error screen for setting operation errors does not have a display on the main control board 71, such as the payout count lamp, and there is no illumination of the lamps and LEDs used for effects on the sub-control board 72 (upper lamp 23, etc.) or sound output from speakers 35a and 35b. Alternatively, the sub-control board 72 may be configured to illuminate the special effect lamps/LEDs (such as the upper lamp 23) with the same light pattern as a normal error, and output the same error sound from speakers 35a and 35b. Alternatively, the special effect lamps/LEDs (such as the upper lamp 23) may be configured to illuminate with a dedicated light pattern, and output a dedicated error sound from speakers 35a and 35b.

The sub-CPU 201 registers the error information set in the error status flag and the start time of displaying that error information (the date and time obtained from the RTC at the start (year, month, day, hour, minute, second: yyyy/mm/dd hh/mm/ss)) in the error information history stored in the sub-RAM 203 (the content displayed in error information history A41 on the error information history screen shown in Figure 55(d)) (S974), and then terminates the setting error notification process in Figure 58 and returns to the setting change/confirmation error detection process in Figure 56.

Note that while Figures 54 and 56 describe the case where the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is ON when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is open and OFF when it is closed, the explanation is not limited to this case. It is also possible to describe the case where the switch is ON when the door (lower door mechanism DD) is closed and OFF when it is open. In this case, in Figures 46 and 56, the parts relating to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 should be replaced with "OFF state" and vice versa.

[11-6. Effects]
[11-6-1. Effects of maintenance treatment (with door opening/closing conditions)]
According to the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) in Figure 54, upon completion of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process on the main CPU 101 side of the main control circuit 100 of the main control board 71, the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) is terminated by the sub-CPU 201 side of the sub-control circuit 200 of the sub-control board 72 in such a way that neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit. This prevents unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen or unauthorized settings of the contents of the item screen after the completion of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process.

By the way, if the sub-CPU 201 is unable to receive the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) sent from the main control board 71 due to some abnormality such as a communication error, the sub-CPU 210 will not be able to terminate the maintenance process by not displaying either the menu screen or the item screen on the display unit unless any countermeasures are taken. In this way, even after the main CPU 101 has completed the processing related to setting confirmation and the processing related to setting changes, a problem arises in which it becomes possible to illegally view the contents of the item screen or to illegally set the contents of the item screen. In the maintenance process shown in Figure 54 (with door opening/closing conditions), a predetermined event (in the case of the third gaming machine, a situation in which the third gaming machine is in a state where it is possible that the main control circuit 100 has finished processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation) is defined as the state in which the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state. It is determined whether the state in which the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S852). If the state in which the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S853 is YES), the maintenance menu top screen is displayed (S852), and steps S852, S853, and S853 are repeated as "YES". This prevents the maintenance menu top screen from accepting operations (disabling operations), and even if the sub-CPU 201 cannot receive initialization commands (change/end) or initialization commands (confirm/end) from the main control board 71 due to a communication error or other abnormality, it prevents unauthorized viewing or setting of the contents of the item screen in the event of a communication error or other abnormality.

Furthermore, the predetermined event may be any situation of the third gaming machine other than the situation where the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state, provided that the third gaming machine is in a state where it is possible that the main control circuit 100 has completed the processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation.

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S852). If it determines that the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the off state (closed state) and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S853 is YES), it displays the maintenance menu top screen (S852). This simple process and control, where steps S852, S853, and S853 are repeated as "YES," prevents unauthorized viewing or setting of the contents of the item screen.

Furthermore, by having the sub-CPU 201 use the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, which is connected to the main control board 71 used by the main CPU 101 for detecting the opening/closing status of the door (lower door mechanism DD), it becomes possible to suppress the increase in the number of parts caused by the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) shown in Figure 54.

Furthermore, a simple mechanism allows the sub-CPU 201 to recognize the state (on or sub) of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 by sending an idle command (see Figure 45) from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

Furthermore, instead of using the door open/close monitoring switch 56 connected to the main control board 71 to detect the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD), the sub-CPU 201 may use the 24h door monitoring unit 61 connected to the sub-control board 72. In this case, even if there is a communication failure between the sub-CPU 201 and other control units such as the main CPU 101, the open/closed state of the door (lower door mechanism DD) can still be obtained.

Furthermore, a simple mechanism allows the sub-CPU 201 to recognize the state (off or on) of the setting key-type switch 52 connected to the main control board 71 (see Figure 45) by sending an idle command (see Figure 45) from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

[11-6-2. Effects of maintenance treatment (without door opening/closing conditions)]
According to the maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (without door opening/closing conditions), upon completion of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process on the main CPU 101 side of the main control circuit 100 of the main control board 71, the maintenance process (with door opening/closing conditions) is terminated by the sub-CPU 201 side of the sub-control circuit 200 of the sub-control board 72, which prevents either the menu screen or the item screen from being displayed on the display unit. This prevents unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen or unauthorized setting of the contents of the item screen after the completion of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process.

By the way, if the sub-CPU 201 is unable to receive the initialization command (change/end) or initialization command (confirm/end) sent from the main control board 71 due to some abnormality such as a communication error, the sub-CPU 210 will not be able to terminate the maintenance process by not displaying either the menu screen or the item screen on the display unit unless any countermeasures are taken. In this way, even after the main CPU 101 has completed the processing related to setting confirmation and the processing related to setting changes, a problem arises in which it becomes possible to illegally view the contents of the item screen or to illegally set the contents of the item screen. In the maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (without door opening/closing conditions), a predetermined event (in the case of the third gaming machine, a situation in which the third gaming machine is in a state where the main control circuit 100 may have finished processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation) is defined as the state maintenance flag being in the off state and the setting key-type switch 52 being in the off state. It is determined whether the state maintenance flag is in the off state and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S812). If the state maintenance flag is in the off state and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S812 is YES), the maintenance process shown in Figure 53 (without door opening/closing conditions) is terminated by not displaying anything on either the menu screen or the item screen (S813). This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized viewing or setting of the contents of the item screen even if the sub-CPU 201 is unable to receive initialization commands (change/end) or initialization commands (confirm/end) from the main control board 71 due to some kind of abnormality such as a communication error.

Furthermore, the predetermined event may be a state in which the third gaming machine is in a state where the main control circuit 100 has completed processing related to setting changes or setting confirmation, even if the state maintenance flag is in the off state and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state.

Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the state maintenance flag is set to the off state and whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S812). If it determines that the state maintenance flag is set to the off state and the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S812 is YES), it terminates the maintenance process (without door opening/closing conditions) by preventing either the maintenance menu screen or the item screen from being displayed on the sub-display unit 220 (S813). This simple processing and control prevents unauthorized viewing or setting of the contents of the item screen.

Furthermore, a simple mechanism allows the sub-CPU 201 to recognize the state of the start switch 7S connected to the main control board 71 (off or on) by sending an idle command (see Figure 45) from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

Furthermore, a simple mechanism allows the sub-CPU 201 to recognize the state (off or on) of the setting key-type switch 52 connected to the main control board 71 (see Figure 45) by sending an idle command (see Figure 45) from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

Furthermore, by using a state maintenance flag, it is possible to unify the determination process for the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the process of confirming the setting value and the determination process for the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the process of changing the setting value, while including the state of the start switch 7S being ON in the determination of the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the process of changing the setting value, and not including the state of the start switch 7S being ON in the determination of the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the process of confirming the setting value.

Furthermore, by using a status maintenance flag, maintenance processes (without door opening/closing conditions) that were interrupted due to a power outage can be resumed after the power is restored.

[11-7. Addendum]
[11-7-1. Appendix 1]
In some conventional gaming machines, when an operator turns on a setting key-type switch on the main control board using a setting key and then turns on the power, the setting change process begins, or when an operator turns on a setting key-type switch on the setting board using a setting key while the power is on, the setting confirmation process begins. In conjunction with this, a maintenance menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display on the sub-control board, and when an operator operates the operation keys to select the "Error Information History" item displayed on the menu screen, the error information history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display (see, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-30542 (for example, paragraph 0124, figures 82, 83, etc.))).

However, it is undesirable from a fraudulent standpoint that the sub-control board can continue to view the contents of the item screens corresponding to the items included in the menu screen even after the setting change or setting confirmation process has been completed on the main control board.

The gaming machine described in Appendix 1 was developed in view of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen corresponding to the items included in the menu screen after the setting value display processing or setting value change processing has been completed on the gaming control unit side.

The gaming machine (a1) related to Appendix 1 is,
In a gaming machine comprising a game control unit (71) that controls the progress of the game, an effect control unit (72) that controls the effects according to the progress state of the game control unit, a first switch (52) connected to the game control unit, a second switch (53) connected to the game control unit, a display unit (220) connected to the effect control unit, and an operation unit (22) connected to the effect control unit,
The aforementioned game control unit,
It includes a setting value storage unit (103) that stores setting values indicating the degree of advantage for the player in the game,
A setting value display process (Figures 51, 52, S205) is performed to display the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit, provided that the state of the first switch changes after the power is turned on.
A setting value change process (Figures 50, 52, S205) is performed in which, provided that the first switch is in a state where the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit can be changed when the power is turned on, the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is changed based on the change in the state of the second switch.
The aforementioned game control unit,
In the aforementioned setting value display process,
When starting to display the setting value, a first start command is sent to the performance control unit (S653, S703, S204).
When the display related to the setting value is terminated, a first termination command is sent to the performance control unit (S657, S715, S204).
In the above setting value change process,
When the display related to the setting value performed in the setting value change process is started, a second start command is sent to the performance control unit (S603, S703, S204).
When the display related to the setting value is terminated, a second termination command is sent to the performance control unit (S614, S715, S204).
The performance control unit displays a menu screen on the display unit that includes a plurality of items selectable using the operation unit, and performs a screen display process that displays on the display unit the item screen corresponding to the item selected using the operation unit on the menu screen from among the item screens provided for each of the plurality of items (Figure 54).
The aforementioned performance control unit,
In the aforementioned screen display process,
Upon receiving the first start command or the second start command, the display of the menu screen is started (S852),
Upon receiving the first termination command or the second termination command, neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit (S858).
It is characterized by the following.

According to this, upon completion of the setting value display process and the setting value change process on the game control side, the performance control side will prevent the menu screen and item screen from being displayed on the display unit. Therefore, unauthorized viewing of the item screen content after the completion of the setting value display process and the setting value change process can be prevented.

The gaming machine (a2) is, in the gaming machine (a1) described above,
The performance control unit performs a display restriction process in the screen display process to restrict the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event occurs that is different from the reception of the first termination command or the second termination command (S853, S853 is YES, S852).
That is also acceptable.

Incidentally, if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command sent from the game control unit due to a communication error or other malfunction, the performance control unit cannot terminate the screen display process. This creates a problem where the contents of the item screen can be illegally accessed even after the game control unit has finished displaying or changing the setting values.

According to the above-described gaming machine (a2), the performance control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that it is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event occurs. Therefore, even if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command transmitted from the gaming control unit due to some abnormality such as a communication error, it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen when such an abnormality occurs.

The gaming machine (a3) is, in the gaming machine (a2) described above,
In the display restriction process, the performance control unit displays the menu screen on the display unit upon the occurrence of the predetermined event, and controls the performance control unit to a state where it does not accept selection operations for the items using the operation unit on the menu screen (S853, S853 is YES, S852).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen can be prevented with simple processing and control.

The gaming machine (a4) is, in the gaming machine (a2) or (a3) described above,
The performance control unit determines whether the predetermined event has occurred based on the detection results of the open/close detection sensors (56, 61) that detect the open or closed state of the front door (DD) which is attached to the gaming machine body (G) so as to be openable and closable (S853).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, the performance control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that it is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event related to the opening and closing state of the front door occurs. Therefore, even if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command transmitted from the game control unit due to some abnormality such as a communication error, it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen in the event of such an abnormality.

The gaming machine (a5) is, in the gaming machine (a4) described above,
The opening/closing detection sensor (56) may be connected to the game control unit.

According to this, by having the performance control unit detect the open/closed state of the front door, and the game control unit using an open/closed detection sensor connected to the game control unit that also detects the open/closed state of the front door, it becomes possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts.

The gaming machine (a6) is, in the gaming machine (a5) described above,
The game control unit may also transmit an input state command to the performance control unit that includes front door open/close information indicating the open or closed state of the front door as detected by the open/close detection sensor (56).

According to this system, a simple mechanism is used in which the game control unit sends an input status command, including front door open/closed information, to the performance control unit. The performance control unit then becomes able to recognize the state of the front door (open or closed) detected by the open/closed detection sensor connected to the game control unit.

The gaming machine (a7) is, in the gaming machine (a4) described above,
The opening/closing detection sensor (61) may be connected to the performance control unit.

According to this, by using an open/close detection sensor connected to the performance control unit to detect the open/closed state of the front door, the open/closed state of the front door can be obtained even if a communication abnormality occurs with other control units such as the game control unit.

The gaming machine (a8) is one of the gaming machines (a2) to (a7) described above,
The performance control unit determines whether or not the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the first switch (S853).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, the performance control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that it is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event related to the state of the first switch occurs. Therefore, even if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command transmitted from the game control unit due to some abnormality such as a communication error, it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen in the event of such an abnormality.

The gaming machine (a9) is subordinate to the gaming machine (a6) described above in the gaming machine (a8),
The game control unit may transmit the input state command, which includes first switch state information indicating the state of the first switch, to the performance control unit.

According to this, a simple mechanism allows the game control unit to send an input status command containing the first switch status information to the performance control unit, enabling the performance control unit to recognize the status of the first switch connected to the game control unit.

The gaming machine (a10) is located in the gaming machine (a6), the gaming machine (a8) which is subordinate to the gaming machine (a6), or the gaming machine (a9) described above.
The game control unit may periodically transmit the input status command.

According to this, the performance control unit will be able to periodically acquire information contained in the input state command.

The gaming machine described in Appendix 1 can provide a system that prevents unauthorized access to the history of setting value confirmation and setting value changes by anyone other than authorized personnel such as hall staff.

[11-7-2. Appendix 2]
In some conventional gaming machines, when an operator turns on a key-shaped setting switch on the main control board using a setting key and then turns on the power, the setting change process begins. Alternatively, when an operator turns on a key-shaped setting switch using a setting key while the power is on, the setting confirmation process begins. In conjunction with this, a maintenance menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display on the sub-control board. When an operator operates the operation keys to select the "Error Information History" item displayed on the menu screen, the error information history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display (see, for example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-30542 (e.g., paragraph 0124, figures 82, 83, etc.))).

However, it is undesirable from a fraudulent standpoint that the sub-control board can continue to view the contents of the item screens corresponding to the items included in the menu screen even after the setting change or setting confirmation process has been completed on the main control board.

The gaming machine described in Appendix 2 was developed in view of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen corresponding to the items included in the menu screen after the setting value display processing or setting value change processing has been completed on the gaming control unit side.

The gaming machine (b1) according to this embodiment is
In a gaming machine comprising a game control unit (71) that controls the progress of the game, an effect control unit (72) that controls the effects according to the progress state of the game control unit, a first switch (52) connected to the game control unit, a second switch (53) connected to the game control unit, a display unit (220) connected to the effect control unit, and an operation unit (22) connected to the effect control unit,
The aforementioned game control unit,
It includes a setting value storage unit (103) that stores setting values indicating the degree of advantage for the player in the game,
A setting value display process (Figure 49, S205) is performed to display a setting value stored in the setting value storage unit, provided that the state of the first switch changes after the power is turned on.
A setting value change process (Figure 48, S205) is performed, which, provided that the first switch is in a state where it is possible to change the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit when the power is turned on, changes to the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit are made based on the change in the state of the second switch.
The aforementioned game control unit,
In the aforementioned setting value display process,
When starting to display the setting value, a first start command is sent to the performance control unit (S552, S204).
When the display related to the setting value is terminated, a first termination command is sent to the performance control unit (S556, S204).
In the above setting value change process,
When the display related to the setting value performed in the setting value change process is started, a second start command is sent to the performance control unit (S503, S204).
When the display related to the aforementioned setting value is terminated, a second termination command is sent to the performance control unit (S513, S204).
The performance control unit displays a menu screen on the display unit that includes a plurality of items selectable using the operation unit, and performs a screen display process that displays on the display unit the item screen corresponding to the item selected using the operation unit on the menu screen from among the item screens provided for each of the plurality of items (Figure 53).
The aforementioned performance control unit,
In the aforementioned screen display process,
Upon receiving the first start command or the second start command, the display of the menu screen is started (S804),
Upon receiving the first termination command or the second termination command, neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit (S813).
It is characterized by the following.

According to this, upon completion of the setting value display process and the setting value change process on the game control side, the performance control side will prevent the menu screen and item screen from being displayed on the display unit. Therefore, unauthorized viewing of the item screen content after the completion of the setting value display process and the setting value change process can be prevented.

The gaming machine (b2) is, in the gaming machine (b1) described above,
The performance control unit performs a display restriction process in the screen display process to restrict the display of the item screen so that the item screen is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event occurs that is different from the reception of the first termination command or the second termination command (S812, if S812 is YES, S813).
That is also acceptable.

Incidentally, if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command sent from the game control unit due to a communication error or other malfunction, the performance control unit cannot terminate the screen display process. This creates a problem where the contents of the item screen can be illegally accessed even after the game control unit has finished displaying or changing the setting values.

According to the above-described gaming machine (b2), the performance control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that it is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event occurs. Therefore, even if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command transmitted from the gaming control unit due to some abnormality such as a communication error, it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen in the event of such an abnormality.

The gaming machine (b3) is, in the gaming machine (b2) described above,
The performance control unit terminates the screen display process in the display restriction process by ensuring that neither the menu screen nor the item screen is displayed on the display unit due to the occurrence of the predetermined event (S813).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen can be prevented with simple processing and control.

In the gaming machine (b4), in the gaming machine (b2) or (b3) described above, in the display control process in the screen display process upon receiving the second start command, the game determines whether the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the start switch (7S) which is connected to the game control unit and detects operation on the start lever (7) that accepts the start of operation by the player (S811).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, the performance control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that it is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event related to the operation state of the start lever occurs. Therefore, even if the performance control unit is unable to receive the second termination command sent from the game control unit due to some abnormality such as a communication error, it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen in the event of such an abnormality.

The gaming machine (b5) is, in the gaming machine (b4) described above,
The game control unit may also transmit an input status command to the performance control unit that includes start switch information indicating the state of the start switch.

According to this, a simple mechanism allows the game control unit to send an input status command containing start switch information to the performance control unit, enabling the performance control unit to recognize the state of the start switch connected to the game control unit.

The gaming machine (b6) is one of the gaming machines (b2) to (b5) described above,
The performance control unit determines whether or not the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the first switch (S853).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, the performance control unit restricts the display of the item screen so that it is not displayed on the display unit when a predetermined event related to the state of the first switch occurs. Therefore, even if the performance control unit is unable to receive the first or second termination command transmitted from the game control unit due to some abnormality such as a communication error, it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing of the contents of the item screen in the event of such an abnormality.

The gaming machine (b7) is a gaming machine (b6) that is subordinate to the gaming machine (b5) described above,
The game control unit may transmit the input state command, which includes first switch state information indicating the state of the first switch, to the performance control unit.

According to this, a simple mechanism allows the game control unit to send an input status command containing the first switch status information to the performance control unit, enabling the performance control unit to recognize the status of the first switch connected to the game control unit.

The gaming machine (a8) is located in the gaming machine (b5), the gaming machine (b6) which is subordinate to the gaming machine (b5), or the gaming machine (b7) described above.
The game control unit may periodically transmit the input status command.

According to this, the performance control unit will be able to periodically acquire information contained in the input state command.

The aforementioned gaming machine (b9) is one of the above gaming machines (b4) to (b8),
The aforementioned performance control unit comprises a first information storage unit (203) for storing first information and a second information storage unit (203) for storing second information.
The aforementioned performance control unit, in the screen display processing,
Determine whether the first start command or the second start command has been received (S802),
When it is determined that the first start command has been received, the first information stored in the first information storage unit is set to maintain the screen display process, and the setting value display information related to the setting value display process is set in the second information stored in the second information storage unit (S802 is YES, S802 and S803 are YES, S803),
When it is determined that the second start command has been received, the first information stored in the first information storage unit is set to maintain the screen display process, and the setting value change information related to the setting value change process is set in the second information stored in the second information storage unit (S802 is YES, S802 and S803 are YES, S803),
When the state of the start switch is such that it detects operation on the start lever, the first information stored in the first information storage unit is set not to maintain the screen display process (S805, S805 is YES, S807),
If the setting value display process is set in the second information stored in the second information storage unit, then the screen display process is set not to be maintained in the first information stored in the first information storage unit (S806, S806 is YES, S807),
The first information stored in the first information storage unit is used to determine whether or not the predetermined event has occurred based on the state of the start switch (S812).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, the determination process for the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the setting value display process and the determination process for the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the setting value change process can be made common, while the determination of the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the setting value change process can include the detection of operation on the start lever by the state of the start switch, and the determination of the occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to the setting value display process can be made without including the detection of operation on the start lever by the state of the start switch.

The aforementioned gaming machine (b10) is, in the gaming machine (b9) described above,
The first information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory,
The aforementioned performance control unit, in the screen display processing,
Before determining whether the first start command or the second start command has been received, it is determined whether the first information stored in the first information storage means is set to maintain the screen display process (S801).
If it is determined that the first information stored in the first information storage means is set to maintain the screen display process, the display of the menu screen is started (S801 is YES, S804).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, screen display processing that was interrupted when the power was turned off can be resumed after the power is turned back on.

According to the gaming machine described in Appendix 2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents unauthorized viewing of the setting value confirmation and setting value change history by anyone other than those with viewing privileges, such as hall staff.

[11-8. Game machine of modified example 1 of the third game machine]
Next, referring to Figures 60 to 72, a modified version of the specifications for changing and confirming the settings of the pachislo machine 1 will be explained, referred to as "the modified version 1 of the third gaming machine" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "the modified version 1 of the gaming machine"). Note that all components of the pachislo machine 1 not shown in the descriptions of Figures 60 to 72 are subject to the embodiments described in Figures 1 to 35.

[11-8-1. Configuration of the gaming machine in modified example 1]
The configuration of the gaming machine in Modification 1 will be described below with reference to Figure 60.

The first gaming machine is equipped with a door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 used to monitor the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD, but it is not equipped with a switch used to monitor the opening/closing state of the upper door mechanism UD (see Figure 3). In contrast, the gaming machine of Modified Example 1, as shown in Figure 60(a), is equipped with a lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d used to monitor the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD, and an upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u used to monitor the opening/closing state of the upper door mechanism UD. Each of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d and the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73.

The lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is, for example, located on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may also be configured to be located on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD, or on the cabinet G side. The lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d monitors the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD by turning ON when the lower door mechanism DD is in an open state and OFF when it is in a closed state. When the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is ON, a lower door open error occurs. In this case, closing the lower door mechanism DD clears the error. As described above, the setting key-type switch 52 and the reset switch 53 are configured to be located on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case), and the main control board 71 is housed in the lower space behind the lower door mechanism DD within the cabinet G.

The upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is, for example, installed on the opening/closing side (right side) of the upper door mechanism UD. It may also be configured to be installed on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD, or on the cabinet G side. The upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u monitors the opening/closing state of the upper door mechanism UD by turning ON when the upper door mechanism UD is in an open state and OFF when it is in a closed state. Note that an upper door opening error occurs when the upper door mechanism UD is turned ON. In this case, the error state is cleared when the upper door mechanism UD is closed.

The gaming machine of Modified Example 1 has a combination of open/closed states for the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD,
(Door opening/closing combination 1) The upper door mechanism UD is in the open state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state.
(Door opening/closing combination 2) When the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state,
(Door opening/closing combination 3) Upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state.
The system is configured to have these three configurations. Furthermore, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, it is possible to operate the setting key-type switch 52 and the reset switch 53.

The first gaming machine is equipped with a group of speakers, such as speakers 35a and 35b (see Figure 3). In contrast, the gaming machine of Modification 1, as shown in Figure 60(a), is equipped with a group of speakers, such as speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d, which constitute an audio output means capable of performing effects through sound output. These speaker groups are electrically connected to the sub-control board 72 via a sub-relay board 74.

As shown in Figure 60(a), the modified game machine 1 is equipped with a group of selection buttons, such as selection buttons 40l and 40r, which are not provided in the first game machine. These selection buttons are electrically connected to the sub-control board 72 via a sub-relay board 74. The selection buttons 40l and 40r, along with the effect button 10a, are used for operation on the screens shown in Figures 66 to 72, which will be described later. Figure 60(b) shows an example configuration of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a. Details of the operation of the selection buttons 40l and 40r and the effect button 10a on the screens shown in Figures 66 to 72 will be described later.

The modified version 1 of the gaming machine, as shown in Figure 60(a), includes a movable mechanism 41 that is not present in the first gaming machine. The movable mechanism 41 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 74, and its movement is controlled by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control board 72. It is used, for example, in effects such as those indicating a bonus win.

[11-8-2. Commands]
The initialization commands (initialization commands described in [4-9. Commands], etc.) and periodic commands (sometimes referred to as "no-operation commands") transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained, focusing on the parts necessary for the explanation of [11-8. Game Machine of Modification Example 1 of the Third Game Machine], with other parts being briefly described or omitted. Note that periodic commands (no-operation commands) are referred to as input status commands in [6-2. Periodic Interrupt Processing], etc.

An initialization command includes an initialization command ID assigned to the command (which is an ID used to identify the command), a setting value stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and the status of the initialization command. The statuses are "Change/Start," "Change/End," "Confirm/Start," and "Confirm/End." In the following, (1) a command with the "Initialization Command ID" set as the ID and the status set to "Change/Start" will be described as "Initialization Command (Change/Start)," (2) a command with the "Initialization Command ID" set as the ID and the status set to "Change/End" will be described as "Initialization Command (Change/End)," (3) a command with the "Initialization Command ID" set as the ID and the status set to "Confirm/Start" will be described as "Initialization Command (Confirm/Start)," and (4) a command with the "Initialization Command ID" set as the ID and the status set to "Confirm/End" will be described as "Initialization Command (Confirm/End)."

A periodic command (no-operation command) includes an ID for identifying the command, the periodic command ID assigned to the periodic command (no-operation command), the input status (detected or not detected, on or off) of various sensors and switches related to the input ports (input ports P0 to P3) (setting key-type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d, upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u, etc.), and the game state, such as "normal," "BB in progress," and "re-playing."

The input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 store the port states of input ports P0 to P2 (the input states of various sensors and switches (such as the setting key-type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d, upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, etc.) (detected or not detected, on or off)) based on the input port check process (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32. Periodic commands (no-operation commands) are created based on the port states of input ports P0 to P2 (the input states of various sensors and switches (such as the setting key-type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d, upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u, etc.)) stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

The communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 60(a) transmits command data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

In the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, if the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 60(a) is in a ready state and not performing communication, and if neither data for commands related to game progress, such as medal insertion commands and start commands corresponding to valid operations by players or arcade staff, nor data for initialization commands, is stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, then the main CPU 101 stores data for an "no operation" command in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 60(a) based on the contents stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then transmits the "no operation" command data to the sub-control circuit 200 via the communication circuit (not shown) based on the transmission cycle.

Furthermore, in the communication data transmission process (S204) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, if the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 60(a) is in a ready state, and if the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 contains data for commands related to the progress of the game, such as medal insertion commands and start commands, or initialization command data, corresponding to valid operations by the player or amusement parlor staff (i.e., data for commands other than no-operation commands), then the main CPU 101 stores the data for commands other than no-operation commands in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 60(a). Based on the transmission cycle, the main CPU 101 transmits the data for commands other than no-operation commands to the sub-control circuit 200 via the communication circuit (not shown).

Furthermore, if the communication circuit (not shown) is in a busy state (communicating), no new command data will be set in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 in Figure 60(a).

Initialization commands and other data are initially stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then, in the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) of Figure 32, they are stored in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 (Figure 60(a)) and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. However, for example, initialization commands and other data may be stored directly in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

[11-8-3. Processing related to setting changes and setting confirmation]
The following describes the processing related to setting changes and setting confirmations performed by the main control circuit 100. In the modified example 1, the gaming machine executes the processing related to setting changes (setting change processing) and the processing related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation processing) using different programs, and the open/closed state of the doors (lower door mechanism DD, upper door mechanism UD) is a condition for both the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing.

In the periodic interrupt processing input port check process (S202) shown in Figure 32, the input state (detected or not detected, on or off) of the input ports corresponding to various sensors and switches (setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d, upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u, etc.) connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) is checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether there has been a change in the input state. If there has been a change in the input state, the details of the change in the input state are stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and the input state is stored as is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Therefore, by waiting for one periodic interrupt process as shown in Figure 32, the input state (detected or not detected, on or off) of the input ports corresponding to various sensors and switches (setting key-type switch 52, reset switch 53, start switch 7S, lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d, upper door open/close monitoring switch 56u, etc.) is reflected in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) during that one periodic interrupt process. Note that in the explanation of [11-8. Modification Example 1 of the Third Gaming Machine], "waiting for one periodic interrupt process as shown in Figure 32" is described as "performing 1 interrupt wait" for simplification.

[11-8-3-1. Configuration Change Process]
The process related to changing settings in Modification Example 1 (settings change process) will be explained with reference to Figure 61. In Modification Example 1, the power-on process is the same as the power-on process in Figure 24, but steps S22 to S27 are replaced with the settings change process in Figure 61. The settings change process in Figure 61 is called as a subroutine, and this executes the settings change process in Figure 61.

In the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether (1) the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1001). If it is determined that neither of the following is true (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1001 is NO), the setting change process in Figure 61 is terminated and the system returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither of the following is true (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1001 is YES), the system proceeds to step S1002. Note that "Step S1001 is YES" only occurs in combinations of open/closed states (Door Open/Close Combination 1 to Door Open/Close Combination 3) of the possible open/closed states of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD (as described above), excluding the combination where the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed (as described above). The reason for proceeding with the setting change process in cases other than (Door Open/Close Combination 3) is that when the setting change is performed with both doors (upper door mechanism UD, lower door mechanism DD) closed, it is conceivable that the setting key-type switch 52 is being operated without the door key that the store normally possesses being used. This raises the possibility of fraudulent activity, such as drilling a hole in the gaming machine cabinet and operating the setting key-type switch 52, and the process is intended to prevent such fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). Therefore, the part of the judgment process in step S1001 can be replaced by a process in which the main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open). If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is OFF (lower door closed), the setting change process in Figure 61 is terminated and the system returns to the caller. If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open), the system proceeds to the process in step S1002.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key switch 52 is in the ON state, that is, whether the setting key switch 52 was in the ON state when the power was turned on (S1002). If it is determined that the setting key switch 52 is not in the ON state, that is, that the setting key switch 52 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on (S1002 is NO), the setting change process shown in Figure 61 is terminated and the system returns to the caller. Note that the setting key switch 52 being in the ON state corresponds to "a state where the setting value can be changed."

If the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the ON state, that is, if the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the ON state when the power is turned on (S1002 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/start) data and performs initialization command (change/start) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (change/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S1003). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) of Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 of Figure 60(a), and the communication circuit (not shown) transmits the initialization command (change/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Furthermore, if step S1002 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses a different light emission control for the light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs) positioned in conjunction with the bet buttons (e.g., MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b). This control differs from the light emission control used when the player can play the game after receiving an operation on the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b or the start lever, excluding the period from when step S1002 is YES to when step S1014 is YES, and the period from when step S1051 is YES to when step S1056 is YES (described later). The main CPU 101 uses this different light emission control to illuminate the light-emitting means positioned in conjunction with the bet buttons. For example, it may illuminate in a color that does not illuminate in the playable state (e.g., red).

Following the processing in step S1003, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process to obtain a setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a setting value display process to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp (S1004), and then proceeds to the processing in step S1005. In the process of converting the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into a display setting value, if the acquired setting value is "0", the display setting value is converted to "1", if the acquired setting value is "1", the display setting value is converted to "2", ..., and if the acquired setting value is "5", the display setting value is converted to "6". In the periodic interrupt processing (S205) of Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets either an on or off value for each segment output port of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp. Note that the 7-segment displays other than the one corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp remain off.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S1005) and proceeds to the processing of step S1006.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the reset switch 53 is in the ON state (S1006). If it is determined that the reset switch 53 is not in the ON state (S1006 is NO), the process proceeds to step S1009.

If the reset switch 53 is determined to be in the ON state (S1006 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value update process (S1007) and proceeds to step S1008. In the setting value update process, if the setting value is "0", it is updated to "1", ..., if the setting value is "4", it is updated to "5", and if the setting value is "5", it is updated to "0". Note that at this point, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 is not updated.

The main CPU 101 converts the setting value updated in step S1007 into a display setting value to be displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, and performs a setting value display process to display the display setting value (S1008), then proceeds to step S1009. In the process of converting the updated setting value to a display setting value, if the updated setting value is "0", the display setting value is converted to "1", if the updated setting value is "1", the display setting value is converted to "2", ..., and if the updated setting value is "5", the display setting value is converted to "6". In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off for each segment output port of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp based on the display setting value, thereby displaying the display setting value on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S1009). If it is determined that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S1009 is NO), the process returns to step S1005.

If it is determined that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S1009 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting value storage process (S1010) to store the updated setting value (the setting value obtained in step S1004 if the start switch 7S was turned ON without the reset switch 53 ever being turned ON) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and then proceeds to the process in step S1011.

The main CPU 101 performs the same initialization process for setting changes as the power-on processing (S23) in Figure 24 (S1011), and then proceeds to step S1012.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S1012) and then proceeds to the processing of step S1013.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S1013). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S1013 is NO), the process returns to step S1012.

If the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the off state (S1013 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (change/end) data and performs initialization command (change/end) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (change/end) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S1014). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (change/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 60(a). This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (change/end) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Furthermore, if step S1013 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses the above-described control of the light-emitting means in the playable state as the light-emitting means corresponding to the bet button, and uses this control to illuminate the light-emitting means positioned in conjunction with the bet button.

Following the processing in step S1015, the main CPU 101 performs a payout acquisition process to retrieve the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout display process to display the retrieved payout count on the payout count lamp (S1015). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the set values on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the lamp. After the processing in step S1015, the setting change process shown in Figure 61 is completed, and the system returns to the caller.

[11-8-3-2. Configuration Confirmation Process]
The setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process) for Modified Example 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 62. The setting confirmation process in Figure 62 is called between the end of one game and before the conditions for pressing the start lever 7 are met (e.g., no bet, no replay win in the previous game). In the game machine of Modified Example 1, the medal insertion check process (S46) of the medal reception/start check process (Figure 25) calls the setting confirmation process in Figure 62 as a subroutine, thereby executing the setting confirmation process in Figure 62.

In the main control board 71, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, whether the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed to the on state after power-on (S1051). As described above, in the input port check process of the periodic interrupt process (S202) in Figure 32, if there is a change in the input state of the input port corresponding to the setting key-type switch 52, the contents of the change in input state are stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and the input state is stored as is in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Therefore, if the change from the off state to the on state corresponding to the setting key-type switch 52 is stored in the input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, the determination step in step S1051 determines that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state. Furthermore, a change in the state of the setting key switch 52 from the off state to the on state corresponds to "a change in the state of the setting key switch 52 (setting key switch) that allows the display of the set value on other indicator means (dispensing count lamp)."

If it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed from the off state to the on state, that is, that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has not changed to the on state after power-on (S1051 is NO), the setting confirmation process in Figure 62 is terminated and the system returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state, that is, that the state of the setting key-type switch 52 has changed to the on state after power-on (S1051 is YES), the system proceeds to step S1052.

In the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above: (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). The main CPU 101 refers to the contents stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and determines whether (1) the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1052). If it is determined that neither (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), nor (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) is true (S1052 is NO), the setting confirmation process in Figure 62 is terminated and the system returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), nor (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) is true (S1052 is YES), the system proceeds to step S1053. Note that "Step S1052 is YES" applies to combinations of open/closed states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (as described above in (Door Open/Close Combination 1) to (Door Open/Close Combination 3)), excluding the combination where the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state (as described above in (Door Open/Close Combination 3)).

Furthermore, in the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above: (Door Open/Close Combination 1) to (Door Open/Close Combination 3). Therefore, the part of the judgment process in step S1052 can be replaced by a process in which the main CPU 101 refers to the contents of the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open). If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is OFF (lower door closed), the setting confirmation process in Figure 62 is terminated and the system returns to the caller. If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/close monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open), the system proceeds to the process in step S1053.

The main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/start) data and performs initialization command (confirmation/start) generation and storage processing (S1053) to store the generated initialization command (confirmation/start) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. In the periodic interrupt processing communication data transmission process (S204) of Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (confirmation/start) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 (Figure 60(a)). This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (confirmation/start) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Furthermore, if step S1052 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses a different light emission control for the light emission means corresponding to the bet button than the light emission control for the light emission means in the playable state described above, and uses this different light emission control to illuminate the light emission means positioned in conjunction with the bet button. For example, it may illuminate in a color that does not illuminate in the light emission control in the playable state (for example, red).

Following the processing in step S1053, the main CPU 101 performs a setting value acquisition process to obtain a setting value from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a setting value display process to convert the acquired setting value into a display setting value corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp on the 7-segment display and display the display setting value (S1054), and then proceeds to the processing in step S1055. In the process of converting the setting value acquired from the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 into a display setting value, if the acquired setting value is "0", the display setting value is converted to "1", if the acquired setting value is "1", the display setting value is converted to "2", ..., and if the acquired setting value is "5", the display setting value is converted to "6". In the periodic interrupt processing (S205) of Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets either an on or off value for each segment output port of the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp, based on the display setting value. As a result, the display setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp. Note that the 7-segment displays other than the one corresponding to the lowest value of the payout lamp remain off.

The main CPU 101 performs an interrupt wait (S1055) and proceeds to the processing of step S1056.

The main CPU 101 refers to the contents of input port storage area 0 or 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 to determine whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S1056). If it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the off state (S1056 is NO), the process returns to step S1055.

If the state of the setting key-type switch 52 is determined to be in the off state (S1056 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates initialization command (confirmation/end) data and performs initialization command (confirmation/end) generation and storage processing to store the generated initialization command (confirmation/end) data in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 (S1057). In the communication data transmission processing of the periodic interrupt processing (S204) shown in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 stores the initialization command (confirmation/end) data stored in the communication data storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 in the communication circuit (not shown) built into the main control circuit 100 shown in Figure 60(a). This communication circuit (not shown) then transmits the initialization command (confirmation/end) data to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the transmission cycle.

Furthermore, if step S1056 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 uses the above-described control of the light-emitting means in the playable state as the light-emitting means corresponding to the bet button, and uses this control to illuminate the light-emitting means positioned in conjunction with the bet button.

Following the processing in step S1057, the main CPU 101 performs a payout acquisition process to retrieve the payout count from the payout count storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and a payout display process to display the acquired payout count on the payout count lamp (S1058). In the 7-segment LED driving process (S205) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32, the main CPU 101 sets a value for turning on or off the output port of each segment of the 7-segment display corresponding to each part of the payout count lamp based on the payout count. This completes the display of the set values on the payout count lamp, and the payout count is displayed on the lamp. After the processing in step S1058, the setting confirmation process in Figure 62 is completed and the system returns to the caller.

In the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the input check port processing (S202) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 32 checks the status of the input ports corresponding to each of the various sensors and switches, and stores the check results in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown). Figures 61 and 62 refer to the contents of the input port storage areas 0 and 1 (not shown) to confirm the status of the various sensors and switches. However, the system is not limited to this. For example, in Figures 61 and 62, the status of each of the various sensors and switches could be confirmed by directly referencing the status of the input ports corresponding to each of the various sensors and switches. In this case, the interrupt wait shown in Figures 61 and 62 would not be necessary.

[11-8-4. Procedures related to maintenance]
The following describes the maintenance processes performed by the sub-control circuit 200. In the modified example 1, the gaming machine executes maintenance processes performed during setting changes (maintenance processes during setting changes) and maintenance processes performed during setting confirmation (maintenance processes during setting confirmation) using different programs. The maintenance processes allow staff at the gaming parlor to confirm the contents of one or more items or to set the contents of one or more items. The "maintenance menu" in the gaming machine of modified example 1 corresponds to the hall menu in [8-2. Gaming parlor side].

[11-8-4-1. Maintenance process during configuration changes]
The maintenance process during setting changes (predetermined maintenance process) executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 63. The sub-side control process (overview) in Figure 33 calls the maintenance process during setting changes in Figure 63 as a subroutine, thereby executing the maintenance process during setting changes in Figure 63.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received an initialization command (change/start) (S1101). If it is determined that it has not received an initialization command (change/start) (S1101 is NO), it terminates the setting change maintenance process shown in Figure 63 and returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has received an initialization command (change/start) (S1101 is YES), it proceeds to step S1102. Here, an initialization command (change/start) is received when (a) the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, and (b) the combination of open/closed states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (as described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3)) is a combination other than the one where the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state (as described above (door open/closed combination 3)) (as described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 2)).

The sub-CPU 201 displays a "settings change in progress" screen (a specific example of which is shown in Figure 65, displaying the text "settings change in progress" 210a) on the main display device 210 to indicate that settings are being changed (S1102), and then proceeds to step S1103.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received an initialization command (change/end) (S1103). If it determines that it has not received an initialization command (change/end) (S1103 is NO), it proceeds to step S1105. On the other hand, if it determines that it has received an initialization command (change/end) (S1103 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 terminates the display of the setting change screen and performs a setting change screen display termination process (S1104), such as displaying the normal screen that was displayed on the main display device 210 in the first step S1102, and then terminates the setting change maintenance process shown in Figure 63 and returns to the caller.

In the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the contents of the bit that sets the state (on state, off state) of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d (hereinafter referred to as "lower door open/closed monitoring switch state setting bit") and the contents of the bit that sets the state (on state, off state) of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u (hereinafter referred to as "upper door open/closed monitoring switch state setting bit") included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100, and determines whether the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is off (lower door closed) (S1105). If it is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed) (S1105 is NO), the process returns to step S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed) (S1105 is YES), the process proceeds to step S1106.

Furthermore, in the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). Therefore, the part of the judgment process in step S1105 can be replaced by a process in which the sub-CPU 201 refers to the set contents of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch state set bit included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 to determine whether the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed). If it is not determined that the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the process returns to step S1103. If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the process proceeds to step S1106.

In step S1106, the sub-CPU 201 displays a maintenance menu screen on the main display device 210 (S1106) corresponding to the maintenance that is set to be performed during a setting change (predetermined maintenance; hereinafter referred to as "maintenance during setting change") among the maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine of Modified Example 1 (a specific example of the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 66(a); hereinafter referred to as "maintenance menu screen during setting change"), and proceeds to step S1107. The display of the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(a)) begins after receiving an initialization command (change/start) and when the state of the lower door mechanism DD changes from the open state to the closed state.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether an employee has performed an operation using any of the selection buttons 40l, 40r, or the effect button 10a on the maintenance menu screen displayed on the main display device 210 (in the modified example 1, as shown in Figures 66(a) to (d)) during the setting change (S1107). If it is determined that no operation has been performed using any of the selection buttons 40l, 40r, or the effect button 10a (S1107 is NO), the process proceeds to step S1110. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation has been performed using any of the selection buttons 40l, 40r, or the effect button 10a (S1107 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs an operation identification process to identify the content of the operation performed by the employee (S1108), performs a maintenance (during setting change) process corresponding to the identified content of the operation performed by the employee (S1109), and proceeds to step S1110. Details of the processes in steps S1106 to S1109 will be described later using Figure 66.

In the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the contents of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch state set bit and the contents of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch state set bit included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100, and determines whether (1) the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door open/closed monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1110). If it is determined that neither of the following is true (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1110 is NO), the process proceeds to step S1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither of the following is true (1) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is off (upper door closed) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open), or (2) the state of the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is on (upper door open) and the state of the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is on (lower door open) (S1110 is YES), the process proceeds to step S1102. Note that "Step S1110 is YES" only applies to combinations of open/closed states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (as described above in (Door Open/Close Combination 1) to (Door Open/Close Combination 3)), excluding the combination where the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state (as described above in (Door Open/Close Combination 3)).

When the maintenance menu screen for setting changes (Figures 66(a) to (d)) is displayed on the main display device 210, and the lower door mechanism DD changes from the closed state to the open state, the display content on the main display device 210 switches from the maintenance menu screen for setting changes (Figures 66(a) to (d)) to the setting change screen (Figure 65).

Furthermore, in the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combinations of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD are the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). Therefore, the part of the judgment process in step S1110 can be replaced by a process in which the sub-CPU 201 refers to the set contents of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch state set bit included in the no-operation command received from the main control circuit 100 to determine whether the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open). If it is determined that the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is NOT ON (lower door open), the process proceeds to step S1111; if it is determined that the state of the lower door open/closed monitoring switch 56d is ON (lower door open), the process returns to step S1102.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received an initialization command (change/end) (S1111). If it is determined that it has not received an initialization command (change/end) (S1111 is NO), it returns to the process in step S1107. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has received an initialization command (change/end) (S1111 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 terminates the display of the setting change maintenance menu screen (Figures 66(a) to (d)) currently displayed on the main display device 210, and performs a setting change maintenance termination process (S1112), such as displaying the normal screen on the main display device 210 before the setting change screen (Figure 65) was displayed in the first step S1102, and then terminates the setting change maintenance process in Figure 63 and returns to the caller.

[11-8-4-2. Maintenance process during configuration check]
The setting verification maintenance process (specific maintenance process) executed by the sub-control circuit 200 will be explained with reference to Figure 64. The sub-side control process (overview) in Figure 33 calls the setting verification maintenance process in Figure 64 as a subroutine, thereby executing the setting verification maintenance process in Figure 64.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received an initialization command (confirmation/start) (S1151). If it is determined that the initialization command (confirmation/start) has not been received (S1151 is NO), it terminates the setting confirmation maintenance process shown in Figure 64 and returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined that the initialization command (confirmation/start) has been received (S1151 is YES), it proceeds to step S1152. Here, the initialization command (confirmation/start) is received when (a) the state of the setting key-type switch 52 changes from the off state to the on state after the power is turned on, and (b) the combination of open/closed states that the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can take (as described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3)) is a combination other than the one where the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed (as described above (door open/closed combination 3)).

The sub-CPU 201 displays a maintenance menu screen on the main display device 210 (S1152) corresponding to the maintenance that is set to be performed during the setting confirmation (specific maintenance; hereinafter referred to as "maintenance during setting confirmation") among the maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine of Modified Example 1 (specific maintenance menu screen; a specific example is shown in Figure 67(a); hereinafter referred to as "maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation"), and proceeds to step S1153. Here, the display of the maintenance menu screen during setting confirmation (Figure 67(a)) by the process of step S1152 is started upon receiving the initialization command (confirmation/start), without being conditional on a change in the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether an operator has performed an operation using one of the selection buttons 40l, 40r, or the effect button 10a on the screen displayed on the main display device 210, which is one of the maintenance menu screens during setting confirmation (Figures 67 to 71 (a)) or screens for performing or confirming maintenance that can be performed during setting confirmation (specific examples are shown in Figures 67 (b) to (c), Figure 68 (b) to (d), and Figures 69 to 71 (b): hereinafter referred to as "maintenance screen during setting confirmation" as appropriate) (S1153). If it is determined that no operation has been performed using one of the selection buttons 40l, 40r, or the effect button 10a (S1153 is NO), the process proceeds to step S1156. On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation was performed using either the selection buttons 40l, 40r, or the performance button 10a (S1153 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 performs an operation identification process to identify the operation performed by the staff member (S1154), performs a maintenance (settings confirmation) process corresponding to the identified operation performed by the staff member (S1155), and then proceeds to step S1156. Details of the processes in steps S1152 to S1155 will be described later using Figures 67 to 71.

The sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received an initialization command (confirmation/end) (S1156). If it is determined that it has not received an initialization command (confirmation/end) (S1156 is NO), it returns to the process in step S1153. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has received an initialization command (confirmation/end) (S1156 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 terminates the display of the screen shown on the main display device 210 among the setting confirmation maintenance menu screens (Figures 67 to 71 (a)) and the setting confirmation maintenance screens (Figures 67 (b) to (c), Figures 68 (b) to (d), Figures 69 to 71 (b)), and performs the setting confirmation maintenance termination process (S1157), such as displaying the normal screen on the main display device 210 before the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (Figure 67 (a)) was displayed in step S1152, and then terminates the setting confirmation maintenance process in Figure 64 and returns to the caller.

[11-8-4-3. Specific Examples of Maintenance Processing During Configuration Changes]
The following describes a specific example of the maintenance process during setting changes shown in Figure 63 with reference to Figure 66. The main contents described here are the operations performed by the staff in steps S1106 to S1109 of the maintenance process during setting changes shown in Figure 63, and the processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 corresponding to those operations. Image data for displaying each screen shown in Figures 65 to 66 on the main display device 210 is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202, and the sub-CPU 201 uses the image data stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 to display the screen on the main display device 210. In the following, the selection button 40l will be referred to as the "left selection button 40l" and the selection button 40r as the "right selection button 40r".

In the maintenance process during configuration change shown in Figure 63, when the sub-CPU 201 receives an initialization command (change/start) (S1101, if S1101 is YES), it displays the configuration change screen on the main display device 210, showing the text "Configuration Change in Progress" 210a as shown in Figure 65 (S1102). The background image for "Configuration Change in Progress" 210a is the same as the background image used when an error occurs. However, it is not necessary to use the same background image as when an error occurs; a separate background image specifically for "Configuration Change in Progress" 210a may be used.

While the setting change screen shown in Figure 65 is displayed on the main display device 210, if the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state (S1105, S1105 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the setting change screen shown in Figure 65 to the setting change maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 66(a) (S1106).

The maintenance menu screens shown in Figure 66(a) and Figures 66(b) to (d) described later display the text "Maintenance Menu During Settings Change" 210b to indicate that it is a maintenance menu screen during settings changes. The selectable items related to maintenance during settings changes include "Speaker Check ON" 210b1 (first predetermined maintenance), "Speaker Check OFF" 210b2, "Performance Button Check" 210b3 (second predetermined maintenance), and "Movable Device Check" 210b4.

In Figure 66(a), the maintenance menu screen displayed during settings change, which is accessed after switching from the settings change screen in Figure 65, "Speaker Confirmation ON" 210b1 is selected and highlighted (magnified). Note that highlighting is not limited to magnification; for example, inversion may also be used.

On the maintenance menu screen during setting changes (Figure 66(a)) where "Speaker Check ON" 210b1 is selected, an attendant makes a confirmation operation using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1107-S1108) and performs a speaker output confirmation process as a maintenance (setting change) process (S1109) to check whether sound is output normally from speakers 35a-35d. In the speaker output confirmation process, for example, the following processes are performed sequentially: (1) Speaker 35a outputs sound for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) and then the sound output stops; (2) Speaker 35b outputs sound for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) and then the sound output stops; (3) Speaker 35c outputs sound for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) and then the sound output stops; (4) Speaker 35d outputs sound for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) and then the sound output stops; and (5) Both speakers 35c and 35d repeatedly output music for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds). Even if the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r is operated by an operator and the selected item changes during the speaker output confirmation process, the sound output from speakers 35a to 35d continues.

On the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(a)) where "Speaker Check ON" 210b1 is selected, an attendant operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1107-S1108), and as a maintenance (setting change in progress) process (S1109), it selects "Speaker Check OFF" 210b2, moves the cursor (selection target) to "Speaker Check OFF" 210b2, and displays the enlarged maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(b) on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the maintenance menu screen during setting changes (Figure 66(a)) shows "Speaker Confirmation ON" 210b1 selected, if the staff member operates the left selection button 40l, the sub-CPU 201 processes the data, and "Movable Part Confirmation" 210b4 is selected. The maintenance menu screen during setting changes, as shown in Figure 66(d) below, is then displayed on the main display device 210.

While "Speaker Check OFF" 210b2 is selected, the maintenance menu screen during setting changes (Figure 66(b)) is displayed, and the operator uses the performance button 10a to confirm the selection. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1107-S1108) and performs a maintenance (setting change in progress) process (S1109) to terminate the speaker output confirmation process described above. This terminates the audio output for confirming the output of speakers 35a-35d. Note that the speaker output confirmation process terminates at the moment the performance button 10a is operated, regardless of which of the processes (1) to (5) is in progress.

When the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(b)) shows "Speaker Check OFF" 210b2 selected, the staff member operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1107-S1108), and as a maintenance (setting change) process (S1109), it selects "Performance Button Check" 210b3, moves the cursor to "Performance Button Check" 210b3, and displays the enlarged maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(c) on the main display device 210. If the staff member operates the left selection button 40l on the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(b)) while "Speaker Check OFF" 210b2 is selected, the sub-CPU 201 processes the system to select "Speaker Check ON" 210b1, and the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(a) is displayed on the main display device 210.

On the maintenance menu screen during setting changes (Figure 66(c)) where "Confirmation of performance button" 210b3 is selected, an attendant makes a decision using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1107-S1108) and, as a maintenance (during setting change) process (S1109), performs a button vibration operation process to vibrate the performance button 10a for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to confirm whether the vibration function of the performance button 10a is working correctly. The vibration function is a function that vibrates the performance button 10a in small increments. For example, it is a function that vibrates the performance button 10a during a bonus winning indication performance to notify the player that there is a high possibility of winning a bonus before the bonus confirmation announcement. Note that the button vibration operation process can also be executed during the speaker output confirmation process. For example, if the performance button 10a is operated while the "Performance Button Confirmation" 210b3 is selected during audio output from speakers 35a to 35d, the performance button 10a will vibrate while the audio output from speakers 35a to 35d continues.

When the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(c)) shows "Performance Button Confirmation" 210b3 selected, the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1107-S1108), and as a maintenance (setting change in progress) process (S1109), it selects "Movable Device Confirmation" 210b4, moves the cursor to "Movable Device Confirmation" 210b4, and displays the enlarged maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(d) on the main display device 210. Note that if the operator operates the left selection button 40l on the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(c)) where "Performance Button Confirmation" 210b3 is selected, the sub-CPU 201 processes the system to select "Speaker Confirmation OFF" 210b2, and the maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(b) is displayed on the main display device 210.

On the maintenance menu screen during setting changes (Figure 66(d)) where "Movable Device Confirmation" 210b4 is selected, an attendant makes a decision using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1107-S1108) and performs a movable device test operation process as a maintenance (during setting changes) process (S1109) to confirm whether the movable device 41 is functioning correctly. The movable device 41 is designed to operate based on a predetermined sequence when powered on, and in the movable device test operation process, for example, the movable device 41 is operated based on the predetermined sequence. The movable device 41 is a device used in game effects, and for example, by activating the movable device at a predetermined timing during a bonus winning suggestion effect, it notifies the player that there is a high possibility of winning a bonus before the bonus confirmation notification. Note that the movable device test operation process can also be executed during speaker output confirmation processing. For example, if the "Confirm Movable Part" 210b4 is selected while audio is being output from speakers 35a to 35d, and the performance button 10a is operated, the audio output from speakers 35a to 35d will continue, and the movable part 41 will be activated.

If the maintenance menu screen during setting change (Figure 66(d)) shows "Movable Part Confirmation" 210b4 selected, and the operator operates the left selection button 40l, the sub-CPU 201 processes the settings, indicating that "Performance Button Confirmation" 210b3 is selected. The maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(c) is then displayed on the main display device 210. If the operator operates the right selection button 40r, the sub-CPU 201 processes the settings, indicating that "Speaker Confirmation ON" 210b1 is selected. The maintenance menu screen during setting change shown in Figure 66(a) is then displayed on the main display device 210.

Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 201 is displaying the maintenance menu screen during configuration changes (Figures 66(a) to (d)), if the door opening/closing state of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD becomes combination 2 (upper door mechanism UD is closed and lower door mechanism DD is open) or combination 1 (upper door mechanism UD is open and lower door mechanism DD is open), the display content of the main display device 210 switches from the maintenance menu screen during configuration changes (Figures 66(a) to (d)) to the configuration change screen (Figure 65) (S1110, S1102). Therefore, during configuration changes, the maintenance menu screen during configuration changes is not displayed unless the door opening/closing state is combination 3 (upper door mechanism UD is closed and lower door mechanism DD is closed), and maintenance during configuration changes using the maintenance menu screen cannot be performed.

[11-8-4-4. Specific Examples of Maintenance Processing During Configuration Verification]
The following describes a specific example of the maintenance process during setting confirmation shown in Figure 64, with reference to Figures 67 to 71. The main contents described here are the operations performed by the staff in steps S1152 to S1155 of the maintenance process during setting confirmation shown in Figure 64, and the processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 corresponding to those operations. Image data for displaying each screen shown in Figures 67 to 71 on the main display device 210 is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202, and the sub-CPU 201 uses the image data stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 to display the screen on the main display device 210.

In the maintenance process during configuration confirmation shown in Figure 64, when the sub-CPU 201 receives an initialization command (confirmation/start) (S1501, S1501 is YES), the sub-CPU 201 displays the maintenance menu screen during configuration confirmation shown in Figure 67(a) on the main display device 210 (S1152).

The maintenance menu screens shown in Figure 67(a) and Figures 67 through 71(a) described later display the text "Maintenance Menu During Settings Check" 210c to indicate that it is a maintenance menu screen during settings check. The selectable items related to maintenance during settings check include "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1, "Time Setting" 210c2, "Eco Mode Setting" 210c3, "Error History" 210c4, and "Setting Change History" 210c5.

In the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 67(a), which is displayed upon receiving the initialization command (confirmation/start), the "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1 is selected, and to indicate that "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1 is selected, it is highlighted (enlarged). Note that the highlighting is not limited to enlargement; for example, it could also be inverted.

When "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1 is selected, the maintenance menu screen (Figure 67(a)) displays the setting and the operator confirms the setting using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 67(a) to the maximum/standard volume setting screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in Figure 67(b).

The maximum and standard volume setting screens shown in Figure 67(b) and Figure 67(c), described later, display the text "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1a to indicate that they are screens for setting the maximum and standard volumes of speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d. They also include an area for setting the maximum volume, "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b (first specific maintenance), and an area for setting the standard volume, "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c (second specific maintenance). The "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b area is where an attendant can set the maximum volume that the user (player) can set on the volume setting screen shown in Figure 72(b), described later, from volume level 1 to volume level 6. The higher the volume level value, the louder the volume. In the "Maximum Volume Setting" area 210c1b, the values in the squares ("1" to "6") represent the volume levels. The maximum volume level to be set is indicated by whether or not there is a diagonal line in the square below it. Specifically, squares corresponding to volume levels below the set volume level have a diagonal line, and squares corresponding to volume levels above the set volume level do not have a diagonal line. For example, if the set volume level is volume level 3, as shown in Figure 67(b), squares corresponding to volume levels 1 to 3 will have diagonal lines, and squares corresponding to volume levels 4 to 6 will not have diagonal lines. The "Standard Volume Setting" area 210c1c is for setting the volume level (hereinafter referred to as "standard volume") that is set when the game has not been played for a certain period of time or when the settings are changed, from volume levels 1 to 6. The higher the volume level value, the louder the volume. In the "Standard Volume Setting" area 210c1c, the values within the squares ("1" to "6") represent the volume levels. The standard volume level is indicated by the presence or absence of diagonal lines within the square below it. Specifically, squares corresponding to volume levels below the set level have diagonal lines, while squares corresponding to volume levels above the set level do not. For example, if the set volume level is level 2, as shown in Figure 67(c), squares corresponding to volume levels 1 through 2 will have diagonal lines, while squares corresponding to volume levels 3 through 6 will not. Note that the maximum and standard volume levels may be other than volume levels 1 through 6.

In Figure 67(b), the maximum/standard volume setting screen, which is accessed by switching from the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 67(a), the "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b area is selected and highlighted (enlarged and bordered). Note that the highlighting is not limited to enlargement and bordering; for example, it could also be simply enlarged. Furthermore, the maximum volume level displayed in "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b is the volume level stored in the maximum volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 at the time of the screen switch (volume level 3 in the example of Figure 67(b)), and the standard volume level displayed in "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c is the volume level stored in the standard volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 at the time of the switch (volume level 2 in the example of Figure 67(b)).

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(b)) where "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b is selected, the attendant operates the left selection button 40l. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), lowers the maximum volume level by one step to volume level 2, and displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen on the main display device 210 with the volume level displayed as volume level 2 in the area of "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b. Also, on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(b)) where "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b is selected, the attendant operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), increases the maximum volume level by one step to volume level 4, and displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen with volume level 4 displayed in the "Maximum Volume Setting" area 210c1b on the main display device 210.

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(b)) where "Maximum Volume Setting" 210c1b is selected, an attendant makes a confirmation operation using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), updates the maximum volume level stored in the maximum volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to the maximum volume level selected using the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r (if the performance button 10a is operated without any operation by the attendant on the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r, it updates to the maximum volume level stored in the maximum volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 before switching from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen to the maximum/standard volume setting screen). Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201, as part of the maintenance (settings confirmation) process (S1155), selects "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c and displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen shown in Figure 67(c), which is an enlarged and thick-bordered version of "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c, on the main display device 210. Alternatively, before the operator makes a decision using the performance button 10a, the system may check whether an initialization command (confirmation/end) has been received. If the initialization command (confirmation/end) is received before the operator makes a decision using the performance button 10a, the maintenance (settings change) process may be terminated without updating the maximum volume level.

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(c)) where "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c is selected, the attendant operates the left selection button 40l. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), lowers the standard volume level by one step to volume level 1, and displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen on the main display device 210 where the volume level display in the area of "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c is volume level 1. Also, on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(c)) where "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c is selected, the attendant operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), increases the standard volume level by one step to volume level 3, and displays the maximum/standard volume setting screen, where the volume level in the "Standard Volume Setting" area 210c1c is displayed as volume level 3, on the main display device 210.

On the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(c)) where "Standard Volume Setting" 210c1c is selected, an attendant makes a decision using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), updates the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to the volume level of the standard volume selected using the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r (if the performance button 10a is operated without any operation by the attendant on the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r, it updates to the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 before switching from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen to the maximum/standard volume setting screen). Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 performs a maintenance (settings verification in progress) process (S1155), switching the display content of the main display device 210 from the maximum/standard volume setting screen shown in Figure 67(c) to the settings verification maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 67(a).

When the maintenance menu screen (Figure 67(a)) showing "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1 is selected, the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154), and as a maintenance (settings confirmation) process (S1155), it selects "Time Setting" 210c2, moves the cursor to "Time Setting" 210c2, and displays the enlarged maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 68(a) on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the operator operates the left selection button 40l on the maintenance menu screen (Figure 67(a)) showing "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1, the sub-CPU 201 processes the screen to select "Setting Change History" 210c5, and the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 71(a), described later, is displayed on the main display device 210.

When "Time Setting" 210c2 is selected, the maintenance menu screen (Figure 68(a)) displays the setting and the operator makes a confirmation using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 68(a) to the time setting screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in Figure 68(b).

The time setting screens shown in Figure 68(b) and Figures 68(c) to (d) described later display the text "Time Setting" 210c2a to indicate that it is a time setting screen. They also include a "Time Setting" area 210c2b for setting the time on the clock in the gaming machine of Modification 1, a "Confirm" button 210c2c for setting the clock time, and a "Cancel" button 210c2d for canceling the clock time setting. In the "Time Setting" area 210c2b, the clock time can be set using the "Year (last two digits of the Western calendar)", "Month", "Day", "Hour", and "Minute".

In Figure 68(b), the time setting screen is accessed after switching from the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 68(a) during the settings confirmation process. The time in the "Time Setting" area 210c2b is the time displayed on the clock at the time of the screen switch, and the year (last two digits of the Gregorian year) is selected and enclosed in a rectangle. Immediately after switching to this screen, the left and right selection buttons 40l and 40r are used to select items such as "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" in the "Time Setting" area 210c2b, as well as "Confirm" 210c2c and "Cancel" 210c2d.

In the time setting screen shown in Figure 68(b), where "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is selected and the item is in the selection state, the operator makes a confirmation operation using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), puts the system into a state where the value of the selected "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is set. On the time setting screen in Figure 68(b), where the "year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is being set, an attendant operates the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r. The sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154) and performs a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155). If the left selection button 40l is pressed, the value of "year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is decreased by 1, and if the right selection button 40r is pressed, the value of "year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is increased by 1. In the time setting screen shown in Figure 68(b), where the "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is being set, an attendant operates the performance button 10a. The sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), returns to the state where an item is selected. At this time, the selected item is "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)".

In the time setting screen shown in Figure 68(b), where "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is selected and the user is in the state of selecting an item, the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), sets the "Month" in the "Time Setting" area 210c2b to selected, moves the cursor to "Month," and displays the time setting screen shown in Figure 68(c), enclosed in a square frame, on the main display device 210. Also, in the time setting screen shown in Figure 68(b), where "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" is selected and the user is in the state of selecting an item, the operator operates the left selection button 40l. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l (S1153-S1154), and as part of the maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), it selects "Cancel" 210c2d, moves the cursor to "Cancel" 210c2d, and displays the highlighted (enlarged) time setting screen on the main display device 210. Note that the highlighting is not limited to enlargement; for example, it could also be inverted.

The processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 in response to the operation of the effect button 10a and the left/right selection effect buttons 0l and 40r on the time setting screen in Figure 68(c) when "Month" is selected, when "Day" is selected, when "Hour" is selected, and when "Minute" is selected corresponds to the processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 in response to the operation of the effect button 10a and the left/right selection effect buttons 0l and 40r as explained in the section on "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)". Note that on the time setting screen in Figure 68(c) when "Month" is selected and an item is being selected, if the left selection button 40l is operated, "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" becomes the selection target, and if the right selection button 40r is operated, "Day" becomes the selection target. Also, on the time setting screen when "Day" is selected and an item is being selected, if the left selection button 40l is operated, "Month" becomes the selection target, and if the right selection button 40r is operated, "Hour" becomes the selection target. Furthermore, in the time setting screen where "Hour" is selected and an item is being selected, operating the left selection button 40l will make "Day" the target of selection, and operating the right selection button 40r will make "Minute" the target of selection. Also, in the time setting screen where "Minute" is selected and an item is being selected, operating the left selection button 40l will make "Hour" the target of selection, and operating the right selection button 40r will make "Confirm" 210c2c the target of selection and will be enlarged (see Figure 68(d)).

On the time setting screen (Figure 68(d)) where "Confirm" 210c2c is selected, the operator uses the performance button 10a to confirm. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), sets the time (year, month, day, hour, minute) set in the "Time Setting" 210c2b area to the clock, and switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the time setting screen shown in Figure 68(d) to the setting confirmation in progress maintenance menu shown in Figure 68(a).

When the time setting screen (Figure 68(d)) shows "Confirm" 210c2c selected, the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 considers "Cancel" 210c2d to be selected, moves the cursor to "Cancel" 210c2d, and displays an enlarged version of the time setting screen on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the left selection button 40l is operated by the operator on the time setting screen (Figure 68(d)) while "Confirm" 210c2c is selected, the "Minute" area of "Time Setting" 210c2b becomes the target of selection.

When "Cancel" 210c2d is selected on the time setting screen, the operator uses the performance button 10a to confirm the selection. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the time setting screen to the setting confirmation maintenance menu shown in Figure 68(a) without setting the time (year, month, day, hour, minute) set in the "Time Setting" 210c2b area to the clock.

When the left selection button 40l is operated by an attendant on the time setting screen (Figure 68(d)) where "Cancel" 210c2d is selected, "Confirm" 210c2c becomes available for selection (see Figure 68(d)). When the right selection button 40r is operated by an attendant, the "Year (last two digits of the Gregorian year)" area of "Time Setting" 210c2b becomes available for selection (see Figure 68(b)).

When the maintenance menu screen (Figure 68(a)) shows "Time Setting" 210c2 selected, the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), selects "Eco Mode Setting" 210c3. The cursor is then moved to "Eco Mode Setting" 210c3, and the enlarged maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 69(a) is displayed on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the operator operates the left selection button 40l on the maintenance menu screen (Figure 68(a)) showing "Time Setting" 210c2 selected, the sub-CPU 201 processes the data, selecting "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1, and the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 67(a) is displayed on the main display device 210.

When "Eco Mode Setting" 210c3 is selected, the maintenance menu screen (Figure 69(a)) displays the setting and the operator makes a confirmation using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen to the Eco Mode setting screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in Figure 69(b).

The eco-mode setting screen shown in Figure 69(b) displays the text "Eco-mode setting" 210c3a to indicate that it is the screen for setting eco-mode, as well as text asking about the processing content (for example, "Do you want to turn on eco-mode?" 210c3b). It also includes "ON" 210c3c and "OFF" 210c3d for setting eco-mode.

The Eco Mode is a function that reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine in Modification Example 1. When Eco Mode is set to ON, if predetermined conditions are met during gameplay or standby, for example, the main display device 210, reel lamps, and lower panel lighting will be turned off or dimmed. The gaming machine in Modification Example 1 enters Eco Mode when the contents of the Eco Mode memory area (not shown) are "ON," and does not enter Eco Mode (it enters a mode that does not reduce power consumption) when the contents are "OFF."

In the Eco Mode setting screen shown in Figure 69(b), which is accessed from the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 69(a) during the settings confirmation, if the contents of the Eco Mode memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 are "OFF," the question "Do you want to turn on Eco Mode?" 210c3b is displayed, and "OFF" 210c3d is selected and highlighted (enlarged). If the contents of the Eco Mode memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 are "ON," the question "Do you want to turn off Eco Mode?" is displayed, and "ON" 210c3c is selected and highlighted (enlarged). Note that highlighting is not limited to enlargement; for example, inversion may also be used.

On the eco-mode setting screen (Figure 69(b)) where "OFF" 210c3d is selected, an attendant operates either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r (S1153-S1154), and as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), it selects "ON" 210c3c, moves the cursor to "ON" 210c3c for enlargement, and displays the eco-mode setting screen with the message "Do you want to turn off eco-mode?" on the main display device 210.

On the eco-mode setting screen where "ON" 210c3c is selected, an attendant operates either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of either the left or right selection button 40l or 40r (S1153-S1154), and as part of the maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), it selects "OFF" 210c3d, moves the cursor to "OFF" 210c3d for enlargement, and displays the eco-mode setting screen (Figure 69(b)) with the message "Do you want to turn on eco-mode?" on the main display device 210.

On the eco-mode setting screen (Figure 69(b)) where "OFF" 210c3d is selected, an attendant uses the performance button 10a to confirm the selection. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), sets the contents of the eco-mode memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to "OFF". The display content of the main display device 210 is then switched from the eco-mode setting screen shown in Figure 69(b) to the setting confirmation in progress maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 69(a).

When "ON" 210c3c is selected in the eco-mode setting screen, an attendant uses the performance button 10a to confirm the selection. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation in progress) process (S1155), sets the contents of the eco-mode memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to "ON," and switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the eco-mode setting screen to the setting confirmation in progress maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 69(a).

When the maintenance menu screen (Figure 69(a)) shows "Eco Mode Setting" 210c3 selected, the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154), and as a maintenance (settings confirmation) process (S1155), it selects "Error History" 210c4, moves the cursor to "Error History" 210c4, and displays the enlarged maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 70(a) on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the operator operates the left selection button 40l on the maintenance menu screen (Figure 69(a)) showing "Eco Mode Setting" 210c3 selected, the sub-CPU 201 processes the screen to select "Time Setting" 210c2, and the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 68(a) is displayed on the main display device 210.

On the "Error History" 210c4 setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (Figure 70(a)), the operator makes a selection using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 70(a) to the error history screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in Figure 70(b).

The error history screen shown in Figure 70(b) displays the text "Error History" 210c4a to indicate that it is an error history confirmation screen, and also includes an error history display area 210c4b. The error history display area 210c4b displays six error entries (error code, error name, and error date and time). While six entries are displayed, it is possible to display more error information.

In the error history screen shown in Figure 70(b), which is accessed by switching from the maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 70(a) during settings confirmation, the sub-CPU 201 stores the most recent six error entries stored in the error storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 in the error history display area 210c4b. When the sub-CPU 201 receives an error command containing error information from the main CPU 101, it stores the error information contained in that error command in the error storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203. When the left selection button 40l is operated, the six error entries prior to the currently displayed error information are read from the error storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 and displayed in the error history display area 210c4b. The error storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 can store up to 150 error entries, although the maximum number of entries that can be stored may be other than 150.

On the error history screen shown in Figure 70(b), an attendant makes a selection using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (settings confirmation in progress) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the error history screen shown in Figure 70(b) to the settings confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 70(a).

When the "Error History" 210c4 is selected on the "Setting Confirmation Maintenance Menu" screen (Figure 70(a)), the operator operates the right selection button 40r. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the right selection button 40r (S1153-S1154), and as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), it selects "Setting Change History" 210c5, moves the cursor to "Setting Change History" 210c5, and displays the enlarged "Setting Confirmation Maintenance Menu" screen shown in Figure 71(a) on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the operator operates the left selection button 40l on the "Setting Confirmation Maintenance Menu" screen (Figure 70(a)) while "Error History" 210c4 is selected, the sub-CPU 201 processes the system to select "Eco Mode" 210c3, and the "Setting Confirmation Maintenance Menu" screen shown in Figure 69(a) is displayed on the main display device 210.

On the "Setting Change History" 210c5, which is currently selected in the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen (Figure 71(a)), an attendant uses the performance button 10a to confirm their selection. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (setting confirmation) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 71(a) to the setting change history screen (one of the setting confirmation maintenance screens) shown in Figure 71(b).

The settings change history screen shown in Figure 71(b) displays the text "Settings Change History" 210c5a to indicate that it is a screen for confirming the settings change history, and also includes a settings change history display area 210c5b. The settings change history display area 210c5b displays information for six settings changes (changed setting value, change date and time). While it is stated that information for six settings changes is displayed, it is also possible to display more error information.

In the setting change history screen shown in Figure 71(b), which is accessed by switching from the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 71(a), the sub-CPU 201 stores the most recent six setting change information stored in the setting change storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 in the setting change history display area 210c5b. When the sub-CPU 201 receives an initialization command (change/end) from the main CPU 101, it sets the setting value included in the initialization command (change/end) as the changed setting value and stores the date and time of receipt of the initialization command (change/end) as the change date and time in the setting change storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203. When the left selection button 40l is operated, the setting change information for the six changes prior to the currently displayed setting change information is read from the setting change history display area 210c5b of the sub-RAM 203 and displayed in the setting change history display area 210c5b. When the right selection button 40r is operated, the setting change information for the six changes after the currently displayed setting change information is read from the setting change history display area 210c5b of the sub-RAM 203 and displayed in the setting change history display area 210c5b. Furthermore, the setting change storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 can store up to 30 sets of setting change information, although the maximum number of stored settings may be other than 30.

On the settings change history screen (Figure 71(b)), the operator makes a confirmation operation using the performance button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the performance button 10a (S1153-S1154) and, as a maintenance (settings confirmation in progress) process (S1155), switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the settings change history screen shown in Figure 71(b) to the settings confirmation maintenance menu screen shown in Figure 71(b).

If the maintenance menu screen (Figure 71(a)) shows "Setting Change History" 210c5 selected, and the operator operates the left selection button 40l, the sub-CPU 201 processes the data to select "Error History" 210c4, and the maintenance menu screen (Figure 70(c)) is displayed on the main display device 210. If the operator operates the right selection button 40r, the sub-CPU 201 processes the data to select "Maximum/Standard Volume Setting" 210c1, and the maintenance menu screen (Figure 67(a)) is displayed on the main display device 210.

[11-8-5. Specific Examples of User Menus, etc.]
The following describes specific examples of the user menu screen and the volume adjustment screen accessed from the user menu in the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, with reference to Figure 72.

For example, the player operates the effect button 10a after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the player finished playing. The sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a and switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the normal screen to the user menu screen shown in Figure 72(a), which includes items for user confirmation or settings.

The user menu screen shown in Figure 72(a) displays the text "User Menu" 210d to indicate that it is the user menu screen, as well as the symbol arrangements 210d1 for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, and the game history 210d2. It also includes the items "Volume Adjustment" 210d3, which is operated by the user to adjust the volume, and "Exit" 210d4, which is used by the user to switch from the user menu screen to the normal screen.

As shown in Figure 72(a), the symbol arrangement 210d1 is displayed on the left side of the main display device 210 screen, displaying a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) for each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The game history 210d2 is displayed in the center of the main display device 210 screen, and the displayed information includes, for example, the number of games played, the number of jackpots (bonus rounds), and the jackpot probability (bonus probability). Below the game history display area of the main display device 210, "Volume Adjustment" 210d3 and "End" 210d4 are displayed side-by-side.

In the user menu screen shown in Figure 72(a), which is accessed from the normal screen, "Volume Adjustment" 210d3 is selected and highlighted (magnified). Note that highlighting is not limited to magnification; for example, inversion may also be used.

When "Volume Adjustment" 210d3 is selected on the user menu screen (Figure 72(a)), the player makes a selection using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a and switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the user menu screen shown in Figure 72(a) to the volume adjustment screen shown in Figure 72(b).

The volume adjustment screen shown in Figure 72(b) is a screen that allows the user to adjust the volume of sound output from speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d. The volume adjustment screen displays the text "Volume Adjustment" 210d3a to indicate that it is a screen for setting the output volume of speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d, and also includes an area for setting the output volume "Output Volume Setting" 210d3b. Above the "Output Volume Setting" 210d3b area is a marker 210d3c indicating the maximum volume set on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(b)), and below the "Output Volume Setting" 210d3b area is a marker 210d3d indicating the standard volume set on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(b)). The "Output Volume Setting" area 210d3b is where the player sets the output volume of speakers 35a, 35b, 35c, and 35d from volume level 1 to the maximum volume set on the maximum/standard volume setting screen (Figure 67(b)). A higher volume level indicates a louder volume. In the "Output Volume Setting" area 210d3b, the values within the squares ("1" to "6") represent the volume levels. The volume level to be set is indicated by whether or not there is a diagonal line in the square below it. Specifically, squares corresponding to volume levels below the set volume level have a diagonal line, while squares corresponding to volume levels above the set volume level do not. For example, if the set volume level is volume level 3, as shown in Figure 72(b), squares corresponding to volume levels 1 through 3 will have diagonal lines, while squares corresponding to volume levels 4 through 6 will not.

In the volume adjustment screen shown in Figure 72(b), which is accessed by switching from the user menu screen in Figure 72(a), the output volume level displayed in "Output Volume Setting" 210c1b is the volume level stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 at the time of the screen switch (volume level 3 in the example of Figure 72(b)). The maximum volume level indicated by marker 210d3c is the volume level stored in the maximum volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 at the time of the screen switch (volume level 3 in the example of Figure 72(b)). The standard volume level indicated by marker 210d3d is the volume level stored in the standard volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 at the time of the screen switch (volume level 3 in the example of Figure 72(b)).

On the volume adjustment screen (Figure 72(b)) where the output volume level is set to volume level 3, the player operates the left selection button 40l. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l and lowers the output volume level by one step to volume level 2. The main display device 210 then displays the volume adjustment screen with volume level 2 displayed in the "Output Volume Setting" area 210d3b. However, if the sub-CPU 201 detects the player operating the left selection button 40l on a volume adjustment screen where the output volume level is set to volume level 1, the output volume level remains at volume level 1 without being lowered by one step.

If the sub-CPU 201 detects that the player has pressed the right selection button 40r on the volume adjustment screen where the output volume level is below the maximum volume level, it increases the output volume level by one step and displays a volume adjustment screen on the main display device 210 with the volume level displayed in the "Output Volume Setting" area 210d3b showing the increased volume level. Also, if the player presses the right selection button 40r on the volume adjustment screen where the output volume level is at the maximum volume level 3 (Figure 72(b)), the sub-CPU 201 detects the press of the right selection button 40r and, since increasing the output volume level by one step would exceed the maximum volume level 3, it leaves the output volume level at level 3 without increasing it further.

On the volume adjustment screen (Figure 72(b)), the player makes a selection using the effect button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the effect button 10a and updates the output volume level stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to the output volume level selected using the left selection button 40l or right selection button 40r (or, if the effect button 10a is operated without any operation by the player on the left selection button 40l or right selection button 40r, to the output volume level stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 before switching to the volume adjustment screen from the user menu). The sub-CPU 201 also switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the volume adjustment screen shown in Figure 72(b) to the user menu screen shown in Figure 72(a), which displays an enlarged view of "Volume Adjustment" 210d3, indicating that "Volume Adjustment" 210d3 is selected.

When the player operates the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r on the user menu screen (Figure 72(a)) where "Volume Adjustment" 210d3 is selected, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the left selection button 40l or the right selection button 40r, sets "Exit" 210d4 to selected, moves the cursor to "Exit" 210d4, and displays an enlarged version of the user menu screen on the main display device 210.

When "End" 210d4 is selected on the user menu screen, the player makes a decision using the special effect button 10a. In this case, the sub-CPU 201 detects the operation of the special effect button 10a and switches the display content of the main display device 210 from the user menu screen to the normal screen. Alternatively, if no operation of the special effect button 10a or similar is performed on the user menu screen for a specific period of time (e.g., 30 seconds), the display may switch from the user menu screen to the normal screen, or it may switch to a demo screen instead of the normal screen.

The user menu screen can be displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the end of a game, until the next game is initiated. For example, it can be displayed while waiting for a bet or after placing a bet. It can also be displayed after winning a replay bonus and while waiting for the next game (replay game) to start. When the next game is initiated, the screen will automatically switch to the normal screen without any user intervention.

This section describes the control of the output volume levels of speakers 35a to 35d by the sub-CPU 201. The output volume levels of speakers 35a to 35d controlled by the sub-CPU 201 are those stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203.

When the player adjusts the output volume using the volume adjustment screen shown in Figure 72(b), the sub-CPU 201 controls the volume levels of the speakers 35a to 35d to the volume level (the volume level set by the player) stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203, based on the output volume adjustment using the volume adjustment screen shown in Figure 72(b).

Furthermore, if no gameplay is performed for a certain period of time, the sub-CPU 201 updates the output volume level stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to the standard volume level stored in the standard volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203, based on the standard volume setting using the maximum/standard volume setting screen in Figure 67(c). It then controls the output volume levels of speakers 35a to 35d to the updated output volume level stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 (the standard volume level set by the operator).

Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 201 receives an initialization command (change/start) upon power-on (when the main control board 71, during the setting change process shown in Figure 61 upon power-on, steps S1001 and S1002 become YES, and the reset switch 53 is accepted and the setting value can be changed (setting change state)), it updates the output volume level stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 to the standard volume level stored in the standard volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203, based on the standard volume setting using the maximum/standard volume setting screen in Figure 67(c). It then controls the output volume levels of speakers 35a to 35d to the updated output volume level (standard volume level set by the operator) stored in the output volume memory area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203.

Furthermore, if the sub-CPU 201 does not receive an initialization command (change/start) when the power is turned on (i.e., if the setting change process shown in Figure 61, performed on the main control board 71 when the power is turned on, results in either step S1001 being NO or step S1002 being NO, and the system does not enter a setting change state where it can accept a change in the state of the reset switch 53 and change the setting value), the sub-CPU 201 maintains the volume level of the output volume stored in the output volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203 without updating it to the volume level of the standard volume stored in the standard volume storage area (not shown) of the sub-RAM 203. In this case, the volume levels of the output volume of speakers 35a to 35d after power-on will be the same as the volume levels of the output volume of speakers 35a to 35d before power-off.

[11-8-6. Effects]
According to the modified example 1 of the gaming machine described above, an attendant can change the setting value by opening the lower door mechanism DD and turning on the setting key-type switch 52 before turning on the power. Furthermore, when the door mechanism (lower door mechanism DD, upper door mechanism UD) is closed, a setting change maintenance menu screen is displayed, allowing the attendant to perform setting change maintenance. Thus, the attendant can perform setting value changes and setting change maintenance in succession, improving the efficiency of these tasks.

Furthermore, by opening the lower door mechanism DD and turning on the setting key-type switch 52 after the power is turned on, the staff can confirm the setting value. Additionally, a maintenance menu screen is displayed during the setting confirmation, allowing maintenance to be performed. Therefore, the staff can perform setting value confirmation and maintenance in succession, improving the efficiency of these tasks.

In the modified example 1, the display conditions for the setting change maintenance menu screen, which corresponds to the setting change maintenance among the various types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine, on the main display device 210 include a reception condition of receiving an initialization command (change/start). Based on the fulfillment of this reception condition, the setting change maintenance menu screen, which corresponds to the setting change maintenance—one of the multiple types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine—is displayed on the main display device 210 as a maintenance menu screen. This reduces the amount of information displayed, making the maintenance menu screen easier to read.

Furthermore, even if the main CPU 101 mistakenly recognizes the setting key-type switch 52 as being in the ON state at power-on due to some malfunction or error, if the upper door mechanism UD is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is also recognized as being closed, the initialization command (change/start) will not be sent from the main control circuit 71 to the sub-control circuit 72, and the sub-CPU 201 will not determine that it has received the initialization command (change/start). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sub-CPU 201 from displaying the setting change maintenance menu screen on the main display device 210 due to the main CPU 101 mistakenly recognizing the setting key-type switch 52 as being in the ON state at power-on due to some malfunction or error.

Furthermore, the conditions for displaying the maintenance menu screen during configuration changes on the main display device 210 now include not only the reception condition of receiving an initialization command (change/start), but also the door opening/closing condition of the door mechanism (upper door mechanism UD, lower door mechanism DD) being in the closed state. Therefore, even if the sub-CPU 201 mistakenly recognizes that it has received an initialization command (change/start) due to some malfunction or error, if it recognizes that the upper door mechanism UD is in the closed state and the lower door mechanism DD is not in the closed state, it can prevent the maintenance menu screen during configuration changes from being displayed on the main display device 210.

Furthermore, the display conditions for the setting change maintenance menu screen, which corresponds to the setting confirmation maintenance among the maintenance procedures that can be performed on the gaming machine in Modification Example 1, include a reception condition of receiving an initialization command (confirmation/start). Based on the fulfillment of this reception condition, the main display device 210 displays the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen, which corresponds to one of the multiple types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine and is different from the setting change maintenance. This reduces the amount of information displayed, making the maintenance menu screen easier to read.

Furthermore, even if the main CPU 101 mistakenly perceives that the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state after power-on due to some malfunction or error, if the upper door mechanism UD is recognized as closed and the lower door mechanism DD is also recognized as closed, the initialization command (confirmation/start) will not be sent from the main control circuit 71 to the sub-control circuit 72, and the sub-CPU 201 will not determine that it has received the initialization command (confirmation/start). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sub-CPU 201 from displaying the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen on the main display device 210 due to the main CPU 101 mistakenly perceiving that the setting key-type switch 52 has changed from the off state to the on state after power-on due to some malfunction or error.

Furthermore, the display conditions for the maintenance menu screen during configuration confirmation on the main display device 210 include a reception condition for receiving an initialization command (confirmation/start), but do not include changes in the open/closed state of the door mechanism (upper door mechanism UD, lower door mechanism DD) after receiving the initialization command (confirmation/start). Therefore, by making the display conditions for the maintenance menu screen different for a predetermined maintenance menu screen and a specific maintenance menu screen, it becomes easier to understand which maintenance menu screen is being used for maintenance.

Furthermore, by providing separate maintenance menu screens—one for setting changes based on the reception of initialization commands (change/start) and another for setting confirmation based on the reception of initialization commands (confirm/start)—the number of maintenance items displayed on a single maintenance menu screen (setting change maintenance menu screen, setting confirmation maintenance menu screen) can be reduced. This allows staff to easily perform the desired maintenance (setting change maintenance, setting confirmation maintenance) using the setting change maintenance menu screen or the setting confirmation maintenance menu screen.

Furthermore, if the settings are changed while both the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed, it is possible that the setting key-type switch 52 is being operated without the door key that the store normally possesses being used. This could indicate a cheating operation where a hole is drilled in the gaming machine's cabinet and the setting key-type switch 52 is being operated. However, even if the system recognizes that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, the system recognizes that both the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are in the closed state, thus preventing the setting values from being changed through cheating.

Furthermore, even if, as described above, a cheating act occurs where a hole is drilled in the gaming machine's cabinet and the setting key switch is manipulated, causing the system to perceive a change in the setting key switch 52's state from off to on after power-on, the system can prevent the display of the setting value (confirmation of the setting value) due to the cheating act by recognizing that both the upper door mechanism DD and the lower door mechanism UD are in the closed state.

Furthermore, by checking the illumination status of the light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs) positioned in conjunction with the bet buttons (e.g., MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the staff can determine that the gaming machine is in a setting change state (the state from when step S1001 becomes YES in the setting change process shown in Figure 61 upon power-on, when step S1002 becomes YES and the reset switch 53's state change is accepted, allowing the setting value to be changed, until step S1014 becomes YES).

According to this, by performing maintenance related to speaker output confirmation (speaker confirmation) and maintenance related to the operation confirmation of the performance button 10a (performance button confirmation) in parallel, the time required for maintenance work by staff during setting changes can be reduced.

Furthermore, by setting the maximum volume that players can set, potential volume issues between players can be prevented. Additionally, by setting a standard volume that can be set when the machine has not been played for a certain period of time or when a setting change state is reached (where step S1001 and step S1002 become YES in the setting change process shown in Figure 61 when the power is turned on, allowing the reset switch 53 to accept a state change and the setting value to be changed), the system can automatically set the volume to the standard volume desired by the store after these situations occur.

Furthermore, on the main control board 71, if the setting change process shown in Figure 61, performed when the power is turned on, results in either step S1001 being NO or step S1002 being NO, and the reset switch 53's state change is not accepted, preventing the system from entering a state where the setting value can be changed, the system will not be set to the standard volume. This prevents players from having to perform cumbersome tasks such as resetting the volume to the setting it was at before a power outage or error occurred.

[11-8-7. Modification of the third type of gaming machine, Modification 1]
The gaming machine described in Modification 1 above may be modified as shown in (A) to (E) below, for example.

(A) The maintenance process during setting changes may be modified by removing step S1110 from the maintenance process during setting changes shown in Figure 63, and setting the destination when the determination process in step S1107 is "YES," and the destination after the processing in step S1109, to step S1111. In this modified maintenance process during setting changes, unlike the maintenance process during setting changes shown in Figure 63, once the maintenance screen during setting changes (Figure 66) is displayed, the display of the maintenance screen during setting changes (Figure 66) will continue until the maintenance process during setting changes is completed. Therefore, there are more states in which maintenance can be performed on the gaming machine during setting changes, making it easier for staff to perform maintenance.

(B) In the modified version 1 of the gaming machine, the combination of the open/closed state of the upper door mechanism UD and the open/closed state of the lower door mechanism DD is given as the three combinations described above (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3). However, it is not limited to these, and for example, there may be four combinations: the above combinations (door open/closed combination 1) to (door open/closed combination 3) and (door open/closed combination 4), where the upper door mechanism UD is in the open state and the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state. In this case, the processing in Figures 61 to 64 may be, for example, as follows (B-1) and (B-2).

(B-1) In the setting change process shown in Figure 61, the determination process in step S1001 may be replaced with a determination process that "determines whether the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed)." If it is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the process proceeds to step S1002. If it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the setting change process may be terminated and the process returned to the caller. Furthermore, in the setting confirmation process shown in Figure 62, the determination process in step S1052 may be replaced with a determination process that "determines whether the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed)." If it is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the process proceeds to step S1053. If it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the setting confirmation process may be terminated and the system returned to the caller. Furthermore, in the maintenance process during setting changes shown in Figure 63, the determination process in step S1110 may be replaced with a determination process that "determines whether the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed)." If it is not determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the process returns to step S1102. If it is determined that the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is in the off state (upper door closed) and the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is in the off state (lower door closed), the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the determination process in step S1105 may not be changed in the maintenance process during setting changes shown in Figure 63.

(B-2) The content of the determination process in step S1001 of the setting change process in Figure 61, the determination process in step S1052 of the setting confirmation process in Figure 62, and the determination process in step S1105 and S1110 of the setting change maintenance process in Figure 63 may be used as is, without changing the content of the determination process in step S1001 of the setting change process in Figure 61, the determination process in step S1052 of the setting confirmation process in Figure 62, and the setting change maintenance process in Figure 63.

(C) Figures 61 to 63 describe the case where the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d is an ON switch when the lower door mechanism DD is open and OFF when it is closed, and the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u is an ON switch when the upper door mechanism UD is open and OFF when it is closed. However, the explanation is not limited to this case. It is also possible to describe the case where the switches are ON when the lower door mechanism DD is closed and OFF when it is open, and the switches are ON when the upper door mechanism UD is closed and OFF when it is open. In this case, in Figures 61 to 63, the parts relating to the lower door opening/closing monitoring switch 56d and the upper door opening/closing monitoring switch 56u should be replaced with "ON state" and "OFF state," respectively.

(D) When the sub-CPU 201 is displaying a setting change screen on the main display device 210 to indicate that a setting change is in progress, it may also simultaneously display a message such as "The maintenance menu will be displayed when the door is closed." Alternatively, the system may use audio output from speakers 35a to 35d to indicate that the maintenance menu will be displayed when the door is closed.

(E) The maintenance performed during the setting confirmation process is not limited to those described above. For example, it may include (E-1) light intensity settings. For example, in the light intensity setting, similar to the "maximum/standard volume setting," a maximum light intensity setting may be provided to set the maximum light intensity that the player can set, and a standard light intensity setting may be provided to set the standard light intensity when the machine has not been played for a certain period of time or when the settings are changed.

(E-2) As part of the maintenance process during the settings check, it is possible to implement a setting to disable volume switching so that players cannot adjust the volume. When the volume switching is disabled, it is preferable to prevent the "Volume Settings" 210d3 item from being displayed on the user menu screen.

[11-8-8. Addendum]
In some conventional gaming machines, when an attendant uses a setting key to turn on a setting key switch (setting key switch) and then turns on the power, or when an attendant uses a setting key to turn on the setting key switch (setting key switch) while the power is on, a maintenance menu screen related to maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in conjunction with this (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-183205 (for example, paragraphs 0997 to 1059, figures 132 to 137, etc.)).

By the way, the types of maintenance that can be performed on gaming machines are diverse, and considering the efficiency of maintenance, there is room for improvement in the current maintenance processing control.

The amusement machines described in the appendix were developed in consideration of these points, and aim to provide amusement machines with improved processing control for maintenance that can be performed on the machine.

To achieve the above objective, the gaming machine described in the appendix can provide a gaming machine with the following configuration.

The gaming machine (1) mentioned in the appendix is,
Display means (210),
The gaming machine is equipped with a maintenance processing means (101) for performing maintenance processing related to maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine,
The maintenance processing means performs a predetermined maintenance process in the maintenance process, which, based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, displays a predetermined maintenance menu screen on the display means as a maintenance menu screen, corresponding to a predetermined maintenance that is part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine (Figure 63 or Figure 4).
It is characterized by the following.

According to this, based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions, a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to a predetermined maintenance procedure, which is one of several types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine, will be displayed on the display means. This reduces the amount of information displayed, making the maintenance menu screen easier to view.

The gaming machine (2) is, in the gaming machine (1) described above,
The maintenance processing means performs a specific maintenance process in the maintenance process, which, based on the fulfillment of specific conditions, displays on the display means a specific maintenance menu screen that is a part of a plurality of types of maintenance that can be performed in the gaming machine, and corresponds to a specific maintenance that is different from the predetermined maintenance (Figure 64 or Figure 63).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, based on the fulfillment of specific conditions, a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to a particular maintenance, which is a part of the multiple types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine and is different from a predetermined maintenance, will be displayed on the display means. This reduces the amount of information displayed, making the maintenance menu screen easier to read. Furthermore, by providing a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to a predetermined maintenance that is displayed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, and a specific maintenance menu screen corresponding to a particular maintenance that is displayed based on a specific condition, the number of maintenance items displayed on a single maintenance menu screen (predetermined maintenance menu screen, specific maintenance menu screen) can be reduced, allowing staff to easily perform the desired maintenance using the predetermined maintenance menu screen or the specific maintenance menu screen.

The gaming machine (3) is, in the gaming machine (1) or the gaming machine (2) described above,
A door mechanism (DD) that is attached to the gaming machine body so that it can be opened and closed,
The door mechanism is further provided with an opening/closing detection means (56d) for detecting the opening/closing state of the door mechanism,
The maintenance processing means, in the predetermined maintenance processing,
Even if the predetermined conditions are met, if the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is in the open state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen will not be displayed on the display means (S1101, S1101 is YES, S1105, S1105 is NO).
If the predetermined conditions are met and the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is in a closed state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means (S1101, S1101 is YES, S1105, S1105 is YES, S1106).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, even if the maintenance processing means recognizes that a predetermined condition has been met due to some malfunction or improper operation, if it recognizes that the door mechanism is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined maintenance menu screen from being displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine (4) is a gaming machine (3) that is subordinate to the gaming machine (2) described above,
The maintenance processing means, in the specific maintenance processing, if the specific conditions are met, will display the specific maintenance menu screen on the display means without requiring a change in the open/closed state of the door mechanism (S1151, S1151 is YES, S1152).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, by differentiating the display conditions of the maintenance menu screen between a designated maintenance screen and a specific maintenance screen, it becomes easier to understand which type of maintenance is being performed.

The gaming machine (5) is, in the gaming machine (3) or the gaming machine (4) described above,
Other door mechanisms (UD) that are attached to the gaming machine body in a way that allows them to be opened and closed,
An additional opening/closing detection means (56u) for detecting the opening/closing state of the other door mechanism,
A setting value storage unit (103) that stores setting values indicating the degree of advantage for the player in the game,
A setting value changing means (101) that performs setting value changing processing (Figure 61) related to changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit,
Setting key switch (52),
It is equipped with a setting value change switch (53) and
The predetermined conditions are that, when the power is turned on, the state of the setting key switch is in a state that allows the setting value to be changed, and that, among the possible open/closed states of the door mechanism and the other door mechanism, the combination is one other than the one in which the detection result by the open/closed detection means is that the door mechanism is closed and the detection result by the other open/closed detection means is that the other door mechanism is closed.
The setting value changing means, in the setting value changing process,
Based on the state change of the setting value change switch, the setting value is changed (S1001, S1001 is YES, S1002, S1002 is YES, S1004-1010),
If the predetermined conditions are not met, the setting value will not be changed based on the state change of the setting value change switch (S1001, S1001 is NO, S1002, S1002 is NO).
That is also acceptable.

The situation where a setting change is made while both the door mechanism and other door mechanisms are closed suggests that the setting key switch is being operated without the door key that the store is supposed to possess being used. This could indicate a cheating operation where a hole is drilled in the gaming machine's cabinet and the setting key switch is manipulated. However, even if the setting value change mechanism recognizes the state of the setting key switch at power-on as allowing a setting value change, it can prevent cheating by recognizing that both the door mechanism and other door mechanisms are closed.

The gaming machine (6) is a gaming machine (3) or gaming machine (4) that is subordinate to the gaming machine (2) above,
Other display means (14),
Other door mechanisms (UD) that are attached to the gaming machine body in a way that allows them to be opened and closed,
An additional opening/closing detection means (56u) for detecting the opening/closing state of the other door mechanism,
A setting value storage unit (103) that stores setting values indicating the degree of advantage for the player in the game,
A setting value display means (101) that performs setting value display processing (Figure 61) relating to the display of the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit to the other display means,
Equipped with a setting key switch,
The aforementioned specific conditions are that, after power is turned on, the state of the setting key switch changes to a state that allows the other display means to display the setting value, and that, among the possible open/closed states of the door mechanism and the other door mechanism, the combination is one other than the one in which the detection result by the open/closed detection means is that the door mechanism is closed and the detection result by the other open/closed detection means is that the other door mechanism is closed.
The setting value display means, in the setting value display process,
If the above specific conditions are met, the setting value is displayed on the other display means (S1051, S1051 is YES, S1052, S1052 is YES, S1054),
If the aforementioned specific conditions are not met, the setting value will not be displayed on the other display means (S1051, S1051 is NO, S1052, S1052 is NO).
That is also acceptable.

According to this, even if, as described above, a cheating act occurs where a hole is drilled in the gaming machine's cabinet and the setting key switch is manipulated, causing the system to perceive that the state of the setting key switch has changed to one that allows the setting value to be displayed on other display means after power-on, the system can prevent the display of the setting value due to the cheating act by recognizing that both the door mechanism and other door mechanisms are in a closed state.

The gaming machine (7) is one of the gaming machines described above, from gaming machine (1) to gaming machine (6).
A bet button (6a or 6b) used by the player to set the number of bets in the game,
A light-emitting means corresponding to the aforementioned bet button,
The light-emitting means further comprises a light-emitting control means (101) for controlling the light emission of the light-emitting means,
The light emission control means may use a different light emission control for the light emission means than the light emission control for the light emission means in a playable state, based on the fulfillment of the predetermined conditions.

According to this, by checking the illumination status of the light-emitting device corresponding to the bet button, the staff can determine that the gaming machine is in a state that meets the predetermined conditions.

The gaming machine (8) is one of the gaming machines described above, from gaming machine (1) to gaming machine (7).
Speakers (35a-35d) and
The system further includes a special button (10a) that accepts player input for performance effects,
The aforementioned predetermined maintenance includes at least a first predetermined maintenance (210b1) related to checking the output of the speaker and a second predetermined maintenance (210b3) related to checking the operation of the performance buttons.
The maintenance processing means may be capable of performing the second predetermined maintenance while the first predetermined maintenance is being performed.

According to this, by performing the first prescribed maintenance related to speaker output confirmation and the second prescribed maintenance related to the operation confirmation of the performance buttons in parallel, the time required for the prescribed maintenance work by staff can be shortened.

The gaming machine (9) is located in the gaming machine (2) above, or the gaming machine (3) which is subordinate to the gaming machine (2) above, or the gaming machine (4) above, or the gaming machine (6) above.
It is further equipped with speakers (35a to 35d),
The aforementioned specific maintenance may include a first specific maintenance (210c1b) relating to setting the maximum volume of the speaker that can be set by the player, and a second specific maintenance (210c1c) relating to setting the standard volume that is used as the output volume of the speaker when certain conditions are met.

According to this, by setting a maximum volume level that players can adjust, potential volume issues between players can be prevented. Furthermore, by setting a standard volume level that can be adjusted under specific conditions, the system can automatically adjust to the desired volume level for the establishment when those conditions are met.

The gaming machine (10) is, in the gaming machine (9) described above,
The system further includes an output volume setting means (201) for setting the volume output from the speaker,
The output volume setting means may set the speaker output to the standard volume if the predetermined conditions are met when the power is turned on, and may not set the speaker output to the standard volume if the predetermined conditions are not met when the power is turned on.

According to this system, if certain conditions are not met when the power is turned on, the volume will not be set to the standard volume. This prevents players from having to perform cumbersome tasks such as resetting the volume to the setting it was at before a power outage or error occurred.

According to the attached description of the gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved processing control for maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine.

[12. The Fourth Gaming Machine]
Next, referring to Figures 73 to 210, we will describe another specification of the pachislo machine 1, which will be referred to as the "fourth gaming machine." Note that all configurations of the pachislo machine 1 not described in Figures 73 to 210 are governed by the embodiments described in Figures 1 to 35.

In the fourth type of gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1, the cross-up lines are used as effective lines among the pseudo-lines connecting the 3x3 symbols displayed within the frame of the main display window 4, and the other lines are used as pseudo-lines. Specifically, in the pachislo machine 1, the cross-down lines formed by connecting the lower unit symbol display area of the left reel 3L, the middle unit symbol display area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper unit symbol display area of the right reel 3R, respectively, are used as effective lines, and the lines formed by connecting the other unit symbol display areas are used as pseudo-lines. Examples of pseudo-lines include the top line connecting the unit symbol display areas in the upper row of each reel, the center line connecting the unit symbol display areas in the middle row of each reel, the bottom line connecting the unit symbol display areas in the lower row of each reel, and the cross-down line connecting the unit symbol display areas in the upper row of the left reel 3L, the middle row of the middle reel 3C, and the lower row of the right reel 3R.

[12-1. Flowchart of game state transitions]
First, with reference to Figure 73, we will explain the various game states and their transition flows managed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) of the fourth gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1.

[12-1-1. Basic game state transition flow]
In the fourth type of gaming machine, pachislo machine 1, a type of bonus game is provided called a Big Bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB"). BB is a continuous activation device for a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as "RB"), which is called a Type 1 Special Feature, and it activates RBs continuously. In addition to BB, pachislo machine 1, the fourth type of gaming machine, also provides a type of bonus game called a Single Bonus (hereinafter referred to as "SB"), which is called a Normal Feature.

Therefore, in the fourth type of gaming machine, pachislo machine 1, the game state is managed based on whether or not a big bonus is won/activated (awarded), and whether or not a single bonus is won/activated.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 73, the main control circuit 100 manages four types of game states, referred to as "General State," "Big Bonus Flag Interval State (BB Flag Interval State)," "Big Bonus State (BB State)," and "Single Bonus State (SB State)," based on whether or not a Big Bonus role (the internal winning role named "F_Red 7 Same Color," "F_White Same Color," "F_Red Different Color," and "F_White Different Color" described later) has been won/activated (awarded), and whether or not a Single Bonus role (the internal winning role named "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" described later) has been won/activated (awarded).

In general, the state is one in which the Big Bonus has not been won and the Big Bonus has not been activated (awarded), and the Single Bonus has not been won and the Single Bonus has not been activated (awarded). The Big Bonus state (BB state) is one in which the Big Bonus has been activated, and the Single Bonus state (SB state) is one in which the Single Bonus has been activated. In this embodiment, once the Big Bonus role is determined as the internal winning role, a state occurs in which the Big Bonus role is carried over as the internal winning role for multiple games until the Big Bonus is awarded. The Big Bonus Flag Interval State (BB Flag Interval State) is one in which the Big Bonus role is carried over as the internal winning role, that is, the Big Bonus role has been won and the Big Bonus has not been activated. Unlike the Big Bonus, if a Single Bonus is determined as an internal winning combination in a game where the Single Bonus is not activated (winning), the Single Bonus is not carried over as an internal winning combination.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 73, the main control circuit 100 manages three types of game states in the BB state, based on whether or not a regular bonus role (the internal winning role referred to later as "F_BBRB") is won/activated (awarded). These states are called "Big Bonus General State (BB General State)," "Regular Bonus Flag Interval State (BBRB Flag Interval State)," and "Regular Bonus State (RB State)."

Furthermore, in the Big Bonus state (BB state), the Big Bonus General state (BB General state) is a state where the Regular Bonus has not been won and the Regular Bonus has not been activated (awarded). The Regular Bonus state (RB state) is a state where the Regular Bonus has been activated. In this embodiment, once the Regular Bonus role is determined as the internal winning role, the Regular Bonus role is carried over as the internal winning role for multiple games until the Regular Bonus is awarded. The Regular Bonus Flag Interval state (BBRB Flag Interval state) is a state where the Regular Bonus role is carried over as the internal winning role; that is, the Regular Bonus role has been won, and the Regular Bonus has not been activated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, thirteen different states are provided, each with a different type of internal winning combination related to replays and a different probability of winning: RT0 to RT3 and RT6 game states in the general state; RT0 to RT3 and RT6 game states in the SB state; RT5 in the BB flag state; RT4 game state in the BB general state; RT4 game state in the RB state; and RT7 game state in the BBRB flag state. Hereafter, "RTxxx game state" will be referred to as "RTxxx state."

Furthermore, the RT0-RT3 and RT6 states within the general state are distinguished into infinite RT states or finite RT states, not only based on the probability of winning the internal winning combination related to replays, but also depending on the transition trigger that leads to the transition from itself to the other RT0-RT3 and RT6 states within the general state. The infinite RT state is an RT state in which the number of games played is not used as a transition trigger to other RT states; in this embodiment, this corresponds to the RT0, RT3, and RT6 states within the general state. The finite RT state is an RT state in which the number of games played is used as a transition trigger to other RT states; in this embodiment, this corresponds to the RT1 and RT2 states within the general state.

As shown in Figure 73, when a predetermined number of games are played in the RT1 or RT2 state during the general state (when transition condition (1) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT1 or RT2 state during the general state to the RT0 state during the general state. The predetermined number of games for the RT1 state during the general state is 12, and the predetermined number of games for the RT2 state during the general state is 60.

Furthermore, in the RT0 state or RT6 state during the general state, when the symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "RT1 transition replay symbol" (see Figures 105 to 114 below) and the symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "RT1 transition bell symbol" (see Figures 105 to 114 below) are displayed on the active line (when transition condition (2) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT0 state or RT6 state during the general state to the RT1 state during the general state.

Furthermore, in the RT0 state during the general state, when a symbol combination related to the abbreviated "RT2 transition replay symbol" (see Figures 105 to 114 described later) is displayed on the active line (when transition condition (3) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT0 state during the general state to the RT2 state during the general state.

Furthermore, in the RT0 or RT6 state during the general state, if a symbol combination related to the abbreviated "RT3 transition replay symbol" (see Figures 105 to 114 described later) is displayed on the active line (when transition condition (4) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT0 or RT6 state during the general state to the RT3 state during the general state.

Furthermore, in the RT0 or RT3 state during the general state, if a symbol combination related to the abbreviated "RT6 transition replay symbol" (see Figures 105 to 114 described later) is displayed on the active line (when transition condition (5) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT0 or RT3 state during the general state to the RT6 state during the general state.

In pachislo machine 1, when using symbol combinations displayed on the active payline as a condition for transitioning to the RT state during other general states, during the infinite RT state, if that symbol combination is displayed on the active payline, the machine must transition to the corresponding RT state during the general state. The abbreviations "RT1 transition replay symbol," "RT1 transition bell symbol," "RT2 transition replay symbol," "RT3 transition replay symbol," and "RT6 transition replay symbol" refer to symbol combinations that, when displayed on the active payline during the infinite RT state, will transition to the corresponding RT state.

On the other hand, in the finite RT state within the general state, even if the abbreviated symbols "RT1 transition replay symbol," "RT1 transition bell symbol," "RT2 transition replay symbol," "RT3 transition replay symbol," and "RT6 transition replay symbol" are displayed on the active line, it is possible to control the machine so that it does not transition to the corresponding RT state within the general state. Therefore, in the pachislo machine 1 of this embodiment, in the RT1 state or RT2 state, which are finite RT states within the general state, even if the abbreviated symbols "RT1 transition replay symbol," "RT1 transition bell symbol," "RT2 transition replay symbol," "RT3 transition replay symbol," and "RT6 transition replay symbol" are displayed on the active line, the RT state is not transitioned. Instead, the RT state is transitioned when a predetermined number of games have been played, thereby realizing the game state transition flow shown in Figure 73.

On the other hand, in the infinite RT state during the general state, if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line, the game must transition to another RT state during the general state. Therefore, if there is an RT state that the player does not want to transition to from a gameplay perspective, the game controls the game so that the symbol combination that triggers the transition to that unwanted RT state is not displayed on the active line during the corresponding RT state, thereby realizing the transition flow of game states shown in Figure 73.

Furthermore, when a Big Bonus role is determined as an internal winning role in the general state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the general state to the BB flag state. Specifically, when an internal winning role related to the names "F_Red 7 Same Color," "F_White 7 Same Color," "F_Red 7 Different Colors," or "F_White 7 Different Colors" is determined as a Big Bonus role (when transition condition (6) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the general state to the RT5 state within the BB flag state.

Furthermore, when a Big Bonus (BB) role is won during the BB flag state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the BB flag state to the BB state. Specifically, when an internal winning role named "F_Red 7 Same Color," "F_White 7 Same Color," "F_Red 7 Different Colors," or "F_White 7 Different Colors" is won (the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "BB" for the internal role (see Figures 105 to 114 below) is displayed on the active line) (when transition condition (7) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT5 state during the BB flag state to the RT4 state during the BB general state.

Furthermore, if the number of medals dispensed exceeds the specified number during the BB state, and the BB state ends (when transition condition (8) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the BB state to the RT3 state during the general state. In this embodiment, the specified number of medals that triggers the end of the BB state is "179 medals".

Furthermore, in the BB general state, when a regular bonus role is determined as the internal winning role, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the BB general state to the BBRB flag state. Specifically, when an internal winning role related to the name "F_BBRB" is determined as the regular bonus role (when transition condition (9) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT4 state in the BB general state to the RT7 state in the BBRB flag state.

Furthermore, in the BBRB flag state, when a regular bonus role is won, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the BBRB flag state to the RB state. Specifically, when the internal winning role named "F_BBRB" is won (the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "RB" for that internal role (see Figures 105 to 114 below) is displayed on the active line) (when transition condition (10) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT7 state in the BBRB flag state to the RT4 state in the RB state.

Furthermore, in the RB state, when the prescribed number of games have been played, or when the number of wins for the internal winning combinations named "F_JAC-1" to "F_JAC-3" (see Figures 78 to 104 below) reaches the prescribed number of wins (when transition condition (11) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT4 state in the RB state to the RT4 state in the BB general state. The prescribed number of RT4 states in the RB state is 12, and the prescribed number of wins is 8.

Furthermore, in the normal state, if a single bonus role is determined as the internal winning role and a symbol role is achieved, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the normal state to the SB state. Specifically, internal winning combinations named "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" are determined as single bonus combinations, and when a winning combination is achieved (the symbol combination related to the abbreviation "SB" for the internal combination (see Figures 105 to 114 described later) is displayed on the active line), (when transition condition (12) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT0 state in the general state to the RT0 state in the SB state, or from the RT1 state in the general state to the RT1 state in the SB state, or from the RT2 state in the general state to the RT2 state in the SB state, or from the RT3 state in the general state to the RT3 state in the SB state, or from the RT6 state in the general state to the RT6 state in the SB state. Here, the RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT6 states within the SB state are each assigned to a symbol combination related to the abbreviation "SB" (for each symbol combination named "C_SIN1" to "C_SIN32"). For example, if the symbol combination named "C_SIN1" is displayed in the RT0 state during the general state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the RT0 state in the general state to the RT0 state corresponding to the symbol combination named "C_SIN1" in the SB state.

Furthermore, when the specified number of games have been played in the SB state (when transition condition (13) is met), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the SB state to the general state. The specified number of games in the SB state is one. When returning from the SB state to the general state, the same transitions as between RT states in the general state occur based on the display of "RT1 transition replay symbol," "RT1 transition bell symbol," "RT2 transition replay symbol," "RT3 transition replay symbol," and "RT6 transition replay symbol," also occur between RT states in the SB state and RT states in the general state. Additionally, when a single bonus role is determined as the internal winning role during SB gameplay and a symbol role is awarded, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the SB state to the SB state.

[12-2. Structure of data tables stored in the main ROM]
Next, we will explain the structure of the various data tables stored in the main ROM 102.

[12-2-1. Pattern Placement Table]
First, the symbol placement table will be explained with reference to Figure 74. The symbol placement table defines the correspondence between the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of symbol placed at each position (data that identifies the type of symbol placed at each position (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the symbol code)).

Furthermore, in the fourth type of gaming machine, Pachislo Machine 1, each reel displays one of ten symbols: "Red Seven," "White Seven," "BAR," "Replay," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Watermelon A," "Watermelon B," "Cherry," and "Blank."

[12-2-1. Internal Lottery Table]
Next, with reference to Figures 75 to 77, we will explain the internal lottery tables that are referenced when determining the internal winning combinations. An internal lottery table is provided for each game state and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery values at which each internal winning combination is determined.

Furthermore, in the RT0 state during the general state, the internal lottery table for RT0 shown in Figure 75 is referenced; in the RT1 state during the general state, the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in Figure 75 is referenced; in the RT2 state during the general state, the internal lottery table for RT2 shown in Figure 75 is referenced; in the RT3 state during the general state, the internal lottery table for RT3 shown in Figure 75 is referenced; and in the RT6 state during the general state, the internal lottery table for RT6 shown in Figure 75 is referenced.

Furthermore, during the RT5 state while the BB flag is active, the internal lottery table for RT5 shown in Figure 75 is referenced.

In RT5 mode, if "Miss," "Minor Win," or "Re-spin Win" is drawn, it is treated as a "Duplicate Win with the Carried-Over Bonus Win." For example, in RT5 mode with a carried-over Red Same-Color BB win ("F_Red Same-Color"), if "Miss" is selected in the draw using the internal draw table, "F_Red Same-Color," which is a standalone win for the Red Same-Color BB win, will be determined as the final internal win. Also, if "F_Strong Bell A" is selected in the same draw, "F_Red Same-Color + F_Strong Bell A" will be determined as the final internal win.

Furthermore, in RT5 state, if an internal winning combination is selected based on the draw value of the overlapping combinations "bonus combination + minor combination" or "bonus combination + re-spin combination," the "carried-over bonus combination + minor combination" or "bonus combination + re-spin combination" is determined as the final internal winning combination. For example, in RT5 state with a carried-over red same-color BB combination ("F_Red Same Color"), if "F_White Different Color + F_Strong Cherry" is selected in the draw using the internal draw table, since the red same-color BB combination has already been carried over and there is no new win for the white different-color BB combination, "F_Red Same Color + F_Strong Cherry" is determined as the final internal winning combination.

Furthermore, in RT5 state, since one of the BB roles is already carried over, a bonus role different from the carried-over bonus role (a different BB role from the carried-over BB role and a single bonus role) cannot be determined as a new internal winning role. If the draw using the internal draw table selects the occurrence of a "bonus role different from the carried-over bonus role," the carried-over bonus's single winning role is determined as the final internal winning role. For example, in RT5 state with a carried-over red same-color BB role ("F_Red Same Color"), if the draw using the internal draw table selects a single bonus role (one of "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32"; see the bottom row of Figure 75), "F_Red Same Color" is determined as the final internal winning role, and the stopping of the symbol combination corresponding to the red same-color BB role is permitted.

The gaming machine of this embodiment uses a reel stop control that prioritizes small wins, stopping symbol combinations related to replay wins and small wins over symbol combinations related to bonus wins. At first glance, the draw values for RT5 in Figure 75 show that the "miss" draw value is a small "39," making it seem difficult to win a bonus win while carrying over. However, the sum of the draw values for single bonus wins is 1080 x 32 = 34560, and the draw denominator is 65536. Therefore, a win of a carried-over bonus win is permitted with the draw value for single bonuses at a rate of approximately 1/1.896 (= 65536 ÷ 34560), roughly once every two games. As a result, players can quickly win a bonus win without having to play for a long period of time in a state where they cannot win a bonus while carrying over a bonus. Note that the equivalent of the "Red Same Color _BB" lottery value (lottery value 8) is also included when a bonus win is permitted, but the detailed calculation is omitted here.

Furthermore, in the RT0 state within the SB state, the internal lottery table for SB (RT0) shown in Figure 76 is referenced; in the RT1 state within the SB state, the internal lottery table for SB (RT1) shown in Figure 76 is referenced; in the RT2 state within the SB state, the internal lottery table for SB (RT2) shown in Figure 76 is referenced; in the RT3 state within the SB state, the internal lottery table for SB (RT3) shown in Figure 76 is referenced; and in the RT6 state within the SB state, the internal lottery table for SB (RT6) shown in Figure 76 is referenced.

Furthermore, in the RT4 state during the BB general state, the internal lottery table for BB general (RT4) shown in Figure 77 is referenced; in the RT7 state during the BBRB flag state, the internal lottery table for RT7 shown in Figure 77 is referenced; and in the RT4 state during the RB state, the internal lottery table for RB (RT4) shown in Figure 77 is referenced.

[12-2-2. Correspondence table between internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (symbol combination determination table)]
Next, with reference to Figures 78 to 104, the correspondence table between internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (symbol combination determination table) will be explained. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line, which are associated with each internal winning combination. In other words, once an internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the active line (the type of winning combination that can be displayed) is uniquely determined.

The various data listed in the symbol combination column of each symbol combination determination table are used to identify the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed along the active lines set across the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The relationship between each name listed in the symbol combination (display role) column and the specific symbol combinations will be explained later in Figures 105 to 114.

Furthermore, the "○" mark in the symbol combination determination table indicates the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line for the determined internal winning combination, i.e., the winning combinations that can result in a prize. Note that the symbol combination determination table does not specify cases where the "internal winning combination" is a "miss." This indicates that the display of all symbol combinations specified in the symbol combination determination tables shown in Figures 105 to 114 is not permitted.

In the fourth type of gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1, the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) controls the stopping of the reels differently depending on the internal winning combination and the game state. When a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it controls the rotation and stopping of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R so that the corresponding symbol combinations shown in Figures 105 to 114 can be displayed. Note that in the correspondence table shown in Figures 105 to 114, all symbol combinations that can be displayed for the determined internal winning combination are listed with a "○" mark. However, due to the priority given to drawing in certain symbols, some symbol combinations marked with a "○" may not be displayed.

[12-3. Details of the pattern combinations]
Next, we will explain the specific details of the symbol combinations with reference to Figures 105 to 114. In Figures 105 to 114, the Combination column shows the symbols of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R that are displayed along the active lines when each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops, and the Name column is the name of the symbol combination shown in the Combination column. The Payout column specifies the number of medals that will be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed. The Abbreviation column shows the abbreviation given based on the role of each symbol combination or the characteristics of each symbol combination. In the Combination column, the left column corresponds to the left reel 3L, the center column corresponds to the middle reel 3C, and the right column corresponds to the right reel 3R.

The combination name "BB General Control" is abbreviated as "BB General Control Outcome," and when it appears along the active line, zero medals are dispensed. For the sake of explanation, it is stated that zero medals are dispensed, but this means that no payout process is performed. The same applies in the following paragraphs. The combinations "BB General Control," "SB Control," and "T-Stop Control ○○" are not combinations of symbols that constitute a winning combination corresponding to an internal winning role, but are treated as "misses (including missed small wins and bonuses)" even if they stop, as none of the roles are awarded. In this embodiment, in order to improve the efficiency of reel stop control, "misses" and control symbol combinations that are allowed to stop are defined as control outcomes. Note that these control outcomes may actually be displayed as stopped on the active line, or they may be symbol combinations that are only referenced in part or all within the reel stop control process and do not actually stop on the active line. In this embodiment, the symbol combination for "BB General Control" is not stoppable during BB General. However, it may be configured to be stoppable so that it can be recognized by the player as a "losing day" during BB General.

The combination name "SB Control" is abbreviated as "SB Control Outcome," and when it appears along the active line, zero medals are dispensed. In this embodiment, the "SB Control" symbol combination cannot be stopped while the SB is active. Specifically, as shown in the second row from the top of Figure 80, it is a symbol combination included in the re-play bonus, but it is actually a symbol combination for reel stop control that does not stop, and does not exist as a conditional device. In other words, it exists for changing the reel stop control during the SB. However, it may also be configured to be stopable, so that when stopped, it can be recognized by the player as a "losing combination" during the SB's operation.

The combination names "T_Stop Control A_01" to "T_Stop Control A_24", "T_Stop Control B_01" to "T_Stop Control B_03", "T_Stop Control C", "T_Stop Control D_01" to "T_Stop Control D_12", "T_Stop Control E_01" to "T_Stop Control E_08", "T_Stop Control F_01" to "T_Stop Control F_24", "T_Stop Control G_01" to "T_Stop Control G_32", and "T_Stop Control H_01" to "T_Stop Control H_08" are abbreviated as "control symbols," and when displayed along the active lines, zero medals are dispensed. As mentioned above, these symbol combinations may or may not actually result in a stop.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Red 7 Same Color," "C_XU White Same Color," "C_CT White Same Color," "C_Red 7 Different Colors," "C_XU White Different Colors," and "C_CT White Different Colors" are symbol combinations related to the continuous activation device (BB) of the first type of special feature, and are abbreviated as "BB." When the symbol combination abbreviated as "BB" is displayed along the active line, the game state transitions to the RT4 state during the BB general state (see Figure 73).

Furthermore, the combination name "C_BBRB" is a symbol combination related to RB, and its abbreviation is "RB". When the symbol combination abbreviated as "RB" is displayed along the active payline, the game state transitions to the RT4 state during the RB state (see Figure 73).

Furthermore, the combination names "C_SIN32" to "C_SIN01" are symbol combinations related to SB, and are abbreviated as "SB". When the symbol combination abbreviated as "SB" is displayed along the active payline, the game state transitions to the SB state (see Figure 73).

Furthermore, the combination name "C_BAR Replay" is abbreviated as "BAR Aligned Replay," and when it appears along an active payline, the game is restarted. The symbol combination related to the abbreviated "BAR Aligned Replay" is a combination in which the "BAR" symbol appears on the center line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination name "C_BAR Fake A" is abbreviated as "BAR Fake Rep," and when it appears along the active payline, a replay is activated. The symbol combination related to the abbreviated "BAR Fake Rep" is a combination in which the symbols "Replay," "BAR," and "BAR" appear on the center line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_FakeB_01" through "C_FakeB_04" are abbreviated as "B Fake Rip," and when they appear along the active payline, the game is restarted.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Weak Cherry A_01" to "C_Weak Cherry A_03", "C_Weak Cherry B", and "C_Weak Cherry C" are abbreviated as "Weak Cherry," and when they appear along the active payline, the game restarts.

Furthermore, the combination name "C_XU Replay" is abbreviated as "Right-Up Replay," and when it appears along an active payline, it triggers a replay. The symbol combination associated with the abbreviated "Right-Up Replay" is a combination where the "Replay" symbol aligns on the cross-up line, which is one of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination name "C_XU Replay" is also part of the "RT1 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XD Replay_01" to "C_XD Replay_06" are abbreviated as "Downward Right Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the re-play function is activated. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Upward Right Replay" are those in which the "Replay" symbol appears on the cross-down line, one of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination names "C_XD Replay_01" to "C_XD Replay_06" constitute a part of the "RT1 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_BT Replay_01" to "C_BT Replay_06" are abbreviated as "Lower Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the re-play function is activated. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Lower Replay" are those in which the "Replay" symbol appears on the bottom line of the pseudo-line connecting the 3x3 symbols. The combination names "C_BT Replay_01" to "C_BT Replay_06" constitute a part of the "RT2 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_CT Replay_01" to "C_CT Replay_20" are abbreviated as "Middle Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the re-play function is activated. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Middle Replay" are those in which the "Replay" symbol is displayed on the center line of the pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination names "C_CT Replay_01" to "C_CT Replay_20" constitute a part of the "RT2 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_TP Replay_01" to "C_TP Replay_04" are abbreviated as "Upper Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the re-play function is activated. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Upper Replay" are those in which the "Replay" symbol appears on the top line of the pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. Note that the combination names "C_TP Replay_01" to "C_TP Replay_04" constitute a part of the "RT2 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Additionally, the combination names "C_Strong Cherry A_01" to "C_Strong Cherry A_06", "C_Strong Cherry B", "C_Strong Cherry C_01" to "C_Strong Cherry C_03", "C_Strong Cherry D_01" to "C_Strong Cherry D_02", and "C_Strong Cherry E_01" to "C_Strong Cherry E_08" are abbreviated as "Strong Cherry", and when they appear along the active payline, the game restarts. Furthermore, "C_Strong Cherry Replay A_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay A_06", "C_Strong Cherry Replay B", "C_Strong Cherry Replay C_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay C_03", "C_Strong Cherry Replay D_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay D_02", and "C_Strong Cherry Replay E_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay E_08" constitute a part of the "RT3 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_YamaRep_01" to "C_YamaRep_03" are abbreviated as "KoyamaRep," and when they appear along the active lines, the re-play function is activated. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "KoyamaRep" are those in which the "Replay" symbol appears on the pseudo-line connecting the lower row of 3L on the left reel, the middle row of 3C on the middle reel, and the lower row of 3R on the right reel, which are part of the pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination names "C_YamaRep_01" to "C_YamaRep_03" constitute a part of the "RT3 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" are abbreviated as "Small V Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the re-play function is activated. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Small V Replay" are those in which the "Replay" symbol appears on the pseudo-line connecting the upper row of 3L on the left reel, the middle row of 3C on the middle reel, and the upper row of 3R on the right reel, which are part of the pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination names "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" constitute a part of the "RT3 Transition Replay Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Red 7 Replay_01" to "C_Red 7 Replay_03" are abbreviated as "Red 7 Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the game restarts.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Red Follow-Up Reply_01" to "C_Red Follow-Up Reply_06" are abbreviated as "Red Follow-Up Reply," and when they appear along the active payline, the game restarts.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Red 7 Fake Rep_01" to "C_Red 7 Fake Rep_02" are abbreviated as "Red 7 Fake Rep," and when they appear along the active payline, the game restarts.

Furthermore, the combination name "C_XUBAR Replay" is abbreviated as "Right-Upward BAR Alignment Replay," and when it appears along an active payline, the game is restarted. The symbol combination related to the abbreviated "Right-Upward BAR Alignment" is a combination in which the "BAR" symbol aligns on the cross-up line, which is one of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XUB Follow Reply A_01" to "C_XUB Follow Reply A_03" and "C_XUB Follow Reply B_01" to "C_XUB Follow Reply B_02" are abbreviated as "B Follow Reply," and when they appear along the active payline, the game is restarted.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_SP Replay A_01" to "C_SP Replay A_08", "C_SP Replay B_01" to "C_SP Replay B_08", "C_SP Replay C_01" to "C_SP Replay C_04", "C_SP Replay D_01" to "C_SP Replay D_04", and "C_SP Replay DE_01" to "C_SP Replay E_04" are abbreviated as "SP Replay," and when they appear along the active payline, the game is restarted.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_OreRepA_01" to "C_OreRepA_12" and "C_OreRepB_01" to "C_OreRepB_24" are abbreviated as "OreRep," and when they appear along the active lines, the game restarts. Note that the combination names "C_OreRepA_01" to "C_OreRepA_12" and "C_OreRepB_01" to "C_OreRepB_24" constitute a part of the "RT6 Transition Rep Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XU Bell A_01" to "C_XU Bell A_04" are abbreviated as "Right-Upward Bell A," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Right-Upward Bell A" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the cross-up line, which is a pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_BT Bell A_01" to "C_BT Bell A_02" are abbreviated as "Lower Bell A," and when displayed along the active payline, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Lower Bell A" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the bottom line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XD Bell A_01" to "C_XD Bell A_24" are abbreviated as "Downward-Sloping Bell A," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Downward-Sloping Bell A" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the cross-down line, which is a pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XD Bell B_01" to "C_XD Bell B_06" are abbreviated as "Downward Bell B," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Downward Bell B" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the cross-down line, which is a pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_TP Bell A_01" to "C_TP Bell B_03" are abbreviated as "Upper Bell A," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Upper Bell A" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the top line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_CT Bell A_01" to "C_CT Bell A_04" are abbreviated as "Middle Bell A," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Middle Bell A" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the center line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XU Bell B_01" to "C_XU Bell B_04" are abbreviated as "Downward-Sloping Bell B," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Downward-Sloping Bell B" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the cross-down line, which is a pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_TP Bell B_01" to "C_TP Bell B_02" are abbreviated as "Upper Bell B," and when displayed along the winning line, 15 medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Upper Bell B" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the top line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_BT Bell B_01" to "C_BT Bell B_08" are abbreviated as "Lower Bell B," and when displayed along the active payline, four medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Lower Bell B" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the bottom line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_CT Bell B_01" to "C_CT Bell B_04" are abbreviated as "Middle Bell B," and when displayed along the active payline, four medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations associated with the abbreviated "Middle Bell B" are those in which the "Bell" symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are aligned on the center line of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XU Watermelon_01" to "C_XU Watermelon_04" are abbreviated as "Right-Upward Watermelon," and when displayed along the winning line, four medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Right-Upward Watermelon" are those in which the "Watermelon" symbols ("Watermelon A" and "Watermelon B") are aligned on the cross-up line, which is one of the pseudo-lines connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_XD Watermelon_01" to "C_XD Watermelon_02" are abbreviated as "Diagonal Watermelon," and when displayed along the winning line, four medals are dispensed. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Diagonal Watermelon" are those in which the "Watermelon" symbols ("Watermelon A" and "Watermelon B") are aligned on the cross-down line, which is a pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Yama Suika_01" to "C_Yama Suika_02" are abbreviated as "Koyama Suika," and when they appear along the winning line, four medals are dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_V Watermelon_01" through "C_V Watermelon_04" are abbreviated as "Small V Watermelon," and when they appear along the winning line, four medals are dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_CT Watermelon_01" through "C_CT Watermelon_06" are abbreviated as "Middle Watermelon," and when they appear along the winning payline, four medals are dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Chance Role_01" to "C_Chance Role_24" are abbreviated as "Single Cherry," and when they appear along the winning payline, four medals are dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Control Chance A_01" to "C_Control Chance A_06", "C_Control Chance B_01" to "C_Control Chance B_02", "C_Control Chance C", and "C_Control Chance D_01" to "C_Control Chance D_08" are abbreviated as "Chance Symbol Control," and when they appear along the valid payline, one medal is dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Maintenance Mountain Bell_01" to "C_Maintenance Mountain Bell_04" are abbreviated as "Maintenance Small Mountain Bell," and when they appear along the active payline, one medal is dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Maintain V-Bell_01" to "C_Maintain V-Bell_06" are abbreviated as "Maintain Small V-Bell," and when they appear along the active payline, one medal is dispensed.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_01" to "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_16" are abbreviated as "Transition Mountain Bell," and when they appear along the active payline, one medal is dispensed. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Transition Mountain Bell" are those in which the "Bell" symbol ("Bell A" and "Bell B") is displayed along a pseudo-line connecting the lower row of the left reel 3L, the middle row of the middle reel 3C, and the lower row of the right reel 3R, which are part of the pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination names "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_01" to "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_16" constitute a part of the "RT1 Transition Bell Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_RT1VBell_01" to "C_RT1VBell_06" are abbreviated as "Transition Small V Bell," and when they appear along the active payline, one medal is dispensed. The symbol combinations related to the abbreviated "Transition Small V Bell" are those in which the "Bell" symbol ("Bell A" and "Bell B") is displayed along a pseudo-line connecting the upper row of the left reel 3L, the middle row of the middle reel 3C, and the upper row of the right reel 3R, which are part of the pseudo-line connecting the symbols in a 3x3 grid. The combination names "C_RT1VBell_01" to "C_RT1VBell_06" constitute a part of the "RT1 Transition Bell Symbols" mentioned above.

Furthermore, the combination names "C_Special Role 1st_01" to "C_Special Role 1st_04", "C_Special Role 213A_01" to "C_Special Role 213A_06", "C_Special Role 213B_01" to "C_Special Role 213B_12", "C_Special Role 231A_01" to "C_Special Role 231A_08", "C_Special Role 231B_01" to "C_Special Role 231B_08", "C_Special Role 312_01" to "C_Special Role 312_04", and "C_Special Role 321_01" to "C_Special Role 312_04" are abbreviated as "Chance Symbols," and when they appear along an active payline, one medal is paid out.

Also, the combination names are "C_Special Role A_01" to "C_Special Role A_02", "C_Special Role B_01" to "C_Special Role B_02", "C_Special Role C_01" to "C_Special Role C_02", "C_Special Role D_01" to "C_Special Role D_06", "C_Special Role E_01" to "C_Special Role E_06", "C_Special Role F_01" to "C_Special Role F_06", "C_Special Role G_ The combinations "01" through "C_Special Role G_06", "C_Special Role H_01" through "C_Special Role H_06", "C_Special Role I_01" through "C_Special Role I_08", "C_Special Role J", "C_Special Role K_01" through "C_Special Role K_04", and "C_Special Role M_01" through "C_Special Role M_03" are abbreviated as "reach combinations," and when they appear along an active payline, one medal is dispensed.

[12-4. Game state transition flow considering whether the notification (AT) function is activated or not]
Next, referring to Figures 115 to 118, we will explain the transition flow of game states considering whether or not the notification (AT) function is activated. Figures 115 and 116 are game state transition flows, respectively, and Figures 117 and 118 are lists of the transition conditions in Figures 115 and 116.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not to activate the function that notifies the advantageous button press sequence when a button press sequence combination (e.g., "F_Bell 123") is drawn, where the sequence of button presses determines whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous. Therefore, in this embodiment, the activation/deactivation state of the AT function is also managed as part of the game state during the bonus non-activation state (RT0-RT3, RT5, RT6). However, during normal/AT Extra BB, since the AT function is activated to create a pseudo-bonus game state, the AT function is managed as an activated state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) manages not only the transitions between game states (RT0 to RT7) where the target of the re-play bonus draw and the draw data differ, but also the transitions between advantageous sections that allow notification of a favorable button press sequence when a button press sequence win (e.g., "F_Bell 123") is achieved, and unadvantageous sections that prohibit such notification. Therefore, the AT function operates only in advantageous sections, and is always inactive in unadvantageous sections.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages "Normal," "CZ (Chance Zone)," "AT State," and "Extra BB" as separate game states based on the presence or absence of notification (AT function) when a bonus is not activated (more specifically, as shown in Figure 115, the premonition period and preparation period for each game state are also managed as separate game states).

(Normal (non-advantageous period))
"Normal" consists of "Normal (Non-Advantageous Section)," which is a non-advantageous section, and "Normal (Advantageous Section)," which is an advantageous section. In both cases, even if a winning combination is achieved, the advantageous button sequence is not announced, making it an unfavorable game state for the player. Note that "Normal (Non-Advantageous Section)" and "Normal (Advantageous Section)" are generally composed of one of RT0 to RT3 or RT6 (see Figure 73).

Normally (in the non-advantageous section), a lottery for transitioning to the advantageous section is conducted with each game using the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery table (Figure 126). Specifically, in normal (non-advantageous section), the following are possible: "Middle Cherry Replay (F_Middle Cherry Replay)", "6-Choice Bell (F_Bell 123, F_Bell 132, F_Bell 213, F_Bell 231, F_Bell 312, F_Bell 321)", "Slavel (F_Slavel 123, F_Slavel 132, F_Slavel 213, F_Slavel 231, F_Slavel 312, F_Slavel 321)", "Common Bell (F_Common Bell A, F_Common Bell B)", "Weak Watermelon (F_Weak Watermelon)", "Strong Watermelon (F_Strong Watermelon A, F_Strong Watermelon B)", "Strong Cherry A draw for transitioning to the advantageous section is performed when you win any of the following roles (see Figure 75): (F_Strong Cherry), "SP Role (F_SP Role)", "Strong Bell (F_Strong Bell A, F_Strong Bell B)", "SB (F_SIN1 to F_SIN32)", and a standalone bonus win (F_Red 7 Same Color). However, the draw for transitioning to the advantageous section is not performed when you are in RT5, which is the carry-over state of a won bonus. Also, the draw for transitioning to the advantageous section is not performed when you win anything other than "6-choice Bell", "Slave Bell", or "Common Bell" during BB state (Normal BB (Non-advantageous Section)).

Furthermore, if you win the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous period during the normal (non-advantageous period), you will transition to the advantageous period from the next game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a CZ mode lottery is also conducted at the same time as the advantageous section transition lottery. There are four types of CZ modes, A to D, and in this embodiment, they are used in the lottery to determine the number of games added to the BB interval game counter, which will be described later. The CZ mode may also influence various lotteries related to the CZ (Chance Zone), such as the ease of winning the CZ transition lottery (for example, the pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery). The CZ (Chance Zone) is a game state where it is easier to transition to AT than in normal (non-advantageous section/advantageous section), and will be explained in more detail later.

Furthermore, in games where a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery, a CZ transition lottery is conducted according to the winning combination. However, if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a "bell" win, a preliminary CZ preliminary lottery, which determines whether or not to conduct the CZ transition lottery, is conducted using the preliminary CZ preliminary lottery table (Figure 130) before the CZ transition lottery is conducted. The preliminary CZ preliminary lottery table (Figure 130) is set up according to the type of CZ mode, and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the CZ mode at the time of the lottery. Note that if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a "bell" win, the CZ transition lottery is conducted based on the condition of winning that lottery. If the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with any other combination, the CZ transition lottery is conducted without going through the preliminary lottery.

Whether or not you transition to the CZ (Chance Zone) or the AT (Attack Time) is determined by the number of V-stocks, as explained below. Basically, if you have one or more V-stocks, you transition to the initial CZ. If you have two or more V-stocks, even if you fail the AT transition lottery in the CZ, the lottery result is rewritten to a win, and you transition to the AT. The number of V-stocks awarded is determined in the CZ transition lottery.

In this embodiment, during normal play (advantageous period), multiple states of residence are set that affect the success of draws such as the CZ transition draw. In this embodiment, low probability state, high probability state, and super high probability state are set as residence states, and during normal play (advantageous period), the player is in one of these states. During normal play (advantageous period), the CZ transition draw is performed using a draw table (CZ draw table for small role before CZ win (Figures 131 to 133)) corresponding to the type of residence state and the set value that defines the payout rate. The CZ transition draw table for each residence state is set so that the draw data is advantageous in the order of low probability, high probability, and super high probability. Furthermore, during normal play (non-advantageous period), the parameters for draws related to AT cannot be retained if the player remains in normal play (non-advantageous period). Therefore, during normal play (non-advantageous period), states such as low probability, high probability, and super high probability do not exist. Therefore, when AT-related lotteries (such as CZ transition lotteries) referencing the current state are performed during normal (non-advantageous) periods, the CZ transition lottery is performed using the basic low-probability state and referring to the lottery table in Figure 131. Furthermore, if a current state transition lottery is performed before the CZ transition lottery is performed during normal (non-advantageous) periods, and a transition to high-probability or super-high-probability is determined, the CZ transition lottery may be performed using the treatment of the transition destination state (e.g., high-probability).

If a bonus is won and the advantageous zone transition lottery is also won, a CZ transition lottery is conducted using the BB win CZ lottery table (Figure 135). In this case, as with the CZ transition lottery upon winning a minor role, a lottery table is provided according to the current state, and the lottery data is set so that the CZ transition lottery becomes more advantageous in the order of low probability, high probability, and super high probability.

Normally (in a non-advantageous period), if you win with "F_White 7 Same Color + F_Middle Cherry Replay," one V-stock is awarded regardless of the current state. Furthermore, when you win with "F_White 7 Same Color + F_Middle Cherry Replay," a common process is followed where one V-stock is awarded regardless of the various game states (including the current state) shown below.

In addition to the normal (non-advantageous) period, during the normal (advantageous) period, initial CZ, continuation CZ, special bonus zone (SZ), general AT (NAT), stock chance (SC), extra BB, etc., when in a general game state (RT0-RT3, RT6) and the CZ mode is D mode, if the V-stock increases from 0 to 1 or more for the first time, an additional V-stock will be added.

In a game where the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery during normal (non-advantageous section) and wins "F_Red 7 same color" or "F_White 7 same color + F_Middle Cherry Replay", a freeze lottery is held. If the freeze lottery is won, freeze control is executed. Freeze control is a special reel control that occurs rarely, for example, when the normal game start operation (for example, start lever 7 ON) is performed, the reels do not rotate for a certain period of time, and after that period of time has elapsed, the reels return to normal control. Also, if the freeze lottery is won, 6 V stocks are added, and after the bonus (normal BB (advantageous section)) ends, the game transitions to the special bonus zone (SZ) described later. At this time, the SZ type is set to "5". Among the various game states in the advantageous section shown below, in the general game state (RT0 to RT3, RT6), a similar freeze lottery is performed in games where "F_Red 7 same color" or "F_White 7 same color + F_Middle Cherry Replay" is drawn, and after the bonus (normal BB (advantageous section), extra BB) ends, the game transitions to the special bonus zone (SZ) (omitted in Figure 115). Note that the bonus (normal BB (advantageous section)) that is transitioned to as a result of winning the freeze lottery is sometimes called an episode bonus. Note that reel operation effects may be performed instead of or in combination with freeze control. Here, reel operation effects refer to effects such as forward rotation and reverse rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the reel acceleration before constant speed rotation. One form of reel operation effect may include a pseudo-game in which the reels during the reel operation effect pseudo-stop in response to a stop operation. Furthermore, when "reel animation is performed," it refers to a situation where both the freeze control animation and the reel operation animation are executed as appropriate, or where at least one of the animations is performed.

In the normal (non-advantageous) period, if the player wins the advantageous period transition lottery but loses the CZ transition lottery, the game transitions from the normal (non-advantageous) period back to the normal (advantageous) period. On the other hand, if the player wins the advantageous period transition lottery and also wins the CZ transition lottery in the normal (non-advantageous) period, the game transitions to the CZ pre-announcement phase (Figure 117, A2).

The CZ pre-announcement period is the time between winning the CZ transition lottery and actually entering the CZ (Chance Zone). During this period, a performance (CZ pre-announcement performance) is executed that suggests the possibility of entering the CZ. Normally (in the non-advantageous section), the CZ transition lottery is only held when the advantageous section transition lottery is won; therefore, the CZ pre-announcement period belongs to the advantageous section. Even if the CZ transition lottery is unsuccessful, the game may transition to a CZ pre-announcement (fake pre-announcement) and the CZ pre-announcement performance may be executed, but this is omitted from Figure 115. Once the fake pre-announcement ends, the game generally does not transition to the initial CZ, but returns to the normal advantageous section.

The CZ pre-announcement period is set within a range of 5 to 36 games, and is determined using the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table (Figure 136) when the CZ transition lottery is won. Even when the CZ transition lottery is won during normal (advantageous) mode, the pre-announcement period is determined using the same CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table (Figure 136) as in normal (non-advantageous) mode. The determined pre-announcement game count is set in the CZ pre-announcement counter, and the CZ pre-announcement counter is decremented by one each time a game is played during the CZ pre-announcement. The game transitions to the CZ from the game following the CZ pre-announcement counter reaching 0.

Normally (non-advantageous section/advantageous section), for each game, a normal-to-high probability transition lottery is held using the normal-to-high probability transition lottery table (Figure 138) to move to a higher state depending on the winning combination. The normal-to-high probability transition lottery table (Figure 138) is set up according to the state of the game (low probability, high probability, super high probability) and the type of winning combination (lottery flag group). In this embodiment, if the high probability transition lottery is won, the number of games that guarantees the maintenance of the destination state is also determined. For example, the number of games required to maintain the high probability state is determined to be 10, 20, or 30, and this number is set in the high probability state counter. The high probability state counter is decremented by one each game, and is configured so that the game does not transition to a lower state until it reaches 0. Furthermore, in the normal (non-advantageous) phase, if the advantageous phase transition lottery for that game results in a win in one of the advantageous phases (see Figure 126, transition to one of the CZ modes A to D), and it is determined that the game will transition to the advantageous phase from the next game, the information regarding the transition destination and guaranteed number of games, which is the result of the normal-to-high probability transition lottery, will be retained for subsequent games. However, if the advantageous phase transition lottery for that game is unsuccessful and the next game will also be normal (non-advantageous) phase, the result of the normal-to-high probability transition lottery will be discarded. This is because, according to the rules, it is not permitted to have multiple AT lottery parameters (states and modes such as low probability and high probability) in the non-advantageous phase. Note that in the normal (non-advantageous) phase, if the advantageous phase transition lottery is unsuccessful and the next game will also be normal (non-advantageous) phase, the normal-to-high probability transition lottery may not be performed.

In this embodiment, during the normal (advantageous period) and general AT described later, a high-probability state termination lottery is conducted while in the high-probability state. The high-probability state termination lottery is conducted when the role lottery result is "miss," and if the lottery result is "low probability," the state transitions from high-probability to low-probability. The high-probability state termination lottery is conducted using different lottery tables (Figure 139) for the normal (advantageous period) and general AT. However, even if the role lottery result is "miss" in the high-probability state, the high-probability state termination lottery is not conducted until the high-probability state guarantee counter reaches 0 (the period during which the high-probability state is guaranteed).

Furthermore, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, or when a bonus starts, a lottery for the initial value of the number of games between BBs is held using the initial value lottery table for the number of games between BBs (Figure 129) to determine the initial value to be set for the number of games between BBs. In this embodiment, the initial value lottery table for the number of games between BBs (Figure 129) is set according to the setting value that defines the payout rate, and is determined to be either 0 games or 500 games, respectively. As will be described in detail later, the number of games between BBs is used as a condition for activating the so-called ceiling function (a relief function that grants AT, etc., if no wins such as BB or AT occur for a certain period of time). When the number of games between BBs satisfies a predetermined threshold (for example, when it reaches 1000), a predetermined ceiling bonus can be granted. In this embodiment, the transition to an AT-guaranteed CZ is determined as the ceiling bonus. Therefore, if the initial value for the number of games between Big Bonuses (BBs) is set to 0, the ceiling will not be reached until a maximum of 1000 games have been played. However, if the initial value is set to 500, the ceiling will be reached after a maximum of 500 games, thus relatively shortening the time to reach the ceiling for the player. Furthermore, since the selection rate of the initial value 500 is higher with higher settings, if the ceiling is triggered after 500 games, the expectation of a higher setting increases. Note that the selection rate of the advantageous initial value (500 in this embodiment) may be set to be higher with higher settings, as shown in Figure 129. Alternatively, it may be set to be more frequently selected with even settings than odd settings, or more frequently selected with low settings, or more frequently selected only with specific settings such as setting 6.

In normal (non-advantageous) mode, when the advantageous mode transition lottery is won, the next CZR activation lottery is conducted using the next CZR activation lottery table (Figure 128). If this lottery is won, the next CZ will be the most advantageous CZ (Chance Zone), which is CZR. As will be described later, there are three types of CZs (Chance Zones): NCZ, which is the normal CZ; ACZ, which is a more advantageous CZ than NCZ; and CZR, which is the most advantageous. NCZ is a chance zone where, unless there are two or more V-stocks, if the CZ success lottery in the continuing CZ is not won, the mode transitions to normal (advantageous) mode. ACZ is a chance zone where, even if the CZ success lottery in the continuing CZ is not won, if there is one or more V-stocks, one V-stock is consumed to rewrite the CZ success lottery to a win and transition to general AT. CZR is a chance zone in a continuous CZ where, if the CZ success lottery is unsuccessful, the CZ success lottery is rewritten to a win without consuming V-stock, and the game transitions to a regular AT. At this time, the CZ type changes from CZR to ACZ.

Furthermore, when a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery during normal (non-advantageous zone) playtime, the initial resonance points acquired upon transitioning to the advantageous zone are determined by a lottery using the normal-play resonance point acquisition lottery table (Figure 140). Resonance points are points used in various lotteries conducted during the advantageous zone, and will be explained later. The normal-play resonance point acquisition lottery table is set up according to the setting value that defines the payout rate. Specifically, there are lottery tables common to settings 1 and 2, settings 3 and 4, and settings 5 and 6 (Figure 140).

(Normal (advantageous period))
In the normal (non-advantageous) state, if you win the advantageous state transition lottery and lose the CZ transition lottery at that time, you will transition to the normal (advantageous) state (Figure 117, A1). The normal (advantageous) state belongs to the advantageous state where it is permissible to be notified of an advantageous button sequence when you win a button sequence combination. However, except in special cases, the game is set to an unfavorable state where an advantageous button sequence is not notified even if you win a button sequence combination. Special cases include when the resonance points reach a predetermined value (for example, 200 points or more) and you win one of the "6-choice slabs"("F_Slab123","F_Slab132","F_Slab213","F_Slab231","F_Slab312","F_Slab321"), which will be explained in more detail later.

Normally (during the advantageous period), a CZ transition lottery (pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery) is held after each game depending on the winning combination. However, if the advantageous period transition lottery is won when a "bell" is won, a preliminary small role CZ preliminary lottery is held before the CZ transition lottery, similar to the normal (non-advantageous period) case. The CZ transition lottery is then held based on a win in this preliminary lottery. If the advantageous period transition lottery is won with any other combination, the CZ transition lottery is held without going through the preliminary lottery. The configuration of the small role CZ preliminary lottery table (Figure 130) and the pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery table (Figures 6-8) is the same as in the normal (non-advantageous period) case, so an explanation is omitted.

In normal mode (advantageous section), if the CZ transition lottery is won, the game transitions to the CZ pre-announcement phase from the next game (Figure 117, B1). Also, if the CZ transition lottery is won, a CZ pre-announcement game count lottery is conducted using the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table, determining the CZ pre-announcement period. The number of games determined by the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery is set in the CZ pre-announcement counter, and the value of the CZ pre-announcement counter is decremented by one each time a game is played during the CZ pre-announcement. For the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery in normal mode (advantageous section), the same lottery table used in normal mode (non-advantageous section) (Figure 136) is used. When the value of the CZ pre-announcement counter reaches 0, the game transitions to the initial CZ (Figure 117, B2).

During the CZ pre-announcement phase, a V-stock lottery (CZ lottery after CZ win) is conducted in each game according to the winning combination, using the CZ lottery after CZ win table (Figure 134). As described above, the CZ lottery before CZ win is a CZ transition lottery that determines whether or not to transition to CZ. On the other hand, the CZ lottery after CZ win is a game state (CZ pre-announcement) where it has already been decided to transition to CZ, so although the same lottery table is used, it is a lottery to acquire V-stocks that will be advantageous in the AT transition lottery (1st and 2nd CZ success lottery) that takes place in the initial CZ that follows. In this embodiment, the CZ (Chance Zone) draw table after a CZ win (Figure 134) does not have different draw tables depending on the setting value or current state, unlike the pre-CZ draw tables (Figures 131-133). Instead, it uses a common draw table for both the setting value and current state. However, different draw tables may be used depending on the setting value and current state.

During normal gameplay (the advantageous period), if a bonus is won, a CZ transition lottery (BB transition lottery) is conducted using the BB win CZ lottery table (Figure 135). In this case, similar to the CZ transition lottery upon winning a minor role, a lottery table is provided according to the current state, and the lottery data is set so that the V-stock lottery becomes more advantageous in the order of low probability, high probability, and super high probability.

Furthermore, even if a bonus is won during the CZ pre-announcement, the same BB win CZ lottery table (Figure 135) is used for the V-stock lottery. In this case, since the transition to the CZ is already confirmed, it is not so much a CZ transition lottery, but rather a lottery to acquire V-stocks that will be advantageous in the AT transition lottery (1st and 2nd CZ success lottery) that takes place in the initial CZ that follows.

During normal gameplay (advantageous period) and in general game state (RT0-RT3, RT6), if F_JAC3 is won, a lottery to determine the number of games to be added to the BB game count counter is conducted using the BB game count lottery table (Figure 142). The BB game count lottery table is provided according to the type of CZ mode, and the lottery is conducted using the BB game count lottery table corresponding to the type of CZ mode set when F_JAC3 is won. Once the number of games to be added is determined, that number of games is added to the BB game count counter. Note that, separately from the addition by the BB game count lottery, the BB game count counter is also increased by one each time a game is played in general game state (RT0-RT3, RT6).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, during normal play (the advantageous period), a normal-to-high probability transition lottery is held after each game to determine whether or not the current state will be advanced to a higher level, depending on the winning combination. Also, if the winning combination lottery result is a "miss," a high probability drop lottery is held to determine whether or not the current state will be reduced to a lower level.

Furthermore, under normal circumstances (advantageous period), if the F_JAC role 3 is won with 0 V stocks, a CZ mode transition lottery is conducted using the CZ mode transition lottery table (Figure 141) to determine whether to maintain the CZ mode or transition to the next higher mode. The CZ modes are arranged in the following order: Mode D is the highest mode, followed by Mode C, Mode B, and Mode A. The CZ mode transition lottery table (Figure 141) is set up according to the type of CZ mode, and the CZ mode transition lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of CZ mode set at the time of the lottery.

Furthermore, during normal play (the advantageous period), a normal resonance point acquisition lottery is conducted using the normal resonance point acquisition lottery table (Figure 140) to determine the value of resonance points to be awarded in each game in which the F_JAC role 3 is won or the middle cherry replay is won. The normal resonance point acquisition lottery table (Figure 140) is set up according to the type of winning role and the setting value that defines the payout rate. Specifically, the following tables are provided as the normal middle resonance point acquisition lottery tables: a lottery table for F_JAC wins (common to settings 1 and 2), a lottery table for middle cherry wins (common to settings 1 and 2), a lottery table for F_JAC wins (common to settings 3 and 4), a lottery table for middle cherry wins (common to settings 3 and 4), a lottery table for F_JAC wins (common to settings 5 and 6), and a lottery table for middle cherry wins (common to settings 5 and 6). Once the resonance points to be awarded are determined, that value is added to the resonance point counter (not shown in the diagram).

Furthermore, during normal play (advantageous period), an LI transition lottery is conducted using the LI transition lottery table (Figure 143) to determine whether or not to transition to the limit state upon winning a bonus. The limit state is set as a slight increase period where the number of medals held increases slightly, as the lottery determines whether or not a favorable button-pressing sequence is announced upon winning a 6-choice bell. The LI transition lottery table (Figure 143) is set according to the setting value that defines the payout rate, and if the lottery is won, the game transitions to the limit state from the next game. The LI transition lottery is conducted during normal play (advantageous period) when the CZ mode is "A" and the V stock is "0" upon winning a bonus.

In addition to the normal (advantageous period), in various game states within the advantageous period, if any of the following conditions are met, a direct AT will occur: (i) when a "F_7 alignment replay" is drawn, (ii) when a bonus is drawn during RT6, or (iii) when a bonus is drawn during Extra BB. A direct AT is an AT that transitions to a normal AT (NAT) without going through the initial CZ, and before that, it goes through a special bonus zone (SZ) (Figure 117, B4).

In this case, if a direct AT occurs during normal play (advantageous section), one V-stock is added, and the type of CZ (Challenge Zone) is determined using the same lottery table (Figure 146(b)) as when "Replay Cherry" is drawn in the CZ reward lottery described later. Also, if cases (i) to (iii) occur in the Chance Zone (initial CZ, continuing CZ), one V-stock is added. Furthermore, if cases (i) to (iii) occur in a normal Extra BB, one V-stock is added, and the type of CZ is determined using the same lottery table (Figure 146(b)) as when "Replay Cherry" is drawn in the CZ reward lottery. Also, if cases (i) to (iii) occur in an Extra BB during AT, one V-stock is added. If cases (i) to (iii) occur in any other game state within the advantageous section, one V-stock is added.

Note that the "F_7 alignment replay" is only included in the draw during RT3 or RT6, therefore case (i) only occurs during RT3 or RT6. RT3 is a game state that is mainly entered after the end of a bonus (normal BB, AT BB). During a normal extra BB, the button press sequence to maintain RT3 is announced, and if an RT6 transition replay is won, the button press sequence to transition to RT6 is announced. Furthermore, since the probability of winning the "F_7 alignment replay" increases dramatically in RT6 compared to RT3, transitioning to RT6 during a normal extra BB is the best trigger for a direct AT transition.

(Initial CZ, continuing CZ)
In this embodiment, the gameplay involves looping between a general AT (NAT) and a CZ (Chance Zone) to increase the number of medals. The initial CZ is the first CZ (Chance Zone) entered in this loop. In other words, it is the CZ (Chance Zone) that triggers the first transition to the general AT. The continuing CZ is the second or subsequent CZ (Chance Zone) entered in this loop. As for the types of CZs, the initial CZ has the least advantageous NCZ and the most advantageous CZR as described above. On the other hand, the continuing CZ has ACZ, which is more advantageous than NCZ, and the most advantageous CZR.

The initial CZ consists of 11 games, and an AT transition lottery (1st CZ success lottery, 2nd CZ success lottery) is held in each game. In this embodiment, the 1st CZ success lottery table (Figure 144) is configured such that if a so-called rare role (weak rare role, strong rare role, middle cherry, BB) is drawn in the AT transition lottery, the player will always win the AT transition lottery, and in all other cases, the player will not win. Here, weak rare roles include "F_RT1 Replay", "F_Weak Cherry Replay", "F_Weak C Replay", "6-Choice Weak C Replay", "F_Weak Watermelon", "F_7 Fake Replay", "F_7 Aligned Replay", and "F_JAC Role 3". The "Strong Rare Roles" include "F_Strong Watermelon A", "F_Strong Watermelon B", "F_Strong Cherry Replay", "F_Strong C Replay", "F_Strong Cherry", "F_SP Role", "F_Strong Bell A", "F_Strong Bell B", and "6-Choice Strong C Replay". The "Middle Cherry" includes "F_Middle Cherry Replay". The "BB" includes BB itself and combinations of weak rare roles, strong rare roles, etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a win occurs with a symbol other than a rare symbol (weak rare symbol, strong rare symbol, middle cherry, BB), the AT transition lottery (first CZ success lottery) will always result in a loss. However, a second CZ success lottery is held for every game played in a game where the first CZ success lottery is unsuccessful. In other words, there are up to two chances to win the AT transition lottery in each game played in the CZ. Also, as shown in Figure 145, in the second CZ success lottery, a lottery table is provided according to the type of CZ (NCZ, ACZ, CZR), and furthermore, different lottery tables are provided for the final game of the CZ and the games played before it.

Furthermore, the first CZ success lottery also includes a lottery to determine whether or not to raise the V rank to a higher rank (Figure 144).

If the CZ type is NCZ and all AT transition lotteries during the CZ period (e.g., 11 games) result in a non-win (failure), and there are 2 or more V stocks, the AT transition lottery result is rewritten to a win, and one V stock is consumed (deducted). Also, if the CZ type is ACZ and all AT transition lotteries during the CZ period (e.g., 11 games) result in a non-win (failure), and there are 1 or more V stocks, the AT transition lottery result is rewritten to a win, and one V stock is consumed (deducted). Also, if the CZ type is CZR and all AT transition lotteries during the CZ period (e.g., 11 games) result in a non-win (failure), the CZ type is changed to ACZ, and the AT transition lottery result is rewritten to a win without consuming any V stocks.

In the case of a continuing CZ, just like in the case of an initial CZ, an AT transition lottery (1st CZ success lottery, 2nd CZ success lottery) is held with each game. If successful, the player transitions back to the regular AT (NAT) via a special bonus zone (SZ) (F2 in Figure 117).

If the AT transition lottery is won, a CZ reward lottery is held using the CZ reward lottery table (Figure 146) to determine the type of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ). The CZ reward lottery table (Figure 146) is set up individually for each winning combination (Replay & Others) and the type of CZ rank at the time of the AT transition lottery win. Resonance points may also be awarded in this lottery. The type of SZ affects the bonus in the Special Bonus Zone (bonus to the initial number of games in the general AT) and the type of V-stock awarded.

If you win the AT transition lottery and the SZ type is determined by the CZ reward lottery, you will transition to the bonus zone (SZ) from the next game (C1 in Figure 117). However, if the game state at the time of winning the AT transition lottery is anything other than RT3, you will transition to AT preparation (C2 in Figure 117). AT preparation is a preparation period until the game state transitions to RT3, during which the button press order is announced to guide you to the RT3 transition replay. If the game state transitions to RT3 as a result, you will transition from AT preparation to the bonus zone (SZ) (C3 in Figure 117).

If the AT transition lottery (1st CZ success lottery, 2nd CZ success lottery) is not won within the initial CZ period, and the lottery results are not rewritten, and the conditions for transitioning to normal (advantageous section) are not met, then the game transitions to normal (non-advantageous section) (C4 in Figure 117). Also, if the AT transition lottery (1st CZ success lottery, 2nd CZ success lottery) is not won within the initial CZ period, and the conditions for transitioning to normal (advantageous section) are met, then the game transitions to normal (advantageous section) (B3 in Figure 117). Furthermore, the conditions for transitioning to the normal (advantageous period) are, for example, that the AT transition lottery (first CZ success lottery, second CZ success lottery) is not won within the initial CZ period, and the number of consecutive games in the advantageous period when the lottery results are not rewritten is less than a value close to the upper limit (for example, 2500 games, which is 500 games less than the upper limit of 3000 games).

Furthermore, if the AT transition lottery (first CZ success lottery, second CZ success lottery) is not won within the continuous CZ period, and the lottery results are not rewritten, the game transitions to normal (non-advantageous section) (F3 in Figure 117).

If the AT transition lottery (1st CZ success lottery, 2nd CZ success lottery) is not won during the initial CZ or continuous CZ period, and the game transitions to normal (advantageous section), a CZ failure CZ mode lottery is held to determine the initial CZ mode of the transitioned normal (advantageous section) using the CZ failure CZ mode lottery table (Figure 147). The CZ failure CZ mode lottery table (Figure 147) is set according to the setting value that defines the payout rate. Specifically, there are three CZ failure CZ mode lottery tables (Figure 147): one common to settings 1 and 2, one common to settings 3 and 4, and one common to settings 5 and 6.

If the AT transition lottery (first CZ success lottery, second CZ success lottery) is not won during the initial CZ or continuous CZ period, and the lottery results are not rewritten, a next CZR activation lottery is conducted using the next CZR activation lottery table (Figure 128) to determine whether the next CZ will be a CZR. The structure of this lottery is the same as the lottery conducted when the advantageous section transition lottery is won during normal (non-advantageous) periods, so an explanation is omitted.

(Special bonus zone (SZ))
The Special Bonus Zone (SZ) is a game period that is entered when the AT transition lottery (first and second CZ success lottery) is won during the CZ (initial CZ or continuation CZ), or when the lottery result is rewritten to a win. This zone determines the initial number of games in the subsequent general AT (NAT). In addition, a lottery is also held in the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) to determine whether or not V stocks are awarded. When the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) ends, the game transitions to the general AT (NAT) from the next game (Figure 117, D).

When the AT transition lottery is won, or when the direct AT described above occurs, the SZ type is determined by the CZ reward lottery. In the Special Zone for Bonus (SZ), the initial number of games (number of continuous games) for the general AT (NAT) and the V-stock allocation lottery (V-stock acquisition lottery) are conducted based on the SZ type determined by the lottery. The following describes the bonus accumulation method for the general AT (NAT) and the V-stock allocation method for each SZ type.

SZ Type 1 is a special bonus zone (SZ) that ends after one game. During this single game, a NAT game count lottery is conducted using the NAT game count lottery table (for 1, 5-8) (Figure 148) to determine the number of consecutive games in the general AT (NAT). The NAT game count lottery table (for 1, 5-8) (Figure 148) is set up according to the type of winning combination. The number of games determined by this lottery becomes the initial number of consecutive games in the general AT (NAT) that begins after the special bonus zone (SZ).

Furthermore, in the same game, a V-stock acquisition lottery is conducted using the V-stock acquisition (for SZ type 1) lottery table (Figure 149) to determine whether or not to add to the number of V-stocks acquired. The V-stock acquisition (for SZ type 1) lottery table (Figure 149) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) in the game. If the lottery result is a win, one V-stock is added to the player's possession.

SZ Type 2 is a special bonus zone (SZ) that continues until the predetermined SZ Type 2 termination conditions are met. In the SZ Type 2 special bonus zone (SZ), 20 games are set as the number of continuous games for the general AT (NAT) at the start, and the number of games to be added to this (additional game count) for each game is determined by a general AT (NAT) NAT game addition count lottery using the NAT game addition count (for SZ Type 2) lottery table (Figure 150). The NAT game addition count (for SZ Type 2) lottery table (Figure 150) is set according to the type of winning combination (type of lottery flag group) for the game in question. The total number of games determined by the end of the special bonus zone (SZ) becomes the initial number of continuous games for the general AT (NAT) that transitions to after the zone ends.

In this embodiment, the predetermined SZ type 2 termination condition is whether the draw result is "SB (F_SIN1 to F_SIN32)" or "Miss," but this can be changed as appropriate.

This means that the bonus zone will continue until the draw result is either "SB (F_SIN1 to F_SIN32)" or "Miss." In SZ type 2, if it continues for 5 or more games, one V-stock will be awarded for each subsequent game.

SZ Type 3 is essentially a special bonus zone (SZ) that lasts for 5 games. During these 5 games, a NAT game addition lottery is conducted using the NAT game addition lottery (for SZ Type 3) lottery table (Figure 151) to determine the number of games that will be added to the general AT (NAT) continuation count. The NAT game addition lottery (for SZ Type 3) lottery table (Figure 151) is set up according to the type of winning combination (type of lottery flag group). The total number of games determined by the end of the special bonus zone (SZ) becomes the initial number of continuation games for the general AT (NAT) that transitions to after the zone ends.

In SZ Type 3, if a predetermined reload condition is met before the 5 games are completed, the remaining number of games is reset to the initial 5 games. The predetermined reload condition is winning the remaining bonus reload lottery, which is performed using the remaining bonus reload (for SZ Type 3) lottery table (Figure 152) for each game. The remaining bonus reload (for SZ Type 3) lottery table (Figure 152) is set up according to the type of winning combination (type of lottery flag group).

In SZ Type 3, one V-stock is awarded for every 100 games played, based on the total number of games added through the NAT game count lottery.

SZ Type 4 is a special bonus zone (SZ) that continues for 5 games. During these 5 games, until the final game, a SZ Type 4 level-up/NAT game addition lottery is conducted using the SZ Type 4 level-up/NAT game addition lottery table (Figure 153). This lottery determines the number of consecutive games added to the general AT (NAT) and the number of SZ Type 4 level increases used in the final game. The SZ Type 4 level-up/NAT game addition lottery table (Figure 153) is set according to the type of winning combination (type of lottery flag group). The initial value of the SZ Type 4 level is set to level 0.

In the final game of the SZ Type 4 bonus zone (SZ), a NAT game addition lottery is conducted using the NAT game addition lottery (for SZ Type 4) lottery table (Figure 155) to determine the base number of games to be added to the number of continuous games in the general AT (NAT). The NAT game addition lottery (for SZ Type 4) lottery table (Figure 155) is set up according to the type of winning combination (type of lottery flag group). Furthermore, in the final game, in addition to the NAT game addition lottery, a NAT game addition loop lottery is conducted using the NAT game addition lottery (for SZ Type 4) loop lottery table (Figure 154) to determine the number of games to be added to the base number of games determined by the lottery.

The NAT game count (for SZ type 4) loop lottery table (Figure 154) is set according to the value of the SZ type 4 level that has been increased by the final game of the SZ type 4 bonus zone (SZ). In this embodiment, the maximum level of the SZ type 4 level is "5," and it is configured so that it does not go any higher. The NAT game count loop lottery continues until it does not result in a win, and each time it results in a win, the number of continuous games in the general AT (NAT) is increased by 1.

In the SZ Type 4 bonus zone (SZ), the total number of games played (NAT games) added by the SZ Type 4 level-up and NAT game count lottery up to the final game, the base number of games played (NAT games) determined by the NAT game count lottery in the final game, and the total number of games played (NAT games) added until the NAT game count loop lottery was unsuccessful, will be the initial number of games played in the subsequent general AT (NAT).

For SZ types 5-8, in the initial game, a NAT game count lottery is conducted using the NAT game count lottery table (for 1, 5-8) (Figure 148) to determine the number of consecutive games in the general AT (NAT) as performed in SZ type 1. Thereafter, until the predetermined termination conditions for SZ types 5-8 are met, for each game in SZ mode 3 or lower that does not result in a bonus, a target performance/V stock/SZ mode transition lottery is conducted using the target performance/V stock/SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table (Figure 156) to determine whether or not to grant a V stock, whether or not to perform a pseudo-game, and the SZ mode for the next game.

The draw table (Figure 156) for the "Aim!" animation, V-stock, and SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) is set up according to the type of SZ mode and the type of winning combination (type of draw flag group) at the time of the draw. There are four types of SZ modes: SZ Mode 1 to SZ Mode 4. In SZ Mode 4, the "Aim!" animation, V-stock, and SZ mode transition draws are not performed, and one V-stock is awarded without a draw. However, if a bonus is not won during the game, and the winning combination draw result is one of the bell combinations such as "Miss," "F_RT Replay," "F_RT2 Bell," "F_BAR Fake Replay," or "6-Choice Bell," the mode changes from SZ Mode 4 to SZ Mode 3.

Furthermore, in the SZ type 5 bonus zone (SZ), the SZ mode is set to 4 at the start, meaning at least one V-stock will be granted.

The lottery for the "Aim!" animation, V-stock, and SZ mode transition generally results in three patterns: "The 'Aim!' animation does not occur" (Pattern 1), "The 'Aim!' animation occurs, but no V-stock is awarded, and the red 7s do not line up" (Pattern 2), and "The 'Aim!' animation occurs, the red 7s line up, and a V-stock is awarded" (Pattern 3) (Figure 156).

(Simulated game)
The "Aim for it" feature is a feature in which, after the third reel of a game in which the Aim for it, V-stock, or SZ mode transition lottery has been performed has stopped (all reels have stopped), the reels start spinning automatically when a start operation is performed or when a predetermined time has elapsed, and text such as "Aim for the red 7 from the right!!" is displayed on the LCD screen, prompting the player to line up the red 7s by pressing the buttons in reverse order. In addition, regarding stop operations during simulated gameplay, initially only specific reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be allowed to be stopped, and after the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to those specific reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are pressed, or after the specific reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have temporarily stopped, the remaining reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be allowed to temporarily stop. For example, in a simulated game where the prompt "Aim for the 7 from the right!!" is displayed, only the right reel 3R can be temporarily stopped initially, and the stop buttons 8L and 8C corresponding to the left reel 3L and middle reel 3C may be invalid even if pressed until the stop button 8R for the right reel 3R is pressed (or until the right reel 3R is temporarily stopped). In such cases where the valid stop buttons are limited in a simulated game, it is desirable to also include a visual effect that suggests that there is a valid stop button 8R and invalid stop buttons 8C and 8L. For example, the lamp for the valid stop button 8R is lit, and the lamps for the other stop buttons 8L and 8C are turned off. The lamp above the right reel 3R, which is a stoppable reel, is made to blink, and the lamps above the other reels 3L and 3C, which are not stoppable reels, are turned off. The screen may also display that the left and middle reels 3L and 3C can be temporarily stopped after the right reel 3R stops. Furthermore, after the stop button 8R on the right reel 3R is pressed, or after the right reel 3R is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stop, it is desirable to generate a visual effect that suggests that the left and middle reels 3L and 3C can be temporarily stopped. Alternatively, after the first temporary stop (for example, after the right reel 3R is temporarily stopped), the reel for the second temporary stop may be limited to one of the reels (for example, the middle reel 3C), and the other reels (for example, the left reel 3L) may not be temporarily stopped as the second stop.

In the second pattern, the same reel control as "F_7 Fake Replay" is performed. That is, when you manually stop the reels to hit the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbols line up on the middle line, but the red 7 symbol does not stop on the middle line of the left reel, resulting in a non-aligned red 7 symbol (pseudo-game). On the other hand, in the third pattern, the same reel control as "F_7 Aligned Replay" is performed. That is, when you manually stop the reels to hit the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbols line up on the middle line (pseudo-game). Note that in the first and second patterns, no V-stock is awarded, while in the third pattern, a V-stock is awarded.

Furthermore, in the "F_7 Fake Rep" winning game, if the red 7 symbol is not manually stopped on all reels (3L, 3C, 3R, or any of the other reels), symbol combinations such as "C_Koyama Rep," "C_V Rep," and "C_Red Follow" (see Figure 89) may stop. In the second pattern of the simulated game, if the red 7 symbol is not manually stopped, the reel control will be similar. In the simulated game, there is no limit to the number of sliding frames between the stop operation and the temporary stop of the symbols; therefore, regardless of the stopping position, the stop control may be set to pull the red 7 symbol into the frame and create a winning combination. In this case, even players who are not skilled at manually stopping the reels can enjoy the game by seeing if the red 7 symbols line up.

Furthermore, even if the lottery result for the "Aim!" animation, V-stock, and SZ mode transition lottery is the second pattern (the "Aim!" animation is executed, but the red 7s do not line up and no V-stock is awarded), if an SB ("F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32") is won in that game, the lottery result will be rewritten to one in which a V-stock is awarded. At this time, the reel control of the simulated game changes from "F_7 Fake Replay" to "F_7 Aligned Replay". However, the type of SZ mode to which the game transitions does not change.

Furthermore, in the "F_7 Aligned Replay" winning game, if the red 7 symbol is not stopped on all reels 3L, 3C, 3R, or any of the reels, the symbol combinations such as "C_Koyama Replay," "C_V Replay," and "C_Red Follow" (see Figure 88) may stop. In the second pattern of the simulated game, if an SB is won, and in the third pattern of the simulated game, if the red 7 symbol is not stopped, the reel control will be the same. Furthermore, in the simulated game, there is no limit to the number of sliding frames from the stop operation to the temporary stop of the symbols, so the stop control may be such that the red 7 symbol is drawn into the frame and lined up regardless of the position at which the stop operation is performed. In this case, even players who are not good at timing their stops can enjoy the situation of the red 7 symbols lining up. Furthermore, to prevent players from mistaking the alignment of red 7s (temporary stop) in the simulated game for a winning combination in the actual game, it is desirable that the reels move up and down or exhibit other behaviors different from the actual game during the temporary stop in the simulated game. Also, since the simulated game is merely one aspect of the reel animation during reel acceleration, there is a certain time limit from the start (when the start lever 7 is pressed). If no action is taken within this time, the reels will automatically perform a temporary stop and then resume rotation (start of actual game rotation). When a temporary stop occurs due to the expiration of time, the red 7s may automatically align, or reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may stop as if a stop operation had been performed at the rotation position at the time of the expiration. Even if the red 7s align automatically, the timing of the start of forward rotation of each reel (3L, 3C, 3R) at the start of the re-rotation is randomly delayed to prevent it from assisting with precise reel stopping.

If the result of the "Aim for it!" animation, V-stock, or SZ mode transition lottery is the third pattern, or if the result is the second pattern but an SB ("F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32") is won in that game, a V-stock acquisition lottery is conducted using the V-stock acquisition number (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table (Figure 157) to determine the number of V-stocks to be awarded. The number determined by this lottery is added to the number of V-stocks held.

Furthermore, when starting a game in any of the SZ types 6-8's bonus zones (SZ), or when a bonus is won in an SZ type 5's bonus zone (SZ), an SZ mode setting lottery is conducted using the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table (Figure 158). The SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table (Figure 158) consists of a lottery table used when starting SZ types 6-8, and a lottery table used when a bonus is won in SZ type 5. Additionally, the lottery table used when a bonus is won in SZ type 5 is provided according to the type of SZ mode at the time of bonus win.

In SZ types 1 through 8, if a bonus is won, the following processes are executed: For SZ type 1, the number of playable special bonus zones (SZ) is not reduced. For SZ type 2, no special processing is performed. For SZ type 3, the remaining number of plays is reset to 5. For SZ type 4, the remaining number of plays is reset to "5". For SZ types 5 through 8, one V-stock is awarded, and an SZ mode setting lottery is conducted.

The predetermined termination conditions for SZ types 5-8 are that the SZ mode is 1 and the payout when one of the "6-choice bells" is selected is 1 coin. In other words, any of the bonus zones (SZ) of SZ types 5-8 ends when the "6-choice bell" is selected in SZ mode 1 and the button sequence is incorrect. Note that for SZ types 5-8, if the SZ level is 2 or higher, the correct button sequence (the sequence that pays out 15 coins) is announced when the "6-choice bell" is selected, but if the SZ level is 1, the correct button sequence (the sequence that pays out 15 coins) is not announced when the "6-choice bell" is selected.

Furthermore, even if the lottery result for the "Aim!" animation, V-stock, and SZ mode transition lottery is the second pattern (the "Aim!" animation is performed, but the red 7s are not aligned and no V-stock is awarded), if the player enters SB during that game, the lottery result will be rewritten to one in which a V-stock is awarded. However, since AT-related lotteries become more favorable during SB state, it may be possible to increase the probability of pseudo-game occurrences or the proportion of the third pattern lottery result being determined.

(General AT (NAT))
The regular AT (NAT) is a favorable game state in which, when you hit the "6-choice bell," you are notified of the advantageous button sequence (the correct button sequence) which will result in a payout of 15 medals. The regular AT (NAT) uses the number of NAT games acquired in the bonus zone (SZ) before the transition as the initial number of continuous games, and when that number of games is used up, the regular AT (NAT) ends and the game transitions to the continuation CZ (F1 in Figure 117).

Even in general AT (NAT) gameplay, the state of being in low probability, high probability, and super high probability states is managed, just like in normal (advantageous section) play. At the start of a general AT (NAT) game, a NAT start high probability transition lottery is conducted using the NAT start high probability transition lottery table (Figure 159) to determine whether to maintain the current state or transition to a different state. The NAT start high probability transition lottery table (Figure 159) is set up according to the type of current state, and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the current state at the start of the general AT (NAT). If the lottery determines a transition to a high probability state, the number of games required to maintain that high probability state is also determined (addition to the high probability state retention counter). The high probability state retention counter is deducted by one each time a general AT (NAT) game is played, and the high probability state fallout lottery is not conducted until the counter reaches 0.

Furthermore, in the initial gameplay of a regular AT (NAT), if the AT transition lottery (first and second CZ success lottery) is unsuccessful in the continuation CZ that follows the end of the regular AT (NAT), a SAT activation lottery upon failure of the next CZ is conducted using the next CZ failure SAT activation lottery table (Figure 160) to determine whether to transition to the special AT (SAT) described later, instead of transitioning to the normal (advantageous section) or normal (non-advantageous section). The next CZ failure SAT activation lottery table (Figure 160) is set according to the setting value that defines the payout rate, and the next CZ failure SAT activation lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the setting value at the time of the lottery.

If the lottery is won, for example, the special AT activation flag is set to ON. Then, if the AT transition lottery for the continuation CZ (first and second CZ success lottery) is unsuccessful, and the special AT activation flag is ON, the game transitions to the special AT (SAT) (Figure 118 (L)).

In a standard AT (NAT), for each game where the SC pre-announcement game counter (described later) is 0, a lottery is held using the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery table (Figure 161) to determine whether to transition to a Stock Chance (SC) and whether to grant one V-stock. The SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery table (Figure 161) is set up according to the type of current state and the type of winning combination (lottery flag group), and the lottery is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the current state and the type of winning combination at the time of the lottery.

If the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is "transition to Stock Chance" or "transition to Stock Chance and grant 1 V-stock",
The SC pre-announcement game count lottery, which determines the number of SC pre-announcement games, is conducted using the SC pre-announcement game count lottery table (Figure 162). The SC pre-announcement game count lottery table (Figure 162) is set up according to the lottery results of the SC occurrence/V stock acquisition lottery, and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table according to the lottery results of the SC occurrence/V stock acquisition lottery. The number of games determined by the SC pre-announcement game count lottery is set in the SC pre-announcement game count counter. When the number of pre-announcement games is set in the SC pre-announcement game count counter, the game transitions to the SC pre-announcement (E1 in Figure 117).

Furthermore, if the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is "transition to Stock Chance" or "transition to Stock Chance while granting one V-stock," the SC level (SC level 1-3) will be set according to the current state (low probability, high probability, super high probability).

During the SC pre-announcement phase, the SC pre-announcement game counter decreases by one with each game played. When the SC pre-announcement game counter reaches 0, the game transitions to Stock Chance (SC) (E2 in Figure 117). During the SC pre-announcement phase, visual cues suggesting the possibility of transitioning to Stock Chance (SC) are displayed.

In each game where SC generation and V-stock acquisition lottery are conducted, a NAT high-probability transition lottery is performed using the NAT high-probability transition lottery table (Figure 163) to determine whether to transition the current state to a high-probability state or a super-high-probability state, and, if so, the number of games required to guarantee the maintenance of that state. The NAT high-probability transition lottery table (Figure 163) is set up according to the current state and the type of winning combination (lottery flag group). The lottery is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the current state and the type of winning combination of the game in which the lottery is conducted. If the number of games required to maintain the high-probability state is determined, that number of games is added to the high-probability guarantee counter.

In a general AT (NAT), for each game played while in a high-probability state and with a high-probability probability counter value of 0, a high-probability state fall-out lottery is conducted using the high-probability state fall-out lottery table (Figure 139) to determine whether to maintain the high-probability state or transition to a low-probability state.

In a standard AT (NAT), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to award one V-stock during each game (excluding game states such as BB during AT). This lottery is conducted using the NAT V-stock acquisition lottery table (Figure 164). The NAT V-stock acquisition lottery table (Figure 164) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group), and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of winning combination at the time of the lottery.

Furthermore, in each game of a regular AT (NAT), a lottery is held to determine the number of resonance points to be awarded during the NAT, using the NAT resonance point acquisition lottery table (Figure 166). The NAT resonance point acquisition lottery table (Figure 166) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group), and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of winning combination at the time of the lottery.

Furthermore, in a standard AT (NAT), if a bonus is won, a NAT pre-BB game count lottery is conducted using a NAT pre-BB game count lottery table (Figure 165) to determine the number of NAT pre-BB games until the bonus win is announced. When a bonus is won in a standard AT (NAT), the game transitions to an AT flag phase, but the bonus win is not announced until the NAT pre-BB game count is completed. After the NAT pre-BB game count is completed, the bonus win is announced, and the player is prompted to claim their winnings.

(Stock Chance (SC))
Stock Chance (SC) is a special zone for increasing V-stocks, making it easier to acquire V-stocks than in the regular AT (NAT). Stock Chance (SC) ends after a predetermined number of continuous games have been played, and after it ends, the game returns to the regular AT (NAT). There are also three types of Stock Chance (SC), each with a different number of continuous games. The number of continuous games varies depending on the SC level determined when SC occurs and the V-stock acquisition lottery is won. In this embodiment, if SC level 1, 2 games are granted as the number of continuous games for Stock Chance (SC); if SC level 2, 3 games are granted as the number of continuous games for Stock Chance (SC); and if SC level 3, 4 games are granted as the number of continuous games for Stock Chance (SC). During Stock Chance (SC), a lottery is held to determine whether or not a V-stock is granted with each game, so the more continuous games played, the more advantageous it is.

During Stock Chance (SC), a V-stock acquisition lottery is conducted using the V-stock acquisition lottery table (Figures 168 and 169) to determine whether or not a V-stock is awarded with each game. However, different lottery tables are used before and after a V-stock is acquired during the Stock Chance (SC).

The V-Stock Acquisition Count Draw Table (Figure 168), used before winning the V-Stock Acquisition Count Draw (before acquiring V-Stocks), is set up according to the type of SC level (1-3) at the time of the draw and the winning combination (drawing flag group). The V-Stock Acquisition Count Draw Table (Figure 168), used after winning the V-Stock Acquisition Count Draw (after acquiring V-Stocks), is set up according to the winning combination (drawing flag group) at the time of the draw, regardless of the SC level. If you win the V-Stock Acquisition Count Draw, the number of V-Stocks you possess is increased by 1.

Furthermore, during Stock Chance (SC), a lottery is held using the SC Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 167) to determine the value of Resonance Points awarded in each game. The SC Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 167) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) at the time of the lottery, and the amount of Resonance Points determined by that lottery is added to the player's current Resonance Points.

When the Stock Chance (SC) ends, the current state is set to a high probability state, and the game transitions to a normal AT (NAT) (E3 in Figure 117). Then, in the final game of the Stock Chance (SC), a post-SC high probability guarantee game count lottery is conducted using the post-SC high probability guarantee game count lottery table (Figure 170) to determine the guaranteed number of games for the high probability state, which is the state the game transitions to after the SC ends. The determined number of games is set in the high probability guarantee game count counter. In the normal AT (NAT), the value of the high probability guarantee game count counter is deducted by one each time a game is played. However, if the value of the high probability guarantee game count counter is 1 or greater, the high probability fall-out lottery (Figure 139) is not performed.

If a bonus is won during Stock Chance (SC), the V-stock acquisition lottery for that game will not be held. However, after the bonus (BB during AT or Extra BB during AT) ends, the game will transition back to Stock Chance (SC), and the Stock Chance (SC) will be restarted from the beginning (the number of consecutive games will be reset).

(Special AT (SAT))
Special AT (SAT) is a special type of AT that is activated when certain conditions for transitioning to a special AT are met. One set consists of a net gain of +50 coins, and if the player wins the continuation lottery (SAT continuation lottery) held at the end of a set, the player will transition to the next set.

The transition to Special AT (SAT) occurs from specific state E. Here, specific state E is the game state when any of the following conditions for transitioning to the special AT (SAT) are met: (i) when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games required to transition to the special AT (SAT); (ii) when the MY counter exceeds 1800 coins; (iii) when the number of sets played in the general AT (NAT) is "12" and the result of the CZ success lottery is a win (the next set of AT is acquired); (iv) when the SAT activation lottery for the next CZ failure, which is held at the start of the general AT (NAT), is won, and the CZ success lottery for the next continuous CZ (2nd CZ success lottery) is a loss; or (v) when it is the end of BB, the number of remaining games in Extra BB is 0, and the value of the difference counter for the special AT (SAT) is "1" or more. If the conditions for transitioning to Special AT (SAT) are met, the game will transition to Special AT (SAT) from the next game (Figure 118 (L)).

Furthermore, in the first set of the Special AT (SAT), 1 Resonance Point is converted to 1 coin and added to the initial set's net coin count plus 50 coins. Additionally, the remaining number of games in the Extra BB and the remaining number of games in the General AT (NAT) are also added to the initial value of 50 coins on the net coin counter, according to the respective items.

In Special AT (SAT), if the number of medals increases by a set amount (initial set = +50 medals + added number, subsequent sets +50 medals), the current set ends, and an SAT continuation lottery is held using the SAT continuation lottery table (Figure 171) to determine whether to continue to the next set. The SAT continuation lottery table (Figure 171) is set according to the setting value that defines the payout rate. For example, there are lottery tables common to settings 1, 2, and 3, lottery tables common to settings 4 and 5, and lottery tables for setting 6.

In Special AT (SAT), the SAT coin addition lottery, which determines the number of coins added to the coin difference counter after each game, is conducted using the SAT coin difference addition lottery table (Figure 172). The SAT coin difference addition lottery table (Figure 172) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) at the time of the lottery. If the number of coins is determined by the SAT coin difference addition lottery, that value is added to the coin difference counter.

If you win the SAT continuation lottery, you will move to the next set of the Special AT (SAT), and the difference in tokens will be reset to +50 tokens. On the other hand, if you do not win the SAT continuation lottery, you will move to the SAT termination preparation stage (M1 in Figure 118).

The SAT termination preparation is completed in one game, but during that game, a SAT continuation lottery result rewriting lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to rewrite the SAT continuation lottery result. If the SAT continuation lottery result rewriting lottery determines that the SAT continuation lottery result should be rewritten, the SAT continuation lottery result is rewritten to a win, and the game moves to the next set of the special AT (SAT) (M2 in Figure 118). On the other hand, if the SAT continuation lottery result rewriting lottery determines that the SAT continuation lottery result should not be rewritten, the game moves from SAT termination preparation to normal (non-advantageous section) (P1 in Figure 118).

Even if the SAT continuation lottery result is a win, if the game state is in the middle of an AT flag (a state where a bonus has been carried over), the lottery result will be rewritten to a loss. In other words, if a bonus is won, the Special AT (SAT) ends in that set. In this case, after the Special AT (SAT) ends, the game transitions to the Limit (LI) described later (N in Figure 118). After the Limit (LI) ends, the game transitions from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and the carried-over bonus (Normal BB (Non-advantageous Section)) is played (this bonus is sometimes called the Ending Bonus).

Furthermore, the SAT continuation lottery result rewriting lottery table (not shown) is configured according to, for example, the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) at the time of the draw. If a bonus or a so-called rare combination is drawn, the result is considered a win (rewriting of the SAT continuation lottery result).

(Limit (LI))
Limit (LI) is a game section that leads to the ending (ending bonus) of the medal increase section (advantageous section). For example, when a "6-choice bell" is won, a lottery determines whether or not the advantageous button press order (correct button press order) is announced, resulting in a game state where the number of medals held increases slightly. The player transitions to Limit (LI) from a specific state F. Specific state F is a game state in which the Limit transition conditions (a) to (b) are met, such as (a) when a bonus is won in a special AT (SAT) and the winnings of that bonus are carried over (between flags during AT) and the set ends (the difference in medal count becomes 0), or (b) when the LI transition lottery is won in normal (advantageous section). When the Limit transition conditions are met, the player transitions to Limit (LI) from the next game (Figure 118 (O)).

To explain the ending, in this embodiment, when the number of medals the player has acquired approaches the limit (MY = 2400 medals), the game transitions to a special AT (SAT), where the player waits for a bonus win while playing in the special AT (SAT). If a bonus is won, the game transitions to the limit (LI), where the player is notified of the bonus win. The player can then choose to either enjoy a period of slight medal increases up to the upper limit of the advantageous section (MY = 2400 medals or upper limit of continuous gameplay = 3000 games) without winning a bonus in the limit (LI), or to immediately enter the bonus round.

Furthermore, if the upper limit of the advantageous period (MY = 2400 coins or upper limit of 3000 consecutive games) is reached, the game transitions from the advantageous period to the normal (non-advantageous period), and then the carried-over bonus is awarded. On the other hand, if a bonus is awarded before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous period (MY = 2400 coins or upper limit of 3000 consecutive games), the game transitions from the advantageous period to the non-advantageous period (normal BB (non-advantageous period)), and the bonus starts in the non-advantageous period. In any case, if a bonus carried over due to the limit is awarded, the game transitions to the ending bonus.

During the ending bonus, the presentation differs from that of a normal bonus. A special presentation is shown to indicate that the payout period (the period during which medals increase) has reached its upper limit, thus signaling the end of the advantageous period.

During the ending bonus, a lottery is held to determine whether to transition to the advantageous section. If you win this lottery, you will transition to the advantageous section during the ending bonus, potentially transitioning from a regular BB (advantageous section) to a regular extra BB. If a direct AT (bonus game) is awarded during the regular extra BB, you will then transition to a regular AT (NAT) via a special bonus zone (SZ). In other words, the payout period can continue even across the non-advantageous section.

In Limit (LI), a navigation mode lottery is conducted using a navigation mode lottery table (Figure 173) to determine the navigation mode that influences whether or not a favorable button press sequence is announced when one of the "6-choice bells" is selected in each game. The navigation mode lottery table (Figure 173) is set up according to the type of navigation mode and the type of setting value that defines the payout rate. The lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of navigation mode and setting value at the time of the lottery. When transitioning to Limit (LI), the initial navigation mode is set to "Low" mode.

In Limit (LI), when a game results in a win of one of the "6-choice bells," a navigation generation lottery is conducted using the navigation generation lottery table (Figure 174) to determine whether or not to announce a favorable button-pressing sequence that results in a payout of 15 medals. In games where a win is achieved in this lottery, the favorable button-pressing sequence, set according to the type of "6-choice bell" won, is announced. On the other hand, in games where a win is not achieved in this lottery, even if a win of the "6-choice bell" occurs, the favorable button-pressing sequence is not announced.

In Limit (LI), if a bonus is won, or if the maximum number of consecutive games in the advantageous section is reached, the game state transitions to normal (non-advantageous section) (Figure 118, P2).

(Non-advantageous period → BB win → BB prize)
If a bonus is won during a game played under normal circumstances (non-advantageous period), but the bonus is not awarded in that game, the game will transition to a normal period (non-advantageous period) from the next game onwards (G3 in Figure 117). During a normal period (non-advantageous period), the same lottery as the one held under normal circumstances (non-advantageous period) is basically conducted.

If the advantageous section transition lottery (advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery) is won during the normal flag interval (non-advantageous section), the game transitions back to the normal flag interval (advantageous section) (G4 in Figure 117).

During the normal flag interval (non-advantageous period), if a bonus that has been carried over as an internal win is triggered, the game transitions to a normal BB (non-advantageous period) (G2 in Figure 117).

The normal BB (non-advantageous section) is a more advantageous game state than the normal (non-advantageous section) or normal (advantageous section), where the number of medals increases. In this embodiment, in BB (normal BB (non-advantageous section), normal (advantageous section), BB during AT), the initial number of continuous games (initial number of games) for the BB is determined at the start of the BB. The initial number of continuous games is the number of games that leads to a transition to the Extra BB (normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), which will be described later. The number of continuous games may be extended during the BB. Also, in BB (normal BB (non-advantageous section), normal (advantageous section), BB during AT), a medal count termination condition is set, which ends the BB when the number of medals paid out exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 179 medals).

In this configuration, the condition for ending the number of coins may be met before the determined number of continuous games (including the extended number of games if applicable) is consumed. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the condition for ending the number of coins is met before the number of continuous games for the Big Bonus (BB) is consumed, the game state transitions from BB (Normal BB (non-advantageous section), Normal (advantageous section), BB during AT) to Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT) (H4, J4 in Figure 118).

Furthermore, after a BB (Normal BB (Non-Advantageous Period), Normal (Advantageous Period), BB during AT) ends, the game state (RT state) always transitions to RT3. Therefore, the Extra BB is also executed while the game state (RT state) is in RT3. The Extra BB consists of a so-called pseudo-bonus, where a payout period is created in RT3 (including gameplay in RT6, which may be transitioned to afterward) where advantageous button press sequences (such as "6-choice bell") are announced when a button press sequence is won, resulting in an increase in medals.

If the conditions for ending a normal Big Bonus (non-advantageous period) are met (i.e., if the bonus ends without transitioning to a normal Extra Big Bonus), the game state returns to normal (non-advantageous period) (G1 in Figure 117).

Furthermore, if the player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery during a normal BB (non-advantageous zone), the game state transitions to a normal BB (advantageous zone) (G5 in Figure 117).

In games where a bonus is won during normal (non-advantageous) play, the initial number of games required to transition to a normal Extra BB is determined by an Extra BB initial game count lottery using the Extra BB initial game count lottery table (Figure 175). The Extra BB initial game count lottery table (Figure 175) is set up according to the type of CZ mode at the time of the lottery and the type of bonus won.

Furthermore, during a normal BB (non-advantageous period), an Extra BB game addition lottery is conducted at the start of each game to determine the number of games to be added to the initial number of games determined when the bonus was won. This lottery is performed using the Extra BB game addition lottery table (Figure 176). The Extra BB game addition lottery table (Figure 176) is set up according to the remaining number of games relative to the initial number of games to be played (or the number of games after additions, if any) and the type of winning combination (lottery flag group). The determined number of games is added to the initial number of games to be played.

Furthermore, during a normal Big Bonus (non-advantageous period), the Big Bonus/Extra Big Bonus Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery, which determines the value of Resonance Points awarded with each game, is conducted using the Big Bonus/Extra Big Bonus Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 177). The Big Bonus/Extra Big Bonus Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 177) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group), and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) at the time of the lottery. The determined number of Resonance Points is added to the number of Resonance Points held.

(Advantageous period → BB win → BB prize)
If a bonus is won in a game under specific state B, but the bonus is not awarded, the game will transition to the normal flag interval (advantageous section) from the next game (H3 in Figure 118). Here, specific state B is, for example, normal (advantageous section), CZ pre-announcement, or initial CZ win. In the normal flag interval (advantageous section), the same lottery as in normal (advantageous section) is basically conducted. If a bonus is won during the initial CZ win, the win is determined by the CZ success lottery, and after the end of that bonus (normal BB (advantageous section), or normal extra BB), the game will transition to the special bonus zone (SZ).

During the normal flag interval (advantageous period), if a bonus that has been carried over as an internal win is triggered, the game transitions to a normal BB (advantageous period) (H2 in Figure 118).

In games where a bonus is won during normal (advantageous) play, the initial number of games required to transition to a normal Extra BB is determined by an Extra BB initial game count lottery, similar to the case in normal (non-advantageous) play. This lottery is conducted using the Extra BB initial game count lottery table (Figure 175). The Extra BB initial game count lottery table (Figure 175) is set up according to the type of CZ mode at the time of the lottery and the type of bonus won.

Furthermore, during the normal BB (advantageous period), just like in the normal (non-advantageous period), an Extra BB game addition lottery is conducted each game to determine the number of games to be added to the initial number of continuous games determined at the time of winning the bonus. This lottery is performed using the Extra BB game addition lottery table (Figure 176). The Extra BB game addition lottery table (Figure 176) is set up according to the remaining number of games relative to the initial number of continuous games (or the number of continuous games after additions, if any) at the time of the lottery, and the type of winning combination (lottery flag group). The determined number of games is added to the initial number of continuous games.

If the conditions for ending the Big Bonus (BB) are met before the total number of games (initial number of continuous games plus the number of games added by the lottery) is consumed, the game transitions from a normal BB (advantageous section) to a normal extra BB (H4 in Figure 118).

Furthermore, during a normal Big Bonus (advantageous period), the Big Bonus/Extra Big Bonus Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery, which determines the value of Resonance Points awarded with each game, is conducted using the Big Bonus/Extra Big Bonus Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 177), just as in the normal (non-advantageous period). The Big Bonus/Extra Big Bonus Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 177) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group), and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) at the time of the lottery. The determined number of Resonance Points is added to the number of Resonance Points held.

If the total number of games played (initial continuous play count + added play count) is used up and the condition for ending a normal Big Bonus (advantageous section) (payout of more than 179 medals) is met, the game will not transition to a normal Extra Big Bonus, but will instead transition to Specific State A (H1 in Figure 118). Specific State A means that if the game state before the bonus was won was normal (advantageous section), the game will return to normal (advantageous section); if the game state before the bonus was won was a CZ pre-announcement, the game will return to a CZ pre-announcement. In other words, the game returns to its original state.

(During AT → Big Bonus win → Big Bonus prize awarded)
If a bonus is drawn in a specific state D, but the bonus is not awarded in that game, the game transitions to an AT state between flags from the next game (J3 in Figure 118). Specific state D is one of the following: AT preparation, special bonus zone (SZ), general AT (NAT), SC pre-announcement, or stock chance (SC). Between AT states, the same lottery as the game state at the time of winning the bonus is basically conducted. For example, if a bonus is drawn in general AT (NAT), the same lottery as the one conducted in general AT (NAT) is conducted. If a bonus is drawn during a continuing CZ, the win is determined by the CZ success lottery, and the game transitions to a special bonus zone (SZ) after the end of that bonus (AT BB or AT Extra BB).

During AT (Attack Time), if a bonus that has been carried over as an internal win is triggered between flags, the game transitions to AT BB (Big Bonus) (J2 in Figure 118).

In games where a bonus is won in specific state D, the initial number of games required to transition to the Extra BB during AT is determined by an Extra BB initial game count lottery, similar to normal (non-advantageous and advantageous periods). This lottery is conducted using the Extra BB initial game count lottery table (Figure 175). The Extra BB initial game count lottery table (Figure 175) is set up according to the type of CZ mode at the time of the lottery and the type of bonus won.

Furthermore, during AT (Attack Time) and BB (Big Bonus), just as in normal play (non-advantageous and advantageous periods), an Extra BB game addition lottery is conducted each game using the Extra BB game addition lottery table (Figure 176) to determine the number of games to be added to the initial number of continuous games determined at the time of winning the bonus. The Extra BB game addition lottery table (Figure 176) is set up according to the remaining number of games relative to the initial number of continuous games (or the number of continuous games after additions, if any) at the time of the lottery, and the type of winning combination (lottery flag group). The determined number of games is added to the initial number of continuous games.

If the conditions for ending the Big Bonus (BB) are met before the total number of games (initial continuous play count + additional play count determined by the lottery) is consumed, the game transitions from an AT (Attack Time) BB to an AT Extra BB (Figure 118, J4).

Furthermore, during AT (Attack Time) and BB (Big Bonus), the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery, which determines the value of Resonance Points awarded with each game, is conducted using the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 177), just as in normal play (non-advantageous and advantageous periods). The BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Figure 177) is set up according to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group), and the lottery is conducted using the lottery table corresponding to the type of winning combination (lottery flag group) at the time of the lottery. The determined number of Resonance Points is added to the number of Resonance Points held.

If the total number of games played (initial continuous play count + added play count) is used up and the condition for ending the BB during AT (payout of more than 179 medals) is met, the game will not transition to an AT Extra BB, but will instead transition to a specific state C (J1 in Figure 118). Specific state C is defined as follows: (i) If the game state at the time of winning the bonus is a continuous CZ or a special bonus zone (SZ), then it is a special bonus zone (SZ); (ii) If the VA type at the end of the bonus is "1" or higher, then it is a special bonus zone (SZ); (iii) If the game state at the time of winning the bonus is a general AT (NAT) and the SC level is "0", then it is a general (AT); (iv) If the game state at the time of winning the bonus is a stock chance (SC), or if the game state at the time of winning the bonus is a general AT (NAT) and the SC level is "1" or higher, then it is a stock chance (SC).

(Normal Extra BB)
The regular Extra BB is a pseudo-bonus that transitions from the regular BB (advantageous section) and is set up as a payout section (advantageous gameplay state) where medals increase. In the regular Extra BB, the bonus is basically performed when the RT state is RT3, and when the "6-choice bell" is won, an advantageous button press sequence that will pay out 15 medals will be announced. Also, if any of "F_weak C replay 123", "F_weak C replay 132", "F_weak C replay 213", "F_weak C replay 231", "F_weak C replay 312", or "F_weak C replay 321"("6-choice weak C replay") is won, an advantageous button press sequence to maintain RT3 will be announced. Furthermore, if you win with any of the following combinations: "F_Strong C Replay 123", "F_Strong C Replay 132", "F_Strong C Replay 213", "F_Strong C Replay 231", "F_Strong C Replay 312", or "F_Strong C Replay 321"("6-Choice Strong C Replay"), you will be notified of a favorable button press sequence that will transition the RT state to RT6.

Furthermore, in general gameplay states excluding BB (RT4, RT7, BB (RB)) or SB, only RT3 and RT6 include "F_7 alignment replay" as a target for the prize draw. Since winning "F_7 alignment replay" results in a direct AT, RT3 and RT6 are more advantageous gameplay states than other RT states. Additionally, RT6 has a higher probability of winning "F_7 alignment replay" than RT3, making RT6 the most advantageous general gameplay state.

Therefore, in a normal Extra BB, when you win a "6-choice bell," the advantageous button press order is announced, allowing you to increase your winnings (medals) while aiming for a direct AT by winning a bonus or a "F_7 alignment replay." Furthermore, if you win one of the "6-choice strong C replays," which have the potential to transition to RT6, the advantageous button press order is announced, making it easy to transition to RT6. Therefore, the goal is to transition from RT3 to the even more advantageous RT6, and in RT6, aim for a "F_7 alignment replay" which leads to a direct AT.

In addition, during a normal Extra BB, if the game results in a "F_7 alignment replay" or a "F_7 fake replay," the LCD display screen will show text such as "Aim for the red 7 by pressing in reverse order!". Therefore, if the player presses the red 7 symbol according to the display, in the case of an "F_7 alignment replay," the red 7 symbol will align on the middle line, and the player will be notified that a direct AT has been awarded. On the other hand, in the case of an "F_7 fake replay," the red 7 symbol will line up on the middle line on the right and middle reels, but the red 7 symbol will not stop on the middle line on the left reel, and the player will be notified that a direct AT has not been awarded. Furthermore, in games where an "F_7 alignment replay" is won, it is desirable that an animation be displayed to notify the player that a direct AT has been awarded even if the red 7 symbol does not align due to a mis-press or incorrect order of pressing. Furthermore, if the red 7 symbols do not line up in a game where "F_7 Aligned Replay" is triggered, the sound effects for when the red 7s line up (such as fanfare, special AT confirmation sound, or confirmation tenpai sound) will not occur. However, an effect indicating that a direct AT has been awarded will still occur, allowing players aiming for the red 7 symbols to enjoy the effects more. Alternatively, if the red 7 symbols do not line up in a game where "F_7 Aligned Replay" is triggered, the effect indicating that a direct AT has been awarded will not occur. Instead, the same effect as when the 7s did not line up (e.g., screen darkening) will occur. Then, in the next game, an AT win animation will appear on the screen, allowing the player to realize that "F_7 Aligned Replay" had actually occurred.

Normally, if you win a bonus during an Extra BB, you'll enter a direct AT (Attack Time). After that bonus (Extra BB) ends and you've finished the remaining normal Extra BBs, you'll transition to a special bonus zone (SZ) (Figure 118, I2). Similarly, if you win an "F_7 alignment replay" during a normal Extra BB, you'll also enter a direct AT, and after finishing the remaining normal Extra BBs, you'll transition to a special bonus zone (SZ) (Figure 118, I2).

Furthermore, when a bonus is won during a regular Extra Big Bonus (BB), there are two paths to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ): the path between regular flags (advantageous section) (I4 in Figure 118) → regular BB (advantageous section) → Special Bonus Zone (SZ), and the path between regular flags (advantageous section) (I3 in Figure 118) → regular BB (advantageous section) → regular Extra BB → Special Bonus Zone (SZ) (I2 in Figure 118).

If the player does not have the right to a direct AT and the conditions for ending a normal Extra BB are met, that is, if the player does not have the right to a direct AT and the total number of games played in a normal BB and a normal Extra BB reaches the sum of the initial number of continuous games and the number of added games, and the game state at the time of winning the bonus was normal (advantageous section) and the conditions for transitioning to the first CZ were not met, the game will transition to normal (advantageous section) (I1 in Figure 118). An example of a situation where the conditions for transitioning to the CZ are not met is when the number of V-stocks held is "0".

If the conditions for ending a normal Extra Big Bonus are met without the right to a direct AT, and the game state at the time of winning the bonus was a CZ pre-announcement, the game will transition to a CZ pre-announcement (I3 in Figure 118).

(Extra BB during AT)
The Extra BB during AT is a pseudo-bonus that transitions from the BB during AT, and is set up as a payout section (advantageous gameplay state) where medals increase. In a normal Extra BB, the bonus is basically performed when the RT state is RT3, and when the "6-choice bell" is won, an advantageous button press sequence that will pay out 15 medals will be announced. If one of the "6-choice weak C-replay" is won, an advantageous button press sequence to maintain RT3 will be announced. If one of the "6-choice strong C-replay" is won, an advantageous button press sequence that will transition the RT state to RT6 will be announced.

Normally, an Extra BB leads directly to an AT, but if an Extra BB occurs during an AT, one V-stock is awarded (an increase in V-stock). This occurs when a bonus is won or when an "F_7 alignment replay" is won. Therefore, during an Extra BB in AT, when a "6-choice bell" is won, the advantageous button press order is announced, increasing the payout (medals), while aiming to increase V-stock by winning a bonus or an "F_7 alignment replay". Also, if one of the "6-choice strong C replays" which have the potential to transition to RT6 is won, the advantageous button press order is announced, making it easy to transition to RT6. Therefore, the gameplay is such that the goal is to transition from RT3 to the even more advantageous RT6, and in the RT6, the goal is to win an "F_7 alignment replay" which will increase V-stock. Furthermore, if a bonus is won during an Extra Big Bonus (BB) in AT mode, the game state will transition to the AT mode flag (K4 in Figure 118).

Furthermore, during the AT Extra BB, if a game results in a "F_7 alignment replay" or an "F_7 fake replay," the LCD display screen will show text such as, "Aim for the red 7 by pressing the buttons in reverse order!" Therefore, if the player follows this display and attempts to stop the reels on the red 7 symbol, in the case of an "F_7 alignment replay," the red 7 symbols will align on the middle line, and the player will be notified that one V-stock has been awarded. On the other hand, in the case of an "F_7 fake replay," the red 7 symbols will line up on the middle line on the right and middle reels, but the red 7 symbol will not stop on the middle line on the left reel, and the player will be notified that no V-stock has been awarded.

If an Extra Big Bonus (BB) during AT (Attack Time) ends, the game generally returns to the state it was in when the bonus was won. Specifically, if the bonus was won during a Special Bonus Zone (SZ), the game transitions to the SZ after the Extra BB ends (Figure 118, K3). If the bonus was won during a regular AT (NAT), the game transitions to a regular AT after the Extra BB ends (Figure 118, K1). Furthermore, if the bonus was won during a Stock Chance (SC), the game transitions to a Stock Chance (SC) after the Extra BB ends (Figure 118, K2).

[12-5. Correspondence between winning combinations and the symbols displayed when stopped]
Next, with reference to Figure 119, the correspondence between the internal winning combinations and the symbol combinations displayed when each internal winning combination is determined will be explained. Figure 119 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the various internal winning combinations that can be determined and the symbol combinations displayed when each internal winning combination is determined.

When a winning combination is drawn in the winning combination lottery, all symbol combinations (constituent symbol combinations) belonging to that winning combination (Figures 78 to 104) are allowed to stop and display. Furthermore, if, depending on the timing of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R at the time of winning, multiple symbol combinations belonging to that winning combination can be drawn into the winning line (upward-sloping line), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will prioritize drawing in (stopping) predetermined symbol combinations.

By the way, when stop control is performed, a range of retractable symbols is set, which is usually a maximum of four symbol frames. However, strictly speaking, there are so-called "perfect stops" where the symbols stop without sliding even one frame from the pressed position, and frames that can be retracted with a slide of 1 to 4 frames. Therefore, the number of frames that can be stopped relative to the pressed position, including the perfect stops, can be said to be a maximum of five frames. Consequently, depending on the timing of operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, there may be cases where none of the symbol combinations belonging to the winning combination can be retracted to the winning line (upward-sloping line) (they will not be displayed as stopped). In this case, a so-called "missed prize" occurs, where none of the constituent symbol combinations are displayed as stopped despite a win. Winning combinations that may result in a missed prize include, for example, the single winning combination of the BB bonus ("F_Red 7 Same Color"), the single winning combinations of the SB bonus ("F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32"), and "F_SP combination". For the BB Bonus, if the single winning combination "F_Red 7 Same Color" is missed, the game transitions to the BB Flag Interval State (RT5) from the next game, and the won bonus is carried over. On the other hand, for the SB Bonus, if the single winning combinations "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" and "F_SP" are missed, the bonus is not carried over.

Furthermore, bonus symbols ("F_Red 7 Same Color", "F_White 7 Same Color", "F_Red 7 Different Colors", "F_White 7 Different Colors") have overlapping winning combinations with some minor symbols ("F_Strong Bell A", "F_Strong Bell B", "F_Strong Watermelon A", "F_Strong Watermelon B", "F_Weak Watermelon", "F_Strong Cherry", "F_SP Symbol") and some replay symbols ("F_Strong Cherry Replay", "F_Weak Cherry Replay", "F_RT2 Replay", "F_Strong Cherry Replay", "F_Medium Cherry Replay"). In games where such overlapping winning combinations are won, the reel stops prioritize drawing in symbol combinations related to minor symbols and replay symbols over bonus symbols. Therefore, in games where a winning combination is won, the symbol combination related to the bonus symbol may not be displayed. In this case as well, the game transitions to the BB flag state (RT5) from the next game, and the won bonus is carried over.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are two types of symbols: a "press-order" type where the priority of the symbol combinations that stop the symbols differs depending on the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed at the time of a win, and a "non-press-order" type where the priority order of the symbol combinations that stop the symbols does not change depending on the order in which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed.

Examples of button-press combinations include, for example, "F_7 alignment replay", "F_7 fake replay", "F_weak C replay 123", "F_weak C replay 132", "F_weak C replay 213", "F_weak C replay 231", "F_weak C replay 312", "F_weak C replay 321", "F_strong C replay 123", "F_strong C replay 132", "F_strong C replay 213", "F_strong C replay 231", "F_strong C replay 312", "F_strong C replay 321", "F_slab 123", "F_slab 132", "F_slab 213", "F_slab 231", "F_slab 312", "F_slab 321", "F_bell 123", "F_bell 132", "F_bell 213", "F_bell 231", "F_bell 312", and "F_bell 321". Hereafter, "F_weak C replay 123", "F_weak C replay 132", "F_weak C replay 213", "F_weak C replay 231", "F_weak C replay 312", and "F_weak C replay 321" will be collectively referred to as "6-choice weak C replay", and "F_strong C replay 123", "F_strong C replay 132", "F_strong C replay 213", "F_strong C replay 231", "F_strong C replay 312", and "F_strong C replay 321" will be collectively referred to as "6-choice strong C replay Sometimes, the combinations "F_Slavel 123", "F_Slavel 132", "F_Slavel 213", "F_Slavel 231", "F_Slavel 312", and "F_Slavel 321" are collectively referred to as "6-Choice Slavel," and "F_Bell 123", "F_Bell 132", "F_Bell 213", "F_Bell 231", "F_Bell 312", and "F_Bell 321" are collectively referred to as "6-Choice Bell."

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, each of the "6-choice weak C-Replay" combinations contains both an "RT1 transition replay" and an "RT3 transition replay." Here, "RT1 transition replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_XU replay" (upward right replay) and "C_XD replay_01" to "C_XD replay_06" (downward right replay). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT1. Similarly, "RT3 transition replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_mountain replay_01" to "C_mountain replay_03" (small mountain replay) and "C_V replay_01" to "C_V replay_02" (small V replay). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT3.

As shown in Figure 119, when "F_Weak C Replay 123," one of the "6-choice Weak C Replays," is won during a non-internal Big Bonus (BB), if the button press order is 1→2→3, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination related to the "RT3 Transition Replay" preferentially. On the other hand, if the button press order is any other, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination related to the "RT1 Transition Replay" preferentially. Both the "RT1 Transition Replay" and the "RT3 Transition Replay" are groups of symbol combinations that do not result in any missed symbols. Therefore, if the button press order when "F_Weak C Replay 123" is won is (1→2→3), then one of the symbol combinations "C_Mountain Replay_01" to "C_Mountain Replay_03" (Small Mountain Replay) or "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" (Small V Replay) will always stop and be displayed on the winning line. Furthermore, if the button press order when "F_Weak C Replay 123" is won is anything other than (1→2→3), then one of the symbols "C_XU Replay" (Upward Right Replay) or "C_XD Replay_01" to "C_XD Replay_06" (Downward Right Replay) will always stop and be displayed on the winning line. Note that "BB Non-Internal" refers to any of the game states: RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT6.

Here, the button press order (1→2→3) means that the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the second stop reel is the middle reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the right reel 3R. Also, the button press order (1→3→2) means that the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the second stop reel is the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 3C. Also, the button press order (2→1→3) means that the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C, the second stop reel is the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel is the right reel 3R. Also, the button press order (2→3→1) means that the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C, the second stop reel is the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L. Furthermore, the button press order (3→1→2) means that the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 3C. Similarly, the button press order (3→2→1) means that the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the middle reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L.

Furthermore, in RT3, the "F_7 alignment replay" that triggers a direct AT transition is subject to a prize draw, making it a more advantageous game state compared to RT1, where this symbol is not subject to the prize draw. Therefore, for "F_weak C replay 123," the correct button press order is (1→2→3) which displays the symbol combination of the "RT3 transition replay" that transitions to RT3.

Other "6-choice weak C replays" also use the same stop control for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Specifically, for "F_weak C replay 132," the correct button press order is set to (1→3→2). For "F_weak C replay 213," the correct button press order is set to (2→1→3). For "F_weak C replay 231," the correct button press order is set to (2→3→1). For "F_weak C replay 312," the correct button press order is set to (3→1→2). For "F_weak C replay 321," the correct button press order is set to (3→2→1). When a win occurs and the correct button press order is selected, one of the symbol combinations for "RT3 transition replay" will stop and be displayed on the winning line. For any other button press order, one of the symbol combinations for "RT1 transition replay" will stop and be displayed on the winning line.

Furthermore, each of the "6-choice weak C-replay" combinations contains an "RT6 transition replay" related to the transition of the RT state to RT6. Here, "RT6 transition replay" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_folded replay A_01" to "C_folded replay A_12". In this embodiment, there are cases where reel 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped to prioritize drawing in the "6-choice weak C-replay" (during SB operation), but details will be described later.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, each of the "6-Choice Strong C Replay" combinations contains both "RT1 Transition Replay" and "RT6 Transition Replay." Here, "RT1 Transition Replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_XU Replay" (upward right replay) and "C_XD Replay_01" to "C_XD Replay_06" (downward right replay). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT1. Similarly, "RT6 Transition Replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Folded Replay A_01" to "C_Folded Replay A_12" and "C_Folded Replay B_01" to "C_Folded Replay B_24." If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT6.

As shown in Figure 119, when "F_Strong C Replay 123," one of the "6-choice Strong C Replays," is won during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, if the button press order is 1→2→3, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination related to the "RT6 Transition Replay" preferentially. On the other hand, if the button press order is any other, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination related to the "RT1 Transition Replay" preferentially. Both "RT1 Transition Replay" and "RT6 Transition Replay" are groups of symbol combinations that do not result in missed wins. Therefore, when "F_Strong C Replay 123" is won, if the button press order is 1→2→3, one of the symbol combinations "C_Bent Replay A_01" to "C_Bent Replay A_12" or "C_Bent Replay B_01" to "C_Bent Replay B_24" will always stop and display on the winning line. Furthermore, if the button press order when "F_Strong C Replay 123" is won is anything other than the order (1→2→3), then either "C_XU Replay" (upward right replay), "C_XD Replay_01" to "C_XD Replay_06" (downward right replay) will always stop and be displayed on the winning line. Note that "BB not internally active" refers to any of the following game states: RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT6.

Furthermore, in RT6, the "F_7 alignment replay" that triggers a direct AT transition is subject to a prize draw, making it a more advantageous game state compared to RT1, where this symbol is not subject to the prize draw. Therefore, for "F_Strong C Replay 123," the correct button press order is (1→2→3) which displays the symbol combination of the "RT6 transition replay" that triggers the transition to RT6.

Other "6-Choice Strong C Replay" symbols also use the same stopping control for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Specifically, for "F_Strong C Replay 132," the correct button press order is set to (1→3→2). For "F_Strong C Replay 213," the correct button press order is set to (2→1→3). For "F_Strong C Replay 231," the correct button press order is set to (2→3→1). For "F_Strong C Replay 312," the correct button press order is set to (3→1→2). For "F_Strong C Replay 321," the correct button press order is set to (3→2→1). When a win occurs and the correct button press order is selected, one of the symbol combinations for "RT6 Transition Replay" will stop and be displayed on the winning line. For any other button press order, one of the symbol combinations for "RT1 Transition Replay" will stop and be displayed on the winning line.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, each of the "6-choice Slave" symbols includes both a "15-coin Bell" and a "Chance Symbol" within its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "15-coin Bell" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_XU Bell B_01" to "C_XU Bell B_04" (upward-sloping bell) and "C_TP Bell 01" to "C_TP Bell 02" (upper bell). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, 15 coins will be paid out. Furthermore, "Chance Symbol" is a collective term for the following symbol combinations: "C_Special Role 1st_01" to "C_Special Role 1st_04", "C_Special Role 213A_01" to "C_Special Role 213A_06", "C_Special Role 213B_01" to "C_Special Role 213B_12", "C_Special Role 231A_01" to "C_Special Role 231A_08", "C_Special Role 231B_01" to "C_Special Role 231B_08", and "C_Special Role 312_01" to "C_Special Role 312_04". If any of the symbol combinations shown stop, the payout will be one less medal than if the "15-bell" symbol combination were shown. However, in AT-related draws (e.g., small role CZ draw, CZ success draw), the draw will be conducted using the "weak rare role" draw flag group, making it more advantageous than the "15-bell" in terms of AT-related draws.

As shown in Figure 119, when "F_Slave 123," one of the "6-choice slaves," is won during a non-internal Big Bonus (BB), if the button press order is 1→2→3, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display symbol combinations related to "chance symbols" preferentially. On the other hand, if the button press order is any other, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display symbol combinations related to "15-coin bells" preferentially. Both "15-coin bells" and "chance symbols" are groups of symbol combinations that do not result in missed wins. Therefore, if the button press order when "F_Slavel123" is won is (1→2→3), then one of the following symbol combinations will always stop and be displayed on the winning line: "C_Special Role 1st_01" to "C_Special Role 1st_04", "C_Special Role 213A_01" to "C_Special Role 213A_06", "C_Special Role 213B_01" to "C_Special Role 213B_12", "C_Special Role 231A_01" to "C_Special Role 231A_08", "C_Special Role 231B_01" to "C_Special Role 231B_08", or "C_Special Role 312_01" to "C_Special Role 312_04". Furthermore, if the button press order during a win of "F_Slavel 123" is anything other than the standard order (1→2→3), then either "C_XU Bell B_01" to "C_XU Bell B_04" (upward-sloping bell) or "C_TP Bell 01" to "C_TP Bell 02" (upper bell) will always stop and be displayed on the winning line. Note that "BB not internally active" refers to any of the following game states: RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT6.

As will be explained later, the "6-Choice Slave" may sometimes display information that identifies the button press sequence that will result in a winning combination of symbols related to a "chance symbol" (the button press sequence that produces a chance symbol). In this case, the player has two choices: either select the button press sequence that produces a chance symbol to receive a favorable draw in the AT-related lottery, or select the button press sequence that will result in a winning combination of symbols for the "15-coin bell" to acquire more medals.

Other "6-choice Slave" machines also use similar stop control for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Specifically, "F_Slave 132" has the button press order (1→3→2) set as the order for a chance symbol to appear. "F_Slave 213" has the button press order (2→1→3) set as the order for a chance symbol to appear. "F_Slave 231" has the button press order (2→3→1) set as the order for a chance symbol to appear. "F_Slave 312" has the button press order (3→1→2) set as the order for a chance symbol to appear. "F_Slave 321" has the button press order (3→2→1) set as the order for a chance symbol to appear. When a win occurs and the button press order matches a chance symbol, one of the "chance symbol" combinations will stop and display on the winning line. For any other button press order, one of the "15-coin bell" combinations will stop and display on the winning line.

In Figure 119, the "6-choice bell" combination, which is not shown in the illustration, also uses the same stop control for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as other combinations. Specifically, if the correct button sequence is selected upon winning, the symbol combination related to the "15-coin bell" is displayed; otherwise, the symbol combination related to the "1-coin bell" is displayed. Here, "15-coin bell" refers collectively to "C_XU Bell A_01" to "C_XU Bell A_04" (upward-sloping bell), "C_BT Bell A_01" to "C_BT Bell A_02" (lower bell), "C_XD Bell A_01" to "C_XD Bell A_24" (downward-sloping bell A), "C_XD Bell B_01" to "C_XD Bell B_06" (downward-sloping bell B), "C_TP Bell A_01" to "C_TP Bell A_03" (upper bell A), and "C_CT Bell A_01" to "C_CT Bell A_04" (middle bell A). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, 15 coins will be dispensed. "One-coin bell" refers collectively to the following combinations of symbols: "C_Maintenance Mountain Bell_01" to "C_Maintenance Mountain Bell_04" (Maintenance Small Mountain Bell), "C_Maintenance V Bell_01" to "C_Maintenance V Bell_06" (Maintenance Small V Bell), "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_01" to "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_16" (Transition Small Mountain Bell: RT1 Transition Bell), and "C_RT1 V Bell_01" to "C_RT1 V Bell_06" (Transition Small V Bell: RT1 Transition Bell). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, one medal will be dispensed.

Of the "6-choice bells," "F_Bell123" has the correct button press order set to (1→2→3). "F_Bell132" has the correct button press order set to (1→3→2). "F_Bell213" has the correct button press order set to (2→1→3). "F_Bell231" has the correct button press order set to (2→3→1). "F_Bell312" has the correct button press order set to (3→1→2). "F_Bell321" has the correct button press order set to (3→2→1). When a win occurs and the correct button press order is selected, one of the "15-coin bell" symbol combinations will stop and be displayed on the winning line. For any other button press order, one of the "1-coin bell" symbol combinations will stop and be displayed on the winning line. Furthermore, if any of the following symbol combinations of "Single Bell" symbols—"C_RT1 Mountain Bell_01" to "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_16" (Transition Small Mountain Bell: RT1 Transition Bell) or "C_RT1 V Bell_01" to "C_RT1 V Bell_06" (Transition Small V Bell: RT1 Transition Bell)—stop and display on the winning line, the game state (RT state) will be maintained or transitioned to RT1.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, the "F_7-aligned replay" includes both the "RT3 transition replay" and the "red 7 replay" within its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "RT3 transition replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_mountain replay_01" to "C_mountain replay_03" (small mountain replay: RT3 transition replay) and "C_V replay_01" to "C_V replay_02" (small V replay: RT3 transition replay). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT3. Similarly, "red 7 replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_red 7 replay_01" to "C_red 7 replay_03" (red 7 replay). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, either a direct AT is granted or one V stock is granted.

As shown in Figure 119, when "F_7 Aligned Replay" is won during a non-BB internal state, if the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Red 7 Replay" is preferentially displayed. On the other hand, in the case of other stop orders, the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT3 Transition Replay" is preferentially displayed. Among the "Red 7 Replay," "C_Red 7 Replay_01" is a stop display mode in which the Red 7 symbol aligns on the middle line, and when "F_7 Aligned Replay" is won, if the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R and the Red 7 symbol is aimed, the Red 7 symbol will align on the middle line. On the other hand, when the "F_7 alignment replay" is won, if the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, one of the following symbol combinations will be displayed on the winning line: "C_Mountain Replay_01" to "C_Mountain Replay_03" (Small Mountain Replay: RT3 Transition Replay) or "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" (Small V Replay: RT3 Transition Replay). Note that "BB not internally active" refers to any of the game states: RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT6.

If you win with "F_7 alignment replay," the button press order for the symbol combination related to "red 7 replay" may be announced. In this case, you will either be granted a direct AT or one V stock, but more details will be explained later.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_7 Fake Replay" includes "RT3 Transition Replay" and "Red 7 Fake" in its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "RT3 Transition Replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Mountain Replay_01" to "C_Mountain Replay_03" (Small Mountain Replay: RT3 Transition Replay) and "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" (Small V Replay: RT3 Transition Replay). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed as stopped symbols, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT3. Furthermore, "Red 7 Fake" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Red 7 Fake_01" to "C_Red 7 Fake_02" (Red 7 Fake). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed as stopped symbols, nothing is awarded.

As shown in Figure 119, when "F_7 Fake Replay" is won during a non-BB internal state, if the button press order is 3→2→1, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Red 7 Fake" is preferentially stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of any other button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT3 Transition Replay" is preferentially stopped and displayed. In all cases of the symbol combination related to "Red 7 Fake", the red 7 symbol stops in the middle position on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, putting the red 7 symbol in a ready state, but the red 7 symbol does not stop in the middle position on the left reel 3L. Therefore, when you win with "F_7 Fake Replay," if you press the buttons in the correct order (3→2→1) to aim for the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbol will line up on the middle line until the second stop reel, but after the third stop, the red 7 symbol will not line up on the middle line. On the other hand, when you win with "F_7 Aligned Replay," if the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, one of the following symbol combinations will be displayed on the winning line: "C_Mountain Replay_01" to "C_Mountain Replay_03" (Small Mountain Replay: RT3 Transition Replay), or "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" (Small V Replay: RT3 Transition Replay). Note that "BB not internal" refers to any of the game states: RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT6.

If you win with "F_7 Fake Replica," the button press sequence for the symbol combination related to "Red 7 Fake" may be displayed. In this case, the notification is misleading and does not award any prizes, but more details will be explained later.

Furthermore, the "F_7 Fake Replay" combination includes a "Red 7 Replay" which grants either a direct AT hit or one V-stock. In this embodiment, there are cases where reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped to prioritize drawing in the "Red 7 Replay" (during SB activation), but details will be described later.

Next, we will explain non-sequential winning combinations.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong Cherry" is a combination of symbols that includes "Strong Cherry". Here, "Strong Cherry" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Strong Cherry A_01" to "C_Strong Cherry A_06", "C_Strong Cherry B", "C_Strong Cherry C_01" to "C_Strong Cherry C_03", "C_Strong Cherry D_01" to "C_Strong Cherry D_02", and "C_Strong Cherry E_01" to "C_Strong Cherry E_08". When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Strong Cherry" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the pressing order (Figure 119). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, an AT-related lottery is performed with the winning role categorized as "Strong Rare Role". Furthermore, the "Strong Cherry Replay" also serves as an RT2 transition replay, which either transitions to or maintains the RT state in RT2 mode.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong C Replay" includes an "RT6 Transition Replay" among its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "RT6 Transition Replay" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_Bent Replay A_01" to "C_Bent Replay A_12" and "C_Bent Replay B_01" to "C_Bent Replay B_24" (Bent Replay). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT6 Transition Replay" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, it functions as an RT6 Transition Replay, transitioning or maintaining the RT state to RT6. Furthermore, when "F_Strong C Replay" is won, the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) is categorized as "Strong Rare Combination" and an AT-related draw is performed.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Middle Cherry Replay" is a combination of symbols that includes "Middle Cherry Replay". Here, "Middle Cherry Replay (SP Replay)" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_SP Replay A_01" to "C_SP Replay A_08", "C_SP Replay B_01" to "C_SP Replay B_08", "C_SP Replay C_01" to "C_SP Replay C_04", "C_SP Replay D_01" to "C_SP Replay D_04", and "C_SP Replay E_01" to "C_SP Replay E_04". When a win occurs during a non-internal Big Bonus, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Middle Cherry Replay (SP Replay)" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed (Figure 119). If any of the specified symbol combinations are displayed, an AT-related lottery will be conducted with the winning combination categorized as "Middle Cherry".

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_RT1 Replay" includes an "RT1 Transition Replay" among its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "RT1 Transition Replay" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_XU Replay" (upward right replay) and "C_XD Replay_01" to "C_XD Replay_06" (downward right replay). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination related to "RT1 Transition Replay" on the winning line (Figure 119). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained at RT1.

Furthermore, within the "F_RT1 Replay" symbol combinations, there are also "RT3 Transition Replays" related to the transition to or maintenance of RT3. Here, "RT3 Transition Replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Mountain Replay_01" to "C_Mountain Replay_03" (Small Mountain Replay) and "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" (Small V Replay). In this embodiment, there are cases where reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped to prioritize the "RT3 Transition Replay" (during SB operation), but details will be described later.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_RT2 Replay" contains "RT2 Transition Replay" within its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "RT2 Transition Replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_BT Replay_01" to "C_BT Replay_06", "C_CT Replay_01" to "C_CT Replay_20", and "C_TP Replay_01" to "C_TP Replay_04". When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination related to "RT2 Transition Replay" on the winning line (Figure 119). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained in RT2.

Furthermore, "F_RT2 Replay" includes "Strong Cherry Replay," which is a combination of symbols within the constituent symbols where the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in various draws falls under the "Strong Rare Combination" category. Here, "Strong Cherry Replay" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_Strong Cherry Replay A_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay A_06," "C_Strong Cherry Replay B," "C_Strong Cherry Replay C_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay C_03," "C_Strong Cherry Replay D_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay D_02," and "C_Strong Cherry Replay E_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Replay E_08." In this embodiment, there are cases where reel 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped to prioritize drawing in "Strong Cherry Replay" (when SB is activated), but details will be described later.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Weak Cherry Replay" contains a "Weak Cherry Replay" symbol within its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "Weak Cherry Replay" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_Weak Cherry Replay A_01" to "C_Weak Cherry Replay A_03", "C_Weak Cherry Replay B", and "C_Weak Cherry Replay C". When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Weak Cherry Replay" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in the various draws will be drawn under the "Weak Rare Replay" category.

Furthermore, "F_Weak Cherry Reel" refers to a combination of symbols, including "Strong Cherry Reel," where the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in various draws falls under the "Strong Rare Combination" category. Here, "Strong Cherry Reel" collectively refers to the symbol combinations "C_Strong Cherry Reel A_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Reel A_06," "C_Strong Cherry Reel B," "C_Strong Cherry Reel C_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Reel C_03," "C_Strong Cherry Reel D_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Reel D_02," and "C_Strong Cherry Reel E_01" to "C_Strong Cherry Reel E_08." In this embodiment, there are cases where reel 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped to prioritize drawing "Strong Cherry Reel" (during SB operation), but details will be described later.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Weak C Replay" contains an "RT3 Transition Replay" among its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "RT3 Transition Replay" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Mountain Replay_01" to "C_Mountain Replay_03" (Small Mountain Replay) and "C_V Replay_01" to "C_V Replay_02" (Small V Replay). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT3 Transition Replay" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119). If any of these symbol combinations are displayed, the RT state transitions to or is maintained in RT3.

Furthermore, "F_Weak C Replay" includes "RT6 Transition Replays" within the combination of symbols related to the transition to or maintenance of RT6. Here, "RT6 Transition Replay" is a collective term for the symbol combinations "C_Broken Replay A_01" to "C_Broken Replay A_12". In this embodiment, there are cases where reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped to prioritize the "RT6 Transition Replay" (during SB operation), but details will be described later.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Common Bell A" contains a "Four Bell" combination within its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "Four Bell" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_BT Bell B_01" to "C_BT Bell B_08" (lower bell B) and "C_CT Bell B_01" to "C_CT Bell B_04" (middle bell B). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Four Bell" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Common Bell B" contains a "Four Bell" combination within its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "Four Bell" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_BT Bell B_01" to "C_BT Bell B_08" (lower bell B) and "C_CT Bell B_01" to "C_CT Bell B_04" (middle bell B). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Four Bell" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Weak Watermelon" has both "Watermelon" and "Single-Coin Payout" in its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "Watermelon" refers collectively to the symbol combinations of "C_XU Watermelon_01" to "C_XU Watermelon_04" (upward-sloping watermelon), "C_XD Watermelon_01" to "C_XD Watermelon_02" (downward-sloping watermelon), "C_Mountain Watermelon_01" to "C_Mountain Watermelon_02" (small mountain watermelon), and "C_V Watermelon_01" to "C_V Watermelon_04" (small V watermelon). "Single-Coin Payout" refers collectively to the symbol combinations of "C_Control Chance A_01" to "C_Control Chance A_06" (for chance eye control). When "F_Weak Watermelon" is triggered during a non-internal Big Bonus (BB), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that, regardless of the button press order, the symbol combination related to "Watermelon" is prioritized and displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

In the case of "Watermelon," depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbol may not be drawn into the winning line. In this case, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the next priority winning symbol combination is a symbol combination related to the "Single Coin Win" and is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119). If any symbol combination related to "Watermelon" is displayed on the winning line, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, if any symbol combination related to the "Single Coin Win" is displayed on the winning line, one medal is paid out.

Furthermore, if you win "F_Weak Watermelon," the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in each draw will primarily be drawn under the "Weak Rare Combination" category.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong Watermelon A" has both "Watermelon" and "Single-Coin Payout" in its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "Watermelon" refers collectively to the symbol combinations of "C_XU Watermelon_01" to "C_XU Watermelon_04" (upward-sloping watermelon), "C_XD Watermelon_01" to "C_XD Watermelon_02" (downward-sloping watermelon), "C_Mountain Watermelon_01" to "C_Mountain Watermelon_02" (small mountain watermelon), and "C_V Watermelon_01" to "C_V Watermelon_04" (small V watermelon). "Single-Coin Payout" refers collectively to the symbol combinations of "C_Control Chance A_01" to "C_Control Chance A_06" (for chance eye control). When "F_Strong Watermelon A" is triggered during a non-internal Big Bonus (BB), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that, regardless of the button press order, the symbol combination related to "Watermelon" is prioritized and displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

In the case of "Watermelon," depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbol may not be drawn into the winning line. In this case, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the next priority winning symbol combination is a symbol combination related to the "Single Coin Win" and is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119). If any symbol combination related to "Watermelon" is displayed on the winning line, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, if any symbol combination related to the "Single Coin Win" is displayed on the winning line, one medal is paid out.

Furthermore, if you win "F_Strong Watermelon A," the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in each draw will primarily be drawn under the "Strong Watermelon" category.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong Watermelon B" has both a "watermelon" and a "single-coin combination" in its constituent pattern combination. Here, "Watermelon" refers collectively to the following symbol combinations: "C_XU Watermelon_01" to "C_XU Watermelon_04" (upward-sloping watermelon), "C_XD Watermelon_01" to "C_XD Watermelon_02" (downward-sloping watermelon), "C_Mountain Watermelon_01" to "C_Mountain Watermelon_02" (small mountain watermelon), "C_V Watermelon_01" to "C_V Watermelon_04" (small V watermelon), and "C_CT Watermelon_01" to "C_CT Watermelon_06" (middle watermelon). "Single-coin win" refers collectively to the following symbol combinations: "C_Control Chance A_01" to "C_Control Chance A_06" (for chance symbol control) and "C_Control Chance B_01" to "C_Control Chance B_02" (for chance symbol control). When "F_Strong Watermelon A" is drawn during a non-internal Big Bonus (BB), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that, regardless of the button press order, the symbol combination related to "Watermelon" is prioritized and displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

In the case of "Watermelon," depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbol may not be drawn into the winning line. In this case, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the next priority winning symbol combination is a symbol combination related to the "Single Coin Win" and is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119). If any symbol combination related to "Watermelon" is displayed on the winning line, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, if any symbol combination related to the "Single Coin Win" is displayed on the winning line, one medal is paid out.

Furthermore, if you win "F_Strong Watermelon B," the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in each draw will primarily be drawn under the "Strong Watermelon" category.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong Cherry" includes both "Single Cherry" and "One-Coin Payout" in its constituent symbol combinations. Here, "Single Cherry" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Chance Payout_01" to "C_Chance Payout_24," and "One-Coin Payout" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_Control Chance D_01" to "C_Control Chance D_08" (for chance eye control). When "F_Strong Cherry" is won during a non-internal Big Bonus (BB), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combinations related to "Single Cherry" are preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the button press order (Figure 119).

In the case of a "single cherry," depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbol may not be drawn into the winning line. In this case, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that a symbol combination related to a "single-coin payout" is displayed on the winning line as the next priority winning symbol combination (Figure 119). If any symbol combination related to a "single cherry" is displayed on the winning line, four medals are paid out. On the other hand, if any symbol combination related to a "single-coin payout" is displayed on the winning line, one medal is paid out.

Furthermore, if you win with "F_Strong Cherry," the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in each draw will primarily be drawn under the "Strong Rare Combination" category.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong Bell A" includes a "15-coin bell" in its combination of symbols. Here, "15-coin bell" refers collectively to the symbol combinations of "C_XU Bell A_01" to "C_XU Bell A_04" (upward-sloping bell A), "C_BT Bell A_01" to "C_BT Bell A_02" (lower bell A), "C_XD Bell A_01" to "C_XD Bell A_24" (downward-sloping bell A), and "C_TP Bell A_01" to "C_TP Bell A_03" (upper bell A). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "15-coin bell" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

Furthermore, if you win "F_Strong Bell A," the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in each draw will primarily be drawn under the "Strong Rare Combination" category.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, "F_Strong Bell B" includes a "15-coin bell" in its combination of symbols. Here, "15-coin bell" refers collectively to the symbol combinations "C_XD Bell B_01" to "C_XD Bell B_06" (downward-sloping bell B) and "C_CT Bell A_01" to "C_CT Bell A_04" (middle bell A). When a win occurs during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, regardless of the button press order, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "15-coin bell" is displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

Furthermore, if you win "F_Strong Bell B," the type of winning combination (drawing flag group) in each draw will primarily be drawn under the "Strong Rare Combination" category.

As shown in Figures 78 to 104, the "F_SP role" has a "winning combination" among its constituent symbol combinations. Here, the "winning combinations" are "C_Special Role A_01" to "C_Special Role A_02", "C_Special Role B_01" to "C_Special Role B_02", "C_Special Role C_01" to "C_Special Role C_02", "C_Special Role D_01" to "C_Special Role D_06", "C_Special Role E_01" to "C_Special Role E_06", "C_Special Role F_01" to "C_Special Role F_06", "C_Special Role G_ This refers collectively to the symbol combinations "01" to "C_Special Role G_06", "C_Special Role H_01" to "C_Special Role H_06", "C_Special Role I_01" to "C_Special Role I_08", "C_Special Role J", "C_Special Role K_01" to "C_Special Role K_03", "C_Special Role L_01" to "C_Special Role L_04", and "C_Special Role M_01" to "C_Special Role M_03". When "F_SP Role" is won during a non-BB (Big Bonus) state, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that, regardless of the button press order, the symbol combination related to the "Reach" symbol is preferentially displayed on the winning line (Figure 119).

In the case of a "reach combination," depending on the timing of pressing stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbols may not be drawn onto the winning line. In this case, even though the "F_SP" combination has been won, none of the symbol combinations will stop on the winning line, resulting in a missed payout. If any of the symbol combinations related to the "reach combination" stop on the winning line, one medal will be paid out.

Furthermore, if you win the "F_SP role," in the various draws, the type of winning role (drawing flag group) will primarily be drawn under the "Rare Role" category.

(Handling of each winning combination while SB is in operation)
As shown in Figure 73, if you win "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" (Single Bonus) and the winning combination of symbols is displayed on the winning line in that game, the game state for the next game will transition to SB activation (SB state) (Figure 73 (13)). The Single Bonus ends after one game, and after it ends, the game returns to the state in which the player was at the time of winning (Figure 73 (12)).

"F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" (single bonuses) are subject to the prize draw when the RT state is RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT6, and can be won while in these game states (Figures 73 and 75). Note that in Figure 75, even in the RT5 game state, the single bonus has a draw value (1080 each), but since RT5 is a state where bonuses are carried over, if you win one of these, the draw result is treated as a "miss".

During SB (Super Bonus) operation, the prize draw is performed using an internal draw table different from that used in normal game states (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6). Furthermore, during SB operation, a draw table corresponding to the game state at the time of winning (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6) is provided (Figure 76).

In other words, if a single bonus is won while the game state is RT0, the next game (SB state) will use the internal lottery table for SB (RT0) (Figure 76) to determine the winning combination. Similarly, if a single bonus is won while the game state is RT1, the next game (SB state) will use the internal lottery table for SB (RT1) (Figure 76) to determine the winning combination. Similarly, if a single bonus is won while the game state is RT2, the next game (SB state) will use the internal lottery table for SB (RT2) (Figure 76) to determine the winning combination. Similarly, if a single bonus is won while the game state is RT3, the next game (SB state) will use the internal lottery table for SB (RT3) (Figure 76) to determine the winning combination. Furthermore, if a single bonus is won while the game state is RT6, the next game (SB state) will use the internal lottery table for SB (RT6) (Figure 76) to determine the winning combination.

Depending on the timing of the operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the symbol combinations for "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" may not be displayed on the winning line. In this case, even though a win has occurred, the symbol combination will not be displayed on the winning line, resulting in a missed win. However, in the case of "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32" (single bonuses), unlike the big bonuses ("F_Red 7 same color", "F_Red 7 different color", "F_White 7 same color", "F_White 7 different color"), the game does not transition to a flag-interval state (RT5) and carry over the internal winning combination. Therefore, in the case of a single bonus, if a win is not achieved in the game in which the win occurred, the game will not transition to SB operation (SB state).

Furthermore, when the game state is RT0, the possible winning combinations are "F_RT1 Replay," "F_RT2 Transition Replay," "F_Weak Cherry Replay," and "F_Weak Cherry Replay." Even when entering the SB state (the internal lottery table for SB (RT0) in Figure 76), which is reached when a single bonus is won in the RT state (RT0), all of these combinations are still subject to winning combinations (Figures 75 and 76).

Furthermore, when the game state is RT1, the following are included in the draw for winning combinations: "F_RT1 Replay," "F_RT2 Transition Replay," "F_Weak Cherry Replay," and "F_Weak Cherry Replay." Even when entering the SB state (the internal draw table for SB (RT1) in Figure 76), which is reached when a single bonus is won in the RT state (RT1), all of these are included in the draw (Figures 75 and 76).

Furthermore, when the game state is RT2, the "F_RT2 Transition Replay" is included as a target for the prize draw. Even when transitioning to the SB state (the internal draw table for SB (RT1) in Figure 76), which is reached when a single bonus is won during the RT state (RT1), this prize ("F_RT2 Transition Replay") is also included as a target for the prize draw (Figures 75 and 76).

Furthermore, when the game state is RT3, the possible winning combinations are "F_7 alignment replay," "6-choice weak C replay," and "6-choice strong C replay." Even when entering the SB state (the internal lottery table for SB (RT3) in Figure 76), which is reached when a single bonus is won in the RT state (RT3), all of these combinations are still subject to winning combinations (Figures 75 and 76).

Furthermore, when the game state is RT6, the "F_7 matching replay" and "F_7 fake replay" are included as targets for the prize draw. Even when entering the SB state (the internal draw table for SB (RT6) in Figure 76), which is reached when a single bonus is won in the RT state (RT6), all of these are also included in the prize draw (Figures 75 and 76).

In this embodiment, the winning combination (drawing flag group) is converted such that winning in the SB state based on a single bonus won in the general game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6) is more advantageous in transitioning between game states and in various draws than winning in the general game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6). This conversion is not performed after all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have been stopped, but rather when the start lever 7 is operated. In this embodiment, since the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the advantageous winning combination (drawing flag group) is displayed, this conversion can also be performed after all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have been stopped.

For example, if you win "F_RT1 Replay" in RT0, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Replay" category for various draws. However, if you win "F_RT1 Replay" in the SB state (SB (RT0)) which is entered after winning a single bonus in the current game state, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Weak Rare Replay" category, which is more advantageous than "Replay," for various draws.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes depending on whether the "F_RT1 Replay" is won in RT0 or in SB state (SB (RT0)). Specifically, as mentioned above, the "F_RT1 Replay" includes not only the "RT1 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" but also the "RT3 Transition Replay" symbol combinations as constituent symbol combinations. When the "F_RT1 Replay" is won in RT0, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combinations related to the "RT1 Transition Replay" are preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed. In contrast, if a "F_RT1 Replay" is drawn in SB state (SB(RT0)), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT3 Transition Replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the button press order.

Therefore, if you win with "F_RT1 Replay" in RT0, the game state will transition to RT1 when one of the symbol combinations of "RT1 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" is displayed. However, if you win with "F_RT1 Replay" in SB state (RT0), the game state will transition to RT3, which is more advantageous than RT1, after the end of SB state (RT0), when one of the symbol combinations of "RT3 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" is displayed.

Similarly, when "F_RT1 Replay" is drawn in SB state (SB (RT1)), the winning combination (drawing flag group) is converted ("Replay" → "Weakly Rare Replay") and the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed ("RT1 Transition Replay" → "RT3 Transition Replay") to be more advantageous than when "F_RT1 Replay" is drawn in RT1.

Furthermore, for example, if you win "F_RT2 Replay" in RT0, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Replay" category for various draws. However, if you win "F_RT2 Replay" in the SB state (SB (RT0)) which is entered after winning a single bonus in the current game state, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Rare Combination" category, which is more advantageous than "Replay," for various draws.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes depending on whether the "F_RT2 Replay" is won in RT0 or in SB state (SB (RT0)). Specifically, as mentioned above, the "F_RT2 Replay" includes not only the "RT2 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" but also the "Strong Cherry Replay" symbol combination as a constituent symbol combination. When the "F_RT2 Replay" is won in RT0, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "RT2 Transition Replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed. In contrast, if the "F_RT2 Replay" combination is drawn in SB state (SB(RT0)), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "Strong Cherry Replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the button press order.

Therefore, if you win with "F_RT2 Replay" in RT0, the game state will transition to RT2 when one of the symbol combinations of "RT2 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" is displayed. On the other hand, if you win with "F_RT2 Replay" in SB state (RT0), one of the symbol combinations of "Strong Cherry Replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed. Since "Strong Cherry Replay" functions as an RT2 transition replay, even if you win with "F_RT2 Replay" in SB state (RT0), the game state will transition to RT2 after the end of SB state (RT0).

Similarly, when "F_RT2 Replay" is drawn in SB state (SB(RT1)) or SB state (SB(RT2)), the winning combination (drawing flag group) is converted ("Replay" → "Strong Rare Combination") and the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed ("RT2 Transition Replay" → "Strong Cherry Replay") to be more advantageous than when "F_RT2 Replay" is drawn in RT1 or RT2.

Furthermore, for example, if you win "F_Weak Cherry Replay" in RT0, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Weak Rare Replay" category for various draws. However, if you win "F_Weak Cherry Replay" in the SB state (SB (RT0)) which is entered after winning a single bonus in the current game state, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Strong Rare Combination" category, which is more advantageous than "Weak Rare Replay," for various draws.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes depending on whether the "F_Weak C Replay" is won in RT0 or in SB state (SB (RT0)). Specifically, as mentioned above, the "F_Weak C Replay" includes not only the "RT3 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" but also the "RT6 Transition Replay" symbol combinations as constituent symbols. When the "F_Weak C Replay" is won in RT0, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "RT3 Transition Replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed. In contrast, if the "F_Weak C Replay" combination is drawn in SB state (SB(RT0)), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that, regardless of the button press order, the symbol combination related to the "RT6 Transition Replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line.

Therefore, if you win with "F_Weak C Replay" in RT0, one of the symbol combinations of "RT3 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" will stop and be displayed, causing the game state (RT state) to transition to RT3. On the other hand, if you win with "F_Weak C Replay" in SB state (RT0), one of the symbol combinations of "RT6 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" will stop and be displayed, and after the end of SB state (RT0), the game state will transition to RT6, which is more advantageous than RT3.

Similarly, when "F_Weak C Replay" is drawn in SB state (SB (RT1)), the winning combination (drawing flag group) is converted ("Weak Rare Replay" → "Strong Rare Combination") and the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed ("RT3 Transition Replay" → "RT6 Transition Replay") to be more advantageous than when "F_Weak C Replay" is drawn in RT1.

Furthermore, for example, in RT3, if you win one of the "6-choice weak C replays: 'F_weak C replay 123', 'F_weak C replay 132', 'F_weak C replay 213', 'F_weak C replay 231', 'F_weak C replay 312', 'F_weak C replay 321'", and the button press sequence was correct, various draws will be conducted in the "weak rare replay" category for the winning combination (drawing flag group). If the button press sequence was anything other than that, various draws will be conducted in the "replay" category for the winning combination (drawing flag group). On the other hand, if you enter the SB state (SB (RT3)) after winning a single bonus in the current game state and you win one of the "6-choice weak C-Replay" combinations, regardless of the button press order, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "strong rare combination" category, which is more advantageous than both "Replay" and "weak rare Replay," and various draws will be conducted within that category.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed depending on whether the "6-choice weak C-replay" is won in RT3 or in SB state (SB (RT3)). Specifically, as mentioned above, the "6-choice weak C-replay" always includes not only the "RT1 transition replay (Figure 119)" and "RT3 transition replay (Figure 119)" but also the "RT6 transition replay (Figure 119)" as part of its constituent symbol combinations. Then, in RT3, if one of the "six-choice weak C-replay" combinations is selected, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "RT3 transition replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line if the button press order was correct. If any other button press order was selected, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "RT1 transition replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. In contrast, in SB state (SB (RT3)), if one of the "six-choice weak C-replay" combinations is selected, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "RT6 transition replay (Figure 119)" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the button press order.

Therefore, when a "six-choice weak C-replay" is selected in RT3, if the correct button sequence was followed, one of the symbol combinations of the "RT3 transition replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, maintaining the game state in RT3. If any other button sequence was selected, one of the symbol combinations of the "RT1 transition replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, transitioning the game state to RT1, which is less favorable than RT3. On the other hand, when a "six-choice weak C-replay" is selected in the SB state (RT3), one of the symbol combinations of the "RT6 transition replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, transitioning the game state to RT6, which is more favorable than RT3, after the SB state (RT3) ends.

Furthermore, for example, in RT3, if you win one of the "6-choice Strong C Replay: 'F_Strong C Replay 123', 'F_Strong C Replay 132', 'F_Strong C Replay 213', 'F_Strong C Replay 231', 'F_Strong C Replay 312', 'F_Strong C Replay 321'", and the button press sequence was correct, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Strong Rare Combination" category for various draws. If the button press sequence was anything other than that, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Replay" category for various draws. On the other hand, if you win one of the "6-choice Strong C Replay" in the SB state (SB (RT3)) which is entered by winning a single bonus in the current game state, regardless of the button press sequence, the winning combination (drawing flag group) will be in the "Strong Rare Combination" category, just as if the button press sequence had been correct, for various draws.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes depending on whether the "6-choice strong C-replay" is won in RT3 or in SB state (SB (RT3)). Specifically, as mentioned above, all "6-choice strong C-replays" include the symbol combinations of "RT1 transition replay (Figure 119)" and "RT6 transition replay (Figure 119)" as constituent symbol combinations. When one of the "6-choice strong C-replays" is won in RT3, if the correct button press sequence was followed, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT6 transition replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. If any other button press sequence was followed, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to "RT1 transition replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. In contrast, if a "6-choice strong C-replay" is selected in SB state (SB (RT3)), the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the "RT6 transition replay (Figure 119)" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the button press order.

Therefore, when a "Strong C Replay" of the six choices is selected in RT3, if the correct button sequence was followed, one of the symbol combinations of the "RT6 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, transitioning the game state to RT6, which is more advantageous than RT3. If any other button sequence was selected, one of the symbol combinations of the "RT1 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, causing the game state to drop (transition) to RT1, which is less advantageous than RT3. On the other hand, when a "Strong C Replay" of the six choices is selected in the SB state (RT3), one of the symbol combinations of the "RT6 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, causing the game state to transition to RT6, which is more advantageous than RT3, after the end of the SB state (RT3).

Furthermore, for example, if you hit the "F_7 alignment replay" in RT3, you will receive either a direct AT or one V stock regardless of the button press order. Similarly, if you hit the "F_7 alignment replay" in the SB state (SB (RT3)) which is entered after winning a single bonus in the current game state, you will also receive either a direct AT or one V stock regardless of the button press order.

Furthermore, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes depending on whether the "F_7 alignment replay" is won in RT3 or in SB state (SB (RT3)). Specifically, as described above, the "F_7 alignment replay" includes the symbol combinations of "RT3 transition replay (Figure 119)" and "red 7 replay (Figure 119)" as constituent symbol combinations. Furthermore, if a "F_7 alignment replay" is won in RT3, and the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination related to "Red 7 Replay (Figure 119)" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. If the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination related to "RT3 transition replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. In contrast, if an "F_7 alignment replay" is won in SB state (SB (RT3)), regardless of the press order, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination related to "RT6 transition replay (Figure 119)" is preferentially displayed on the winning line.

Therefore, when you win the "F_7 alignment replay" in RT3, if the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and you aim to stop the red 7 symbol, the display will show the red 7 symbols aligned on the middle line, and you will be awarded one direct AT or V stock. Also, when you win the "F_7 alignment replay" in RT3, if the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, even if you aim to stop the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbols will not align on the middle line, and one of the symbol combinations of the "RT3 transition replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed, but you will be awarded one direct AT or V stock. In this case, the RT state will be maintained at RT3. On the other hand, if you win the "F_7 alignment replay" in SB state (RT3), regardless of the button press order, if you aim for the red 7 symbol, the display will show the red 7 symbols aligned on the middle line, and you will be awarded either a direct AT or one V stock.

Similarly, if you win with "F_7 alignment replay" in SB state (SB (RT6)), the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be changed (only if the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, it will be "Red 7 replay" → "Red 7 replay" regardless of the button press order).

Furthermore, for example, if you win "F_7 Fake Replay" in RT6, neither a direct AT nor a V-stock will be awarded, regardless of the button press order. On the other hand, if you win "F_7 Matching Replay" in the SB state (SB (RT6)) which is entered by winning a single bonus in the current game state, one direct AT or one V-stock will be awarded, regardless of the button press order.

Furthermore, the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes depending on whether the "F_7 Fake Rep" is won in RT6 or in SB state (SB (RT6)). Specifically, as described above, the "F_7 Fake Rep" includes the following symbol combinations as its constituent symbols: "RT3 Transition Rep (Figure 119)", "Red 7 Fake (Figure 119)", and "Red 7 Rep (Figure 119)". Furthermore, if the "F_7 Fake Replay" is won in RT6, and the button press order was 3→2→1, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination related to the "Red 7 Fake (Figure 119)" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. If the button press order was anything other than 3→2→1, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination related to the "RT3 Transition Replay" is preferentially displayed on the winning line. In contrast, if the "F_7 Fake Replay" is won in SB state (SB (RT6)), the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination related to the "Red 7 Replay (Figure 119)" is preferentially displayed on the winning line, regardless of the button press order.

Therefore, when you win "F_7 Fake Replay" in RT6, if the button press order is (3→2→1), if you aim to stop the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbols will line up on the middle line, specifically on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, creating a red 7 symbol tenpai state. However, even if you aim to stop the red 7 symbol on the left reel 3L, the red 7 symbol will not stop in the middle position, resulting in a stop display pattern where neither a direct AT nor a V stock is awarded. Also, when you win "F_7 Fake Replay" in RT6, if the button press order is anything other than (3→2→1), even if you aim to stop the red 7 symbol, the red 7 symbols will not line up on the middle line, and one of the symbol combinations of "RT3 Transition Replay (Figure 119)" will be displayed as the stop, resulting in neither a direct AT nor a V stock being awarded. In this case, the RT state will drop (transition) from RT6 to the disadvantageous RT3. On the other hand, if you win "F_7 Fake Replay" in SB state (RT6), regardless of the button press order, if you aim for the red 7 symbol, the display will show the red 7 symbols aligned on the middle line, and you will be awarded either a direct AT or one V stock.

In addition, in SB states (SB(RT0), SB(RT1), SB(RT2), SB(RT3), SB(RT6)), single bonuses are subject to the prize draw. If a prize is won in the game, the next game will also remain in SB state (SB(RT0), SB(RT1), SB(RT2), SB(RT3), SB(RT6)).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when a re-playable combination that converts to a favorable combination is won during the SB state, the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed so that the symbol combination related to the converted favorable combination is displayed regardless of the button press order or timing. However, it is also possible to configure the stopping control so that the symbol combination related to the converted favorable combination is displayed only when a specific button press order or timing is used.

Up to this point, in the section on handling each winning combination during SB operation, we have explained that one of the benefits of the SB state is that, for at least some of the winning combinations, the lottery flag group is converted in a direction favorable to the player, making the determination regarding the granting of AT etc. more favorable in the SB state compared to other predetermined states (for example, during normal (advantageous section) when SB is not operating). However, the method of making the SB state a favorable state is not limited to this, and it is sufficient as long as it is possible to perform a determination that is more favorable to the player than in other predetermined states. For example, a lottery table with a lottery coefficient (lottery value) that is more favorable than in other predetermined states may be set as the lottery table for AT-related lotteries during the SB state, and a favorable determination may be made by referring to that lottery table during SB. The method of setting up such a separate table may be combined with the flag conversion method. Furthermore, only during the SB state, it may be treated as a higher state such as high probability or super high probability, or AT-related determinations may be performed as if the player is in an advantageous mode. You may use one of the methods exemplified above, or you may combine multiple methods as appropriate. Furthermore, the flag conversion method described above in this embodiment has the advantage of saving program capacity related to the lottery compared to the case where a lottery table dedicated to the SB state is provided.

Furthermore, although it was explained that the reel stop control is changed in the SB state, it is also possible to use the same reel stop control as in games where SB is not activated, without any reel stop control being performed.

Furthermore, when a single bonus combination ("F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32") is achieved, a visual effect (for example, a special winning sound or an effect suggesting that the next game is a chance) may be used to indicate or notify that this has occurred. Additionally, during gameplay in SB (Single Bonus) state, a visual effect may be used to indicate or notify that the player is in SB state or at least in some kind of chance state.

Up to this point, we have explained the upgrading of winning combinations (conversion to more advantageous combinations) and reel control changes during single bonus activation. However, these processes may also be performed in predetermined states other than single bonus activation (SB state). By having the upgrading process and/or reel control changes performed in predetermined states that may occur during the progress of the game, the expectation of winning combinations will change compared to the predetermined state, and the gameplay can be made more diverse. Here, predetermined states may include, for example, the following states.
・RB is in operation (Type 1 special feature is in operation)
- During BB operation (while the Type 1 special feature is not operating, and the Type 1 feature interlocking device is operating)
- During Big Bonus (BB) and Regular Bonus (RB) operation (Type 1 special bonus device operation while Type 1 bonus device interlocking operation device is in operation)
・CB is in operation (Type 2 special features are in operation)
- During general operation while MB is active (while the Type 2 special feature is not active, and the Type 2 feature interlocking mechanism is active)
- MB is in operation, CB is in operation (Type 2 special feature is in operation, Type 2 interlocking mechanism is in operation)
- In machines where the basic state is between any bonus role flags or between bonus flags, the same processing may be performed in other states as well.

[12-6. Correspondence between internal winning combinations and lottery flags, and correspondence between lottery flags and lottery flag groups]
Next, we will explain in detail the gameplay flow of the fourth gaming machine, pachislo machine 1. In pachislo machine 1, various draws are performed based on internal winning combinations, etc. In the following, internal winning combinations are converted into draw flags to perform various draws, and further, draw flags are converted into draw flag groups to perform various draws.

Figures 120 and 121 show the correspondence between internal winning combinations and lottery flags. In the fourth type of game machine, the pachislo machine 1, various lotteries may be performed when the start lever 7 is operated (at the start) or when the stop buttons corresponding to three of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (third stop, final stop) are released (at 3off). Figure 120 shows the correspondence between internal winning combinations and lottery flags used in the various lotteries performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and Figure 121 shows the correspondence between internal winning combinations and lottery flags used in the various lotteries performed at 3off. In Figure 120, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in the SB state is indicated by "■", the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in the BB general state is indicated by "◆", the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in navigation types "1" to "6" in Figure 190 is indicated by "※", and the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in other states is indicated by "●". Furthermore, in Figure 121, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag is indicated by "●".

Figures 122 to 125 show the correspondence between lottery flags and lottery flag groups. Lottery flag groups 1 to 5, 8 to 14, and 16 to 23 in Figures 122 to 125 classify lottery flags into multiple lottery flag groups, which are used in various types of lotteries. Here, in lottery flag group 1 in Figure 122, lottery flags marked with a "●" are classified to belong to the corresponding lottery flag group. In other words, in lottery flag group 1, the lottery flags "Miss," "Middle Cherry," "Weak Watermelon," "Strong Watermelon," "Strong Rare Role A," and "Strong Rare Role B" are classified into lottery flag group "Other," and the lottery flag "Bell" is classified into lottery flag group "Bell." Furthermore, in lottery flag group 1, lottery flags that do not have a "●" mark are excluded from the lottery using lottery flag group 1.

Similar to D1's draw flag group 1, in each of the draw flag groups 2-5, 8-14, and 16-23 shown in Figures 122-125, draw flags marked with a "●" belong to the corresponding draw flag group. Note that draw flags without a "●" mark in each of the draw flag groups 2-5, 8-14, and 16-23 are excluded from the draws using those respective groups.

[12-7. Various Data Tables]
Next, with reference to Figures 126 to 177, the various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be explained. The main control circuit 100 performs a draw using the data tables shown below, with random values in the range of 0 to 255 (i.e., a probability denominator of 256). In some of the diagrams in Figures 126 to 177, some of the cells with a coefficient of 0 in the draw tables are filled in black for easier viewing.

[12-7-1. Advantageous Period Transition/CZ Mode Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 126 is the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery table used for the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery, which performs both the advantageous section transition lottery and the CZ mode lottery (CZ mode lottery) in a single lottery. Figure 126(a) is the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery table referenced when the lottery flag group in lottery flag group 1 in Figure 122 is "Other", and Figure 126(b) is the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery table referenced when the lottery flag group in lottery flag group 1 in Figure 122 is "Bell".

The advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery table in Figure 126(a) specifies the lottery value information for the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery results ("Non-winning," "Transition + CZ Mode A," "Transition + CZ Mode B," "Transition + CZ Mode C," "Transition + CZ Mode D") for each setting ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"). Similarly, the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery table in Figure 126(b) specifies the lottery value information for the advantageous section transition/CZ mode lottery results ("Non-winning," "Transition + CZ Mode D") for each setting ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6").

[12-7-2. Initial Resonance Point Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 127 is the initial resonance point lottery table used in the initial resonance point lottery, which determines the initial value of the resonance points held when transitioning to the advantageous period.

The initial resonance point lottery table in Figure 127 defines the lottery value information for the initial resonance point lottery results ("0 points", "50 points", "100 points") for each setting ("Settings 2, 4", "Settings 1, 6", "Settings 3, 5").

[12-7-3. Next CZR Activation Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 128 is the next CZR activation lottery table used in the next CZR activation lottery, which determines whether or not the type of CZ for the next CZ will be "CZR" (whether or not to activate CZR).

The next CZR activation lottery table in Figure 128 defines the information about the lottery values for the results of the next CZR activation lottery ("Non-Winning" and "Winning").

[12-7-4. Table for drawing initial values of the number of games between Big Bonuses]
Next, Figure 129 is the BB game count initial value lottery table used in the BB game count initial value lottery, which determines the initial value of the number of games to be set in the BB game count counter.

The initial game count lottery table in Figure 129 specifies the lottery value information for the initial game count lottery results ("0G", "500G") for each setting ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6").

[12-7-5. Small Role CZ Preliminary Drawing Table]
Next, Figure 130 is a preliminary small role CZ lottery table used for the preliminary small role CZ lottery, which determines whether or not to conduct the pre-CZ small role CZ lottery (described later).

The preliminary lottery table for the minor role CZ (Chance Zone) in Figure 130 specifies the lottery value information for the lottery results ("No minor role CZ lottery performed," "Minor role CZ lottery performed") for each CZ mode ("Mode A," "Mode B," "Mode C," "Mode D").

[12-7-6. CZ (Chance Zone) Draw Table for Small Roles Before Winning a CZ]
Next, Figures 131 to 133 show the pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery table used for the pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery, which is performed when the number of V stocks is "0" and includes a lottery for transitioning to the CZ (CZ transition lottery), a lottery for the number of V stocks acquired when the CZ transition lottery is won (V stock acquisition lottery), and a lottery for fake patterns related to the number of games in the CZ premonition (fake pattern lottery). Figure 131(a) is the pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 1, 3" and the current state is "Low Probability", Figure 131(b) is the pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 2, 5" and the current state is "Low Probability", and Figure 131(c) is the pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 4, 6" and the current state is "Low Probability". Furthermore, Figure 132(d) is a pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 1, 3" and the stay state is "High Probability", Figure 132(e) is a pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 2, 5" and the stay state is "High Probability", and Figure 132(f) is a pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 4, 6" and the stay state is "High Probability". Figure 133(g) is a pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 1, 3" and the current state is "Super High Probability", Figure 133(h) is a pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 2, 5" and the current state is "Super High Probability", and Figure 133(i) is a pre-CZ winning small role CZ lottery table that is referenced when the setting is "Setting 4, 6" and the current state is "Super High Probability".

The pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery tables in Figures 131 to 133 define the information of the lottery values for the pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery results ("Non-win (fake non-win)", "Non-win (fake pattern 1)", "Acquired 1 V-stock (fake pattern 1)", "Acquired 2 V-stocks (fake pattern 1)", "Non-win (fake pattern 2)", "Acquired 1 V-stock (fake pattern 2)", "Acquired 2 V-stocks (fake pattern 2)") for each lottery flag group ("Other", "Bell", "Weak rare replay", "Weak watermelon", "Strong watermelon", "Strong rare role") in lottery flag group 2 of Figure 122. Here, in the lottery result "〇〇〇 (□□□)", "〇〇〇" represents the parts related to the CZ transition lottery and the V-stock acquisition lottery. "Acquiring 1 V-stock" and "Acquiring 2 V-stocks" represent winning the CZ transition lottery (transition to CZ). Furthermore, in the lottery result "〇〇〇 (□□□)", "□□□" represents the parts related to the fake pattern lottery.

[12-7-7. CZ (Chance Zone) Lottery Table After Winning a Small Role]
Next, Figure 134 is the CZ win small role CZ lottery table used for the CZ win small role CZ lottery, which is a lottery for the number of V stocks to be acquired (V stock acquisition lottery) that is performed when the number of V stocks is "1" or more.

The CZ draw table after winning a CZ (Chance Zone) in Figure 134 defines the information on the draw values for the draw results ("Not won," "1 V-stock acquired," "2 V-stock acquired") of the CZ draw after winning a CZ for each draw flag group ("Weak rare role," "Strong watermelon," "Strong rare role," "Middle cherry") in draw flag group 3 of Figure 122.

[12-7-8. CZ Lottery Table when BB is won]
Next, Figure 135 is the BB win CZ lottery table used for the BB win CZ lottery, which performs a lottery for the number of V-stocks acquired (V-stock acquisition lottery) and a lottery for fake patterns related to the number of games in the CZ premonition (fake pattern lottery) in a single lottery. The BB win CZ lottery, which is performed when the number of V-stocks is "0", also functions as a CZ transition lottery (CZ transition lottery). Figure 135(a) is the BB win CZ lottery table referenced when the number of V-stocks is "0", and Figure 135(b) is the BB win CZ lottery table referenced when the number of V-stocks is "1" or more.

The BB win CZ lottery table in Figure 135(a) specifies the lottery value information for the lottery results of the BB win CZ lottery ("Non-win (fake non-win)", "Non-win (fake pattern 1)", "Acquired 1 V-stock (fake clear)", "Acquired 1 V-stock (fake pattern 1)", "Acquired 2 V-stocks (fake clear)") for each state ("Low probability", "High probability", "Super high probability"). The BB win CZ lottery table in Figure 135(b) specifies the lottery value information for the lottery results of the BB win CZ lottery ("Non-win (fake non-win)", "Non-win (fake clear)", "Acquired 1 V-stock (fake pattern 1)") for each state ("Low probability", "High probability", "Super high probability"). This section defines the information regarding the lottery values for "Fake Clear" and "Acquiring 2 V-Stocks (Fake Clear)". Here, in the lottery result "XXX (□□□)", "XXX" refers to the V-Stock acquisition lottery. If the number of V-Stocks is "0", the BB win CZ lottery is performed, and "Acquiring 1 V-Stock" or "Acquiring 2 V-Stocks" results in a win in the CZ transition lottery (transition to CZ). Furthermore, in the lottery result "XXX (□□□)", "□□□" refers to the fake pattern lottery. Note that the CZ premonition counter is reset (set to "0") during the "Fake Clear" battle.

[12-7-9. CZ Pre-announcement Game Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 136 is the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table used in the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery that determines the number of games in the CZ pre-announcement.

The CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 136 defines the information of the lottery values for the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery results ("5-8G", "9-12G", "13-16G", "17-20G", "21-24G", "25-28G", "29-32G", "33-36G") for each fake table ("Table 1" to "Table 8") generated from fake patterns ("Fake Pattern 1" to "Fake Pattern 3"). The lottery results in the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table have a range for the number of games in the CZ pre-announcement, and the number of games in the CZ pre-announcement is determined equally within that range.

[12-7-10. BB Pre-announcement Game Count Lottery Table Next, Figure 137 is the BB pre-announcement game count lottery table used in the BB pre-announcement game count lottery that determines the number of games in the BB pre-announcement.

The BB pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 137 defines the information of the lottery values for the BB pre-announcement game count lottery results ("1G" to "8G").

[12-7-11. Normal to High Probability Transition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 138 is a normal-to-high probability transition lottery table used for the normal-to-high probability transition lottery, which performs a lottery for transitioning the current state (current state transition lottery) and a lottery for the number of games added to the high-probability obstacle game when the current state is "high probability" (high-probability obstacle game addition lottery) in a single lottery. Figure 138(a) is the normal-to-high probability transition lottery table referenced when the current state is "low probability", Figure 138(b) is the normal-to-high probability transition lottery table referenced when the current state is "high probability", and Figure 138(c) is the normal-to-high probability transition lottery table referenced when the current state is "super high probability".

The normal-to-high probability transition lottery tables in Figures 138(a) and (b) specify the information of the lottery values for the normal-to-high probability transition lottery results ("No transition", "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter added by 10", "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter added by 20", "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter added by 30", "Super high probability") for each lottery flag group ("Weak rare replay", "Watermelon", "Strong rare role") in lottery flag group 4 of Figure 122. The normal-to-high probability transition lottery table in Figure 138(c) specifies the information of the lottery values for the normal-to-high probability transition lottery results ("No transition", "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter added by 10") for each lottery flag group ("Weak rare replay", "Watermelon", "Strong rare role") in lottery flag group 4 of Figure 122. The "No Transition," "High Probability," and "Super High Probability" results in the lottery relate to the state transition lottery. The "+High Probability Counter Added ○○○" result relates to the high probability game count lottery.

[12-7-12. High Probability Drop Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 139 is the high probability drop lottery table used in the high probability drop lottery, which determines whether or not to drop the stay state from "high probability" to "low probability".

The high-probability mode drop-out lottery table in Figure 139 defines the lottery value information for the high-probability mode drop-out lottery results ("low probability" and "high probability") for each game state ("normal (during advantageous period)" and "NAT").

[12-7-13. Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table (Normal)]
Next, Figure 140 is the normal resonance point acquisition lottery table used in the normal resonance point acquisition lottery that determines the number of resonance points to be acquired. Figure 140(a) is the normal resonance point acquisition lottery table referenced when the setting is "setting 1, 2", Figure 140(b) is the normal resonance point acquisition lottery table referenced when the setting is "setting 3, 4", and Figure 140(c) is the normal resonance point acquisition lottery table referenced when the setting is "setting 5, 6".

The normal resonance point acquisition lottery table in Figure 140 defines the information of the lottery values for the normal resonance point acquisition lottery results ("0 points", "1 point", "3 points", "5 points", "10 points", "20 points", "30 points", "50 points", "100 points") for each lottery flag group ("JAC role 3", "Middle Cherry") in lottery flag group 5 in Figure 122.

[12-7-14. CZ Mode Transition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 141 is the CZ mode transition lottery table used in the CZ mode transition lottery, which determines whether or not the CZ mode will be upgraded by one level during normal play (during the advantageous period).

The CZ mode transition lottery table in Figure 141 specifies the lottery value information for the lottery result ("Mode Maintained," "One Level Up") of the CZ mode transition lottery for each CZ mode ("Mode A" to "Mode D").

[12-7-15. BB Interval Game Addition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 142 is the BB game addition count lottery table used in the BB game addition count lottery, which determines the number of games to be added to the BB game count counter.

The BB (Big Bonus) game addition lottery table in Figure 142 specifies the lottery values for the BB game addition lottery results ("add 1000", "add 3", "add 5", "add 10", "add 20", "add 30", "add 50", "add 100") for each CZ (Challenge Zone) mode ("Mode A" to "Mode D").

[12-7-16. LI Transition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 143 shows the LI transition lottery table used for the LI transition lottery, which is a lottery for transitioning to the limit (LI).

The LI transition lottery table in Figure 143 defines the lottery value information for the lottery results ("Non-Winning" and "Winning") of the LI transition lottery for each setting ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6").

[12-7-17. 1st CZ Success Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 144 is the first CZ success lottery table used for the first CZ success lottery, which performs both a lottery for transitioning to the special bonus zone (SZ) (CZ success lottery) and a lottery for the number of V rank increases upon winning the CZ success lottery (V rank up lottery) in a single lottery. Figure 144(a) is the first CZ success lottery table referenced when there is no BB overlap, and Figure 144(b) is the first CZ success lottery table referenced when there is a BB overlap.

The first CZ success lottery table in Figure 144 defines the lottery value information for the lottery results ("Non-Winning," "Winning," "Winning + CZ Rank 1 Up," "Winning + CZ Rank 2 Up") of the first CZ success lottery for each lottery flag group ("Other," "Weak Rare Role," "Strong Rare Role," "Middle Cherry") in lottery flag group 8 of Figure 123. The "Winning" portion of the lottery result is related to the CZ success lottery. The portion of the lottery result excluding "Winning" is related to the V rank up lottery.

[12-7-18. 2nd CZ success lottery table]
Next, Figure 145 shows the second CZ success lottery table used for the second CZ success lottery, which is a lottery for transitioning to the special bonus zone (SZ) (CZ success lottery). Figure 145(a) is the second CZ success lottery table referenced when the CZ type is "NCZ", Figure 145(b) is the second CZ success lottery table referenced when the CZ type is "ACZ", and Figure 145(c) is the second CZ success lottery table referenced when the CZ type is "CZR".

The second CZ success lottery table in Figure 145 specifies the lottery value information for the lottery result ("Non-Winning" or "Winning") of the second CZ success lottery for each game number in the CZ ("1st to 2nd game before the final game," or "1st game before the final game").

[12-7-19. CZ Reward Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 146 is a CZ reward lottery table used for a CZ reward lottery that combines a lottery for the type of SZ to be set (SZ type lottery) and a lottery for the number of resonance points to be acquired (resonance point acquisition lottery). Figure 146(a) is the CZ reward lottery table referenced when the lottery flag group in lottery flag group 9 in Figure 123 is "Other", and Figure 146(b) is the CZ reward lottery table referenced when the lottery flag group in lottery flag group 9 is "Lipche".

The CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(a) specifies the information on the lottery values for the CZ reward lottery results ("SZ Type 1" to "SZ Type 5") for each V rank ("Rank 1" to "Rank 4"). The CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(b) specifies the information on the lottery values for the CZ reward lottery results ("SZ Type 5", "SZ Type 6", "SZ Type 7 + Resonance Points 50", "SZ Type 8 + Resonance Points 100") for each V rank ("Rank 1" to "Rank 4").

[12-7-20. CZ Mode Lottery Table in Case of CZ Failure]
Next, Figure 147 is the CZ failure CZ mode lottery table used for the CZ failure CZ mode lottery, which is a lottery for the CZ mode set when the transition to the bonus zone (SZ) is unsuccessful (CZ failure) and the player returns to the normal (advantageous section).

The CZ mode lottery table in Figure 147, which shows the results of the CZ mode lottery upon failure, specifies the lottery value information for each setting ("Setting 1, 2", "Setting 3, 4", "Setting 5, 6") for the CZ mode lottery upon failure ("CZ Mode A" to "CZ Mode D").

[12-7-21. NAT Game Addition Count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 148 is the NAT game addition number (for SZ types 1, 5 to 8) lottery table used in the NAT game addition number (SZ types 1, 5 to 8) lottery that determines the number of games added in a general AT (NAT) game.

The NAT game addition count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) lottery table in Figure 148 specifies the lottery value information for the lottery results ("+20G", "+30G", "+50G") of the NAT game addition count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) lottery for each lottery flag group ("Miss", "Small win", "Weak rare win", "Strong watermelon", "Strong rare win") in lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123.

[12-7-22. V-Stock Acquisition Count (for SZ Type 1) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 149 is the V-stock acquisition number (for SZ type 1) lottery table used in the V-stock acquisition number (for SZ type 1) lottery that determines whether or not one V-stock is acquired.

The V-Stock Acquisition Count (for SZ Type 1) lottery table in Figure 149 defines the lottery value information for the lottery results ("Non-Winning" and "1 V-Stock Acquired") of the V-Stock Acquisition Count (for SZ Type 1) lottery for each lottery flag group ("Miss," "Small Win," "Weak Rare Win," "Strong Watermelon," and "Strong Rare Win") in the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123.

[12-7-23. NAT Game Addition Count (for SZ Type 2) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 150 is the NAT game addition number (for SZ type 2) lottery table used for the NAT game addition number (for SZ type 2) lottery that determines the number of games added in a general AT (NAT) game.

The NAT game addition count (for SZ type 2) lottery table in Figure 150 defines the information of the lottery values for the lottery results ("+5G", "+10G", "+20G", "+30G") of the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 2) lottery for each lottery flag group ("Other", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", "Strong Rare Role") in lottery flag group 22 in Figure 125.

[12-7-24. NAT Game Addition Count (for SZ Type 3) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 151 is the NAT game addition number (for SZ type 3) lottery table used for the NAT game addition number (for SZ type 3) lottery that determines the number of games added in a general AT (NAT) game.

The NAT game addition count (for SZ type 3) lottery table in Figure 151 defines the information of the lottery values for the lottery results ("+5G", "+10G", "+20G", "+30G", "+50G") of the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 3) lottery for each lottery flag group ("Miss", "Replay", "Bell", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", "Strong Rare Role") in the lottery flag group 11 in Figure 123.

[12-7-25. Remaining Bonus Count Reload (for SZ Type 3) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 152 is the remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery table used for the remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery, which determines whether or not to return the remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery, which adds to the number of games added in a general AT (NAT) game, back to its original value (initial value: in this case, "5").

The remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery table in Figure 152 defines the lottery value information for the remaining bonus count reload lottery table ("Non-winning," "Reset remaining bonus count") for each lottery flag group ("Replay," "Rare Role") in the lottery flag group 21 in Figure 125.

[12-7-26. SZ Type 4 Level Up/NAT Game Addition Count (for SZ Type 4) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 153 is the SZ Type 4 Level Up/NAT Game Addition (for SZ Type 4) lottery table used for the SZ Type 4 Level Up/NAT Game Addition (for SZ Type 4) lottery, which performs a lottery for the number of SZ Type 4 level ups (SZ Type 4 Level Up Lottery) and a lottery for the number of games added in a general AT (NAT) game (NAT Game Addition Lottery) in a single lottery.

The SZ Type 4 Level Up/NAT Game Addition (for SZ Type 4) lottery table in Figure 153 specifies the lottery value information for each lottery flag group ("Miss," "Small Win," "Rare Win," "Strong Watermelon," "Strong Rare Win") in the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123, for the lottery results ("Non-Winning," "SZ Type 4 Level +1, NAT Game Count +5," "SZ Type 4 Level +2, NAT Game Count +10," "SZ Type 4 Level +3, NAT Game Count +20").

[12-7-27. NAT Game Addition Loop (for SZ Type 4) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 154 is the NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery table used for the NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery, which repeats the lottery for whether the number of games added to a general AT (NAT) game "1" is correct until it is "incorrect".

The NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery table in Figure 154 defines the information on the lottery values for the NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery results ("Non-winning" and "Winning (+1G)") for each SZ type 4 level ("Level 0" to "Level 5").

[12-7-28. NAT Game Addition Count (for SZ Type 4) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 155 is the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery table used for the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery, which is a lottery for the number of games added in a general AT (NAT) game.

The NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery table in Figure 155 defines the information of the lottery values for the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery results ("30G", "40G", "50G") for each lottery flag group ("Miss", "Small win", "Weak rare win", "Strong watermelon", "Strong rare win") in lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123.

[12-7-29. Aim for the special effect, V-stock acquisition, SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table]
Next, Figure 156 is the Aim for Figure 156(a) is the lottery table for targeting the special effect, acquiring V-stock, and transitioning to SZ mode (for SZ types 5-8) that is referenced when SZ mode is "SZ mode 1", Figure 156(b) is the lottery table for targeting the special effect, acquiring V-stock, and transitioning to SZ mode (for SZ types 5-8) that is referenced when SZ mode is "SZ mode 2", and Figure 156(c) is the lottery table for targeting the special effect, acquiring V-stock, and transitioning to SZ mode (for SZ types 5-8) that is referenced when SZ mode is "SZ mode 3".

The lottery tables for the "Aim!" effect, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) shown in Figures 156(a) to (c) define the information of the lottery values for the "Aim!" effect, V-stock, and SZ mode transition lottery results ("No Aim - SZ Mode 1", "No Aim - SZ Mode 2", "No Aim - SZ Mode 3", "Aim (Not Matching) - SZ Mode 1", "Aim (Not Matching) - SZ Mode 2", "Aim (Not Matching) - SZ Mode 3", "Aim (Matching) + V-stock - SZ Mode 1", "Aim (Matching) + V-stock - SZ Mode 2", "Aim (Matching) + V-stock - SZ Mode 3") for each lottery flag group ("Matching", "Replay", "Bell", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", "Strong Rare Role") in the lottery flag group 12 shown in Figure 123.

[12-7-30. V-Stock Acquisition Count (for SZ types 5-8) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 157 is the V-stock acquisition number (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table used in the V-stock acquisition number (for SZ types 5-8) lottery that determines the number of V-stocks acquired.

The V-Stock Acquisition Count (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table in Figure 157 defines the information for the lottery results ("1" and "2") of the V-Stock Acquisition Count (for SZ types 5-8) lottery.

[12-7-31. SZ Mode Setting (for SZ types 5-8) Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 158 is the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5 to 8) lottery table used for the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5 to 8) lottery, which determines the number of mode upgrades for SZ mode.

The SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table in Figure 158 specifies the lottery value information for each trigger ("Start of SZ type 6-8", "BB win - SZ mode 1", "BB win - SZ mode 2", "BB win - SZ mode 3", "BB win - SZ mode 4") for the lottery results of the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery ("SZ mode level 0 up", "SZ mode level 1 up", "SZ mode level 2 up", "SZ mode level 3 up").

[12-7-32. NAT Start High Probability Transition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 159 is the NAT start high probability transition lottery table used for the NAT start high probability transition lottery, which performs a lottery for the transition of the current state (current state transition lottery) and a lottery for the number of games added to the high probability of winning when the current state "high probability" is won (high probability of winning games added lottery) in a single lottery.

The NAT Start High Probability Transition Lottery Table in Figure 159 defines the lottery value information for the NAT Start High Probability Transition Lottery results ("No Transition," "High Probability + High Security Obstacle Counter + 10," "High Probability + High Security Obstacle Counter + 20," "High Probability + High Security Obstacle Counter + 30," "Super High Probability") for each current state ("Low Probability," "High Probability," "Super High Probability"). The "No Transition," "High Probability," and "Super High Probability" parts of the lottery results relate to the current state transition lottery. The "+ High Security Obstacle Counter + XXX" part of the lottery results relates to the High Security Obstacle Addition Game Count lottery.

[12-7-33. SAT activation lottery table upon next CZ failure]
Next, Figure 160 is the next CZ failure SAT activation lottery table used in the next CZ failure SAT activation lottery, which determines whether or not to activate the special AT (SAT).

The SAT activation lottery table in Figure 160, which is displayed when the next CZ fails, specifies the lottery value information for the lottery result ("Non-Winning" or "Winning") of the SAT activation lottery when the next CZ fails, for each setting ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6").

[12-7-34. SC Occurrence/V Stock Acquisition Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 161 is the SC Occurrence/V Stock Acquisition Lottery Table used for the SC Occurrence/V Stock Acquisition Lottery, which combines a lottery for transitioning to a Stock Chance (SC Occurrence Lottery) and a lottery for acquiring "one" V Stock (V Stock Acquisition Lottery) into a single lottery. Figure 161(a) is the SC Occurrence/V Stock Acquisition Lottery Table referenced when the current state is "low probability", Figure 161(b) is the SC Occurrence/V Stock Acquisition Lottery Table referenced when the current state is "high probability", and Figure 161(c) is the SC Occurrence/V Stock Acquisition Lottery Table referenced when the current state is "very high probability".

The SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery tables in Figures 161(a) to (c) define the lottery value information for the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery results ("Non-Winning," "SC Winning," "SC Winning + 1 V-Stock Acquired") for each lottery flag group ("Other," "Weak Rare Role," "Weak Watermelon," "Strong Watermelon," "Strong Rare Role") in lottery flag group 13 of Figure 124.

[12-7-35. SC Pre-announcement Game Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 162 is the SC pre-announcement game count lottery table used in the SC pre-announcement game count lottery that determines the number of games in the SC pre-announcement.

The SC pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 162 specifies the lottery value information for the SC pre-announcement game count lottery results ("1G", "2G", "3G", "4G", "5G") for each SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery result ("SC win" and "SC win + 1 V-stock acquisition").

[12-7-36. NAT High Probability Transition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 163 is the NAT High Probability Transition Lottery Table used for the NAT High Probability Transition Lottery, which performs a lottery for transitioning the current state (current state transition lottery) and a lottery for the number of games added to the high probability of winning when the current state is "high probability" (high probability of winning game addition lottery) in a single lottery. Figure 163(a) is the NAT High Probability Transition Lottery Table referenced when the current state is "low probability", Figure 163(b) is the NAT High Probability Transition Lottery Table referenced when the current state is "high probability", and Figure 163(c) is the NAT High Probability Transition Lottery Table referenced when the current state is "super high probability".

The NAT high probability transition lottery table in Figure 163 defines the lottery value information for each lottery flag group ("Miss," "Weak Rare Replay," "Watermelon," "Strong Rare Role") in the lottery flag group 14 of Figure 124, for the NAT high probability transition lottery results ("No transition," "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter + 10 added," "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter + 20 added," "High probability + High-guarantee obstacle counter + 30 added," "Super high probability"). The "No transition," "High probability," and "Super high probability" lottery results relate to the current state transition lottery. The "+ High-guarantee obstacle counter ○○○ added" lottery results relate to the high-guarantee obstacle addition game count lottery.

[12-7-37. NAT V Stock Acquisition Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 164 is the NAT V-stock acquisition lottery table used in the NAT V-stock acquisition lottery that determines whether or not one V-stock is acquired.

The NAT V-stock acquisition lottery table in Figure 164 defines the lottery value information for the NAT V-stock acquisition lottery results ("Non-Winning" and "1 V-Stock Acquired") for each lottery flag group ("Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", "Strong Rare Role", and "Middle Cherry") in lottery flag group 3 of Figure 122.

[12-7-38. NAT Pre-BB Game Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 165 is the NAT pre-BB game count lottery table used in the NAT pre-BB game count lottery that determines the number of games in the BB pre-announcement phase.

The NAT (Network Attack Time) pre-BB (Big Bonus) game count lottery table in Figure 165 defines the information for the lottery results ("2G", "3G", "4G", "5G") of the NAT pre-BB game count lottery.

[12-7-39. NAT Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 166 is the NAT resonance point acquisition lottery table used in the NAT resonance point acquisition lottery to determine the number of resonance points acquired.

The NAT resonance point acquisition lottery table in Figure 166 defines the information of the lottery values for the resonance point acquisition lottery results ("0 points", "3 points", "5 points", "10 points", "20 points", "30 points", "50 points", "100 points") for each lottery flag group ("Bell", "JAC3", "Cherry") in lottery flag group 23 in Figure 125.

[12-7-40. SC Resonance Point Acquisition Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 167 is the SC Resonance Point Acquisition Count Lottery Table used in the SC Resonance Point Acquisition Count Lottery to determine the number of Resonance Points acquired.

The SC (Super Chance) Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table in Figure 167 defines the information on the lottery values for the SC Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery results ("10 points", "20 points", "30 points", "50 points", "100 points") for each lottery flag group ("Strong Rare Role", "Middle Cherry") in the lottery flag group 16 in Figure 124.

[12-7-41. V-Stock Acquisition Count Lottery Table Before V-Stock Acquisition During SC]
Next, Figure 168 shows the lottery for the number of V-stocks acquired before acquiring a V-stock during SC, which is used to determine whether or not one V-stock is acquired during SC. Figure 168(a) is the lottery table for the number of V-stocks acquired before acquiring a V-stock during SC that is referenced in the case of "SC Level 1", Figure 168(b) is the lottery table for the number of V-stocks acquired before acquiring a V-stock during SC that is referenced in the case of "SC Level 2", and Figure 168(c) is the lottery table for the number of V-stocks acquired before acquiring a V-stock during SC that is referenced in the case of "SC Level 3".

The V-stock acquisition count lottery table in Figures 168(a) to (c) during the SC (Super Chance) defines the lottery value information for the lottery results ("Non-Winning," "1 V-Stock Acquired") of the V-stock acquisition count lottery before the SC during the SC, for each lottery flag group ("Bell," "Rare Role") in lottery flag group 17 in Figure 124.

[12-7-42. V-Stock Acquisition Count Lottery Table after V-Stock Acquisition during SC]
Next, Figure 169 is the table for the lottery for the number of V-stocks acquired after acquiring a V-stock during SC, which is used to determine whether or not one V-stock is acquired.

The V-stock acquisition count lottery table in Figure 169, which shows the number of V-stocks acquired after acquiring V-stocks during SC, defines the lottery value information for the lottery results ("Non-winning," "1 V-stock acquired") of the V-stock acquisition count lottery before acquiring V-stocks during SC, for each lottery flag group ("Bell," "Rare Role") in lottery flag group 17 in Figure 124.

[12-7-43. SC Post-High-Secure Game Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 170 is the post-SC high-reserve-failure-game-count lottery table used in the post-SC high-reserve-failure-game-count lottery, which determines the high-reserve-failure-game-count at the end of the Stock Chance (SC).

The SC (Super Chance) post-high-stakes-guaranteed

[12-7-44. SAT Continuous Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 171 is the SAT continuation lottery table used in the SAT continuation lottery, which determines whether or not the next set of the Special AT (SAT) will continue.

The SAT continuation lottery table in Figure 171 defines the lottery value information for the SAT continuation lottery results ("Non-continuation", "Continuation") for each set value ("Setting 1, 2, 3", "Setting 4, 5", "Setting 6").

[12-7-45. SAT Difference Token Increase Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 172 is the SAT difference coin increase lottery table used in the SAT difference coin increase lottery, which determines the number of additional coins that can be obtained in the special AT (SAT).

The SAT difference coin increase lottery table in Figure 172 defines the information of the lottery values for the SAT difference coin increase lottery results ("+0 coins", "+10 coins", "+20 coins", "+30 coins", "+50 coins", "+100 coins") for each lottery flag group ("Weak Rare Role", "Weak Watermelon", "Strong Watermelon", "Strong Rare Role", "Middle Cherry") in lottery flag group 18 in Figure 124.

[12-7-46. Navigation Mode Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 173 shows the navigation generation mode lottery table used to select the navigation generation mode ("high" or "low"). Figure 173(a) is the navigation generation mode lottery table referenced when the navigation generation mode is "high", and Figure 173(b) is the navigation generation mode lottery table referenced when the navigation generation mode is "low".

The navigation mode lottery tables in Figures 173(a) and (b) define the lottery value information for the result ("High" or "Low") of the navigation mode lottery for each set value ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6").

[12-7-47. Navigation Generation Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 174 shows the navigation occurrence lottery table used in the navigation occurrence lottery to determine whether or not navigation will occur.

The navigation generation lottery table in Figure 174 defines the lottery value information for the lottery results ("No Navigation" and "Navigation Enabled") of the navigation generation lottery for each navigation generation mode ("High" and "Low").

[12-7-48. Extra BB Initial Game Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 175 is the Extra BB Initial Game Count Lottery Table used in the Extra BB Initial Game Count Lottery, which determines the initial number of games for BB and Extra BB. Figure 175(a) is the Extra BB Initial Game Count Lottery Table referenced when a same-color BB is won, and Figure 175(b) is the Extra BB Initial Game Count Lottery Table referenced when a different-color BB is won.

The Extra BB initial game count lottery tables in Figures 175(a) and (b) specify the lottery values for the Extra BB initial game count lottery results ("20G", "30G", "24G", "50G", "70G") for each CZ mode ("Mode A" to "Mode D").

[12-7-49. Extra BB Game Addition Count Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 176 is the Extra BB Game Addition Lottery Table used in the Extra BB Game Addition Lottery to determine the number of games added to the BB and Extra BB games. Figure 176(a) is the Extra BB Game Addition Lottery Table that is referenced when the number of remaining Extra BB games after one is subtracted in the game is 0, and Figure 176(b) is the Extra BB Game Addition Lottery Table that is referenced when the number of remaining Extra BB games after one is subtracted in the game is 1 or more.

The extra BB game addition lottery tables in Figures 176(a) and (b) define the information for the lottery results ("0", "5G", "10G", "20G", "30G") of the extra BB game addition lottery for each lottery flag group ("BAR Replay", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", "Strong Rare Role") in lottery flag group 19 in Figure 125.

[12-7-50. BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table]
Next, Figure 177 is the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Count Lottery Table used in the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Count Lottery that determines the number of Resonance Points acquired.

The BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table in Figure 177 specifies the information for the lottery results ("0 points", "3 points", "10 points", "20 points", "30 points", "50 points", "100 points") of the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery for each lottery flag group ("Miss", "JAC Role 3", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Rare Role", "Middle Cherry") in the lottery flag group 20 in Figure 125.

[12-8. Explanation of the operation of the main control circuit]
Next, referring to Figures 178 to 189, the contents of the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using a program will be explained. Note that the same processes as those in the first gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1, will be omitted or explained in a simplified manner.

[12-8-1. Main processing of pachislot machines controlled by the main CPU]
First, with reference to Figure 178, the main processing (main operation processing) of the pachislo machine 1, which is executed under the control of the main CPU 101, will be explained.

First, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of a game (step S2001). This process clears the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area where data needs to be erased after each game, such as a winning flag storage area or a prize activation flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal reception and start check processing (step S2002). In this process, for example, it checks the input status of the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, and start switch 7S, and performs various necessary processing at the start of gameplay.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random value acquisition process (step S2003). This process extracts random values for internal draws (e.g., in the range of 0 to 65535) and random values for various draws related to gameplay (other random values for draws) (e.g., in the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 255), and stores the extracted random values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the methods for acquiring the various random values are not limited to those described above. The required number of random values can be acquired as needed from predetermined numerical ranges (e.g., the range of 0 to 65535, 0 to 32767, 0 to 255, or 0 to 127, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (step S2004). This process involves various operations necessary to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and random values used for internal lottery, corresponding to the current game state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state control process at the start of the game (step S2005). In this process, for various game states, when the game starts, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination), the system performs various processes necessary to transition the game state according to the met transition condition, or to manage the duration of the current game state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (step S2006). In this process, data for the start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 during the communication data transmission process (see S204 in Figure 32). The generation, storage, and transmission methods for other command data are basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the main-side performance control processing at the start of the game (step S2007). In this process, if various performances are to be performed by the main control circuit 100 (main side) at the start of the game, the CPU 101 performs the necessary processing to execute those performances. For example, if a lock performance is to be performed at the start of the game, the CPU 101 controls the execution of that lock performance. Furthermore, if this includes a simulated game, the CPU 101 controls the progress of the simulated game (or the notification related to the simulated game). Also, for example, if the game is in AT mode and the instruction monitor notifies information about the stop operation, the CPU 101 controls the notification method. Although details are omitted, if a lock performance is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the initial reel stop setup process (step S2008). In this process, based on the internal winning combination and game state, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of reel pull-in priority table to be used in the current game, is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the reel rotation start process (step S2009). This process requests the rotation start of all reels. Once the rotation start of all reels is requested, the reel control process (see step S203 in Figure 32) controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins. Each rotating reel is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then that constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted here, this process also includes the generation and storage of reel rotation start commands.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the reel pull-in priority storage process (step S2010). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels (in this case, all reels), data indicating the reel pull-in priority is obtained by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set reel pull-in priority table, and stored in the reel pull-in priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown in the diagram, the symbol code storage process is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (step S2011). This process involves performing various operations necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel, based on the determined internal winning combination (or the information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation patterns of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a prize activation determination process (step S2012). This process determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it checks whether there is a bit containing "1" in the prize activation flag storage area. Although details are omitted, this process also includes the generation and storage of a prize activation command.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal payout and re-play activation process (step S2013). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the aforementioned prize activation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a minor win, the corresponding number of medals are paid out. If the combination of symbols is related to a replay win, various processes necessary to activate re-play in the next game are performed. For example, if the combination of symbols determined in the aforementioned prize activation determination process is related to a replay win, the automatic medal counter (described later) is set to a value equal to the number of bets in the current game. Furthermore, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state control process at the end of the game (step S2014). In this process, for each game state, when the game ends, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), the game state is transitioned according to the met transition condition, or various processes are performed to manage the duration of the current game state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the main-side performance control processing at the end of the game (step S2015). In this process, if various performances are to be performed by the main control circuit 100 (main side) when the game ends, the CPU performs the necessary processing to execute those performances. For example, if a lock performance is to be performed at the end of the game, the CPU controls the execution of that lock performance. Furthermore, if this includes a simulated game, the CPU controls the progress of that simulated game (or the notification related to the simulated game). Although details are omitted here, if a lock performance is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed during this process.

Thus, in pachislo machine 1, the processing described in S2001 to S2015 controls one unit of gameplay, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It is also possible to configure the machine to perform other processes as needed, or to configure it to not perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

The processes in steps S2001 to S2015 of Figure 178 are basically the same as the processes in steps S2 to S16 of Figure 23, but the processes in steps S2 to S16 of Figure 23 have been modified to match the specifications of the fourth gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1.

The information on internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) is as shown in Figures 179(a) and (b). For special prize flags ("Non-Winning," "F_Red 7 Same Color," "F_White Same Color," "F_Red 7 Different Colors," "F_White Different Colors"), the special prize number is transmitted directly from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201), as shown in Figure 179(a). On the other hand, for main flags (winning combinations shown in Figures 78 to 104, sometimes referred to as "internal winning combinations"), the information is converted to a sub-flag number before being transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201), as shown in Figure 179(a).

Furthermore, the following are examples of lock effects that occur when a lock command is generated whose execution is controlled in the main-side performance control processing at the start of the game, or when a lock command is generated whose execution is controlled in the main-side performance control processing at the end of the game: There is a lock effect with a lock time of "3000ms" that occurs after 3 off (payout) at the end of the chance zone (CZ type "ACZ") after a general AT (NAT) is not continued, and after 3 off (payout) when a special AT (SAT) is not continued. There is also a lock effect with a lock time of "63766.67ms" that occurs when the start lever 7 is operated when the name "F_Red 7 Same Color" is won alone and when a freeze lottery is won. Additionally, there is a lock animation with a lock time of "58433.33ms" that occurs when the name "F_White Same Color" + "F_Middle Cherry" is drawn, and during the interval between BB flags after a freeze draw, when the internal winning role is "missed" and the start lever is operated 7. There is also a lock animation with a lock time of "11239ms" that occurs after 3 off (payout) when the BB interval game counter reaches "1000". There is also a lock animation with a lock time of "11232ms" that occurs after 3 off (payout) of a game that will become a special AT (SAT) game from the next game. There is a lock animation with a lock time of "7200ms" that occurs when BB is activated. There is also a lock animation with a lock time of "4300ms" that occurs at the end of BB (excluding the end of BB that transitions to Extra BB) or at the end of Extra BB. Note that the lock times are examples and are not limited to these.

Furthermore, the following types of game waits are available that do not trigger a lock command: A 4000ms wait time occurs when transitioning to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) or when operating the start lever 7 at the start of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) after a Big Bonus (BB). A 4000ms wait time also occurs when entering the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) or when pressing BET at the start of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) after a Big Bonus (BB). During this wait time, the start lever 7 can still be operated. Note that these wait times are examples only and are not exhaustive.

[12-8-2. Details of various processes, including various draws, for each game state]
Next, referring to Figures 180 to 189, we will explain in detail the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 for each game state. Note that since the details of the transitions between each game state were explained in the explanation of the game state transition flow considering the operation or non-operation of the notification (AT) function using Figures 115 to 118, the explanation of the transitions between each game state will be omitted or simplified here. In addition, some processes, including some draws such as the freeze draw and related processes explained in Figures 115 to 118, will be omitted.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 initializes the advantageous section game counter (game counter), which manages the number of games played in the advantageous section, to "0" when the advantageous section state transitions from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, and adds "+1" to the advantageous section game counter for each game played in the advantageous section state. In addition, when the advantageous section state transitions from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, the MY counter, which manages the number of medals acquired in the advantageous section, is initialized to "0", and "+acquired medals (=number of medals paid out - number of medals inserted)" is added to the MY counter for each game played in the advantageous section state. If the value of the MY counter after the addition is less than 0, the value of the MY counter is corrected to "0". When the value of the advantageous period game count counter reaches "3000" ("3000" is just an example and will be set to a value that conforms to the rules), the advantageous period state is switched from the advantageous period to the non-advantageous period. Similarly, when the value of the MY counter reaches "2400" ("2400" is just an example and will be set to a value that conforms to the rules), the advantageous period state is switched from the advantageous period to the non-advantageous period.

[12-8-2-1. Various processes, including various lotteries, performed under normal circumstances (non-advantageous periods)]
First, referring to Figure 180, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 during normal operation (non-advantageous period) will be explained. Note that the various draws in Figure 180 are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting the internal winning combination into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in Figure 120 is used.

The main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag for each game, referring to Figure 120, and then converts it into a lottery flag for the determined result, referring to lottery flag group 1 in Figure 122. If the converted lottery flag group is "Other" or "Bell," the main CPU 101 performs a favorable section transition/CZ mode lottery by referring to the favorable section transition/CZ mode lottery table corresponding to the converted lottery flag group in the favorable section transition/CZ mode lottery tables in Figures 126(a) and (b). If the lottery result includes "Transition," the main CPU 101 determines that the player has won the transition to the favorable section and simultaneously sets the CZ mode of the lottery result in the CZ mode counter.

If the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Other," in the example shown in Figure 126(a), the transition to the advantageous section will always be awarded. On the other hand, if the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Bell," in the example shown in Figure 126(b), the transition to the advantageous section may not be awarded, but if awarded, the game will be set to "CZ Mode D," which is the most advantageous mode for playing.

If the main CPU 101 wins the lottery for a transition to the advantageous period, it refers to the initial resonance point lottery table in Figure 127, performs an initial resonance point lottery based on the current settings, and sets the number of initial resonance points won in the resonance point counter.

The main CPU 101, upon winning the draw for a transition to the advantageous section, refers to the next CZR activation draw table in Figure 128 and performs the next CZR activation draw. If the main CPU 101 wins the next CZR activation draw, it manages the next CZ type to be "CZR" and acquires one V-stock. However, except when transitioning to the normal (advantageous section), the V-stock counter value is increased by "+1" at the end of the normal (non-advantageous section). On the other hand, when transitioning to the normal (advantageous section), the V-stock counter value is increased by "+1" when the transition to the subsequent CZ is won.

The main CPU 101, upon winning a draw for a transition to a favorable section, refers to the initial value draw table for the number of games between Big Bonuses (BBs) shown in Figure 129, performs a draw for the initial value of the number of games between BBs based on the current settings, and sets the initial number of games resulting from the draw in the BB game counter. In the example shown in Figure 129, the initial value of the number of games between BBs increases with higher settings.

Furthermore, the initial game count lottery between Big Bonuses (BBs) is also conducted when a BB (named "F_Red 7 Same Color", "F_White Same Color", "F_Red Different Color", or "F_White Different Color") is won outside of a Special AT (SAT), and a BB (named "F_Red 7 Same Color", "F_White Same Color", "F_Red Different Color", or "F_White Different Color") is awarded, starting a BB.

If the main CPU 101 wins the transition to the advantageous section, the number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is "0". Therefore, the main CPU 101 converts the internal winning role into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 2 in Figure 122. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Other", "Bell", "Weak Rare Replay", "Weak Watermelon", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the pre-CZ winning role CZ lottery table in Figures 131 to 133 that corresponds to the current setting and the current stay state managed by the stay state counter, and performs a pre-CZ winning role CZ lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group. If the result of the pre-CZ (Challenge Zone) small role CZ lottery includes "Acquire 1 V-Stock" or "Acquire 2 V-Stocks," then the transition to the CZ is considered a win, and the number of V-Stocks acquired in the lottery result is added to the V-Stock counter. Furthermore, if the lottery result includes "Fake Pattern 1," "Fake Pattern 2," or "Fake Pattern 3," the main CPU 101 sets the lottery result in the Fake Pattern counter. In the example shown in Figures 131 to 133, the expected value of transitioning to the CZ increases in the order of "Low Probability," "High Probability," and "High Probability."

When the main CPU 101 wins a BB win and transitions to the advantageous section, it refers to the BB win CZ lottery table corresponding to the current number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter in the BB win CZ lottery tables in Figures 135(a) and (b), and performs a BB win CZ lottery based on the current stay state managed by the stay state counter. If the value of the V-stock counter after the pre-CZ win small role CZ lottery is "0", and the result of the BB win CZ lottery includes "acquired 1 V-stock" or "acquired 2 V-stocks", it is a win to transition to the CZ, and the number of V-stocks acquired in the lottery result is added to the value of the V-stock counter. Also, if the lottery result includes "fake pattern 1", the main CPU 101 sets the lottery result in the fake pattern counter. In the example shown in Figures 135(a) and (b), the expected number of V-stocks acquired increases in the order of "low probability," "high probability," and "high probability" states.

When the main CPU 101 wins a draw for a transition to the advantageous section, if the fake pattern managed by the fake pattern counter is "Fake Pattern 1," "Fake Pattern 2," or "Fake Pattern 3," it performs a predetermined conversion process on the fake pattern to generate a fake table ("Table 1" to "Table 8"). Then, the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ pre-announcement game count draw table in Figure 136 and performs a CZ pre-announcement game count draw based on the fake table. It determines the number of CZ pre-announcement games to equalize within the range of the draw result and sets the determined CZ pre-announcement game count in the CZ pre-announcement counter. The CZ pre-announcement counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the CZ pre-announcement. However, the CZ pre-announcement game count draw is not performed between BB flags (between normal flags in Figure 115 (non-advantageous section)).

The main CPU 101, during a BB (Big Bonus) win game, refers to the BB pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 137 to perform a BB pre-announcement game count lottery and sets the resulting BB pre-announcement game count in the BB pre-announcement counter. The BB pre-announcement counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the BB pre-announcement.

The main CPU 101, for each game, refers to the normal-to-high probability transition lottery table corresponding to the current state managed by the current state counter in the normal-to-high probability transition lottery tables shown in Figures 138(a) to (c) and performs a normal-to-high probability transition lottery. If the lottery result is "no transition," the current state counter and the high probability barrier counter are not updated. If the result is "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 10," "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 20," or "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 30," "high probability" is set to the current state counter and the added value is added to the high probability barrier counter. If the result is "super high probability," "super high probability" is set to the current state counter. The high probability barrier counter is deducted by "1" each time a game is played, and when the high probability barrier counter goes from "1" to "0," the value of the current state counter is changed to the lower "low probability."

Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 wins the transition to the advantageous section and the CZ pre-announcement counter is "0", it transitions from the normal (non-advantageous section) to the normal (advantageous section). If it wins the transition to the advantageous section and the CZ pre-announcement counter is not "0", it transitions from the normal (non-advantageous section) to the CZ pre-announcement. Note that the CZ pre-announcement counter may have a value other than "0" even if the transition to the CZ is not won, but in the explanation using Figures 115 to 118, the case where the CZ pre-announcement counter is set to a value other than "0" even if the transition to the CZ is not won is omitted, and the explanation assumes that there is always at least one V-stock when transitioning from the normal (non-advantageous section) to the CZ pre-announcement.

Furthermore, during normal periods (non-advantageous periods) and normal Big Bonuses (non-advantageous periods), the same lottery processes as in normal (non-advantageous periods) are conducted for transitions to advantageous periods and transitions to CZs.

[12-8-2-2. Various processes, including various draws, performed during normal (advantageous period) and CZ pre-announcement]
Next, referring to Figure 181, the details of various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 during normal operation (advantageous period) and during the pre-CZ (Chance Zone) phase will be explained. However, the contents of Figure 181 may also be performed during normal operation (advantageous period) and the pre-CZ phase, as well as between normal flags (advantageous period) (see Figure 115). Furthermore, the various draws shown in Figure 181, including the preliminary draw for the minor role CZ, the draw for the minor role CZ before winning the CZ, the draw for the minor role CZ after winning the CZ, the draw for the CZ when winning the BB, the draw for the number of games before the CZ, the draw for the number of games before the BB, the draw for the transition to high probability mode during normal mode, the draw for falling out of high probability mode, the draw for the CZ mode transition, and the draw for the LI transition, are performed when the start lever 7 is operated. When converting the internal winning role into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning role and the draw flag shown in Figure 120 is used. Furthermore, various draws, such as the draw for the number of resonance points acquired during normal play, the draw for the number of games added between Big Bonuses, and the draw for the CZ reward, are performed when the system is off. When converting internal winning combinations into draw flags, the correspondence between internal winning combinations and draw flags shown in Figure 121 is used.

Normally (during the advantageous period), the number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter at the start of the game is "0". During the CZ pre-announcement, the number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is "0" or "1" or more. Note that in the explanation using Figures 115 to 118, there are cases where the number of V-stocks is "0" at the start of the first game of the CZ pre-announcement, but this case is omitted.

The main CPU 101, for each game, if the number of V-stocks at the start of the game, managed by the V-stock counter, is "0", refers to Figure 120 and converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag. If the resulting lottery flag is "Bell" or "JAC 3", it refers to the small-combination CZ preliminary lottery table in Figure 130 and performs a small-combination CZ preliminary lottery based on the current CZ mode managed by the CZ mode counter. In the example in Figure 130, the expected value of winning with "Small-combination CZ lottery performed" increases in the order of "Mode A", "Mode B", "Mode C", and "Mode D" of the CZ modes. When the lottery flag is "Bell" or "JAC 3", a lottery for transitioning to the CZ (small-combination CZ lottery before CZ win) is performed when the win is with "Small-combination CZ lottery performed". Therefore, the expected value of transitioning to the CZ mode increases in the order of "Mode A," "Mode B," "Mode C," and "Mode D."

The main CPU 101, when the number of V-stocks at the start of the game is "0", converts the converted result's lottery flag to a lottery flag group by referring to lottery flag group 2 in Figure 122 if (1) the lottery flag of the conversion result is something other than "Bell" or "JAC Role 3", or (2) the lottery result of the minor role CZ preliminary lottery is "Minor role CZ lottery performed". If the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Other", "Bell", "Weak Rare Replay", "Weak Watermelon", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the pre-CZ small role CZ lottery table of Figures 131 to 133, which corresponds to the current setting and the current state managed by the current state counter, and performs a pre-CZ small role CZ lottery based on the lottery flag group of the conversion result. If the lottery result of the pre-CZ small role CZ lottery includes "Acquire 1 V Stock" or "Acquire 2 V Stocks", it is a win to transition to CZ, and the number of V Stocks acquired in the lottery result is added to the value of the V Stock counter. Furthermore, if the lottery result includes "Fake Pattern 1," "Fake Pattern 2," or "Fake Pattern 3," the main CPU 101 sets the lottery result in the Fake Pattern Counter. In the example shown in Figures 131 to 133, the expected value of transitioning to the CZ (Chance Zone) increases in the order of "Low Probability," "High Probability," and "Super High Probability" states.

The main CPU 101, during a BB win game, refers to the BB win CZ lottery table corresponding to the current number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter in the BB win CZ lottery tables shown in Figures 135(a) and (b), and performs the BB win CZ lottery (A) based on the current state managed by the current state counter. If the number of V-stocks before the start of the BB win CZ lottery (A) is "0", and the lottery result of the BB win CZ lottery (A) includes "acquired 1 V-stock" or "acquired 2 V-stocks", then the transition to the CZ is considered a win, and the number of V-stocks acquired in the lottery result is added to the value of the V-stock counter. Furthermore, if the lottery result includes "fake pattern 1", the main CPU 101 sets the lottery result in the fake pattern counter.

The main CPU 101, when the fake pattern managed by the fake pattern counter is "Fake Pattern 1," "Fake Pattern 2," or "Fake Pattern 3," performs a predetermined conversion process on the fake pattern to generate a fake table ("Table 1" to "Table 8"). Then, the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 136 and performs a CZ pre-announcement game count lottery based on the fake table. It determines the number of CZ pre-announcement games to equalize within the range of the lottery result. If the determined number of CZ pre-announcement games is greater than the number of CZ pre-announcement games after subtracting "1" for that game managed by the CZ pre-announcement counter, it sets the determined number of CZ pre-announcement games in the CZ pre-announcement counter. The CZ pre-announcement counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the CZ pre-announcement.

The main CPU 101, when the current number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is "0", refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag. If the resulting lottery flag is "JAC combination 3", it refers to the CZ mode transition lottery table in Figure 141 to perform a CZ mode transition lottery based on the current CZ mode managed by the CZ mode. If the lottery result is "Mode Maintenance", the CZ mode counter is not updated. If the lottery result is "One Level Up", the CZ mode of the one-level up is set in the CZ mode counter ("CZ Mode A" → "CZ Mode B", "CZ Mode B" → "CZ Mode C", "CZ Mode C" → "CZ Mode D", "CZ Mode D" → "CZ Mode D").

The main CPU 101, in a BB win game where the current CZ mode managed by the CZ mode counter is "Mode A" and the current number of V stocks managed by the V stock counter is "0", refers to the LI transition lottery table in Figure 143 and performs an LI transition lottery based on the current settings. If the lottery result is "Win," the game transitions from normal (advantageous section) to Limit (LI). In the example in Figure 143, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning the LI transition lottery and transitioning to Limit (LI).

For each game, if the number of V-stocks at the start of the game, managed by the V-stock counter, is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning role into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 3 in Figure 122 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "weak rare role", "strong watermelon", "strong rare role", or "middle cherry", the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ winning small role CZ lottery table in Figure 134 to perform a CZ winning small role CZ lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and if the lottery result is "acquired 1 V-stock" or "acquired 2 V-stocks", the number of V-stocks acquired in the lottery result is added to the value of the V-stock counter. If the number of V-stocks increases from "1" to "2" or more through a small-win CZ lottery after a CZ win, and the value of the CZ pre-announcement counter is "3" or more, then "+2" is added to the value of the CZ pre-announcement counter.

When the main CPU 101 wins a Big Bonus (BB), it refers to the BB win CZ (Challenge Zone) lottery table corresponding to the current number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter in the BB win CZ lottery tables shown in Figures 135(a) and (b), and performs a BB win CZ lottery (B) based on the current state managed by the state counter. The number of V-stocks acquired as a result of the lottery is added to the value of the V-stock counter. Furthermore, if the lottery result includes a "fake clear," the main CPU 101 resets the value of the CZ premonition counter to its initial value (returns it to "0").

Following the LI transition lottery or the BB win CZ lottery (B), the main CPU 101, for BB win games other than RT6, refers to the BB pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 137 to perform a BB pre-announcement game count lottery and sets the resulting BB pre-announcement game count in the BB pre-announcement counter. The BB pre-announcement counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the BB pre-announcement.

The main CPU 101, for each game, performs a normal-to-high probability transition lottery by referring to the normal-to-high probability transition lottery table corresponding to the current state managed by the current state counter, which is one of the normal-to-high probability transition lottery tables shown in Figures 138(a) to (c). If the lottery result for the normal-to-high probability transition lottery is "no transition," the current state counter and the high probability barrier counter are not updated. If the result is "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 10," "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 20," or "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 30," "high probability" is set to the current state counter and the added value is added to the high probability barrier counter. If the result is "super high probability," "super high probability" is set to the current state counter. The high probability barrier counter is deducted by "1" each time a game is played, and when the high probability barrier counter goes from "1" to "0," the current state counter is changed to the lower "low probability."

The main CPU 101, in a game where the current state managed by the current state counter is "high probability," the remaining number of high probability games at the start of the game, managed by the high probability obstacle counter, is "1" (the value of the high probability obstacle counter changes from "1" to "0" in that game), and the lottery flag resulting from converting the internal winning combination (referencing Figure 120) is "miss," performs a high probability fallout lottery based on the game state "normal (advantageous section)" by referring to the high probability fallout lottery table in Figure 139, and sets the lottery result in the current state counter.

The main CPU 101, for each game, refers to Figure 121 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 5 in Figure 122 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "JAC3" or "Middle Cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the normal resonance point acquisition lottery table corresponding to the current setting from the normal resonance point acquisition lottery tables in Figures 140(a) to (c), performs a normal resonance point acquisition lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the number of resonance points acquired as a result of the lottery to the resonance point counter.

The main CPU 101, when it is not yet determined that the game will transition to a general AT (NAT), and the game is in a general game state (RT0-R3, RT6) (excluding BB winning games), and the lottery flag converted from the internal winning role (referencing Figure 121) is "JAC role 3", performs a lottery for the number of games added between BBs based on the current CZ mode managed by the CZ mode counter, referencing the BB game addition lottery table in Figure 142, and adds the number of games added as a result of the lottery to the value of the BB game count counter. The BB game count counter is increased by "+1" for each game played in the general game state (RT0-R3, RT6) (excluding BB winning games).

During the advantageous period, in various game states, a special direct hit process is performed when any of the following conditions are met: (1) the condition of winning an "F_7 matching replay", (2) the condition of winning a Big Bonus (BB) in RT6, or (3) the condition of winning a Big Bonus (BB) during an Extra BB (these conditions are referred to as "special direct hit processing conditions"). The main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V stock counter value when a special direct hit processing condition that may occur during normal play (advantageous period) or a pre-CZ (Challenge Zone) is met, and performs a CZ reward lottery, transitioning to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) from the next game. In the CZ reward lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(b) and performs a CZ reward lottery based on the current V rank managed by the V rank counter, and sets the SZ type of the lottery result in the SZ type counter. Please note that the number of points earned will not be added to the Resonance Point Counter.

The main CPU 101 transitions from the normal (advantageous) state to the CZ pre-announcement state if a value other than "0" is set in the CZ pre-announcement counter through the CZ pre-announcement game count lottery during the normal (advantageous) state. Note that the CZ pre-announcement counter may also have a value other than "0" even if the transition to the CZ is not won. However, the explanation using Figures 115 to 118 omits the case where a value other than "0" is set in the CZ pre-announcement counter even if the transition to the CZ is not won, and explains that there is always at least one V-stock when transitioning from the normal (advantageous) state to the CZ pre-announcement state.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 completes the CZ pre-announcement game count (i.e., when the CZ pre-announcement counter value changes from "1" to "0" in that game), if the number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is "1" or greater, it transitions from the CZ pre-announcement to the initial CZ. If the number of V-stocks is "0", it transitions from the CZ pre-announcement to normal (advantageous section). Note that the latter (transition from CZ pre-announcement to normal (advantageous section)) is omitted in the explanation using Figures 115 to 118.

[12-8-2-3. Various processes, including various draws, performed in the Chance Zone (CZ)]
Next, referring to Figure 182, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the chance zone (CZ) will be explained. However, in Figure 182, the initial CZ and the continuing CZ will be explained together. The first CZ success draw and the second CZ success draw, described later, are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting the internal winning combination into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in Figure 120 is used, while the CZ reward draw, the CZ mode draw when CZ fails, and the draw for the next CZR activation are performed when 3 off, and when converting the internal winning combination into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag in Figure 121 is used.

The Chance Zone (CZ) has three types: "NCZ," "ACZ," and "CZR." The initial CZ triggered is "NCZ" unless the next CZR activation lottery results in a "CZR" activation. The CZ types "CZR," "ACZ," and "NCZ" offer increasing advantages in transitioning to the Special Zone (SZ).

If the CZ type is "NCZ", if it is the first CZ of type "ACZ", or if it is a CZ type "CZR", the remaining number of games in the CZ, "11", is set to the CZ game counter. Furthermore, if it is the second or subsequent CZ of type "ACZ", if the result of the second CZ success lottery was rewritten from "Not Winning" to "Winning" in the game before the last game of the previous CZ, the CZ game count is set to "6", otherwise the CZ game count is set to "11". The CZ game counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during the CZ.

From the first game to the game before the last game (the game where the CZ game counter starts with a value of "2"), the main CPU 101 converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 8 in Figure 123. If a Big Bonus (BB) is won, or if the BB is not won and the resulting lottery flag group is "Weak Rare Combination" or "Strong Rare Combination," the main CPU 101 performs the first CZ success lottery described later. Note that in the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth gaming machine, the resulting lottery flag group will never be "Middle Cherry" if the BB is not won. Furthermore, if the BB is not won and the resulting lottery flag group is "Other," the main CPU 101 performs the second CZ success lottery described later.

In the first CZ success draw, if there is a BB overlap, the main CPU 101 refers to the first CZ success draw table in Figure 144(a) and performs the first CZ success draw based on the draw flag group of the conversion result. If there is no BB and the draw flag group of the conversion result is "weak rare role" or "strong rare role", the main CPU 101 refers to the first CZ success draw table in Figure 144(b) and performs the first CZ success draw based on the draw flag group of the conversion result. Then, if the main CPU 101 wins the lottery for a transition to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) (i.e., if the lottery result includes "Winning"), if the lottery result is "Winning + V-Rank 1 up", the V-Rank managed by the V-Rank Counter will increase the V-Rank by one level ("V-Rank 1" → "V-Rank 2", "V-Rank 2" → "V-Rank 3", "V-Rank 3" → "V-Rank 4", "V-Rank 4" → "V-Rank 4"). If the lottery result is "Winning + V-Rank 2 up", the V-Rank managed by the V-Rank Counter will increase the V-Rank by two levels ("V-Rank 1" → "V-Rank 3", "V-Rank 2" → "V-Rank 4", "V-Rank 3" → "V-Rank 4", "V-Rank 4" → "V-Rank 4"). Note that the V-Rank Counter is set to "V-Rank 1" when a win occurs for transitioning to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figures 144(a) and (b), in the fourth gaming machine, pachislo machine 1, the first successful draw in the CZ will always result in a transition to the SZ. In other words, a BB win, or a win of an internal winning role that falls under the "weak rare role" or "strong rare role" (rare role) in the draw flag group 8, will always result in a transition to the SZ.

In the second CZ success lottery for games from the first game to the game before the last game (the game where the CZ game count counter's starting value is "3"), the main CPU 101 refers to the second CZ success lottery table corresponding to the current CZ type managed by the CZ type counter in the second CZ success lottery tables shown in Figures 145(a) to (c), and performs the second CZ success lottery based on which game number ("1 to 2 games before the last game"). Note that in the example shown in Figures 145(a) to (c), the probability of transitioning to SZ is higher for CZ type "CZR" than for CZ types "NCZ" and "ACZ".

If a transition from CZ to SZ is not achieved in the games from the first game to the third game before the final game (the game where the CZ game counter starts with a value of "4"), then the aforementioned first CZ success lottery or second CZ success lottery will be conducted in the games from the second game to the second game before the final game (the game where the CZ game counter starts with a value of "3").

If the transition from CZ to SZ was not won in the game two games before the last game (the game where the CZ game count counter value at the start of the game is "3"), then in the game one game before the last game (the game where the CZ game count counter value at the start of the game is "2"), the main CPU 101 converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 8 in Figure 123. If a Big Bonus (BB) is won, or if a BB is not won and the resulting lottery flag group is "Weak Rare Combination" or "Strong Rare Combination," the main CPU 101 performs the aforementioned first CZ success lottery. Furthermore, if a BB is not won and the resulting lottery flag group is "Other," the main CPU 101 performs the second CZ success lottery described below.

In the second-to-last game (the game where the CZ game counter's starting value is "2"), the main CPU 101 refers to the second-to-last CZ success lottery table corresponding to the current CZ type managed by the CZ type counter in the second-to-last CZ success lottery tables shown in Figures 145(a) to (c), and performs the second-to-last CZ success lottery based on which game it is ("one game before the last"). Note that in the example shown in Figures 145(a) to (c), the probability of transitioning to SZ is higher for CZ type "CZR" than for CZ types "NCZ" and "ACZ".

If the second CZ success lottery in the game before the final game (the game where the CZ game count counter starts at "2") fails to result in a transition from CZ to SZ, the main CPU 101, if the CZ type is "NCZ" and the number of V-stocks is "2" or more, or if the CZ type is "ACZ" and the number of V-stocks is "1" or more, consumes one V-stock (deducts "1" from the V-stock counter value) and rewrites the result of the second CZ success lottery before the final game from "failed" to "successful".

Furthermore, if the second CZ success lottery in the game before the final game (the game where the CZ game count counter starts at "2") fails to result in a transition from CZ to SZ, the main CPU 101, if the CZ type is "CZR", changes the CZ type counter from "CZR" to "ACZ", and rewrites the lottery result of the second CZ success lottery before the final game from "failed" to "successful". Note that, unlike the cases of CZ types "NCZ" and "ACZ", one V-stock is not consumed.

If the result of the first or second CZ success lottery in the game before the final game (the game in which the CZ game counter starts with a value of "2") is not a "win" (including "win" due to rewriting), then in the final game (the game in which the CZ game counter starts with a value of "1"), the main CPU 101 converts the internal winning role into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 8 in Figure 123. If the BB win is achieved, or if the BB is not achieved and the resulting lottery flag group is a "weak rare role" or a "strong rare role", the main CPU 101 performs the first CZ success lottery as described above. Note that the second CZ success lottery is not performed in the final game (the game in which the CZ game counter starts with a value of "1").

If the first CZ success lottery is not performed in the final game (the game where the CZ game count counter starts at "1") and the game returns to normal (advantageous section), the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ failure CZ mode lottery table in Figure 147 to determine the CZ mode transition lottery based on the current settings, and sets the lottery result in the CZ mode counter. In the example in Figure 147, the probability of winning a CZ mode advantageous to the game is highest in the order of "Settings 1 and 2," "Settings 3 and 4," and "Settings 5 and 6."

If the main CPU 101 returns to normal (advantageous section) without the first CZ success lottery being performed in the final game (the game where the CZ game count counter's value at the start of the game is "1"), it refers to the next CZR activation lottery table in Figure 128 and performs the next CZR activation lottery. If the main CPU 101 wins the next CZR activation lottery, it manages the next CZ to be of type "CZR" and acquires one V-stock. However, if it wins the transition to a later CZ, it adds "+1" to the V-stock counter value.

If the results of the first CZ success lottery include "Win" in any game from the first game to the final game (the game in which the CZ game count counter starts with a value of "1"), or if the results of the second CZ success lottery include "Win" (excluding "Win" due to rewriting) in any game from the first game to the game before the last game (the game in which the CZ game count counter starts with a value of "2"), the main CPU 101 converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 121, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 9 in Figure 123. If the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Other," the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(a) and performs a CZ reward lottery based on the current V rank managed by the V rank counter, and sets the SZ type of the lottery result in the SZ type counter. If the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Lipche," the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(b) and performs a CZ reward lottery based on the current V rank managed by the V rank counter, sets the SZ type of the lottery result in the SZ type counter, and adds the number of resonance points obtained from the lottery result to the resonance point counter.

Furthermore, if the result of the second CZ success lottery is changed from "Not a Winner" to "Winner" in the game before the final game (the game where the CZ game count counter's value at the start of the game is "2"), the main CPU 101, regardless of whether the lottery flag group is "Other" or "Replay Chance," refers to the CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(a) and performs a CZ reward lottery based on the current V rank managed by the V rank counter, and sets the SZ type of the lottery result in the SZ type counter. Note that in the fourth gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, if the lottery result is changed from "Not a Winner" to "Winner," in the example in Figure 146(a), the game does not transition to the bonus zone (SZ) of SZ type "SZ type 6" to "SZ type 8," and no resonance points are awarded.

The main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V-stock counter value when a special direct hit processing condition that may occur in the CZ is met.

The main CPU 101 will transition to the normal (non-advantageous) state if the CZ (Challenge Zone) fails (no wins (including wins overwritten from non-wins) occur during the game interval from the first game to the final game where the CZ game counter changes from "1" to "0"), and the conditions for transitioning to the normal (advantageous) state are not met.

The main CPU 101, upon confirming a CZ failure and the CZ type being "NCZ" (condition for transitioning to normal (advantageous section)), transitions to normal (advantageous section).

If the main CPU 101 succeeds in the CZ (if it wins the transition to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) (including cases where a non-win is overwritten to a win), it will either proceed to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) via AT preparation, or proceed to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ).

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 will transition to the Special AT (SAT) when the value of the game count counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), or when the value of the MY counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), for example, 1800 medals.

[12-8-2-4. Various processes, including various lotteries, performed in the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)]
Next, referring to Figure 183, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) will be explained. However, the contents of Figure 183 may also be performed between AT flags (see Figure 115) in addition to the Special Bonus Zone (SZ). The various draws in Figure 183 are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting internal winning roles to draw flags, the correspondence between internal winning roles and draw flags in Figure 120 is used. The various processes, including various draws, in the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) and the various processes, including various draws, between AT flags transitioning from the Special Bonus Zone (SZ) will be explained together.

There are eight types of SZ, "SZ Type 1" through "SZ Type 8," and each type of SZ ("SZ Type 1" through "SZ Type 8") differs in its termination conditions and the method of drawing the number of games played in the general AT (NAT) (the remaining number of games in NAT).

When entering SZ, the type of SZ is determined by a CZ reward lottery, and the main CPU 101 performs the initial processing as follows:
If the SZ type counter is "SZ type 1", the SZ game counter, which manages the remaining number of SZ games, is set to "1".
If it is "SZ type 2", set the NAT game counter, which manages the remaining number of games in the general AT (NAT), to "20".
If it is "SZ type 3", set the bonus count counter, which manages the remaining number of bonus games to be added to the remaining number of NAT games (the remaining number of draws for drawing the NAT game bonus (for SZ type 3)), to "5".
If it is "SZ type 4", set the SZ game counter to "5".
If it is "SZ type 5", set the SZ mode counter to "SZ mode 4",
For SZ types 6 through 8, the SZ mode counter is set to the SZ mode based on the result of the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery.

In the initial SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery performed for "SZ type 6" to "SZ type 8," the main CPU 101 refers to the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table in Figure 158 and performs the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery based on the trigger ("start of SZ type 6-SZ type 8"). It then sets the SZ mode in the SZ mode counter by increasing "SZ mode 1" by the number of steps determined by the lottery result (if the lottery result is "SZ mode 0 steps up," it becomes "SZ mode 1"; if it's "SZ mode 1 steps up," it becomes "SZ mode 2"; if it's "SZ mode 2 steps up," it becomes "SZ mode 3"; and if it's "SZ mode 3 steps up," it becomes "SZ mode 4").

If the main CPU 101 wins a BB, it sets the BB premonition counter to "0", and according to the SZ type,
If it is "SZ type 1", the process of subtracting "1" from the SZ game counter is not performed.
If it is "SZ type 3", set the bonus count counter to "5",
If it is "SZ type 4", set the SZ game counter to "5".
If the SZ type is "SZ type 5" to "SZ type 8", the value of the V stock counter is increased by "+1", the SZ mode managed by the SZ mode counter is updated based on the draw result of the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5 to 8) draw, and further, referring to Figure 120, if the draw flag converted from the internal winning role is "middle cherry" and the SZ mode managed by the SZ mode counter is "SZ mode 2" or lower, then "SZ mode 3" is set in the SZ mode counter.

In the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery, which is performed as a process when a BB (Big Bonus) is won in the case of "SZ type 5" to "SZ type 8," the main CPU 101 refers to the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery table in Figure 158 and performs the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery based on the trigger ("BB win_SZ mode 1", "BB win_SZ mode 2", "BB win_SZ mode 3", "BB win_SZ mode 4"). The SZ mode managed by the SZ mode counter is then updated based on the lottery result of the SZ mode setting (for SZ types 5-8) lottery. However, if the updated SZ mode exceeds "SZ mode 4," "SZ mode 4" is set in the SZ mode counter.

The SZ game counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played in SZ of "SZ Type 1" and "SZ Type 4". However, the SZ game counter does not decrease during BB winning games in SZ or between AT flags.

In SZ type "SZ type 1", the main CPU 101, for each game, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss", "Small Win", "Weak Rare Win", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Win", the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT game count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) lottery table in Figure 148 to perform a NAT game count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting number of added games to the NAT game counter.

In SZ type "SZ type 1", the main CPU 101, for each game, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss", "Small Win", "Weak Rare Win", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Win", the main CPU 101 refers to the V-stock acquisition count (for SZ type 1) lottery table in Figure 149 to perform a V-stock acquisition count (for SZ type 1) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting V-stock acquisition count of "1" to the V-stock counter value.

In SZ of type "SZ type 1," when the SZ game counter value is reduced by "1" to "0" (the SZ termination condition for "SZ type 1" is met), the SZ ends and the game transitions to a general AT (NAT).

In SZ of type "SZ type 2", the main CPU 101, for games that result in a win other than a finishing role (SB, miss (excluding BB overlap)), refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning role into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 22 in Figure 125 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Other", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 2) lottery table in Figure 150 to perform a NAT game addition count (for SZ type 2) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting number of added games to the NAT game counter. Furthermore, the main CPU 101, upon winning a combination other than the ending combination (SB, miss (excluding BB overlap)), adds "+1" to the V-stock counter for each game from the 5th game onward in an SZ of type "SZ type 2".

In SZ of type "SZ Type 2," the game ends and transitions to general AT (NAT) when the ending role is achieved (the SZ termination condition for "SZ Type 2" is met).

In SZ type "SZ type 3," the main CPU 101 converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 11 in Figure 123. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss," "Replay," "Bell," "Weak Rare Combination," "Strong Watermelon," or "Strong Rare Combination," the main CPU 101 deducts "1" from the bonus count counter. Then, referring to the NAT game bonus count (for SZ type 3) lottery table in Figure 151, the main CPU 101 performs a NAT game bonus count (for SZ type 3) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting bonus game count to the NAT game counter. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V stock counter each time the total bonus game count reaches 100 games.

In SZ type "SZ type 3," following the NAT game addition count (for SZ type 3) lottery, the internal winning combination is converted into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and the resulting lottery flag is converted into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 21 in Figure 125. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Replay" or "Rare Combination," the main CPU 101 refers to the remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery table in Figure 152 and performs a remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group. If the lottery result is "Restore remaining bonus count to original value," the value of the remaining bonus count counter is returned to its original value (initial value: "5").

In SZ of type "SZ type 3," if the value of the remaining bonus count counter, after updating based on the remaining bonus count reload (for SZ type 3) lottery, is "0" (meaning the SZ termination condition for "SZ type 3" is met), the SZ will terminate and the game will transition to a general AT (NAT).

In SZ of type "SZ type 4", if the remaining number of games (including the current game) of the SZ managed by the SZ game counter is "2" or more, the main CPU 101 refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "miss", "minor combination", "rare combination", "strong watermelon", or "strong rare combination", the main CPU 101 refers to the SZ type 4 level up/NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery table in Figure 153 to perform an SZ type 4 level up/NAT game addition count (for SZ type 4) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group. The SZ Type 4 level has five stages, from "Level 0" to "Level 5." It is used in the NAT game count loop (for SZ Type 4) lottery described later, and a higher SZ Type 4 level value is more advantageous to the player. The SZ Type 4 level counter is set to "Level 0" at the start of SZ. The main CPU 101 maintains or updates the SZ Type 4 level, managed by the SZ Type 4 level counter, based on the results of the SZ Type 4 level-up/NAT game count (for SZ Type 4) lottery, and maintains or updates the remaining number of NAT games, managed by the NAT game count counter, based on the results of the SZ Type 4 level-up/NAT game count (for SZ Type 4) lottery. If the updated SZ Type 4 level based on the lottery results exceeds "Level 5," "Level 5" is set in the SZ Type 4 level counter.

In an SZ of type "SZ type 4", if the remaining number of games (including the current game) for the SZ managed by the SZ game counter is "1", and the BB is not won, the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery table in Figure 154 and performs a NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery based on the current SZ type 4 level managed by the SZ type 4 level counter. If the lottery result is "Winning (+1G)", "+1" is added to the NAT game counter, and the NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery is repeated. If the lottery result is "Not winning", the NAT game addition loop (for SZ type 4) lottery is terminated without being repeated. In the example shown in Figure 154, the higher the level value of SZ type 4, the higher the probability of the lottery result being a "win" and winning one game in general AT (NAT).

In SZ type "SZ type 4", if the remaining number of games (including the current game) of the SZ managed by the SZ game counter is "1", the main CPU 101 refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss", "Small Win", "Rare Win", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Win", the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT game count (for SZ type 4) lottery table in Figure 155 to perform a NAT game count (for SZ type 4) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting number of added games to the NAT game counter.

In SZ type "SZ type 4," when the SZ game counter value is reduced by "1" to "0" (the SZ termination condition for "SZ type 4" is met), the SZ ends and the game transitions to a general AT (NAT).

In SZ types 5 through 8, the main CPU 101, in the first game of the SZ, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 10 in Figure 123 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss," "Small Win," "Weak Rare Win," "Strong Watermelon," or "Strong Rare Win," the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT game addition count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) lottery table in Figure 149 to perform a NAT game addition count (for SZ types 1, 5-8) lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the acquired addition count to the NAT game counter.

In SZs of "SZ type 5" to "SZ type 8", the main CPU 101, when the current SZ mode managed by the SZ mode counter is "SZ mode 1" to "SZ mode 3" and the game is not a Big Bonus win, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a draw flag, and refers to the draw flag group 12 in Figure 123 to convert the resulting draw flag into a draw flag group. If the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Miss," "Replay," "Bell," "Weak Rare Role," "Strong Watermelon," or "Strong Rare Role," the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for "Target Performance," "V Stock Acquisition," and "SZ Mode Transition (for SZ Types 5-8)" (shown in Figures 156(a)-(c)) corresponding to the current SZ Mode managed by the SZ Mode Counter, and performs a lottery for "Target Performance," "V Stock Acquisition," and "SZ Mode Transition (for SZ Types 5-8)" based on the lottery flag group of the conversion result, and sets the SZ Mode of the lottery result in the SZ Mode Counter.

However, if the current SZ mode managed by the SZ mode counter is "SZ mode 4", the aforementioned target animation, V stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) lottery will not be performed.
(1) Regardless of whether you win or lose a BB, add "+1" to the V Stock Counter.
(2) If the BB is not won and the draw flag group in draw flag group 8 is "miss", the CZ mode counter is rewritten from "CZ mode 4" to "CZ mode 3".

For SZ types "SZ type 5" to "SZ type 8",
(1) If the result of the draw for the "Aim" effect, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) is "Aim (matched) + V-stock_SZ mode 1", "Aim (matched) + V-stock_SZ mode 2", or "Aim (matched) + V-stock_SZ mode 3", then,
(2) If the result of the draw for the "Aim" animation, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition (for SZ types 5-8) is "Aim (not matched) - SZ mode 1", "Aim (not matched) - SZ mode 2", or "Aim (not matched) - SZ mode 3", and an SB is won, or
(3) If the SZ mode managed by the SZ mode counter is "SZ mode 4" and BB is not won,
In the next game after any of the above conditions are met, the V-stock acquisition count (for VZ types 5-8) lottery table in Figure 157 is used to perform a V-stock acquisition count (for VZ types 5-8) lottery, and the number of V-stocks acquired as a result of the lottery is added to the V-stock counter.

In SZ types "SZ Type 5" to "SZ Type 8," if the CZ mode at the start of the game is "CZ Mode 1," and the winning combination is "F_Bell 123 to F_Bell 321," and the payout is "1" (the SZ termination condition for "SZ Type 5 to SZ Type 8" is met), the SZ will terminate and the game will transition to a general AT (NAT).

The main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V-stock counter value when the special direct hit processing conditions that may occur in SZ are met.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 will transition to the Special AT (SAT) when the value of the game count counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), or when the value of the MY counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), for example, 1800 medals.

[12-8-2-5. Various processes, including various lotteries, performed in general AT (NAT) and SC pre-announcement]
Next, referring to Figure 184, the details of various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 during general AT (NAT) and SC pre-announcement will be explained. However, the contents of Figure 184 may also be performed between flags during AT (see Figure 115), in addition to general AT (NAT) and SC pre-announcement. Note that the high probability transition draw at the start of NAT and the SAT activation draw upon failure of the next CZ, described later, are performed at 3off, and when converting internal winning roles into draw flags, the correspondence between internal winning roles and draw flags in Figure 121 is used. Furthermore, the following lotteries are performed when the start lever 7 is operated: the SC occurrence/V stock acquisition lottery, the SC pre-announcement game count lottery, the NAT high probability transition lottery, the V stock acquisition count lottery during the SC pre-announcement, the BB pre-announcement game count lottery during NAT, the resonance point acquisition count lottery during NAT, and the navigation occurrence lottery. When converting the internal winning role into a lottery flag, the correspondence between the internal winning role and the lottery flag shown in Figure 120 is used.

The NAT game counter decreases by "1" each time a game is played during NAT and SC pre-announcement. However, the NAT game counter does not decrease between AT flags.

At the start of NAT, the initial value for the initial difference in tokens is set in the NAT token counter.

The NAT difference counter is updated between NAT, SC pre-announcement, Stock Chance (SC), and AT flags, and the internal winning combination is...
(1) In the case of a replay, no addition or subtraction is performed on the NAT difference counter.
(2) In the case of "F_Bell 123" to "F_Bell 321", "F_Slave 123" to "F_Slave 321", and "F_JAC Role 1", if instruction numbers 1 to 6 (see Figure 190) "Bell Payout - 3" (the bell payout is the number of coins paid out if the instructions for instruction numbers 1 to 6 are followed) is subtracted from the NAT difference counter, otherwise the difference is subtracted from the NAT difference counter.
(3) In cases other than those mentioned above, subtract the difference in the number of tokens from the NAT token difference counter.

However, the NAT difference counter will not be updated during AT (Attack Time) between Big Bonuses (BB).

First, we will explain the details of the various processes, including the various draws, that are performed at the start of NAT (during the 3-off period in games that will transition to NAT from the next game onwards).

At the start of NAT, the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT start high probability transition lottery table in Figure 159 and performs a NAT start high probability transition lottery based on the current state managed by the current state counter. If the lottery result is "no transition," the main CPU 101 does not update the current state counter or the high probability barrier counter. If the lottery result is "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 10 added," "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 20 added," or "high probability + high probability barrier counter + 30 added," the "high probability" result is set in the current state counter, and the number of added games from the lottery result is added to the high probability barrier counter. If the lottery result is "super high probability," the "super high probability" result is set in the current state counter.

At the start of NAT, the main CPU 101 refers to the SAT activation lottery table for when the next CZ fails (Figure 160) and performs a lottery for when the next CZ fails to activate based on the current settings ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"). If the lottery result is "Winning," the system manages to activate a special AT (SAT) (transitioning to SAT from the next CZ) if the next CZ entered has no V stock and the first CZ success lottery is not performed in the final game of that next CZ, and the transition to SZ is not won. If the lottery result is "Winning" even once, the activation of the special AT (SAT) is effective during that advantageous period. In the example in Figure 160, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of the lottery result being "Winning."

Next, we will explain the details of the various processes, including the various draws performed when operating the start lever 7 during general AT (NAT), SC pre-announcement, and between AT flags.

If the SC pre-announcement counter, which manages the number of games in the SC pre-announcement phase at the start of the game, is "0", and the BB pre-announcement counter, which manages the number of games in the BB pre-announcement phase at the start of the game, is "0", the main CPU 101 refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning role into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 13 in Figure 124 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Other", "Weak Rare Role", "Weak Watermelon", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the SC occurrence/V stock acquisition lottery table corresponding to the current stay state managed by the stay state counter in the SC occurrence/V stock acquisition lottery tables of Figures 161(a) to (c) and performs an SC occurrence/V stock acquisition lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group. If the lottery result is "Not a Winner", it means that the transition to Stock Chance (SC) is not a winner. On the other hand, if the lottery result is "SC Win" or "SC Win + 1 V Stock Acquired," the player wins the transition to SC, and if the lottery result is "SC Win + 1 V Stock Acquired," the number of V Stocks acquired in the lottery result, "1," is added to the V Stock counter. Note that in the example shown in Figures 161(a) to (c), the expected value of winning the transition to SC increases in the order of "Low Probability," "High Probability," and "Super High Probability," and the expected value of acquiring 1 V Stock also increases.

If the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is a win for transitioning to SC (i.e., the lottery result is "SC win" or "SC win + 1 V-stock acquired"), the main CPU 101 sets the SC level counter to "SC Level 1" if the current state managed by the current state counter is "Low Probability," to "SC Level 2" if the current state is "High Probability," and to "SC Level 3" if the current state is "Super High Probability."

If the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is a win for transitioning to SC (i.e., the lottery result is "SC win" or "SC win + 1 V-stock acquired"), the main CPU 101 refers to the SC pre-announcement game count lottery table in Figure 162 and performs an SC pre-announcement game count lottery based on the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery, and sets the number of games for the SC pre-announcement based on the lottery result in the SC pre-announcement counter. However, if the number of games for the SC pre-announcement based on the lottery result is greater than the value after subtracting 1 for that game managed by the NAT game count counter, the value of the SC pre-announcement counter is rewritten to the value after subtracting 1 for that game managed by the NAT game count counter. Note that in the example in Figure 162, the SC pre-announcement in the case of "SC win + 1 V-stock acquired" tends to have a longer number of games than the SC pre-announcement in the case of "SC win".

When an SC occurs and a V-stock acquisition lottery is performed, the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT high probability transition lottery table corresponding to the current state managed by the current state counter in the NAT high probability transition lottery table shown in Figures 163(a) to (c), and performs a NAT high probability transition lottery based on the lottery flag group of the conversion result. If the lottery result is "no transition," the main CPU 101 does not update the current state counter or the high-probability barrier counter. If the lottery result is "high probability + high-probability barrier counter + 10," "high probability + high-probability barrier counter + 20," or "high probability + high-probability barrier counter + 30," the "high probability" result is set in the current state counter, and the number of games added in the lottery result is added to the high-probability barrier counter. If the lottery result is "super high probability," the "super high probability" result is set in the current state counter.

The main CPU 101, if either the SC pre-announcement counter or the BB pre-announcement counter is "1" or greater at the start of the game, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 3 in Figure 122 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "weak rare combination," "strong watermelon," "strong rare combination," or "middle cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT V-stock acquisition lottery table in Figure 164 to perform a NAT V-stock acquisition lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the number of V-stocks acquired ("1") to the V-stock counter.

Furthermore, comparing the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery performed when both the SC pre-announcement counter and the BB pre-announcement counter are "0" at the start of the game, with the NAT V-stock acquisition lottery performed when either the SC pre-announcement counter or the BB pre-announcement counter is "1" or higher at the start of the game, as shown in the examples in Figures 161 and 164, the latter has a higher expected value of acquiring "1" V-stock than the former.

The main CPU 101, when the AT flag is active and the BB pre-announcement counter value is "1" or greater, refers to the "High" section of the navigation occurrence mode in the navigation occurrence lottery table shown in Figure 174 to perform a navigation occurrence lottery. If the lottery result is "Navigation Available," navigation is performed; if it is "No Navigation," navigation is prevented from being performed.

Following the NAT high probability transition lottery or navigation generation lottery, the main CPU 101, referring to Figure 120, converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag. If the current state managed by the stay state counter is "high probability," and the remaining number of high-probability obstacle games at the start of the game, managed by the high-probability obstacle counter, is "1" (the value of the high-probability obstacle counter changes from "1" to "0" in that game), and the lottery flag is "miss," then, referring to the high-probability fall lottery table in Figure 139, a high-probability fall lottery is performed based on the game state "NAT," and the lottery result ("low probability" or "high probability") is set in the stay state counter.

The main CPU 101, during BB (Big Bonus) winning games (excluding RT6), refers to the NAT (Network Attack Time) BB pre-announcement game count lottery table shown in Figure 40 to perform a lottery for the number of BB pre-announcement games during NAT, and sets the resulting number of BB pre-announcement games in the BB pre-announcement counter. Furthermore, upon winning a BB (excluding RT6), the value of the BB pre-announcement counter is reset to its initial value ("0").

The main CPU 101, for each game, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 23 in Figure 125 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Bell," "JAC3," or "Cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the NAT Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table in Figure 166 to perform a NAT Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting acquired points to the Resonance Point Counter.

The main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V-stock counter value when a special direct hit processing condition is met during NAT, SC pre-announcement, or AT flag.

If the player wins the SC transition lottery (when the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is "SC win" or "SC win + 1 V-stock acquired"), the SC pre-announcement game count lottery will be determined to be 1 or more. In NAT, if the main CPU 101 wins the SC transition lottery (when the result of the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is "SC win" or "SC win + 1 V-stock acquired"), it will transition from NAT to SC pre-announcement.

Main CPU 101, during the SC pre-announcement phase, transitions from the SC pre-announcement to a Stock Chance (SC) when the number of games in the SC pre-announcement phase has been completed (i.e., the SC pre-announcement counter value changes from "1" to "0" in that game).

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 will transition to the Special AT (SAT) when the value of the game count counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), or when the value of the MY counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), for example, 1800 medals.

The main CPU 101 transitions from NAT to the Continuation CZ when the NAT game count is completed during the NAT or SC pre-announcement phase (when the NAT game count counter value changes from "1" to "0" in that game). When the main CPU 101 transitions from NAT to the Continuation CZ, if the NAT difference counter value is greater than or equal to the initial value (i.e., the number of acquired coins did not increase), it adds "+50" to the Resonance Point counter value.

[12-8-2-6. Various processes, including various draws, conducted in Stock Chance (SC)]
Next, referring to Figure 185, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 during a Stock Chance (SC) will be explained. However, the contents of Figure 185 may also be performed between flags during AT (see Figure 115) in addition to Stock Chance (SC). The following draws for the number of resonance points acquired during SC, the number of V-stocks acquired before acquiring V-stocks during SC, and the number of V-stocks acquired after acquiring V-stocks during SC are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and the correspondence between internal winning roles and draw flags in Figure 120 is used when converting internal winning roles into draw flags. In addition, the following draw for the number of games to secure high wins after SC is performed when 3 is off, and the correspondence between internal winning roles and draw flags in Figure 121 is used when converting internal winning roles into draw flags.

As part of the SC (Super Chance) system, there are three SC levels ("SC Level 1" to "SC Level 3") with different expected values for the number of games played and the total number of V-stocks acquired. The SC level affects whether or not you acquire one V-stock in the V-stock acquisition lottery before acquiring V-stocks during the SC (described later). The higher the SC level, the higher the expected value of acquiring one V-stock (see Figure 168).

As described above, the SC level is determined based on the current state managed by the current state counter when an SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is won (when the lottery result for the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery is "SC win" or "SC win + 1 V-stock acquired"), and is set in the SC level counter. At the start of an SC, the main CPU 101 sets the SC game counter, which manages the remaining number of SC games, to "1" if the SC level managed by the SC level counter is "SC level 1", to "2" if it is "SC level 2", and to "4" if it is "SC level 3". The SC game counter is decremented by "1" each time a game is played during an SC. Note that the NAT game counter value is not decremented by "1" during an SC or between AT flags transitioning from that SC.

The main CPU 101, for each game, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 16 in Figure 124 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Strong Rare Combination" or "Middle Cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the SC (Super Chance) Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table in Figure 167 to perform a lottery for SC Resonance Points acquired based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the acquired points to the Resonance Point Counter.

The main CPU 101, in a game where a Big Bonus (BB) is not won, and after winning the SC occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery during the current game, has not acquired any V-stocks, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning role into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 17 in Figure 124 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the lottery flag group of the conversion result is "Bell" or "Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of V-stocks to be acquired before acquiring V-stocks during SC, which corresponds to the current SC level managed by the SC level counter in the lottery table for the number of V-stocks to be acquired before acquiring V-stocks during SC shown in Figures 168(a) to (c), and performs a lottery for the number of V-stocks to be acquired before acquiring V-stocks during SC based on the lottery flag group of the conversion result. If the lottery result is "Acquire 1 V-stock", the number of V-stocks acquired, "1", is added to the V-stock counter. In the example shown in Figures 168(a) to (c), if the lottery flag group is "Rare Role", the lottery result will be "Acquire 1 V-stock" with 100% probability, regardless of the SC level value (acquire "1" V-stock). Furthermore, in the example shown in Figures 168(a) to (c), when the lottery flag group is "Bell," the probability of the lottery result being "Acquire 1 V-Stock" (acquiring "1" V-Stock) increases as the SC level value increases.

If the game in question is not a Big Bonus (BB) win, the main CPU 101, after winning the SC (Super Chance) occurrence/V-stock acquisition lottery during the current game and acquiring one or more V-stocks, refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning role into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 17 in Figure 124 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Bell" or "Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the V-stock acquisition lottery table after V-stock acquisition during SC in Figure 169 and performs a V-stock acquisition lottery after V-stock acquisition during SC based on the resulting lottery flag group, and if the lottery result is "1 V-stock acquired", adds the number of acquired V-stocks "1" to the V-stock counter. In the example shown in Figure 169, if the lottery flag group is "Rare Role," the lottery result will be "Acquire 1 V-Stock" with 100% probability (acquire "1" V-Stock).

If the game in question results in a Big Bonus (BB), the main CPU 101 will not perform the V-stock acquisition lottery before or after acquiring a V-stock during the Super Chance (SC). Instead, it will acquire one V-stock, add "+1" to the V-stock counter, and set the BB pre-announcement game counter, which manages the number of games in the BB pre-announcement phase, to "1". This will result in the BB confirmation screen appearing from the next game. Furthermore, if the sequence is AT (Attack Time) flag interval → AT (Attack Time) BB → SC, the main CPU 101 will set the SC game counter to "2" if the current SC level is "SC level 1", "3" if it's "SC level 2", and "4" if it's "SC level 3", and restart the SC from the beginning.

The main CPU 101, in the game where the SC game counter changes from "1" to "0" (the final SC game before transitioning from SC to NAT), sets the current state counter to "high probability" and simultaneously performs a lottery for the number of high-probability games after SC by referring to the SC post-high-probability game count lottery table shown in Figure 170. The resulting high-probability game count is then set in the high-probability counter. Note that even if the value of the high-probability counter before rewriting is greater than the lottery result, the value of the high-probability counter will still be rewritten.

The main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V-stock counter value when a special direct hit processing condition that may occur in SC is met.

When the main CPU 101 has used up the SC game count (i.e., the SC game count counter's value changes from "1" to "0" in that game), it switches from SC to NAT and rewrites the NAT game count counter's value from "0" to "1".

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 will transition to the Special AT (SAT) when the value of the game count counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), or when the value of the MY counter reaches the value that triggers the transition to the Special AT (SAT transition), for example, 1800 medals.

[12-8-2-7. Various processes, including various lotteries, performed in Special AT (SAT) and Special AT (SAT) preparation state]
Next, referring to Figure 186, the details of various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the Special AT (SAT) and Special AT (SAT) preparation states will be explained. However, the contents of Figure 186 may also be performed in the AT during flag intervals (see Figure 115) and during AT BB (see Figure 115), in addition to the Special AT (SAT) and Special AT (SAT) preparation states. The AT during flag interval occurs when a transition occurs due to a BB win in SAT, and the AT during BB occurs, for example, when a BB is won in the AT during flag interval, when the value of the game count counter reaches the value that transitions to the Special AT (SAT) (SAT transition game count), and when the value of the MY counter reaches the value that transitions to the Special AT (SAT) (SAT transition game count medals, for example 1800). Furthermore, the SAT continuation lottery and SAT difference-increase lottery, described later, are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the lottery flag shown in Figure 120 is used.

At the start of SAT (the start of the first set) and at the start of subsequent SATs (the start of the second set and beyond), the SAT difference counter will be set to "50" as the initial difference in tokens.

Also, at the start of the SAT (the start of the first set),
(1) The number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is converted to a difference of "50" per V-stock and added to the value of the SAT difference counter. Furthermore, if the CZ type managed by the CZ type counter is "CZR", the "CZR" is converted to one V-stock and "50" is added to the value of the SAT difference counter.
(2) The number of resonance points managed by the resonance point counter is converted to a difference of "1" per point and added to the value of the SAT difference counter.
(3) The value obtained by subtracting 1 from the rank value of the V rank managed by the V rank counter and multiplying the result by 50 (= (rank value - 1) × 50) is added to the value of the SAT difference counter.
(4) The remaining number of games for Extra BB managed by the Extra BB game counter is converted to a difference of "2" per game and added to the value of the SAT difference counter.
(5) The remaining number of games in the NAT managed by the NAT game counter is converted to a difference of "2" per game and added to the value of the SAT difference counter.

The SAT difference counter is updated during SAT, SAT preparation state, between AT flags, and during AT BB, and the internal winning combination is...
(1) In the case of a replay, no addition or subtraction is performed on the SAT difference counter.
(2) In the case of "F_Bell 123" to "F_Bell 321", "F_Slave 123" to "F_Slave 321", and "F_JAC Role 1", if the instruction numbers are 1 to 6 (see Figure 190), subtract "Bell Payout - 3" (the number of payouts if the instruction numbers 1 to 6 are followed) from the SAT difference counter, otherwise subtract the difference from the SAT difference counter.
(3) In the case of "F_Weak Watermelon", "F_Strong Watermelon A", "F_Strong Watermelon B", "F_Strong Cherry", "F_Strong Bell A", "F_Strong Bell B", and "F_SP Role", the difference in coins is subtracted from the SAT difference coin counter during AT and BB, but in other cases no addition or subtraction is made to the SAT difference coin counter.
(4) In all other cases, subtract the difference in the number of tokens from the SAT token difference counter.

At the start of the SAT setup, the main CPU 101 refers to the SAT continuation lottery table in Figure 171 and performs the SAT continuation lottery based on the current settings.

The main CPU 101 checks, after each game, whether the count value of the SAT difference counter after subtracting the difference in tokens for that game is "1" or greater. If the SAT difference counter is "1" or greater, it refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 18 in Figure 124 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "weak rare combination," "weak watermelon," "strong watermelon," "strong rare combination," or "middle cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the SAT difference token increase lottery table in Figure 172 to perform an SAT difference token increase lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting increase in tokens to the SAT difference counter.

The main CPU 101 adds "+50" to the SAT difference counter value when a special direct hit processing condition is met, which may occur between SAT or AT BB flags.

The main CPU 101, upon the SAT difference counter reaching "0" due to a decrease in the difference in the number of tokens, proceeds to the next set of SAT if the SAT continuation lottery result is "continuation" (in the case of SAT), or to the SAT termination preparation state if the lottery result is "non-continuation".

The SAT termination preparation state ends after one game. If (1) a Big Bonus (BB) is won in this game, or (2) the lottery flag at 3-off (the lottery flag converted using Figure 121 to represent the internally winning role) is anything other than "Miss," "Replay," or "Bell," the SAT continuation lottery result is rewritten from "Non-continuation" to "Continue," and the next set of SAT is played. On the other hand, in all other cases (BB not won AND the lottery flag at 3-off is "Miss," "Replay," or "Bell"), the game transitions to normal mode (non-advantageous section).

The main CPU 101 switches to the limit (LI) when the SAT difference counter becomes "0" due to a decrease in the difference in the number of tokens, if it is between BB flags during AT.

The main CPU 101, upon the SAT difference counter reaching "0" due to a decrease in the difference in the number of tokens, transitions to normal mode (non-advantageous section) in the case of a Big Bonus (BB) during AT mode.

[12-8-2-8. Various processes, including various draws, performed at the limit (LI)]
Next, referring to Figure 187, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 at the limit (LI) will be explained. Note that the navigation generation mode draw and the bell generation draw, which will be described later, are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting the internal winning combination into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag shown in Figure 120 is used.

The main CPU 101 sets the navigation generation mode to "Low" in the navigation generation mode counter when LI (Limit Break) is activated.

The main CPU 101, for each game, refers to the navigation mode lottery table corresponding to the current navigation mode managed by the navigation mode counter in the navigation mode lottery table shown in Figures 173(a) and (b), performs a navigation mode lottery based on the current settings, and sets the lottery result ("High" or "Low") in the navigation mode lottery counter.

Following the navigation mode lottery, if the main CPU 101 selects "F_Bell 123" to "F_321", it refers to the navigation mode lottery table in Figure 174 and performs a navigation mode lottery based on the current navigation mode managed by the navigation mode counter. If the lottery result is "Navigation Available", navigation is performed; if it is "Navigation Not Available", navigation is not performed.

The main CPU 101 returns to normal mode (non-advantageous section) when a Big Bonus (BB) is won during LI (Limited Time), either when the number of games played in the advantageous section is exhausted (when the advantageous section game counter reaches 3000). The main CPU 101 also returns to normal mode (non-advantageous section) when the MY counter reaches 2400.

[12-8-2-9. Various processes, including various lotteries, conducted at BB]
Next, referring to Figure 188, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 during BB will be explained. However, BB refers to the normal BB (non-advantageous section), normal BB (advantageous section), and AT during BB shown in Figure 115. The various draws performed during BB are carried out when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting the internal winning combination into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag shown in Figure 120 is used.

The main CPU 101 is,
(1) The value of the BB premonition counter is "8" or less,
(2) The number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is "2" or more,
(3) If the number of V-stocks managed by the V-stock counter is "1" and the next CZR activation lottery is won,
Clear the value of the BB premonition counter (set it to "0").

During both BB and Extra BB, the value of the Extra BB game counter is deducted by "1" for each game played.

If the Extra BB game counter value is "1" or greater at the end of a BB, the game will transition to an Extra BB. If the Extra BB game counter value is "1" or greater at the end of a BB, the value of the Extra BB game counter will be rounded up to the nearest 5. For example, if the value is "8", it will be rounded up to "10" (the value for 5).

The main CPU 101, in BB winning games other than during Special AT (SAT) and Limit (LI), refers to the Extra BB initial game count lottery table in Figure 175(a) if the winning BB is a same-color BB (named "F_Red 7 same color" or "F_White same color"), and refers to the Extra BB initial game count lottery table in Figure 175(b) if the winning BB is a different-color BB (named "F_Red different color" or "F_White different color"), and performs an Extra BB initial game count lottery based on the current CZ mode managed by the CZ mode counter, and adds the initial game count of the lottery result to the Extra BB initial game count counter. However, the value of the Extra BB initial game count counter after addition will be "N + initial game count result of the draw" if the BB initial game count draw was performed when the value of the Extra BB initial game count counter was "1" or greater than "N". Note that in the example shown in Figures 175(a) and (b), the initial number of Extra BB games tends to increase in the order of "Mode A", "Mode B", "Mode C", and "Mode D" of the CZ mode, and the initial number of Extra BB games tends to be higher for same-color BBs than for different-color BBs.

The main CPU 101, during BB (Big Bonus) win games other than those in Special AT (SAT), refers to the BB interval game count initial value lottery table shown in Figure 129, performs a lottery for the BB interval game count initial value based on the current settings, and sets the initial game count of the lottery result in the BB interval game count counter.

The main CPU 101, during every game in a Big Bonus (BB) other than during a Special AT (SAT) (except for a normal BB (advantageous section) when transitioning from a normal BB (non-advantageous section) to a normal BB (advantageous section) during a normal BB (advantageous section)), refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning roles into lottery flags, and refers to the lottery flag group 19 in Figure 125 to convert the resulting lottery flags into lottery flag groups. If the resulting lottery flag group is "BAR Replay", "Weak Rare Role", "Strong Watermelon", or "Strong Rare Role", the main CPU 101 refers to the extra BB game addition lottery table in Figures 175(a) and (b) that corresponds to the value of the extra BB game counter after subtracting 1 in that game, performs an extra BB game addition lottery, and adds the number of added games from the lottery result to the value of the extra BB game counter.

The main CPU 101, during each game in a Big Bonus (BB) outside of a Special AT (SAT), converts the internal winning combination into a lottery flag by referring to Figure 120, and then converts the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group by referring to the lottery flag group 20 in Figure 125. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss," "JAC Combination 3," "Weak Rare Combination," "Strong Rare Combination," or "Middle Cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table in Figure 177, performs a lottery for the number of Resonance Points acquired during BB/Extra BB based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the number of points acquired as a result of the lottery to the Resonance Point Counter.

The main CPU 101 checks, after each game, whether the SAT difference counter, after the addition or subtraction of the difference in tokens for that game, is "1" or greater. If the SAT difference counter is "1" or greater, it refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 18 in Figure 124 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "weak rare combination," "weak watermelon," "strong watermelon," "strong rare combination," or "middle cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the SAT difference token increase lottery table in Figure 172 to perform an SAT difference token increase lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting increase in tokens to the SAT difference counter.

In a Big Bonus (BB) when it is not yet determined that the game will become a regular AT (NAT), the main CPU 101, upon fulfilling the special direct hit processing conditions that may occur during the BB, increments the V-stock counter value by "+1" and performs a CZ reward lottery. In the CZ reward lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(b) and performs the lottery based on the current V-rank managed by the V-rank counter, setting the resulting SZ type in the SZ type counter. Note that the acquisition points are not added to the resonance point counter.

Furthermore, in BBs (Big Bonus) after the main CPU 101 has been confirmed to be in a general AT (NAT) state, the V-stock counter value is increased by "+1" upon the fulfillment of special direct hit processing conditions that may occur during the BB.

[12-8-2-10. Various processes, including various draws, performed in Extra BB]
Next, referring to Figure 189, the details of the various processes, including various draws, performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in Extra BB will be explained. However, Extra BB refers to the normal Extra BB and the Extra BB during AT as shown in Figure 115. Note that the Extra BB game addition draw and the draw for the number of resonance points acquired during BB/Extra BB, which will be described later, are performed when the start lever 7 is operated, and when converting the internal winning combination into a draw flag, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the draw flag shown in Figure 120 is used.

The main CPU 101, during each game in Extra Big Bonus (Except during Special AT (SAT)), refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 19 in Figure 125 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "BAR Replay," "Weak Rare Combination," "Strong Watermelon," or "Strong Rare Combination," the main CPU 101 refers to the Extra Big Bonus (Extra BB) game count lottery table in Figures 175(a) and (b) that corresponds to the value of the Extra Big Bonus (Extra BB) game count counter after one subtraction in that game, performs an Extra Big Bonus (Extra BB) game count lottery, and adds the resulting number of added games to the value of the Extra Big Bonus (Extra BB) game count counter.

The main CPU 101, during each game in Extra BB (excluding Special AT (SAT)), refers to Figure 120 to convert the internal winning combination into a lottery flag, and then refers to the lottery flag group 20 in Figure 125 to convert the resulting lottery flag into a lottery flag group. If the resulting lottery flag group is "Miss," "JAC Combination 3," "Weak Rare Combination," "Strong Rare Combination," or "Middle Cherry," the main CPU 101 refers to the BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery Table in Figure 177 to perform a BB/Extra BB Resonance Point Acquisition Lottery based on the resulting lottery flag group, and adds the resulting acquired points to the Resonance Point Counter.

In the case of an Extra Big Bonus (BB) when it is not yet determined that it will become a General AT (NAT), the main CPU 101 adds "+1" to the V-stock counter value and performs a CZ reward lottery upon the fulfillment of the special direct hit processing conditions that may occur in the Extra Big Bonus. In the CZ reward lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the CZ reward lottery table in Figure 146(b) and performs the lottery based on the current V-rank managed by the V-rank counter, and sets the SZ type of the lottery result in the SZ type counter. Note that the addition of acquired points to the resonance point counter is not performed.

Furthermore, in Extra BBs after the main CPU 101 has been confirmed to be in general AT (NAT) mode, the V-stock counter value will be increased by "+1" upon fulfillment of the special direct hit processing conditions that may occur during the Extra BB.

[12-9. Button press order navigation patterns for each game state]
Next, with reference to Figures 190 and 191, the notification methods (navigation methods) when a winning combination is achieved in each game state will be explained.

The main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) determines one of the following "navigation types "0" to "12" to notify the player when a button-pressing sequence is hit. As shown in Figure 190, navigation type "0" is a notification mode that does not notify the player about the button-pressing sequence. Navigation type "1" is a notification mode that instructs the button-pressing sequence (1→2→3). That is, it is a notification mode that instructs the button-pressing sequence to be the left reel 3L as the first stop reel, the middle reel 3C as the second stop reel, and the right reel 3R as the third stop reel. Navigation type "2" is a notification mode that instructs the button-pressing sequence (1→3→2). That is, it is a notification mode that instructs the button-pressing sequence to be the left reel 3L as the first stop reel, the right reel 3R as the second stop reel, and the middle reel 3C as the third stop reel. Navigation type "3" is a notification mode that instructs the button press order (2→1→3). That is, it is a notification mode that instructs the button press order to stop the middle reel 3C as the first stop reel, the left reel 3L as the second stop reel, and the right reel 3R as the third stop reel. Navigation type "4" is a notification mode that instructs the button press order (2→3→1). That is, it is a notification mode that instructs the button press order to stop the middle reel 3C as the first stop reel, the right reel 3R as the second stop reel, and the left reel 3L as the third stop reel. Navigation type "5" is a notification mode that instructs the button press order (3→1→2). That is, it is a notification mode that instructs the button press order to stop the right reel 3R as the first stop reel, the left reel 3L as the second stop reel, and the middle reel 3C as the third stop reel. Navigation type "6" is a notification mode that instructs the button press order (3→2→1). In other words, this notification method instructs the player to press the buttons in the following order: the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the middle reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L.

Furthermore, Navigation type "7" is a notification method that instructs the player to select either the button press order (1→2→3) or any other button press order. That is, it is a notification method that instructs the player to select either the button press order where the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the second stop reel is the middle reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the right reel 3R, or any other button press order. Navigation type "8" is a notification method that instructs the player to select either the button press order (1→3→2) or any other button press order. That is, it is a notification method that instructs the player to select either the button press order where the first stop reel is the left reel 3L, the second stop reel is the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 3C, or any other button press order. Navigation type "9" is a notification method that instructs the player to select either the button press order (2→1→3) or any other button press order. In other words, this notification method instructs the player to either select a button press sequence where the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C, the second stop reel is the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel is the right reel 3R, or to select a different button press sequence. Navigation type "10" is a notification method instructing the player to either select a button press sequence (2→3→1) or to select a different button press sequence. In other words, this notification method instructs the player to either select a button press sequence where the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C, the second stop reel is the right reel 3R, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L, or to select a different button press sequence. Navigation type "11" is a notification method instructing the player to either select a button press sequence (3→1→2) or to select a different button press sequence. In other words, this notification method instructs the player to either select a button press sequence where the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the left reel 3L, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 3C, or to select a different button press sequence. Navigation type "12" is a notification method instructing the player to either select a button press sequence (3→2→1) or to select a different button press sequence. In other words, this notification method instructs the player to either select a button press sequence where the first stop reel is the right reel 3R, the second stop reel is the middle reel 3C, and the third stop reel is the left reel 3L, or to select a different button press sequence.

Furthermore, the navigation type determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) can be notified to the player, for example, by displaying it on a two-digit 7-segment LED lamp. Alternatively, information regarding the navigation type may be transmitted in command format to the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201), which may then display information on a display screen such as an LCD screen that identifies the correct button press sequence.

The button press combinations are: "F_weak C-Replay 123", "F_weak C-Replay 132", "F_weak C-Replay 213", "F_weak C-Replay 231", "F_weak C-Replay 312", and "F_weak C-Replay 321", which belong to the "6-choice weak C-Replay" category; and "F_strong C-Replay 123", "F_strong C-Replay 132", "F_strong C-Replay 213", "F_strong C-Replay 231", "F_strong C-Replay 312", and "F_ There are several types of "Strong C Replay 321," including "F_Bell 123," "F_Bell 132," "F_Bell 213," "F_Bell 231," "F_Bell 312," and "F_Bell 321" belonging to the "6-choice Bell" category, and "F_Slave 123," "F_Slave 132," "F_Slave 213," "F_Slave 231," "F_Slave 312," and "F_Slave 321" belonging to the "6-choice Slave" category.

The "6-Choice Weak C Replay" is subject to prize draws in both RT3 and SB states (SB (RT3)) (Figures 75 and 76). As described above, each of the "6-Choice Weak C Replay" prizes has one of the six possible button presses set as the correct sequence. If the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed in the correct sequence during a win, one of the symbol combinations belonging to the "RT3 Transition Replay" (which maintains the RT3 state) will be displayed. If any other sequence (incorrect sequence) is used, one of the symbol combinations belonging to the "RT1 Transition Replay" (which transitions to RT1) will be displayed.

As shown in Figure 191, when the game state is Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), the correct button press sequence is announced for each game in which one of the "6-choice weak C-Replay" combinations is selected. Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT) is a game state transitioned from Normal BB (Advantageous Section) or BB during AT, and the starting RT state is RT3. Therefore, if one of the "6-choice weak C-Replay" combinations is selected during Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), and the instructed button press sequence is followed, the RT state will remain at RT3 and will not drop (transition) to RT1.

Furthermore, in the other game states shown in Figure 191, even if you win one of the "six-choice weak C-replay" combinations, the correct button sequence is not announced. Therefore, whether the button sequence is correct and the RT state remains at RT3, or whether the button sequence is incorrect and the RT state transitions to RT1 (drops) depends entirely on luck.

The "6-Choice Strong C Replay" is subject to prize draws in RT3 and SB states (SB (RT3)) (Figures 75 and 76). As described above, each of the "6-Choice Strong C Replay" prizes has one of the six possible button presses set as the correct sequence. If the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed in the correct sequence during a win, one of the symbol combinations belonging to the "RT6 Transition Replay" (which transitions the RT state to RT6) will be displayed. If any other sequence (incorrect sequence) is used, one of the symbol combinations belonging to the "RT1 Transition Replay" (which transitions the RT state to RT1) will be displayed.

As shown in Figure 191, when the game state is Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), the correct button press sequence is announced for each game in which one of the "6-choice Strong C-Replay" combinations is selected. Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT) is a game state transitioned from Normal BB (Advantageous Section) or BB during AT, and the initial RT state is RT3. Therefore, if one of the "6-choice Strong C-Replay" combinations is selected during Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), and the instructed button press sequence is followed, the RT state will transition to RT3 to RT6 and will not revert to RT1.

Furthermore, RT3 is considered a favorable game state among the general game states (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6) because the "F_7 alignment replay" is the target of the prize draw, which grants either a direct AT or one V stock upon winning. RT6 is an even more favorable game state because the probability of winning the "F_7 alignment replay" (which grants either a direct AT or one V stock upon winning) is significantly higher than in RT3. Therefore, the normal Extra BB gameplay involves waiting to win the "F_7 alignment replay" (which grants a direct AT in RT3) or a bonus that grants an AT, while simultaneously aiming to raise the RT state to RT6 by winning the "6-choice strong C replay," thereby further increasing the probability of receiving a direct AT.

Furthermore, in the other game states shown in Figure 191, even if you win the "6-choice Strong C Replay," the correct button sequence is not announced. Therefore, whether you press the buttons correctly and transition to RT6, or press them incorrectly and transition to RT1 (drop) is entirely a matter of luck.

The "6-Choice Bell" is subject to prize draws in RT0, RT1 to RT7 (Figures 75 to 77). As described above, each of the "6-Choice Bell" prizes has one of the six possible button presses set as the correct sequence. When the correct sequence is pressed and the stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R are pressed, a combination of symbols that results in a payout of 15 medals will be displayed. If any other sequence (incorrect sequence) is pressed, a combination of symbols that results in a payout of 1 medal will be displayed. In the case of an incorrect sequence, one of the RT1 transition bells, "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_01" to "C_RT1 Mountain Bell_16" or "C_RT1 V Bell_01" to "C_RT1 V Bell_06", may be displayed. In this case, the game state will remain in or transition to (drop down from) RT1.

As shown in Figure 191, when the game state is one of the following: Continuation CZ (ACZ), Initial CZ (CZR), Continuation CZ (CZR), Special Bonus Zone (SZ), General AT (NAT), Stock Chance (SC), Special AT (SAT), Limit (LI), Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), or BB, the correct button sequence is basically announced for each game played upon winning. Therefore, when one of the "6-choice bells" is selected in any of these game states, if the player follows the instructed button sequence, they can win 15 medals. This creates a payout period where the number of medals held increases.

Furthermore, there are exceptions where the correct button press sequence is not announced, even if the game state is one of the following: Continuation CZ (ACZ), Initial CZ (CZR), Continuation CZ (CZR), Special Bonus Zone (SZ), General AT (NAT), Stock Chance (SC), Special AT (SAT), Limit (LI), Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT), or BB, and the player has won one of the "6-choice bells". The following explains the cases where the correct button press sequence is not announced.

As shown in Figure 191, in any of the following game states: Continuing CZ (ACZ), Initial CZ (CZR), SZ Type 1 to SZ Type 4 bonus zone (SZ), or Stock Chance (SC), if the RT state is RT6, even if you win one of the "6-choice bells," the correct button press order will not be announced (navigation type "0"). This is because if the button press order for the "6-choice bell" is incorrect, the symbol combination for the RT transition bell may stop and transition to RT1, making it difficult to maintain the advantageous RT6 state for an extended period.

Furthermore, in the SZ types 5-8 bonus zones (SZ), if the SZ mode is "1," even if you win one of the "6-choice bells," the correct button sequence will not be announced (navigation type "0"). This is because the termination condition for the SZ types 5-8 bonus zones (SZ) is an incorrect button sequence (payout of one medal) when winning the "6-choice bell." Therefore, announcing the correct button sequence prevents the SZ types 5-8 bonus zones (SZ) from continuing for an extended period.

Furthermore, if you win one of the "6-choice bells" during the Limit (LI), and the result of the navigation lottery is "Navigation Available," the correct button press sequence will be announced. However, if the lottery result is "No Navigation," the correct button press sequence will not be announced (Navigation type "0"). This is because the Limit (LI) is set as a section where the number of medals increases slightly.

Furthermore, in BB (Normal BB (Advantageous Section), BB during AT), if the game state when you hit one of the "6-choice bells" is the BB general state (RT4) or RB state (RT4), the correct button press sequence will be announced. However, if you are in the BBRB flag-interval state (RT7), even if you hit one of the "6-choice bells," the correct button press sequence will not be announced (Navigation type "0").

Furthermore, in a standard AT (NAT), even if you win the "6-choice bell" while in RT6 mode, the correct button press sequence is not announced (navigation type "0"). This is to make it difficult to maintain the advantageous RT6 state for an extended period. Also, in a standard AT (NAT), during the transition between AT flags resulting from a bonus win, the correct button press sequence is announced if the navigation trigger lottery result is "navigation available," but not if the lottery result is "no navigation."

The "6-Choice Slave" is subject to draws in RT0, RT1-RT7 (Figures 75-77). As described above, for each of the "6-Choice Slave" roles, if one of the six button presses (a specific press order) is selected, a symbol combination belonging to the "Chance Symbol" category will be displayed. If any other button press order is selected, a symbol combination that yields 15 medals ("15-Coin Bell") will be displayed. Here, when a "Chance Symbol" symbol combination is displayed, a payout of one medal is obtained compared to when a "15-Coin Bell" symbol combination is displayed. However, in various draws (e.g., small role CZ draw, CZ success draw, etc.), it is possible to receive draws from the "Weak Rare Role" draw flag group, making it more advantageous than the "15-Coin Bell" in terms of AT-related draws.

As shown in Figure 191, when the game state is Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT) or Special AT (SAT), for each game in which one of the "6-choice slates" is selected, a button press sequence that stops displaying a combination of "15-coin bells" is announced. For example, if "F_slate 123" is selected in these game states, the button press sequence (2→1→3: Navigation type "3") is announced. Also, if "F_slate 132" is selected, the button press sequence (2→3→1: Navigation type "4") is announced. Also, if "F_slate 213" is selected, the button press sequence (3→1→2: Navigation type "5") is announced. Also, if "F_slate 231" is selected, the button press sequence (3→2→1: Navigation type "6") is announced. Furthermore, if you win with "F_Slate 312," the button press order (1→2→3: Navigation type "1") will be announced. If you win with "F_Slate 321," the button press order (1→3→2: Navigation type "2") will be announced.

In other words, when the game state is Extra BB (Normal Extra BB, Extra BB during AT) or Special AT (SAT), if the player wins one of the "6-Choice Bell" combinations, the button press order that displays the symbol combinations of the advantageous "Chance Eye" in various draws cannot be determined, while the same notification as when the correct button press order is announced upon winning a "6-Choice Bell" is provided. Note that the type of navigation announced in this case can be changed as appropriate, as long as it corresponds to the button press order that displays the symbol combinations of the "15-Coin Bell".

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 191, when the game state is normal (advantageous section), if the player wins one of the "6-choice slates," and the player's Resonance Points are above a predetermined value (e.g., 200 points), a notification will be issued instructing the player to choose either a button press sequence that displays a combination of "chance symbols" or a button press sequence that displays a combination of "15-coin bells." Therefore, when the Resonance Points are above a predetermined value during normal play (advantageous section), the player can choose to either select a button press sequence that displays a combination of "chance symbols" to gain an advantage in AT-related draws such as the small role CZ draw and the CZ success draw, or select a button press sequence that displays a combination of "15-coin bells" to obtain a larger payout of medals.

Furthermore, in normal (advantageous) mode, if the resonance points are smaller than a predetermined value, or in normal (non-advantageous) mode, chance zones (NCZ, ACZ, CZR), special bonus zones (SZ), general AT (NAT), SAT end preparation, limit (LI), and bonuses (normal BB (non-advantageous mode), normal BB (advantageous mode), AT BB), even if you win one of the "6-choice slates," the button press order will not be announced (navigation type "0").

[12-9-1. Selection instruction presentation when you win a 6-choice slate]
Next, we will explain the selection instruction display shown on the LCD screen when one of the "six-choice labels" is selected, referring to Figure 192. In Figure 192, we will explain using a game in which "F_label 231," one of the "six-choice labels," is selected as an example.

"F_Slavel231" displays one of the "Chance Symbol" combinations when the button press order is 2→3→1 upon winning. For any other button press order, one of the "15-coin Bell" combinations will be displayed.

Therefore, for example, when the resonance points held during normal play (the advantageous period) are above a predetermined value, and the start switch 7S is operated, resulting in a win on "F_Slave 231," as shown in Figure 192, before the first stop operation, the word "Bell" is displayed in a hexagonal frame in the area above the left reel 3L on the LCD screen, the word "NEXT" is displayed in a pentagonal frame in the area above the middle reel 3C, and the word "Bell" is displayed in a hexagonal frame in the area above the right reel 3L. Furthermore, the color of the hexagonal frame in the area above the left reel 3L is, for example, "yellow," while the color of the hexagonal frame in the area above the right reel 3R is a different color from the color corresponding to the left reel 3L (for example, "purple").

According to this display, the player can understand that if the first stop reel is the middle reel 3C, the symbol combination related to the "chance symbol" can be displayed in this order of pressing the buttons. If the first stop reel is the left reel 3L or the right reel 3R, the symbol combination related to the "15-coin bell" can be displayed in this order of pressing the buttons. In other words, the player can choose whether to display the symbol combination related to the "chance symbol" or the symbol combination related to the "15-coin bell." Furthermore, since the hexagonal frame in the area above the right reel 3R is displayed in the unusual color "purple," the second stop reel for displaying the symbol combination related to the "chance symbol" can also be predicted. Note that the "yellow" used in the hexagonal frame in the area above the left reel 3L is the same color as the bell and is a relatively inconspicuous color.

Based on the screen display, suppose the player presses the middle stop button 8C, which sets the first stop sticker to middle reel 3C, in order to select a "chance symbol." In this case, the middle reel 3C controls the stopping of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R so that the symbols constituting the "chance symbol" that can be pulled in stop on the winning line, according to the timing of pressing the middle stop button 8C. Also, on the LCD screen, the "NEXT" display in the area above the selected middle reel 3C disappears, the word "Bell" is displayed in a hexagonal frame in the area above the left reel 3L, and the word "CHANCE" is displayed in a hexagonal frame in the area above the right reel 3L.

According to this display, if the player selects a button press sequence where the second stop reel is 3L on the left reel, one of the "15-coin bell" symbol combinations will be displayed. If the player selects a button press sequence where the second stop reel is 3R on the right reel, one of the "chance symbol" symbol combinations will be displayed.

Based on the screen display (Figure 192(b)), when the player presses the right stop button 8R, which causes the second stop sticker to be on the right reel 3R, in order to select a "chance combination," the right reel 3R is controlled to stop on the winning line with the possible "chance combination" symbols, depending on the timing of pressing the right stop button 8R. For the third stop, the remaining reel, the left reel 3L, needs to be stopped. When the left stop button 8L is pressed for the third stop, one of the "chance combination" symbol combinations will be displayed.

Furthermore, even if the middle stop button 8C, which allows a "chance symbol" combination to be displayed on the first stop reel, is pressed, if the second stop reel is not the right reel 3R, a symbol combination related to "15-coin bells" will be displayed. Therefore, based on the screen display (Figure 192(b)), if the player presses the left stop button 8L, which sets the second stop sticker to the left reel 3L, in order to select "bells," the left reel 3L will be controlled to stop on the winning line with a "15-coin bell" combination that can be pulled in, according to the timing of the left stop button 8L being pressed. Since the third stop reel only needs to be stopped on the remaining reel, the right reel 3R, pressing the right stop button 8R on the third stop will display one of the "15-coin bell" symbol combinations.

Thus, in a game where the resonance point is above a predetermined value during normal play (the advantageous period), and "F_Slate 231" is selected, the 7-segment LED displays "10" to indicate the navigation type "10," and the LCD screen displays a screen (Figure 192) that allows the player to select whether to stop and display a combination of "chance symbols" or a combination of "15-coin bells" before and after the first stop of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

Similarly, for the other "6-choice slash" symbols, if a win occurs when the resonance points are above a predetermined value during normal play (the advantageous period), a screen will appear on the LCD screen allowing the player to choose whether to display a combination of "chance symbols" or a combination of "15-coin bells."

[12-10. Display processing related to the total number of items acquired]
Next, we will explain the display processing related to the total number of acquired coins, which is performed by the sub-CPU 201.

The display of the total number of acquired coins is performed using a total number of acquired coins counter that manages the total number of acquired coins. The condition for starting the count of the total number of acquired coins counter (count start condition) is, as shown in the illustration in Figure 193, "BB start or bonus special zone (SZ) start or special AT (SAT) start". The sub-CPU 201 starts counting the total number of acquired coins counter when the above count start condition is met. The condition for ending the count of the total number of acquired coins counter (count end condition) is, as shown in the illustration in Figure 193, "end of payout continuation section". The payout continuation section is a game section of a specified number of games after the end of the payout section (BB or general AT (NAT)). Here, "end of payout continuation section" refers to the case where the payout continuation section ends within the game section of a specified number of games after the end of the payout section without a new BB start, bonus special zone (SZ) start, or special AT (SAT) start. Sub-CPU 201 terminates the count of the total acquired coins counter and initializes it (sets it to "0") upon fulfillment of the above count termination conditions. The prescribed number of games after the end of a Big Bonus (BB) is "100 games," and the prescribed number of games after the end of a General AT (NAT) is also "100 games." If it is decided to transition to a BB or General AT (NAT) during a payout period, a payout continuation period (a game period with a prescribed number of games) is set after the end of the new payout period (BB or General AT (NAT)). However, if a pre-announcement (whether genuine or fake) occurs when the prescribed number of games is reached, the payout continuation period ends at the end of that pre-announcement period. The prescribed number of games after the end of a BB and the prescribed number of games after the end of a General AT (NAT) may be other than "100 games," and the prescribed number of games after the end of a BB and the prescribed number of games after the end of a General AT (NAT) may differ.

The timing of the update of the total number of tokens won counter is as shown in Figure 194: subtraction occurs when the start lever is operated 7, and addition occurs when the lever is turned 3 off. However, in a game where the re-play symbols align, the total number of tokens won counter is not updated by addition at the 3 off time, and in the game following a game where the re-play symbols align, the total number of tokens won counter is not updated by subtraction when the start lever is operated 7.

The upper and lower limits of the total number of tokens acquired counter are "32767" and "-32768," as shown in Figure 195.

The upper and lower limits for the display of the total number of acquired coins shown on the display device (in the case of the fourth gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1, the main display device 210) are "2400 (after reaching 2400, "Congratulations" is displayed)" and "0," as shown in the illustration in Figure 196. Even if the total number of acquired coins counted by the total number of acquired coins counter is negative, the negative value is not displayed as total number of acquired coins information, and "0" is displayed. The reason why the display of "Congratulations" is set to when the count value of the total number of acquired coins counter reaches "2400" is that, in one advantageous period, when the count value of the MY counter reaches "2400" (by reaching an increase of 2400 coins based on the lowest point of medal acquisition within that advantageous period), that advantageous period ends. A Congratulations display counter is provided. When the total number of acquired tokens counter reaches "2400," "Congratulations display information" is set in the Congratulations display counter. Furthermore, the "Congratulations display information" set in the Congratulations display counter is cleared (erased) upon the end of the payout continuation period while the "Congratulations display information" is set (when the payout continuation period ends without a new BB starting, a special bonus zone (SZ) starting, or a special AT (SAT) starting within the specified number of games after the payout period ends), or upon transitioning to a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB, or an Episode BB (excluding the Ending BB) while the "Congratulations display information" is set.

The correction of the total acquired coins counter's count value to "0" (hereinafter referred to as "zero correction" as appropriate) is performed when the value of the total acquired coins counter updated at the 3-off update timing is less than "0" in the table shown in Figure 197, where "○" is indicated. In games where the state does not change, the value of the total acquired coins counter is corrected to "0" if "○" is indicated in "Every Game" corresponding to the state of the game in question. In games where the state changes (the current game when the state of the current game is different from the state of the next game), the value of the total acquired coins counter is corrected to "0" if "○" is indicated in at least one of "Every Game" corresponding to the state of the game in question (the current game) and "At Entry" corresponding to the state of the next game. Note that "Normal" in Figure 197 corresponds to "Normal (Non-Advantageous Section) + CZ Pre-announcement" and "Normal (Advantageous Section) + CZ Pre-announcement" in Figures 115 and 116 on the main control circuit 100 side. Furthermore, "CZ" in Figure 197 corresponds to "Initial CZ + AT Preparation" and "Continuing CZ" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side. Also, "SZ" in Figure 197 corresponds to "SZ" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side. Also, "NAT" in Figure 197 corresponds to "NAT + SC Pre-announcement" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side. Also, "SC" in Figure 197 corresponds to "SC" in Figure 115. Also, "SAT" in Figure 197 corresponds to "SAT + SAT Preparation State" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side. Also, "BB Flag Interval" in Figure 197 corresponds to "Normal Flag Interval (Non-Advantageous Section)", "Normal Flag Interval (Advantageous Section)", "AT During Flag Interval" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side, and "LI" in Figure 116. Furthermore, "BB (Non-Advantageous Section)" in Figure 197 corresponds to "Normal BB (Non-Advantageous Section)" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side. Also, "BB (Advantageous Section)" in Figure 197 corresponds to "Normal BB (Advantageous Section)" and "BB during AT" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side. Finally, "EXBB" in Figure 197 corresponds to "Normal Extra BB" and "Extra BB during AT" in Figure 115 on the main control circuit 100 side.

Furthermore, in the fourth gaming machine, pachislo machine 1, during Big Bonus (BB) rounds (normal BB (non-advantageous section), normal BB (advantageous section), and BB during AT, as shown in Figure 115 of the main control circuit), the exact number of increased coins is displayed without "zero correction."

The sub-CPU 201 starts counting the total number of acquired coins counter when the above count start conditions are met. In this total number of acquired coins counter count, when the start lever 7 is operated, the sub-CPU 201 subtracts the number of coins inserted (3 in the case of the fourth game machine, pachislo machine 1) from the total number of acquired coins counter, except when the re-play symbols lined up in the previous game and the current game is a re-play. When 3 is off, the sub-CPU 201 adds the number of coins paid out to the total number of acquired coins counter, except when the re-play symbols lined up in the current game and the next game is a re-play. Then, if the value of the total number of acquired coins counter after adding the number of coins paid out is less than 0, and the conditions for performing the 0 correction shown in Figure 197 are met, the sub-CPU 201 corrects the value of the total number of acquired coins counter to 0.

When the start lever 7 is operated, the sub-CPU 201 displays total acquired coin information (for example, "TOTAL ○○○ coins") on the main display device 210, indicating the total number of coins acquired based on the value of the total acquired coin counter after subtracting the number of coins inserted. Also, when 3 is off, the sub-CPU 201 displays total acquired coin information (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins") on the main display device 210, indicating the total number of coins acquired based on the total acquired coin counter after adding the number of coins paid out and correcting to zero as necessary. However, if the value of the total acquired coin counter after subtracting the number of coins inserted or the value of the total acquired coin counter after adding the number of coins paid out and correcting to zero as necessary is 0 or greater, the "value of the total acquired coin counter" is displayed as the total acquired coin information, and if it is less than "0", "0" is displayed as the total acquired coin information. Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 checks if the total number of acquired coins counter has been updated from "0" and exceeded "2400". If it has exceeded 2400, it sets the "Congratulations display information" in the Congratulations display counter and displays "Congratulations" on the main display device 210 as alternative information for the total number of acquired coins, instead of the actual total number of acquired coins (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins"). The "Congratulations" display is maintained even if the total number of acquired coins increases or decreases in subsequent games. As described later, the sub-CPU 201 also displays a "Sun" icon on the main display device 210 to indicate and notify that the total number of acquired coins has exceeded 2400, along with the display of the "Congratulations" alternative information.

Figure 198(a) shows an example of the total number of coins obtained from the first to the third game at the start of a Big Bonus, where the first game is a "Bell (9 coins)", the second game is a "Replay", and the third game is a "Bell (9 coins)". Note that, as shown in Figure 197, "zero correction" is not performed during games in the Big Bonus.

When the start lever is operated 7, the sub-CPU 201 subtracts the number of coins inserted ("3") from the total acquired coin counter, resulting in "-3," and displays "0" as the total acquired coins. When the lever is off (3), the sub-CPU 201 adds the number of coins paid out ("9") to the total acquired coin counter, resulting in "6," and displays "6" as the total acquired coins.

When the start lever is operated 7, the sub-CPU 201 subtracts "3" from the total number of coins inserted to make the total number of coins acquired counter "3," and displays "3" as the total number of coins acquired. Also, when 3 is off, the sub-CPU 201 does not update the total number of coins acquired counter because the re-play symbols have lined up in the current game, resulting in a re-play for the next game. Therefore, it remains at "3," and displays "3" as the total number of coins acquired.

When the start lever is operated at position 7, the sub-CPU 201 does not update the total acquired coins counter because this is a replay, and it remains at "3," displaying "3" as the total acquired coins. Also, when position 3 is off, the sub-CPU 201 adds the payout amount "9" to the total acquired coins counter, making it "12," and displays "12" as the total acquired coins.

Figure 198(b) shows an example of the total number of coins obtained from the first to the third game at the start of a Big Bonus, where the first game is a "Replay" (a small win combination), the second game is a "Bell" (9 coins), and the third game is a "Bell" (9 coins). Note that, as shown in Figure 197, "zero correction" is not applied during games in the Big Bonus.

When the start lever is operated 7, the sub-CPU 201 subtracts "3" from the total number of coins inserted, resulting in "-3," and displays "0" as the total number of coins won. Also, when 3 is off, since the re-play symbols align in the current game and the next game will be a re-play, the sub-CPU 201 does not update the total number of coins won counter, remaining at "-3," and displays "0" as the total number of coins won.

When the start lever is operated at position 7, the sub-CPU 201 does not update the total acquired coins counter because this is a replay, and it remains at "-3," displaying "0" as the total acquired coins. Also, when position 3 is off, the sub-CPU 201 adds the payout amount "9" to the total acquired coins counter, making it "6," and displays "6" as the total acquired coins.

When the start lever 7 is operated, the sub-CPU 201 subtracts "3" (the number of coins inserted) from the total acquired coin counter, resulting in "3," and displays "3" as the total acquired coins. When the lever is off, the sub-CPU 201 adds "9" (the number of coins paid out) to the total acquired coin counter, resulting in "12," and displays "12" as the total acquired coins.

The condition for initiating the display of the "Sun" icon, which indicates and notifies that the total number of acquired tokens has exceeded 2,400, on the main display device 210 (the condition for initiating the display of the Sun icon), is as shown in Figure 199, and is "Start displaying Congratulations" (when the "Congratulations display information" is set to the Congratulations display counter). The sub-CPU 201 updates the value of the total number of coins acquired counter from "0" until it exceeds "2400". When this value exceeds "2400", it sets the "Congratulations display information" in the Congratulations display counter and starts displaying the substitute total number of coins acquired information "Congratulations" instead of the total number of coins acquired information (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins"). At the same time, when the condition for starting the display of the sun icon is met, it sets the "sun icon display information" in the sun icon display counter and starts displaying the 2400 coins exceeded information "sun" on the main display device 210 in conjunction with the substitute total number of coins acquired information "Congratulations". Furthermore, when the conditions for resetting the number of acquired coins, described later, are met, the total number of acquired coins counter is reset (set to "0") and the display switches from the substitute total number of acquired coins information "Congratulations" to the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL xxx coins"). In this case as well, the sub-CPU 201 displays the 2400-coin-exceeding-coin information "Sun" icon on the main display device 210 in accordance with the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL xxx coins"). Here, it is preferable that the display of the 2400-coin-exceeding-coin information "Sun" icon in accordance with the substitute total number of acquired coins information "Congratulations" or the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins") is such that it is clear that the 2400-coin-exceeding-coin information "Sun" icon is related to the substitute total number of acquired coins information "Congratulations" or the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins").

In the fourth type of gaming machine, pachislo machine 1, the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed and the substitute information for the total number of coins won, "Congratulations," or the total number of coins won (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins"), are displayed side by side. However, this is not the only option; for example, the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed and the substitute information for the total number of coins won, "Congratulations," or the total number of coins won (for example, "TOTAL △△△ coins"), could be displayed vertically.

The reason the sun icon display start condition is set to "Congratulations display start" is because, considering that a single advantageous period ends when the MY counter reaches a count value of "2400" (an increase of 2400 medals based on the lowest medal acquisition point within that period), that period ends.

The condition for resetting the total number of acquired coins counter (total number of acquired coins reset condition) is, as shown in the illustration in Figure 200, "transition to a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB/ending BB (excluding ending BB) in the Congratulations display information set in the Congratulations display counter." When the total number of acquired coins reset condition is met, the sub-CPU 201 resets the value of the total number of acquired coins counter (to "0"), clears (deletes) the "Congratulations display information" set in the Congratulations display counter, and switches from displaying the total number of acquired coins alternative information "Congratulations" to displaying the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL xxx coins"). In this case, the "Sun Icon Display Information" remains set in the Sun Icon Display Counter without meeting the conditions for clearing the Sun Icon Display Information described later, and the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 cards have been surpassed will continue to be displayed. The conditions for resetting the total number of acquired coins include, for example, when transitioning to a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB/ending BB (excluding ending BB) during a payout continuation section while the Congratulations display information is set on the Congratulations display counter, or when transitioning to a BB due to a new BB win during a general AT (NAT) outside of a payout continuation section while the Congratulations display information is set on the Congratulations display counter, or when transitioning to a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB/ending BB (excluding ending BB) while the Congratulations display information is set on the Congratulations display counter outside of a payout continuation section. Furthermore, if the Congratulations display counter outside of the payout continuation section has a specification that allows for a transition to a new AT (Automatic Trigger) during the section where Congratulations display information is set, the transition to that new AT will satisfy the condition for resetting the total number of acquired coins.

As mentioned above, the total number of acquired coins counter uses "end of payout continuation period" as the count termination condition, and "transition to a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB/ending BB (excluding ending BB) while the Congratulations display information is set" as the total number of acquired coins reset condition. Therefore, the total number of acquired coins counter may or may not be initialized during the payout continuation period.

The condition for clearing the "Sun Icon Display Information" set in the Sun Icon Display Counter (Sun Icon Display Information Clearing Condition) is, as shown in Figure 201, "End of Payout Continuation Period." Here, "End of Payout Continuation Period" refers to the end of the payout continuation period without a new Big Bonus (BB), Special Bonus Zone (SZ), or Special AT (SAT) starting within the specified number of games played after the end of the payout period. Sub-CPU 201 clears the "Sun Icon Display Information" set in the Sun Icon Display Counter upon fulfillment of the Sun Icon Display Information Clearing Condition. As mentioned above, the count termination condition is also "End of Payout Continuation Period," so when the "Sun Icon Display Information" set in the Sun Icon Display Counter is cleared, the total number of acquired coins counter stops counting and its value is initialized (set to "0").

The sub-CPU 201 displays a cut-in screen to announce that the total number of acquired coins has been surpassed when the count value of the total acquired coin counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "500", "1000", "1500", "2000", or "2400"). The cut-in screens when "500", "1000", "1500", or "2000" are surpassed will display, for example, large, slanted letters such as "500 coins surpassed", "1000 coins surpassed", "1500 coins surpassed", or "2000 coins surpassed". The cut-in screen when "2400" is surpassed will display, for example, large, slanted letters such as "Congratulations".

Next, an example of the display processing related to the total number of acquired coins, performed by the sub-CPU 201, will be explained with reference to Figures 202 to 206.

Assume that the total number of acquired coins counter is not counting until the N-1st game, and therefore the total number of acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL □□□ coins"), the substitute total number of acquired coins information "Congratulations", and the "Sun" icon indicating exceeding 2400 coins are not displayed on the main display device 210. Furthermore, assume that the initial win chance zone (initial win CZ) ends in the N-1st game, and the bonus zone (SZ) begins from the Nth game.

Sub-CPU 201 starts counting the total number of acquired coins from the Nth game onwards and begins displaying the total number of acquired coins (for example, "TOTAL □□□ coins").

In the Nth game, when the start lever 7 is operated, the sub-CPU 201 performs the subtraction process on the total acquired coin counter described above and displays the total acquired coin information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") based on the value of the total acquired coin counter on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 201 is off, it performs the addition process on the total acquired coin counter described above and, if necessary, performs a zero correction process, and displays the total acquired coin information (e.g., "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the total acquired coin counter on the main display device 210. However, when displaying the total acquired coin information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the total acquired coin counter, if the value of the total acquired coin counter is 0 or greater, "(value of total acquired coin counter) coins" is displayed, and if it is less than 0, "0 coins" is displayed. The same applies to other parts.

Assume that the bonus zone (SZ) ends in the N+M-1 game, and the regular AT (NAT) game begins from the N+M game.

During the game interval from the N+1th game (the second game of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)) to the N+M-1th game (the final game of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total number of acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3-off is activated, and continues to display the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total number of acquired coins counter.

Assume that the regular AT (NAT) ends in the N+M+L-1 game, and the continuation chance zone (Continuation CZ) begins from the N+M+L game.

During the game interval from the N+Mth game (the first game of the general AT (NAT)) to the N+M+L-1th game (the final game of the general AT (NAT)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total number of acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when the 3-off state is reached, and continues to display the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total number of acquired coins counter.

Assume that the continuation chance zone (Continuation CZ) ends in the N+M+L+K-1 game, and the normal (non-advantageous period) game begins in the N+M+L+K game.

During the game interval from the N+M+L game (the first game of the Continuation Chance Zone (Continuation CZ)) to the N+M+L+K-1 game (the final game of the Continuation Chance Zone (Continuation CZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total number of acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when the 3-off state is activated, and continues to display the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total number of acquired coins counter.

Let's assume that from the N+M+L+Kth game onwards, before the payout continuation period ends, a win in the initial win chance zone (initial win CZ) occurs, and the bonus zone (SZ) begins. Here, we assume the bonus zone (SZ) starts on the Hth game.

During the game interval from the N+M+L+Kth game (the first game in the normal (non-advantageous) section) to the H-1th game (the final game in the first-win chance zone (first-win CZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off, but it does not display the total acquired coin information based on the value of the total acquired coins counter (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins").

In the H-game, which is the starting game of the bonus zone (SZ), the sub-CPU 201 performs a subtraction process on the total acquired coin counter when the start lever 7 is operated, and displays the total acquired coin information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins") based on the value of the total acquired coin counter on the main display device 210. When 3 is off, it performs an addition process on the total acquired coin counter and, if necessary, a zero correction process, and displays the total acquired coin information (for example, "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total acquired coin counter on the main display device 210.

Assume that the bonus zone (SZ) ends in the first game of H+G, and the regular AT (NAT) game begins from the H+G game.

During the game interval from the H+1 game (the second game of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)) to the H+G-1 game (the final game of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off, and continues to display the total acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total acquired coins counter.

Let's assume that the total number of acquired coins counter reaches "2400" in the A game after the H+G game. During the game interval from the H+G game (the first game of the general AT (NAT)) to the A-1 game, the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total number of acquired coins counter when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off, and continues to display the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total number of acquired coins counter.

In the first game, when the start lever 7 is operated, the sub-CPU 201 performs the subtraction process on the total number of acquired coins counter described above, and displays the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins") based on the value of the total number of acquired coins counter on the main display device 210. Furthermore, when 3 is off, the sub-CPU 201 performs the incrementing process of the total acquired counter as described above and, if necessary, performs a zero correction process, and determines whether the value of the total acquired counter has reached "2400". If it determines that it has reached "2400", it displays a cut-in screen announcing that 2400 coins have been surpassed (for example, a screen displaying large, slanted letters "Congratulations"). It sets the "Congratulations display information" to the Congratulations display counter and displays the substitute total acquired information "Congratulations" instead of the total acquired information (for example, "TOTAL △△ coins"). In addition, it sets the "sun icon display information" to the sun icon display counter and displays the 2400 coin surpassed information "sun" side by side with the substitute total acquired information "Congratulations". Note that in the diagram, "Congratulations" is written as "Congratulation" due to size limitations.

Assume that the regular AT (NAT) ends in the A+B-1 game, and the continuation chance zone (Continuation CZ) begins from the A+B game.

In the game interval from game A+1 (the game following the game in which the total number of acquired coins counter reached 2400) to game A+B-1 (the final game of the general AT (NAT)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total number of acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3-off is activated. It also continues to display the "Congratulations" message, a substitute for the total number of acquired coins, based on the "Congratulations display information" being set on the Congratulations display counter, and the "Sun" icon, indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed, based on the "Sun icon display information" being set on the Sun icon display counter. Here, even if the count value of the total number of acquired coins counter changes during the game in which the "Congratulations" message is displayed, it is maintained.

Assume that the continuation chance zone (Continuation CZ) ends in the first game of A + B + C, and a normal (non-advantageous period) game begins in the second game of A + B + C.

During the game interval from game A+B (the first game of the Continuation Chance Zone (Continuation CZ)) to game A+B+C-1 (the final game of the Continuation Chance Zone (Continuation CZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off. It also continues to display the "Congratulations" message, which is a substitute for the total acquired coins, based on the "Congratulations display information" being set on the Congratulations display counter, and the "Sun" icon, which indicates that 2400 coins have been surpassed, based on the "Sun icon display information" being set on the Sun icon display counter. Here, even if the count value of the total acquired coins counter changes during the game in which the "Congratulations" message is displayed, it is maintained.

Let's assume that from game A + B + C, before the payout continuation period ends, the player hits the initial win chance zone (initial win CZ) and starts the bonus zone (SZ). Here, we assume the bonus zone (SZ) starts on game F.

During the game interval from game A+B+C (the first game of the normal (non-advantageous) period) to game F-1 (the final game of the first-win chance zone (first-win CZ)), sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off. However, it does not display the "Congratulations" message, which is a substitute for the total acquired coins based on the "Congratulations display information" being set on the Congratulations display counter, nor does it display the "Sun" icon, which indicates that the 2400 coins have been exceeded, based on the "Sun icon display information" being set on the Sun icon display counter.

The sub-CPU 201, recognizing that the bonus zone has started with "Congratulations display information" set in the Congratulations display counter, resets the value of the total acquired coins counter (to "0") when the start lever 7 is operated. It also clears the "Congratulations display information" set in the Congratulations display counter, and further performs the subtraction process of the total acquired coins counter as described above. The total acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins") based on the value of the total acquired coins counter is displayed on the main display device 210. The "Sun" icon, indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed based on "Sun icon display information" being set in the Sun icon display counter, is displayed on the main display device 210 alongside the total acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins"). When the sub-CPU 201 is off, it performs the incrementing process for the total number of acquired coins counter described above and, if necessary, performs a zero correction process. It then displays the total number of acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total number of acquired coins counter on the main display device 210. Furthermore, based on the "sun icon display information" being set in the sun icon display counter, it displays the "sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed, alongside the total number of acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL △△ coins") on the main display device 210.

Assume that the bonus zone (SZ) ends in the first game (F+J-1) and the regular AT (NAT) game begins from the first game (F+J).

During the game interval from the F+1 game (the second game of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)) to the F+J-1 game (the final game of the Special Bonus Zone (SZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off. It displays the total acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total acquired coins counter, and also displays the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed, based on the "Sun Icon Display Information" being set in the Sun Icon Display Counter.

Assume that the regular AT (NAT) ends in the first game of F+J+R, and the continuation chance zone (Continuation CZ) begins from the F+J+R game.

During the game interval from the F+J+R game (the first game of the general AT (NAT)) to the F+J+R-1 game (the final game of the general AT (NAT)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off. It continues to display the total acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total acquired coins counter, and also displays the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been exceeded, based on the "Sun Icon Display Information" being set in the Sun Icon Display Counter.

Assume that the continuation chance zone (continuation CZ) ends in the first game of F+J+R+S, and a normal (non-advantageous period) game begins in the F+J+R+S game.

During the game interval from the F+J+R game (the first game of the Continuation Chance Zone (Continuation CZ)) to the F+J+R+S-1 game (the final game of the Continuation Chance Zone (Continuation CZ)), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total acquired coins when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off. It continues to display the total acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins") based on the value of the total acquired coins counter, and the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been exceeded, based on the "Sun Icon Display Information" being set in the Sun Icon Display Counter.

Assume that from the F+J+R+S game until the end of the payout continuation period, the player does not win the initial bonus chance zone (initial bonus CZ), nor does the special bonus zone (SZ), nor does the Big Bonus (BB) or special AT (SAT) begin. Here, the end game of the payout continuation period is assumed to be the P game.

During the game interval from the first game of the F+J+R+S game to the P game (the final game of the payout continuation period), the sub-CPU 201 continues to count the total number of coins acquired when the start lever is operated and when 3 is off. However, it does not display the total number of coins acquired information based on the value of the total number of coins acquired counter (for example, "TOTAL XX coins", "TOTAL △△ coins"), nor does it display the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been exceeded, based on the "Sun Icon Display Information" being set in the Sun Icon Display Counter.

Sub-CPU 201, at the end of the final game in the payout continuation section, stops counting the total number of acquired coins counter, resets the count value (to "0"), and clears (deletes) the "sun icon display information" set in the sun icon display counter.

(Total number of tokens acquired counter and end of advantageous period)
The total number of acquired coins counter described so far can retain its value even after the end of the advantageous period. In other words, if the next increase period starts before the predetermined initialization condition (for example, 100 games have passed since the end of the increase period) is met after the end of the first increase period, the value from the previous increase period can be carried over even if the advantageous period ends and the next advantageous period starts before the start of the next increase period. For example, if the advantageous period ends at the same time as the end of the AT, and the AT starts within a new advantageous period within 100 games, the value of the total number of acquired coins counter can be carried over from the previous advantageous period. This type of display control makes it easier for players to recognize the total amount of game value acquired, even if the increase state occurs in a short period, even if there is an end to the advantageous period.

Furthermore, if the advantageous period ends at the end of the AT, and a real bonus (mechanism) that increases medals is won within 100 games while still in the non-advantageous period, and the medal increase period begins while still in the non-advantageous period (such as during a Big Bonus), the value of the total acquired medals counter may be carried over.

Alternatively, the total number of acquired coins counter may also be reset at the end of the advantageous period. In this case, the end of the advantageous period becomes easier for the player to understand. The machine configuration may also not include a so-called advantageous period lamp (a lamp that indicates being in the advantageous period). In such a configuration, if the total number of acquired coins counter is reset at the end of the advantageous period, the player can infer the end of the advantageous period from the displayed number of acquired coins.

(Displays when play ends and the number of tokens won)
When the game enters a stop state due to the stop function described later, the display of the number of acquired coins on the screen or segments may be disabled, regardless of the value of the total number of acquired coins counter. This is because the stop state is a function designed to suppress gambling tendencies when a large number of coins have been acquired, and it is inappropriate to make the player aware of the coin acquisition in such a state.

Furthermore, if the game enters a stop state due to the stop function described later, or if there is a high probability of the game stopping (for example, when a predetermined threshold is reached, such as 100 coins remaining until the game stops, or when the predetermined threshold is reached and there is a remaining period of AT where 100 or more coins can be obtained, making the game likely to stop), the display of the number of acquired coins may show "congratulations." In such situations, since the game is about to end due to the game stopping, a sun icon may be displayed along with "congratulations," or it may not be displayed. Also, the "congratulations" display in situations where the stop condition is highly likely to be met may be displayed in a special manner different from the "congratulations" display that may occur in other situations (for example, the text color may be rainbow or gold), creating a rare and special effect.

[12-11. Effects]
While emphasizing a decrease in the number of medals won to the player can lead to a decline in their motivation to play, in the fourth gaming machine described above, the pachislo machine 1, this decline in motivation can be prevented by ensuring that negative values are not displayed for the total number of medals won on the main display device 210.

Furthermore, when the total number of tokens won counter reaches 2400, the system will display "Congratulations" instead of the total number of tokens won information (e.g., "TOTAL XX tokens"), and then display a "Sun" icon to indicate that the 2400-total token count has been surpassed, allowing players to experience the sense of accomplishment of reaching 2400 tokens.

Furthermore, by maintaining the display of "Congratulations," an alternative information for the total number of medals won, after exceeding 2400 medals, it is possible to prevent players from seeing any increase or decrease in their total number of medals won after that point. For example, this prevents players from experiencing discomfort due to a decrease in their total number of medals won after exceeding 2400.

Furthermore, during general AT (NAT) or within the payout continuation period after a BB (Big Bonus), unless the conditions for resetting the total number of acquired coins are met, the total number of acquired coins counter will not reset and will continue to count. This allows for a display of the total number of acquired coins that matches the player's perception of consecutive coin-increasing game states with shorter game intervals than the payout continuation period as a single coin-increasing game state.

Furthermore, at the end of the payout continuation period after a regular AT (NAT) or BB, the total acquired coins counter is reset (to "0"), and the "sun icon display information" set in the sun icon display counter is cleared so that the "sun" icon indicating exceeding 2400 coins is not displayed. This allows for the display of the total acquired coins and the "sun" icon indicating exceeding 2400 coins, which may be perceived by players as separate coin-increasing game states with longer game intervals than the payout continuation period.

Furthermore, when the "Congratulations Display Information" is set on the Congratulations display counter, the total number of medals acquired counter is reset when transitioning to a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB/Episode BB (excluding Ending BB). This allows players to track the total number of medals acquired after a special bonus zone (SZ), special AT (SAT), or BB/Episode BB (excluding Ending BB).

Furthermore, by displaying the total number of tokens won (for example, "TOTAL XX tokens") and the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 tokens have been surpassed side-by-side, players can easily recognize that the two pieces of information are related. Similarly, by displaying the alternative information for the total number of tokens won ("Congratulations") and the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 tokens have been surpassed side-by-side, players can easily recognize that the two pieces of information are related.

Furthermore, by looking at the total number of medals acquired displayed side-by-side (for example, "TOTAL XX medals") and the "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 medals have been surpassed, it is possible to estimate the total number of medals acquired since the start of the first Big Bonus (BB), the Special Zone (SZ), or the Special Attack Time (SAT).

Furthermore, since the stopping control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R differs depending on whether a re-spin combination (for example, "F_Weak Cherry Replay") is won in a normal game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6) or in an SB state, it is possible to diversify the gameplay.

Furthermore, hitting a replayable combination (for example, "F_Weak Cherry Replay") in the SB state is more advantageous in various draws, including AT-related draws (small role CZ draw, CZ success draw), than hitting it in the normal game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6), thus enhancing the enjoyment of the SB state.

Furthermore, if the player wins the designated re-spin combination while in SB mode, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will stop in the same way as when a different, more advantageous combination is won (for example, if "F_Weak Cherry-Reel" is won, it will stop as "F_Strong Cherry-Reel"). This makes it easier for the "Strong Cherry-Reel" combination to stop and display, enhancing the excitement of SB mode.

Furthermore, for roles where the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed to a more advantageous role (for example, "F_Weak Cherry Reel"), the probability of winning is the same in general game states (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT6) and in the SB state (SB(RT0) in the case of SB won in RT0) that is entered after winning in the general game state. In other words, for example, the probability of winning "F_Weak Cherry Reel" when the RT state is RT0 is the same as the probability of winning "F_Weak Cherry Reel" in the SB state that is entered after winning in RT0. In this way, without changing the probability of winning re-play roles that are converted to advantageous roles in the SB state (for example, "F_Weak Cherry Reel"), the probability of winning advantageous roles (for example, "F_Strong Cherry Reel") is effectively increased, thereby diversifying the gameplay according to the game state while suppressing the increase in role lottery data.

Furthermore, when the RT state changes, the replayable role that is converted into a favorable role may differ, and the type of favorable role that is converted also differs. For example, when the RT state is RT0, "F_RT1 Replay" is the target of the role draw, and if this role is drawn in the SB state (SB (RT0)), it is converted into a favorable role where the symbol combination of "RT3 Transition Replay" is displayed as the stop. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT3, "6-Choice Weak C Replay" (for example, "F_Weak C Replay 123"), which is not the target of the role draw in RT0, becomes the target of the role draw, and if this role is drawn in the SB state (SB (RT3)), it is converted into a favorable role where the symbol combination of "RT6 Transition Replay" is displayed as the stop. "RT6 Transition Replay" is more favorable than "RT3 Transition Replay". Thus, because the type of winning combination that is converted into a more advantageous combination, and the degree of advantage of that converted combination, differ depending on the type of RT (Replay Time) state, it is possible to further diversify the gameplay.

Furthermore, for example, if the RT state is RT3 and you win one of the "6-choice weak C-replay" combinations, if the button press order is correct, the symbol combination related to the "RT3 transition replay" will be displayed. However, if the button press order is incorrect, the symbol combination related to the "RT1 transition replay" will be displayed. Also, if you win a "6-choice weak C-replay" in the SB state (SB (RT3)) entered during RT3, the symbol combination related to the "RT6 transition replay" will be displayed regardless of the button press order. This means that in normal gameplay, the button press order may not result in a favorable stopping pattern, but in the SB state entered during normal gameplay, the stopping pattern will be favorable regardless of the button press order, increasing the likelihood of a favorable stopping pattern and enhancing the enjoyment of the SB state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the bonus zones (SZ) of types 5 to 8, whether or not to perform the "Aim For It" sequence, a pseudo-game that may award V-stocks, is determined by the Aim For It sequence, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition lottery. If the lottery result is "No Aim For It" or "Aim For It (Non-matched)," no V-stocks are awarded. If the Aim For It sequence (matched) is awarded, V-stocks are awarded (Figure 156). However, even if the lottery result in the Aim For It sequence, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition lottery is "Aim For It (Non-matched)," if a Single Bonus (SB) is won in that game, the lottery result is always converted to "Aim For It (matched)," which awards V-stocks. In this case, the transition to the SB state becomes more advantageous even in a pseudo-game, further enhancing the enjoyment of the SB (Single Bonus).

Furthermore, within the simulated gameplay, there are two types: the first simulated game ("Aim for it (match)") where the red 7 symbol stops on the middle line and a V-stock is awarded, and the second simulated game ("Aim for it (not match)") where the red 7 symbol does not stop on the middle line and no V-stock is awarded. This prevents the simulated gameplay from becoming monotonous compared to a system where a V-stock is always awarded after each simulated game.

Furthermore, in the first simulated game of "Aim for it (matching)", the same reel stopping control as when "F_7 matching replay" is won is performed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and in the second simulated game of "Aim for it (not matching)", the same reel stopping control as when "F_7 fake replay" is won is performed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.
In the draw for the "Aim" animation, V-stock acquisition, and SZ mode transition, even if the draw result is "Aim (not aligned)," if the draw result is converted to a draw for V-stock acquisition by winning a single bonus (SB) in that game, the stop control will be changed to the same "F_7 alignment replay" as in the first simulated game. This eliminates the incongruity of the second simulated game being executed when a single bonus is won in which V-stock acquisition is confirmed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the RT state is RT3 or RT6, the "F_7 alignment replay" is the target of the prize draw, and if it is drawn, one V stock is awarded. In the bonus zone (SZ), the stop control of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is performed during the simulated game (first simulated game) when the "F_7 alignment replay" is drawn, and the red 7 symbol is configured to stop on the middle line. This provides a gameplay element where there is a chance of drawing the "F_7 alignment replay" if the game transitions to RT3 or RT6, while also providing an opportunity for the red 7 symbol to align on the middle line and award a V stock in the bonus zone without waiting for the RT state to change. In other words, the opportunities for the red 7 symbol to align are increased, enhancing the player's enjoyment.

[12-12. Others]
In the pachislo machine 1, which is the fourth gaming machine described above, the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to display the remaining number of medals that can be obtained during a special AT (SAT) or BB on the main display device 210. In this case, the condition for starting the count of remaining medals (count start condition) is the start of BB or the start of SAT, and the condition for ending the count (count end condition) is the end of BB if the count started due to the start of BB, and the end of SAT if the count started due to the start of SAT. The timing of the count update is, in the case of subtraction, at the 3-off when a small win is achieved, and does not subtract in games where the re-play symbols are aligned. In the case of addition, it is when the start lever 7 is operated when an additional medal is added. The display on the main display device 210 shows subtraction at the 3-off when a small win is achieved, and does not subtract in games where the re-play symbols are aligned. The display shows addition at the 3-off when a miss occurs and when the operation lever is operated for the next game after an additional medal announcement game.

Regarding the display of the total number of acquired tokens mentioned above, the following functions may be added, as explained with reference to Figure 207. The sub-CPU 201 displays an indicator on the main display device 210 representing the number of resonance points acquired, as well as the total number of acquired tokens ("TOTAL XX tokens").

Sub-CPU 201, during general AT (NAT) and Stock Chance (SC), when 3 off,
If the total number of tokens obtained is not less than the total number of tokens obtained at the start of the regular AT (NAT), or
If the total number of coins acquired falls below the total number of coins acquired at the start of the general AT (NAT), and the apparent number of remaining games in the general AT (NAT) is 15 or more, and the resonance point value is 250 or more, the total number of coins acquired information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins") will be displayed at all times, as shown in Figure 207(a).

During general AT (NAT) and Stock Chance (SC), when the total number of acquired coins falls below the total number of acquired coins at the start of general AT (NAT) at the 3-off time, and the apparent remaining number of general AT (NAT) games is less than 15, or the Resonance Point value is less than 250, the sub-CPU 201 will flash the total number of acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") as shown in Figure 207(b). Note that the display methods for both are not limited to flashing; they are designed to be different.

Once the total number of tokens won (for example, "TOTAL XX tokens") is displayed and flashes, at 3 OFF,
If the total number of tokens obtained is no longer less than or equal to the total number of tokens obtained at the start of the regular AT (NAT), or
If the total number of acquired coins is less than or equal to the total number of acquired coins at the start of the general AT (NAT), but the apparent number of remaining games in the general AT (NAT) is 15 or more, and the resonance point value is 250 or more, the total number of acquired coins information (for example, "TOTAL XX coins") will be displayed at all times, as shown in Figure 207(a).

When the start lever 7 is operated during the final game of a regular AT (NAT), a message indicating that it is the final game (for example, "LAST game") will be displayed. At the 3-off point of the final game, if the total number of acquired coins is less than the total number of acquired coins at the start of the regular AT (NAT), and the resonance point value is less than 250, the indicator will display a reading showing the resonance point increased by 50.

However, the apparent remaining number of games in a regular AT (NAT) is calculated by subtracting one game per game during a regular AT (NAT) and also subtracting one game per game during a Stock Chance (SC). The actual remaining number of games in a regular AT (NAT) is calculated by subtracting one game per game during a regular AT (NAT), but not subtracting one game per game during a Stock Chance (SC).

This approach enhances the gameplay experience by allowing players to be notified of the bonus (e.g., the acquisition of 50 Resonance Points) through the flashing display of the total number of tokens won (e.g., "TOTAL XX tokens").

The following functions may be added to the fourth gaming machine, pachislo machine 1, as described above, and will be explained with reference to Figure 208.

Sub-CPU 201 compares the remaining number of coins until the end of the advantageous period (maximum value of MY counter - value of MY counter) with the remaining number of coins that can be obtained in the special AT (SAT) (value of SAT coin counter) at the 3-off time (after updating the MY counter and SAT difference counter) during each game in the special AT (SAT).

If the remaining difference in the number of tokens for the Special AT (SAT) does not exceed the number of tokens remaining until the end of the advantageous period, the sub-CPU 201 displays the SAT token difference information, indicating the remaining difference in the number of tokens for the Special AT (SAT), on the display device (main display device 210), as shown in Figure 208(a).

On the other hand, if the remaining number of tokens in the Special AT (SAT) exceeds the number of tokens remaining until the end of the advantageous period, the remaining number of tokens until the end of the advantageous period will be displayed on the display device (main display device 210), as shown in Figure 208(b).

Furthermore, while it was stated that the SAT (Special AT) payout information showing the remaining payout for the Special AT (SAT) would be displayed when the remaining payout for the Special AT (SAT) is equal to the remaining payout for the advantageous period, it may also be used to display the remaining payout information for the advantageous period showing the remaining payout for the advantageous period.

This method prevents players from misinterpreting the number of tokens they can win.

In the fourth gaming machine described above, the pachislot machine 1, the sub-CPU 201 may display the remaining number of games until the end of the advantageous period on the sub-display device 220 when the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous period falls to, for example, "99" or less, and then erase the display when the advantageous period ends. This provides the player with an estimate of how long the advantageous period will last.

In the fourth gaming machine described above, the pachislo machine 1, when the remaining number of tokens until the end of the advantageous period (the number of tokens remaining until the upper limit of the MY counter is reached) falls to, for example, "99" or less, it may be displayed on the sub-display device 220. When the remaining number exceeds, for example, "99," the display may be terminated, and the display may be erased upon the end of the advantageous period. This provides the player with an estimate of the remaining time until the end of the advantageous period.

In the fourth gaming machine, pachislo machine 1 described above, when the total number of acquired tokens (the value of the total number of acquired tokens counter) reaches 2400, the machine displays "Congratulations" as an alternative to the total number of acquired tokens information ("TOTAL XX tokens"). However, this is not the only option; for example, the following may also be used, as explained with reference to Figure 209.

The remaining number of coins until the end of the advantageous period (MY counter upper limit - MY counter value) is compared with the remaining difference in coins that can be obtained in the special AT (SAT) (SAT difference coin counter value). Furthermore, if the remaining difference in coins from the special AT (SAT) does not exceed the remaining number of coins until the end of the advantageous period, SubCPU 201 checks whether the sum of the total number of coins obtained (total number of coins obtained counter value) and the remaining difference in coins from the special AT (SAT) (SAT difference coin counter value) has reached 2400.

The sub-CPU 201, if the remaining difference in tokens for the Special AT (SAT) does not exceed the remaining tokens until the end of the advantageous period, and the sum of the total tokens acquired and the remaining difference in tokens for the Special AT (SAT) does not reach 2400, displays the SAT token difference information (value of the SAT token difference counter) and the total tokens acquired information (value of the total tokens acquired counter), as shown in Figure 209(a).

In the game shown in Figure 209(a) at the start of the game, the number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) has been increased, and the remaining number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) has not exceeded the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period. However, the sum of the total number of coins acquired and the remaining number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) has reached 2400. As shown in Figure 209(b), the sub-CPU 201 displays SAT coin information (the value of the SAT coin counter) indicating the remaining number of coins in the Special AT (SAT), as well as substitute information for the total number of coins acquired ("Congratulations"). Furthermore, it displays a "Sun" icon indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed.

At the start of the game, in the example display shown in Figure 209(a), the number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) is increased, the remaining number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) exceeds the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period, and the sum of the total acquired coins and the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period reaches 2400. The sub-CPU 201 displays information on the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period (upper limit of MY counter - value of MY counter), which is shown in Figure 209(c), as well as information on the total acquired coins ("Congratulations"), and further displays information indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed ("Sun" icon).

At the start of the game, in the example display shown in Figure 209(b), the number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) is increased, and the remaining number of coins in the Special AT (SAT) exceeds the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period. The sum of the total acquired coins and the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period reaches 2400. As shown in Figure 209(c), the sub-CPU 201 displays information indicating the number of coins remaining until the end of the advantageous period (the upper limit of the MY counter minus the value of the MY counter), as well as information indicating the total acquired coins ("Congratulations"). Furthermore, it displays information indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed ("Sun" icon).

Furthermore, while it was stated that the SAT (Special AT) payout information showing the remaining payout for the Special AT (SAT) would be displayed when the remaining payout for the Special AT (SAT) is equal to the remaining payout for the advantageous period, it may also be used to display the remaining payout information for the advantageous period showing the remaining payout for the advantageous period.

In the fourth gaming machine described above, pachislo machine 1, the condition for switching from displaying the total number of tokens won (e.g., "TOTAL XX tokens") to displaying alternative information for the total number of tokens won (e.g., "Congratulations") was that the total number of tokens won (value of the total number of tokens won counter) reached "2400". However, this is not the only condition; the condition could also be that the total number of tokens won (value of the total number of tokens won counter) reaches a value smaller than the upper limit of the MY counter, "2400," for example, "2200."

Furthermore, in the above modified example, where the condition for switching from displaying total acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") to displaying alternative total acquired coins information (e.g., "Congratulations") is the sum of the total acquired coins and the remaining difference in coins for the special AT (SAT), or the sum of the total acquired coins and the remaining coins until the end of the advantageous period, the condition for switching from displaying total acquired coins information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") to displaying alternative total acquired coins information (e.g., "Congratulations") is the sum of the total acquired coins and the remaining difference in coins for the special AT (SAT) The sum of the two values is set to reach the upper limit of the MY counter, "2400," or the sum of the total acquired coins and the remaining coins until the end of the advantageous period is set to reach the upper limit of the MY counter, "2400." However, it is not limited to this. For example, the sum of the total acquired coins and the remaining difference in coins for the special AT (SAT) may reach a value smaller than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as "2200," or the sum of the total acquired coins and the remaining coins until the end of the advantageous period may reach a value smaller than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as "2200."

In the fourth gaming machine described above, pachislot machine 1, the number of "sun" icons displayed is set to one. However, this is not the only option; one "sun" icon could be displayed for every 2400 coins won (for example, two "sun" icons would be displayed upon reaching 4800 coins). This would allow players to feel an even greater sense of superiority as the number of displayed "sun" icons increases.

In the fourth gaming machine described above, pachislo machine 1, the display start condition for the "Sun" icon is set to the timing when the display switches from the total number of coins acquired information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") to the alternative total number of coins acquired information "Congratulations" (the timing when the total number of coins acquired counter reaches "2400"). However, it is not limited to this, and the start condition may also be set to the timing when the total number of coins acquired counter reaches, for example, "1000", or when the display value exceeds the maximum number of digits for the total number of coins acquired information (for example, when it exceeds "9999" if the display digits for the total number of coins acquired information are 4 digits).

In the fourth gaming machine described above, pachislo machine 1, when the total number of acquired tokens reaches "2400," the display switches from the total number of acquired tokens information (for example, "TOTAL XX tokens") to a substitute information for the total number of acquired tokens with a celebratory nuance, "Congratulations." However, this is not the only option. The substitute information for the total number of acquired tokens that is switched from the total number of acquired tokens information may be, for example, other substitute information for the total number of acquired tokens with a celebratory nuance (for example, "Congratulations") or other substitute information for the total number of acquired tokens without a celebratory nuance.

In the fourth gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, described above, a "sun" icon is displayed to indicate that the total number of acquired coins has exceeded 2400. However, this is not the only option. Other icons (for example, a "V" icon) may be displayed, or the sound effects and visuals at the start of the AT (Attack Time) may be made more elaborate, or the background music may be changed. Other visual effects that occur in different situations may be used to suggest or announce that the total number of acquired coins has exceeded 2400, or dedicated visual effects may be used to suggest or announce that the total number of acquired coins has exceeded 2400.

In the fourth gaming machine, pachislot machine 1 described above, the total number of coins won information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") and the information indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed (e.g., a "sun" icon) are displayed together (side-by-side in pachislot machine 1). However, this is not the only option. For example, instead of displaying a dedicated icon such as the "sun" icon, the display of the total number of coins won information (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins") could be made to function as information indicating that 2400 coins have been surpassed by changing the display character (e.g., display color, display size, etc.) before reaching 2400 and after the total number of coins won counter is initialized due to the fulfillment of the total number of coins reset condition.

In the fourth gaming machine described above, the pachislo machine 1, a display device consisting of an LCD or segments can be used to display various information such as the total number of coins won (e.g., "TOTAL XX coins"), alternative information for the total number of coins won (e.g., "Congratulations"), and information indicating that the number of coins has exceeded 2400 (e.g., a "Sun" icon).

In the fourth gaming machine, pachislot machine 1, described above, the condition for displaying the "Sun" icon, which indicates exceeding 2400 coins, is the display of the "Congratulations" information, which is a substitute for the total number of coins won, upon reaching 2400 coins. However, this is not the only option; the timing may be after reaching 2400 coins (after the display of the "Congratulations" information).

In the fourth gaming machine described above, pachislo machine 1, one of the conditions for ending the advantageous period is that the value of the MY counter, which counts the net increase in medals from the lowest point of increase/decrease in medals within the advantageous period, reaches "2400". Alternatively, the value of the advantageous period difference counter, which counts the net increase in medals from the start of the advantageous period, may also reach "2400". Note that "2400" is just an example, and the value should be set to comply with the regulations.

Next, referring to Figure 210, we will explain the bonus confirmation screen that notifies the player of winning a bonus.

When a BB (Normal BB (Non-Advantageous Section), Normal BB (Advantageous Section), AT-During BB) is won, a bonus confirmation screen informing the player of the win will be displayed on the main display device 210 (main LCD) and sub-display device 220 (sub-LCD) after a predetermined number of games have elapsed. For example, if a bonus is won during Normal (Advantageous Section) or General AT (NAT), the words "BONUS 777" will be displayed on the main display device 210, and an image screen of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R with red 7 symbols aligned on the upward-sloping line will be displayed on the sub-display device 220 (Figure 210(a): Normal Bonus Confirmation Screen). This confirmation screen is intended to inform the player that a BB (F_Red 7 Same Color) has been won and to instruct the player to aim for the red 7 symbol on the upward-sloping line.

Furthermore, as a variation of the normal bonus confirmation screen, as shown in Figure 210(b), the main display device 210 displays the text "Aim for the 7 (red)!!". At this time, the sub-display device 220 does not display anything special. This confirmation screen is intended to inform the player that they have won a BB (F_Red 7 same color) and to instruct them to aim for the red 7 symbol.

On the other hand, if a bonus is won in Special AT (SAT), it is confirmed that the game will transition to Limit (LI). Limit (LI) is a state where the won bonus is carried over, and the number of medals increases slightly. At this time, the words "BONUS 777" are displayed on the main display device 210, and the words "WIN!" are displayed on the sub-display device 220 (Figure 210(c): Limit Confirmation Screen). Unlike the normal bonus confirmation screen, the Limit Confirmation Screen notifies that a BB (F_Red 7 Same Color) has been won, but it is intended not to instruct the player to stop the reels and win the red 7 symbol. In other words, the Limit Confirmation Screen informs the player that they can choose to immediately win the carried-over bonus to gain a short-term increase in medals, or to extend the AT state which is more advantageous in the long term.

It should be noted that the above explanation has been based on the assumption of a so-called A+ART machine, where medals are increased through bonus roles and ART. However, each invention can be implemented in machines with other payout specifications as long as it does not contradict its purpose. For example, the inventions described above can be appropriately implemented in AT machines where bonuses (such as a type 1 BB) are not awarded during gameplay and the game progresses with the bonus carried over, or in A+AT machines with an RT configuration that has little to no transitions to RT involving large fluctuations in replay probability, and where medals are mainly increased through AT, along with bonus roles that increase medals.

[12-13. Additional Features]
[12-13-1. Additional Feature 1]
The fourth gaming machine, the pachislo machine 1, may be equipped with a display function that displays a guide menu screen and a function operation screen on a display device (for example, an LCD display) as described below. For example, the processing of this display function is realized by a sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201).

When the guide menu is displayed, the guide menu top screen appears on the display unit. This guide menu top screen includes the "Volume/Brightness" icon and the "UniMemo (registered trademark)" icon.

When the "Volume/Brightness" icon is selected and confirmed, a volume control function screen for adjusting the speaker's output volume level is displayed on the screen. This screen includes a "Volume Control" area used to adjust the speaker's output volume level, a "Go to Brightness Adjustment" icon, and a "Return to Game" icon, which is selected and confirmed when returning to gameplay. The speaker's output volume level can be adjusted using the "Volume Control" area on the volume control function screen.

When the "Adjust Light Intensity" icon is selected and confirmed, a light intensity adjustment function screen for adjusting the lamp's light intensity level is displayed on the screen. This screen includes a "Light Intensity Adjustment" area used to adjust the lamp's light intensity level, a "Volume Adjustment" icon selected and confirmed when transitioning to the volume function screen, and a "Return to Game" icon selected and confirmed when returning to gameplay. The lamp's light intensity level can be adjusted using the "Light Intensity Adjustment" area on the light intensity adjustment function screen.

This method makes it easy to achieve the desired output volume and light intensity levels.

Alternatively, instead of displaying the "Volume" and "Brightness" icons on the guide menu's top screen, you could, for example, separate them into "Volume" and "Brightness" icons.

UniMemo (registered trademark) is an example of a mobile device linkage function for pachislo machine 1, which links the pachislo machine 1 with a mobile device. Using this function, detailed information about the player's gameplay can be recorded, and functions that do not affect the game results of pachislo machine 1 can be customized by fulfilling certain conditions.

UniMemo (registered trademark) offers multiple missions that grant rewards. These missions may include missions with the following conditions: "Enter General AT (NAT) while the 'Sun' icon is displayed," "Enter the 4th set of General AT (NAT) while the 'Sun' icon is displayed," "Enter the 7th set of General AT (NAT) while the 'Sun' icon is displayed," "Enter the 10th set of General AT (NAT) while the 'Sun' icon is displayed," and "Transition to Special AT (SAT) while the 'Sun' icon is displayed."

When the "UNIMEO (registered trademark)" icon is selected or operated, the UNIMEO (registered trademark) menu screen will be displayed on the screen. The UNIMEO (registered trademark) menu screen includes the following icons: "Return to Game" (selected and confirmed when returning to gameplay), "First Start" icon, "Login" icon, "View Progress Record" icon, "Record and Exit" icon, "Clear UNIMEO (registered trademark)" icon, "Member Registration" icon, "Website" icon, "Character Selection" icon, "Favorite Song Customization" icon, "Rank Up" icon, and "Game Data" icon.

When the "First Start" icon is selected and confirmed, the display will show the initial character selection screen and the initial song selection screen, after one or more screen transitions. The initial character selection screen can be used to select and confirm the initial character, and the initial song selection screen can be used to select and confirm the initial song.

When the "Login" icon is selected and confirmed, a login function screen is displayed on the screen, including a "Password Input" icon, a "No Password" icon, and a "Return to MENU" icon (selected and confirmed when returning to the UniMemo (registered trademark) menu screen). If the "Password Input" icon is selected and operated, the user is redirected to the password input function screen, allowing them to enter their password. If the "No Password" icon is selected and operated, the user is redirected to the member registration function screen, allowing them to register as a member.

When the "View Interim Records" icon is selected and confirmed, a screen displaying the registration code, including the "Registration Code," will appear on the display. Scanning the registration code with a mobile device will retrieve a URL for a webpage where you can view the interim records of game data from the time you started using UniMemo (registered trademark) until the present. Accessing this webpage will allow you to view the interim game data. Examples of registration codes include QR codes (registered trademark).

When the "Record and Exit" icon is selected and confirmed, a screen displaying the registration code, including the "Registration Code," will appear on the display. Scanning the registration code with a mobile device will retrieve the URL of the website that manages game data. Accessing this website will allow you to record your game data.

When the "UniMemo (Registered Trademark) Clear" icon is selected and confirmed, the UniMemo (Registered Trademark) Clear function screen, including the "UniMemo (Registered Trademark) Clear" icon, will be displayed on the screen. When the "UniMemo (Registered Trademark) Clear" icon is selected and operated, the game data will be cleared (deleted) from the website managing the game data.

When the "Member Registration" icon is selected and confirmed, a screen displaying the registration code, including the "Registration Code," will appear on the display. Scanning the registration code with a mobile device will retrieve the URL of the webpage where member information can be registered. Accessing this webpage will allow you to complete member registration.

When the "Website" icon is selected and confirmed, a website function screen is displayed on the screen, including "Website" icons corresponding to multiple websites, such as the "Dedicated Site" icon. Then, when a "Website" icon, such as the "Dedicated Site" icon, is selected and confirmed, a registration code display function screen, including the "Registration Code," is displayed on the screen. When the registration code is read with a mobile device, the URL of the website corresponding to the selected and confirmed "Website" icon is obtained. Accessing the website at that URL allows you to view information managed by that website.

When the "Character Selection" icon is selected and confirmed, a character selection/confirmation screen is displayed on the screen. This screen displays multiple characters, and the user can select and confirm a character from among them. The character selection/confirmation screen may include characters that are unavailable depending on the user's rank.

When the "Favorite Song Customization" icon is selected and confirmed, the Favorite Song Customization function screen will appear on the display. This screen displays multiple songs, from which you can customize your favorite song. The number of songs available for customization on the Favorite Song Customization function screen will change depending on your rank.

When the "Rank Up" icon is selected and confirmed, the rank-up function screen will appear on the display, allowing you to perform the rank-up.

When the "Game Data" icon is selected and confirmed, game data such as the total number of games played and the number of big bonuses for pachislot machine 1 can be viewed.

In this way, players can easily access the services provided by UniMemo (registered trademark).

[12-13-2. Additional Features 2]
The pachislo machine 1 may be equipped with the following stop function.

First, we will explain, with reference to Figure 211, the part in which processing related to the stop-play function is inserted into the main processing (main operation processing) of the pachislo machine 1, which is executed under the control of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101, after completing the main-side performance control processing at the end of gameplay (step S2015) and a predetermined time has elapsed, enters a state where it can accept medal insertion (step S2017).

The main CPU 101 performs a stop-play monitoring process (step S2018) between the completion of the main-side performance control processing at the end of gameplay (step S2015) and the start of accepting medal insertion (step S2017).

Next, the stop-loss monitoring process (step S2018) performed during the main processing shown in Figure 211 will be explained with reference to Figure 212. This stop-loss monitoring process includes a difference counter for monitoring the number of medals acquired (number of medals dispensed minus number of medals inserted). The difference counter is initialized to 0 upon power-on (including power-on in case of RWM malfunction and power-on during setting changes).

This coin difference counter is configured as a MY counter, counting the increase in coins from the point where the coin count was lowest after power-on. As will be explained in more detail later, for example, if the AT (Automatic Trigger) starts with 2000 coins absorbed from power-on, the starting point is -2000 coins. Therefore, the game will stop when the coin count reaches a threshold of +17,000 coins, relative to the initial ±0 coin count at power-on. However, this coin difference counter may also be configured as a net increase counter, stopping when the coin count reaches a threshold of 19,000 coins, starting from power-on. Note that the minus and plus values in the above explanation refer to the coin difference from the player's perspective.

In the stop-play monitoring process (step S2018), the main CPU 101 determines whether the symbol is a re-play activation symbol (S2101). If it is a re-play activation symbol (step S2101 is YES), the process proceeds to step S2103. On the other hand, if it is not a re-play activation symbol (S2101 is NO), the process proceeds to step S2102.

The main CPU 101 subtracts the number of coins inserted from the number of coins paid out, adds the subtraction result to the difference counter, and if the value of the difference counter after the addition is negative, corrects the value of the difference counter to 0 (step S2102), and proceeds to step S2103. Note that in the case of a re-play activation symbol, step S2102 is not performed. Therefore, if step S2102 is performed in the game following the game with the re-play activation symbol, the number of coins inserted in step S2102 is set to the same number as the number of coins inserted in the game with the re-play activation symbol.

The main CPU 101 determines whether BB or RB is in progress (step S2103). If BB or RB is in progress (step S2103 is YES), the stop-out monitoring process ends and the process returns to the main process shown in Figure 211. On the other hand, if neither BB nor RB is in progress (step S2103 is NO), the process proceeds to step S2104.

The main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the net payout counter exceeds 19,000 (this is just an example, and is not limited to this value) (step S2104). If the net payout counter value does not exceed 19,000 (step S2104 is NO), the stop-out monitoring process ends and the system returns to the main process shown in Figure 211. On the other hand, if the net payout counter value exceeds 19,000 (step S2104 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the stop-out process (step S2105).

Furthermore, the determination process in step S2101 may be omitted, and the determination process in step S2103 may also be omitted.

Next, the stop-play process (step S2105) performed during the stop-play monitoring process shown in Figure 212 for the pachislo machine 1 that uses tokens will be explained with reference to Figure 213.

In the stop-play process (step S2105), the main CPU 101 performs a stop-play initiation process (step S2111) that disables the input of tokens, various buttons (excluding the payout button 9), and the start lever 7. This stop-play initiation process does not disable the payout button 9; it remains active, allowing players to operate the payout button 9 to receive their tokens. Alternatively, the payout button 9 could be disabled during the stop-play initiation process, and automatic token payout could be performed in conjunction with the stop-play initiation process.

The main CPU 101 outputs a security signal indicating that the value of the net payout counter has exceeded 19,000 (step S2112), and terminates the stop-play process.

Next, the stop-play process (step S2105) performed during the stop-play monitoring process in Figure 212 of a medalless gaming machine, such as the medalless gaming machines shown in Figures 34(a) and 34(b), which do not use medals, will be explained with reference to Figure 214. In a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board manages the amount of game value corresponding to the number of medals. The counting button is operated when transferring the managed amount of game value from the medal count control board to the dedicated communication unit.

In the stop-play process (step S2105), the main CPU 101 performs a stop-play initiation process (step S2131) that disables the input of tokens, various buttons (excluding the counting button), and the start lever 7. This stop-play initiation process does not disable the counting button's operation; the counting button's operation remains enabled, allowing the player to operate the counting button to transfer the amount of game value from the token control board to the dedicated communication unit.

The main CPU 101 outputs a signal indicating that the value of the net payout counter has exceeded 19,000 as an unauthorized detection signal (step S2132), and terminates the stop-play process.

The cancellation of the reception invalidation performed during the stop-down process in Figure 213 or Figure 214 is performed, for example, when the settings are changed.

By incorporating the above-mentioned stop-play function into pachislo machine 1, excessive gambling can be prevented.

When the main CPU 101 performs the stop-play process shown in Figure 213 or Figure 214, the main CPU 101 sends a command to the sub-CPU 201 indicating that the stop-play process has been activated. The sub-CPU 201 may then display a notification on the main display device 210 or sub-display device 220 indicating the activation of the stop-play process (activation of the complete function) (for example, "The complete function has been activated," or "The game has been stopped because the complete function has been activated."). Alternatively, the notification may be output as audio from speakers 35a, 35b, etc., indicating the activation of the stop-play process (activation of the complete function) (for example, "The complete function has been activated," or "The game has been stopped because the complete function has been activated."). The lamp/LED group 23 may also be illuminated in a light pattern indicating the activation of the stop-play process (activation of the complete function). Furthermore, the main CPU 101 may display a code on the 7-segment display indicating that the stop-play process has been activated.

By notifying the player of the activation of the above-mentioned stop-play process (activation of the complete function), it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the pachislo machine 1 is malfunctioning, and to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 may determine whether the value of the net payout counter exceeds 18,500, which is 500 less than 19,000 (this is just an example and is not limited to this), and if it exceeds 18,500, it may perform a pre-stop notification process to inform the user that the stop-stop process (complete function) will soon be activated. In the pre-stop notification process, the main CPU 101 sends a command to the sub-CPU 201 indicating that a pre-stop notification should be given, and the sub-CPU 201 may display a message on the main display device 210 or sub-display device 220 indicating that the stop-stop process (complete function) will soon be activated (for example, "The complete function will soon be activated," or "500 coins remaining until the complete function is activated."). Furthermore, the speakers 35a, 35b, etc., may output audio messages indicating that the stop-play function (complete function) will soon be activated (for example, "The complete function will soon be activated," or "500 coins remaining until the complete function is activated."). Alternatively, the lamp/LED group 23 may be illuminated in a light pattern indicating that the stop-play function (complete function) will soon be activated. The main CPU 101 may also display a code on the 7-segment display indicating that the stop-play function (complete function) will soon be activated.

The above-mentioned advance notification of the end of play can motivate players to continue playing a little longer before the end of play.

[12-14. Addendum]
[12-14-1. Addendum 1]
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines that display the net increase in the number of medals actually gained (number of medals acquired) during ART on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device (for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2013-90643 (for example, paragraph 0520, figure 55, etc.)).

By the way, there is room for improvement in how the net increase in tokens (number of tokens won) and other metrics are displayed to enhance the player's enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine described in Appendix 1 was developed in consideration of these points, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of implementing a novel display that shows the amount of gaming value obtained in the gaming machine.

The gaming machine (1) related to Appendix 1 is,
In gaming machines,
A display means (210) capable of displaying predetermined information,
A specific condition determination means (220) for determining whether or not specific conditions have been met regarding the acquisition of game value,
The system includes a means (220) for counting the amount of game value acquired in a specific section,
The display means is capable of displaying acquisition information (total acquisition information) related to the amount of game value acquired by the acquisition counting means,
Negative values are not displayed as acquired information on the display means (Figure 196).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, emphasizing the decrease in the amount of game value displayed to players can lead to a decline in their desire to play. However, by preventing negative values from being displayed as acquired information, this decline in desire to play can be prevented.

The gaming machine (2) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (1),
The display means is capable of displaying special information ("Congratulations") in place of the acquired information when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been met.
The content of the special information displayed can be maintained without being updated, even if there is an increase or decrease in the amount of game value acquired (Figure 204).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, players can experience a sense of accomplishment upon achieving specific conditions related to acquiring game value, and it is possible to prevent players from seeing any increase or decrease in the amount of game value acquired after achieving those conditions. For example, it is possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied due to a decrease in the amount of game value acquired after achieving those conditions.

The gaming machine (3) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (1) or gaming machine (2),
The aforementioned gaming machine has an increasing gaming state in which the expected value of the increase in the amount of gaming value acquired in relation to the specific section is positive.
The aforementioned acquisition counting means may not be reset for a predetermined period (payout continuation section), even after a game has ended (Figures 193 and 200).
It is characterized by the following:

This allows for the display of the amount of game value gained in a way that aligns with the player's perception of consecutive increasing game states within a predetermined interval as a single increasing game state.

The gaming machine (4) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (3),
If no new increasing game state is started within the predetermined period after the first increasing game state has ended, the count value of the acquisition count means is reset based on the elapsed time (Figure 193).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, it becomes possible to display the amount of game value gained in a way that matches the player's perception that consecutive increasing game states with intervals exceeding a predetermined period are separate increasing game states.

The gaming machine (5) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (4), which is subordinate to the above-mentioned gaming machine (3), which is subordinate to the above-mentioned gaming machine (2),
After the display of the special information, the count value of the acquisition count means is initialized based on the fact that a new increase game state is entered during the first increase game state or within the predetermined period after the end of the first increase game state (Figure 200).
The display means displays acquisition information related to the amount of game value acquired, which has been counted by the acquisition counting means (Figure 205).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, players will be able to track the amount of game value they gained after a new increased game state.

The gaming machine (6) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (5),
The aforementioned specific condition is characterized by at least one of the following: the amount of game value acquired is equal to or greater than a specific threshold (the count value of the total acquired coins counter reaches "2400") (Figure 204), and the sum of the amount of game value acquired and the amount of game value to be acquired is equal to or greater than a specific threshold (the sum of the count value of the total acquired coins counter and the remaining difference in coins that can be acquired in the special AT (SAT) reaches "2400") (Figure 209).

According to this, players can recognize that they have obtained a game value exceeding a certain threshold, or that they are capable of obtaining a game value exceeding a certain threshold, and thus experience a sense of accomplishment from obtaining game value.

The gaming machine (7) related to Appendix 1 is,
In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The display means can display special information ("sun" icon) indicating that the specific condition has been met when the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been met (Figures 196 and 199).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, players can view special information and experience a sense of accomplishment by fulfilling specific conditions related to acquiring game value.

The gaming machine (8) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (7),
The aforementioned special information may be displayed together with the acquired information when the acquired information is being displayed (Figures 205 and 206).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, players can understand that special information and acquired information are related.

The gaming machine (9) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (7) which is subordinate to any of the above-mentioned gaming machine (5) to gaming machine (6), or in the above-mentioned gaming machine (8) which is subordinate to the above-mentioned gaming machine (7) which is subordinate to any of the above-mentioned gaming machine (5) to gaming machine (6),
The special information can continue to be displayed in the new increasing game state even when the acquisition count means is initialized based on the start of the new increasing game state (Figures 201 and 205).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, it is possible to estimate the amount of game value acquired from both special information and acquired information.

The gaming machine (10) related to Appendix 1 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (9),
The display means prevents the display of the special information based on the elapsed time after the increased game state during the display of the special information has ended (Figures 201, 205-206).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this, it is possible to prevent the display of special information that would be in line with the player's perception that consecutive increasing game states with intervals exceeding a predetermined period are separate increasing game states.

According to the gaming machine described in Appendix 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can implement a novel display showing the amount of game value acquired by the player.

[12-14-2. Appendix 2]
In conventional gaming machines, there are machines equipped with a so-called AT function that allows players to be notified of a favorable or unfavorable button-pressing sequence when a button-pressing sequence is won, provided that certain conditions are met. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are multiple sequences, such as Replay 1, which transitions to a low RT (low probability replay game state) when won, Replay 2, which transitions to a high RT (high probability replay game state) when won, and Replay 3, which does not involve a transition in game state. In addition, there are sequences that can be drawn from Replay 1 to 3, and when a player wins one of these sequences, the sequence in which the player is won differs depending on the button-pressing sequence. Then, if the predetermined conditions are met, an AT (Automatic Trigger) game is executed in which the player is notified of the button press sequence that will result in a favorable win (Replay 2) when the player wins the overlapping winning combination (for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-91506 (for example, paragraphs 0997-1059, figures 132-137, etc.)).

By the way, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, a double-up game is employed when setting the number of games for AT (Automatic Trigger) play, where the number of games changes depending on the player's selection. Specifically, the double-up game is played when a double-winning combination is achieved. The type of combination that results in a double-winning combination is determined by the type of reel that stops first, determining whether it lands on Replay 1, Replay 2, or Replay 3. In the double-up game, only information that allows the player to identify the button press sequence that results in Replay 2, which leads to a high RT (Replay Time) mode, is communicated to the player. If the player selects the button press sequence that results in Replay 2, a predetermined number of games are assigned as the number of games for AT play. On the other hand, since the button press sequence other than that that results in Replay 2 is not communicated, the player does not know the button press sequences that result in Replay 1 or Replay 3. Therefore, in the double-up game, the player is asked to choose a button-pressing sequence other than the one that results in a Replay 2 win. If the player chooses one sequence (the sequence that results in a Replay 1 win), the number of games originally scheduled to be given (the predetermined number) is reset to zero. If the player chooses the other sequence (the sequence that results in a Replay 3 win), double the number of games originally scheduled to be given (the predetermined number) is awarded. This prevents the AT game from becoming monotonous and improves the enjoyment of the game, but there is room for improvement in terms of game diversity.

The gaming machine described in Appendix 2 was developed in consideration of these points, and its purpose is to diversify the gameplay by devising a way to control the stopping of the fluctuating symbols in the gaming machine.

The gaming machine (1) related to Appendix 2 is,
In gaming machines,
A symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of displaying multiple symbols in a variable manner,
A means for determining the winning combination (main CPU 101) that can determine the winning combination from among multiple combinations, including a specific bonus combination,
A stop operation detection means (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) capable of detecting an operation to stop the variable display by the aforementioned pattern display means,
A stop control means (main CPU 101) that controls the stopping of the variable display based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determination means and the stopping operation pattern detected by the stopping operation detection means,
A special bonus control means (main CPU 101) starts a special bonus activation state (SB state) when a combination of symbols corresponding to the aforementioned special bonus role (single bonus role: "F_SIN1" to "F_SIN32") is displayed, and terminates the special bonus activation state when a predetermined termination condition (playing the next game after the winning game) is met,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned winning combination determination means can determine a predetermined combination (e.g., "F_Weak C Replay") as the winning combination in either the specific bonus activation state or the bonus non-activation state (e.g., RT0, RT1, etc.),
The present invention is characterized in that at least a portion of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed by the stop control means differ when the predetermined role is won while the specific bonus is activated, and when the predetermined role is won while the bonus is not activated.

According to this, when a predetermined combination is achieved, the stopping control by the stopping control means differs depending on whether a specific bonus is activated or not, thus allowing for greater diversification of gameplay.

The gaming machine (2) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (1),
The advantage of receiving the benefits (for example, transition to a favorable RT state, V stock, etc.) is higher when the predetermined role is won while the specific bonus is activated compared to when the predetermined role is won while the bonus is not activated.

According to this, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of benefits is higher when a specific bonus is activated compared to when a specific role is hit while the bonus is not activated, thus increasing the appeal of the specific bonus activation state.

The gaming machine (3) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (2),
The stop control means is characterized in that, when the predetermined role (for example, "F_weak cherry-reel") is drawn in the specific bonus activation state, it performs the same stop control as when the predetermined role (if the predetermined role is "F_weak cherry-reel", it is "F_strong cherry-reel", see Figure 119) is drawn.

According to this, by changing the stop control mechanism, the combination of stop symbols for advantageous roles (specific roles) becomes more likely to appear, thus improving the enjoyment of the specific bonus activation state.

The gaming machine (4) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (3),
The probability of winning the predetermined role is the same in the state in which the specific bonus is activated and in the state in which the bonus is not activated (see Figures 75 and 76).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this method, by increasing the probability of winning a specific, advantageous role (a particular role) without changing the probability of winning a predetermined role, it is possible to diversify the gameplay according to the state while suppressing the increase in role lottery data.

The gaming machine (5) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (4),
There are multiple game states (for example, RT0, RT1, RT3, etc.) where the draw value data for at least some of the re-spinning roles are different.
The aforementioned predetermined role includes multiple types, such as a first predetermined role (e.g., "F_RT1 Replay") and a second predetermined role (e.g., "F_Weak C Replay 123").
The aforementioned multiple game states include a first game state (e.g., RT1) and a second game state (e.g., RT3),
In the first game state, it is possible to win the first predetermined role,
In the second game state, it is possible to win the second predetermined role,
The advantage regarding the benefits is higher when the second predetermined role is won while the specific bonus is activated, compared to when the first predetermined role is won while the specific bonus is activated.

According to this, even if both are predetermined roles that increase the degree of advantage when won in a specific bonus state, the degree of advantage differs depending on the type of role, thus allowing for further diversification of gameplay.

The gaming machine (6) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (5),
When the second predetermined role (for example, "F_Weak C Replay 123", see Figure 119) is won, if the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means is the first operation mode (press order (1→2→3), see Figure 119), then the first symbol combination ("RT3 Transition Replay", see Figure 119) can be stopped. However, if the second operation mode is the second operation mode (press order other than (1→2→3), see Figure 119), then the second symbol combination ("RT1 Transition Replay", see Figure 119), which has a different degree of advantage than the first symbol combination, can be stopped.
In the specified bonus activation state, if the second predetermined role is won, the specific symbol combination ("RT6 transition replay", see Figure 119) can be stopped regardless of whether the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means is the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

According to this, while the second predetermined role may not result in a favorable stopping symbol combination depending on the stopping operation method when the bonus is not activated, in the specific bonus activation state, the stopping control is performed so that a favorable stopping symbol combination (specific symbol combination) is achieved regardless of the stopping operation method. This increases the probability of a favorable stopping symbol combination, and enhances the enjoyment of the specific bonus activation state.

The gaming machine (7) related to Appendix 2 is,
In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
There are simulated gameplay sequences that can occur in connection with the granting of bonuses (see "Aim for it" sequence, Figure 156),
In the aforementioned specific bonus activation state, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of the aforementioned benefits related to the occurrence of the simulated game increases.

According to this, when a specific bonus is activated, the degree of advantage regarding specific rewards based on simulated gameplay increases, thus enhancing the appeal of the specific bonus.

The gaming machine (8) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (7),
The aforementioned simulated game is characterized by having a first simulated game that occurs when a reward is awarded ("Aim for it (matching)", see Figure 156) and a second simulated game that occurs when the reward is not necessarily awarded ("Aim for it (not matching)", see Figure 156).

According to this, since rewards may not be granted even if a simulated game occurs, it is possible to prevent the simulated game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine (9) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (8),
The system further includes a type selection means (main CPU 101) for selecting the type of simulated game to be generated,
In the aforementioned specific bonus activation state, the granting of the aforementioned benefit is confirmed even if the second simulated game is selected by the type selection means.

According to this, in a specific bonus activation state, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of benefits increases not only when a predetermined role is won, but also when a simulated game occurs, thus further enhancing the enjoyment of the specific bonus activation state.

The gaming machine (10) related to Appendix 2 is,
In the above-mentioned gaming machine (9),
If the second simulated game is selected by the type selection means, and the granting of the bonus is confirmed based on the transition to the specific bonus activation state, the simulated game is performed in which the reel stop control data of the first simulated game (the reel stop control data when "F_7 alignment replay" is won) is referenced.

This eliminates the awkwardness of a second simulated game being executed when a specific bonus that guarantees the granting of a special reward is activated.

Furthermore, the embodiments described above are not the only possible modifications, and various changes can be made as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the invention.

For example, although the embodiments described above focused on slot machines, the methods are not limited to slot machines and can be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Furthermore, the contents of the above embodiments and their variations can be combined as appropriate.

This embodiment can be widely applied to gaming machines installed in amusement facilities such as amusement parlors.

71...Main control board 100...Main control circuit 101...Main CPU
72...Sub-control board 200...Sub-control circuit 201...Sub-CPU
210...Main display device

Claims (1)

In gaming machines,
Display means and
A door mechanism that can be opened and closed is attached to the main body of the gaming machine,
An opening/closing detection means for detecting the opening/closing state of the door mechanism,
A key-shaped switch for setting,
The aforementioned door mechanism includes an operating means that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine,
Maintenance processing means for performing maintenance processing related to maintenance that can be carried out in the aforementioned gaming machine,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned maintenance processing means is
In the maintenance process, based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions that the door mechanism is in the open state and the setting key-type switch is on when the power is turned on, a predetermined maintenance process is performed on the display means to display a predetermined maintenance menu screen corresponding to a predetermined maintenance, which is one of several types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine; based on the fulfillment of specific conditions that the setting key-type switch changes from off to on after the power is turned on and the door mechanism is in the open state, a specific maintenance process is performed, which includes the process of displaying a specific maintenance menu screen on the display means to display a specific maintenance menu screen, which is one of several types of maintenance that can be performed on the gaming machine and corresponds to a specific maintenance different from the predetermined maintenance; and the specific maintenance process is terminated when the setting key-type switch turns off during the execution of the specific maintenance process, and the change in the open/closed state of the door mechanism does not change the process in the specific maintenance process from the display of the specific maintenance menu screen to the termination of the specific maintenance process.
When the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed, the predetermined maintenance can be performed in response to an operation on the operating means.
In the aforementioned predetermined maintenance process,
Even if the predetermined conditions are met, if, after the predetermined conditions are met, the detection result by the opening/closing detection means does not indicate that the door mechanism is in a closed state but rather that the door mechanism remains in an open state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen will not be displayed on the display means.
If the predetermined conditions are met, and after the predetermined conditions are met, the setting key-type switch remains in the ON position and the detection result by the opening/closing detection means indicates that the door mechanism is in the closed state, the predetermined maintenance menu screen is displayed on the display means.
The aforementioned predetermined maintenance menu screen displays a predetermined message indicating that settings are being changed.
The aforementioned specific maintenance menu screen displays a specific indication that the settings are being checked.
During the aforementioned predetermined maintenance, the predetermined display is maintained.
During the aforementioned specific maintenance, the aforementioned specific display will be hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.